Panasonic” x-v Mama= - Voice Communications Inc. 800 593-6000

Panasonic” x-v Mama= - Voice Communications Inc. 800 593-6000
Panasonic”
x-v
Mama=
Digital Business System
Section 400
Programming
1
Technical Manuals Online! - http://www.tech-man.com
J
I
I
Iss ued 8/l I I95
Dot. Part No. 7Ll3182A2IDJ
The contents of this manual are subject to change without notice and do not constitute a
commitment on the part of Panasonic Communications & Systems Company (PCSC). Every
effort has been made to ensure the accuracy of this document. However, due to ongoing product
improvements and revisions, Panasonic cannot guarantee the accuracy of printed material after
the date of publication nor can it accept responsibility for errors or omissions. Panasonic will
update and revise this document as needed.
The software and hardware described in this document may be used or copied only in accordance
with the terms of the license pertaining to said software or hardware.
Reproduction, publication, or duplication of this manual, or any part thereof, in any manner,
mechanically, electronically, or photographically, is prohibited without permission of the
Panasonic Communications & Systems Company (PCSC).
@Copyright 1995 by Panasonic Communications dr Systems Company
All rights reserved.
Technical Manuals Online! - http://www.tech-man.com
Section 400-Table of Contents
About This Section
Structure ..........................................................................................................................
FF Key Programming .....................................................................................................
Program Sequence ..........................................................................................................
xvii
xvii
xvii
Introduction to DBS Programming
Before You Begin ................................................................................................
Intro-3
Preparations for Programming ................................................................................... Inuo-3
Initializing DBS Systems (RAMCLR) ...................................................................... Intro-4
Upgrading CPC-B Software (New Function Reset) .................................................. Intro-5
Understanding FF Key Programming .............................................................. Intro-6
Program Structure ...................................................................................................... Intro-6
How to Enter the Programming Mode.. ..................................................................... Intro-7
Example Programming Entry .................................................................................... Intro-9
Default Program Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..*....................
Intro-9
Chapter 1. System Programming (FFI)
Date and Time Settings .............................................................................................
1-3
Day/Date Setting .............................................................................................................
Time Setting ....................................................................................................................
l-3
l-4
General System Settings ............................................................................................
l-5
Call Duration Display ......................................................................................................
SMDR Display Start Tier for CO Calls ........................................................................
Least Cost Routing (LCR) Access ...................................................................................
Override Toll Restriction With SSD Numbers ................................................................
SSD Display Restriction ..................................................................................................
Auto Flash Redial ..........................................................................................................
One Touch Dial ..............................................................................................................
Onhook Transfer ............................................................................................................
Key Bank Hold ..............................................................................................................
Non-Appearing Trunk Hold ...........................................................................................
SLT Flash Control .........................................................................................................
Extension Number Digits ...............................................................................................
DBS-70-400
DBS Manual - Issued 8/l/95
Technical Manuals Online! - http://www.tech-man.com
l-5
l-6
1-7
l-8
l-9
l-10
1-11
1-12
1-13
1-14
1-15
1-17
...
- III -
Section 400-Programming
Table of Contents
Alternate Attendant ........................................................................................................
Attendant Intercom Calling ...........................................................................................
Extension Intercom Calling ...........................................................................................
Alert Tone for Voice Calls.............................................................................................
Alert Tone for Busy Override & OHVA .......................................................................
System Installation Area Code ......................................................................................
SSD Name Display ........................................................................................................
APVAEC Slot Assignment ............................................................................................
Voice Mail Busy Tone ...................................................................................................
Analog Transfer Ring Pattern ........................................................................................
Attendant Overflow for Primary Attendant.. .................................................................
Delayed Ring .................................................................................................................
AEC Disconnect Signal Duration.. ................................................................................
Second Attendant Position .............................................................................................
Third Attendant Position ................................................................................................
Fourth Attendant Position ..............................................................................................
Attendant Transfer Extension ........................................................................................
Attendant Override ........................................................................................................
Attendant LED Alarm Indication ..................................................................................
Extension (BLF) Delayed Ring .....................................................................................
Analog Transfer Ring Pattern ........................................................................................
Mu! tiple DID/DNIS .......................................................................................................
Page Duration ................................................................................................................
SLT DISA Ring Pattern .................................................................................................
AEC Disconnect Signal Duration ..................................................................................
DID/DNIS to a Voice Mailbox ......................................................................................
DID/DNIS Answer Code ...............................................................................................
LCD Timer for Caller ID ...............................................................................................
Internal Hold Tone ..........................................................................................................
Door Opener Access Code Required .............................................................................
API Port Type” ................................................................................................................
API Baud Rate ......................... .: ....................................................................................
1-18
1-19
I-20
1-21
l-22
l-23
l-24
l-2.5
l-26
l-27
l-28
l-29
l-30
1-31
l-32
l-33
l-34
l-35
l-36
l-37
l-38
1-39
1-41
1-32
l-43
l-44
l-46
1-48
l-49
l-50
1-51
1-52
Serial Port Parameters (TTY Settings) ................................................................... 1-53
Parity Check ...................................................................................................................
Odd/Even Parity .............................................................................................................
Baud Rate .......................................................................................................................
Stop Bit Length ..............................................................................................................
Data Length ....................................................................................................................
SMDR Printing Mode 1: Outbound and Inbound ..........................................................
SMDR Printing Mode 2: Long-Di stance and Local Calls .............................................
SMDR Printing Mode 3: Header Title.. .........................................................................
Serial Port Flow Control (XON / XOFF) ......................................................................
RAI Baud Rate ...............................................................................................................
- iv -
DBS Manual - Issued 8/l/95
Technical Manuals Online! - http://www.tech-man.com
l-53
1-54
l-55
l-56
l-57
l-58
l-59
l-60
1-61
1-62
DBS-70-400
Section 400~Programming
Table of Contents
PBX Settings ..............................................................................................................
1-63
PBX Access Code(s) ...................................................................................................... 1-63
Automatic Pause Position for PBX Access Codes ........................................................ l-64
External (UNA) Relay Control ................................................................................. l-66
Ring Patterns for UNA Terminals (M, C and B) ........................................................... l-66
External Page Interface Control for Paging Groups ...................................................... l-67
Class of Service .........................................................................................................
l-68
Extension Class of Service ............................................................................................
l-68
...........................................................................................................
Account Codes
l-70
Verified Forced Account Codes ................................................................................... l-70
Toll Restriction for Verified Forced Account Codes..................................................... l-72
Flexible Function Screens ........................................................................................ l-73
Flexible Function Screen Soft-Key Assignment ...........................................................
Flexible Function Screen Text.. .....................................................................................
Flexible Function Screen Default ..................................................................................
Flexible Function Screens Default (All) ........................................................................
l-73
1-78
l-79
I-80
Caller ID Automatic DISA ....................................................................................... i-81
Automatic DISA Callers.. ..............................................................................................
1-8 1
Door Phones ..............................................................................................................
1-82
Door Phone Extensions .................................................................................................. 1-82
Door Phone Ring Assignments.. .................................................................................... l-84
Door Opener Access Code ............................................................................................. 1-86
Door Phone Tone Type.. ................................................................................................ l-87
Door Phone Ring Timeout Timer .................................................................................. 1-88
Door Phone Ring Pattern ............................................................................................... l-89
Door Opener Relay Timer ............................................................................................. l-90
System Timers ............................................................................................................ 1-91
Automatic Night Mode Start Time ................................................................................ 1-91
Attendant Hold Recall Timer for CO Calls ................................................................... 1-93
Extension Hold Recall Timer for CO Calls ................................................................... 1-94
Attendant Transfer Recall Timer for CO Calls .............................................................. 1-95
Extension Transfer Recall Timer for CO Calls ............................................................. l-96
Attendant Hunt Group Recall Timer ............................................................................. 1-97
Extension Hunt Group Recall Timer ............................................................................. 1-98
Attendant Park Hold Recall Timer ................................................................................ 1-99
Extension Park Hold Recall Timer ........................................... . .................................. I- 100
Attendant Call Reversion Timer for CO Calls............................................................. l-101
Unsupervised Conference Timer ................................................................................. l-102
Automatic Pause Timer ............................................................................................... l-103
DBS-70-400
DBS Manual - issued 8/l/95
Technical Manuals Online! - http://www.tech-man.com
-V-
3ec;w
I
4uu-rrogrammlng
CO Flash Timer ...........................................................................................................
SLT Onhook Flash Timer ............................................................................................
CO Ring Cycle Detection Timer .................................................................................
Inbound Ring Cycle Expansion Timer ........................................................................
Dial Pause Timer .........................................................................................................
PBX Flash Timer .........................................................................................................
Call Forward-No Answer Timer ..................................................................................
Outbound Ground Start Detection Timer ....................................................................
Inbound Ground Start Detection Timer .......................................................................
Attendant Hold Recall Timer for Intercom Calls ........................................................
Extension Hold Recall Timer for Intercom Calls ........................................................
Attendant Transfer Recall Timer for Intercom Calls ...................................................
Extension Transfer Recall Timer for Intercom Calls...................................................
CO Delayed Ring Timer ..............................................................................................
Extension (DSQBLF) Delayed Ring Timer ................................................................
Hunt Group No Answer Timer ....................................................................................
Automatic Day Mode Start Time.. ...............................................................................
Automatic Night 2 Mode Start Time ...........................................................................
l-104
l- 106
l-107
l-108
l- 109
l-110
l-111
l-l 12
1-113
1-114
1-115
1-116
1-117
1-118
l-120
1-122
1-123
1-125
Programming and DISA Codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-127
Remote Programming ID Code . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
DISA Inbound Call ID Code . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
DISA Outbound Call ID Code 1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
DISA Outbound Call ID Code 2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
ID Code for System Programming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1-127
1-128
1-129
l-130
1-131
New Function Reset . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-132
New Function Reset . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Confirm New Function Reset . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1-132
1-132
DID/DNIS and Tl Settings ..................................................................................... 1-133
Inbound DID Dial Numbers ........................................................................................
System Configuration ..................................................................................................
Sync Source 1 ..............................................................................................................
Sync Source 2 ..............................................................................................................
Sync Source 3 ..............................................................................................................
Network Re-Sync Timer ..............................................................................................
Disconnect Timer ..........................................................................................................
Guard Timer .................................................................................................................
Release Acknowledge Timer .......................................................................................
Outpulse Delay Timer..................................................................................................
Wink Timeout Timer ...................................................................................................
Incoming Detection Timer ...........................................................................................
Answer Supervision Timer ..........................................................................................
Immediate Glare Timer ................................................................................................
- vi -
DBS Manual - Issued 8/l/95
Technical Manuals Online! - http://www.tech-man.com
1-133
1-135
1-141
1-143
1-144
1-145
1-146
1-147
1-148
1-149
l-150
1-151
1-152
1-153
DBS-70-400
Wink Glare Timer.. ......................................................................................................
l-154
Digital Pad Settings .....................................................................................................
Trunk Configuration ....................................................................................................
Number of Tl Channels.. .............................................................................................
Frame Format ...............................................................................................................
Line Coding .................................................................................................................
Failure Mode ................................................................................................................
Remote Loopback ........................................................................................................
Yellow Alarm Send .....................................................................................................
Flash Key Operation ....................................................................................................
Red Alarm Detection ...................................................................................................
Yellow Alarm Detection ..............................................................................................
Yellow Alarm Recovery ..............................................................................................
Other Alarms Detection ...............................................................................................
Other Alarms Recovery ...............................................................................................
Frame Loss Counter .....................................................................................................
Slip Counter .................................................................................................................
Red Alarm Counter ......................................................................................................
Loss of Signal Counter ................................................................................................
Sync Loss Counter .......................................................................................................
Yellow Alarm Counter.. ...............................................................................................
Yellow Alarm Relay ....................................................................................................
Red Alarm Relay .........................................................................................................
l-155
l- 158
I-159
l-160
1-161
1-162
1-163
l-164
1-165
1-166
1-167
l-169
l-171
l-i73
1-174
l-175
1-176
1-177
1-178 .
l-179
l-180
l-181
Sync Loss Relay.. ........................................ . ................................................................ I- 182
Frame Loss Relay ........................................................................................................
AIS Relay .....................................................................................................................
Relay Reset ..................................................................................................................
Tl Trunk Type Emulation ...........................................................................................
DID/DNIS ....................................................................................................................
Outgoing Signaling Type .............................................................................................
Incoming Signaling Type.. ...........................................................................................
Trunk Mode .................................................................................................................
Robbed Bit Setting .......................................................................................................
Incoming Dialing Method ............................................................................................
Dial Tone Transmission ...............................................................................................
Busy Tone Transmission .............................................................................................
Dial Tone Receive .......................................................................................................
Ringback Tone Transmission ......................................................................................
DNIS Number Setting.. ................................................................................................
DID/DNTS Flexible Ringing Assignments ..................................................................
Tl Trunk Closure .........................................................................................................
DBS-70-400
DBS Manual - Issued 8/l/95
Technical Manuals Online! - http://www.tech-man.com
1-183
1-184
l-185
l-186
1-187
1-188
l-189
l-190
l-191
1-192
l-193
1-194
l-195
1-196
1-197
1-198
l-200
- vii -
Chapter 2. Trunk Programming (FF2)
Trunk Port Operation .......................................................................................................
DTMF/Pulse Dialing for Trunks ......................................................................................
Pooled Trunk Access for Group “9” ................................................................................
Pooled Trunk Access for Groups “8 l-86” .......................................................................
Trunk Port Type ...............................................................................................................
DISA Auto Answer.. ........................................................................................................
Private Trunk Line ...........................................................................................................
Automatic Pause for PBX Line .....................................................................................
Dial Tone Detection.. .....................................................................................................
Outbound DTMF Signal Duration for Auto-Dialed Digits ...........................................
Unsupervised Trunk Conference ...................................................................................
Inbound Ring Pattern .....................................................................................................
Trunk Disconnect Detection Timer ...............................................................................
DISA Start Time ............................................................................................................
DISA End Time .............................................................................................................
. Trunk Circuit Type ........................................................................................................
. DID Immediate or Wink Start .......................................................................................
Wink Start Timer ...........................................................................................................
Time Out for Dialed DID Digits.. ..................................................................................
DID Interdigit Timeout ..................................................................................................
. Trunk Port Class .............................................................................................................
2-3
2-4
2-5
2-6
A
3-7
2-8
2-9
2- 10
2- 11
2-12
2- 13
2-14
2-15
2-16
2-17
2- 18
2-21
2-22
2-23
2-24
2-25
Chapter 3. Extension Programming (FF3)
Extension Numbers ..........................................................................................................
Terminal Type.. ................................................................................................................
EM/24 Port Assignment...................................................................................................
Forced Least Cost Routing ...............................................................................................
Forced Account Codes.. ...................................................................................................
Extension Lockout Code................................................................................................
Offhook Signal (CO) .....................................................................................................
Call Waiting/OHVA ......................................................................................................
Busy Override Send .......................................................................................................
Busy Override Receive ..................................................................................................
Prime Line Pickup .........................................................................................................
Auto Pickup (Ringing Line) ..........................................................................................
Unsupervised Conference ..............................................................................................
Station Message Detail Recorder (SMDR) Report ........................................................
Offhook Signal Volume .................................................................................................
Offhook Signal Pattern ..................................................................................................
PSD Name Display on Large-Sized LCD Phones .........................................................
...
- VIII -
DBS
Manual - Issued 8/l/95
Technical Manuals Online! - http://www.tech-man.com
3-3
3-5
3-7
3-8
3-9 .
3-10
3-11
3- 12
3-13
3-14
3- 15
3-16
3-17
3-18
3-19
3-20
3-21
DBS-70-400
.
--W..“..
I--
.
“J’U” . . . . . . . J
--.-
-.
-1....,...w
Page Group Extensions.. ................................................................................................
Display When Idle .........................................................................................................
Display During Intercom Dial Tone ..............................................................................
Display When Calling an Extension ..............................................................................
Display When Accessing CO Dial Tone .......................................................................
Display When Conversing on a CO Trunk.. ..................................................................
Display When Receiving a Page ....................................................................................
Display After Receiving a Call Waiting Tone ...............................................................
Display When Dialing a Busy Extension ......................................................................
Extension Directory Display..........................................................................................
Extension Class of Service Assignment ........................................................................
Inbound DID Dial Numbers ..........................................................................................
AEC Disconnect ............................................................................................................
Ringback Tone From ML Keys ............................................. i.. .....................................
Station Port Class.. .........................................................................................................
SLT Hookflash ...............................................................................................................
Extension Ring Pattern ..................................................................................................
Digital SLT Receiving Volume .....................................................................................
Auto Set Relocation Code..............................................................................................
Permanent Call Forward Type .......................................................................................
Permanent Call Forward Extension ...............................................................................
ML/MC0Separation .....................................................................................................
VAU Hunting Priority ....................................................................................................
AEC Disconnect ............................................................................................................
VAU Port Assignment.. ..................................................................................................
Hot Dial Pad.. .......................... .......................................................................................
Auto-Redial on Extensions ............................................................................................
3-22
3-23
3-25
3-27
3-29
3-3 1
3-33
3-35
3-37
3-39
3-40
3-41
3-41
3-42
3-43
3-45
3-46
3-48
3-49
3-51
3-52
3-53
3-54
3-55
3-56
3-57
3-58
Chapter 4. Ringing and Hunt Groups (FF4)
CO Day Ring Assignments .............................................................................................. 4-3
CO Day Ring Assignments for Hunt Groups .................................................................. 4-4
CO Night Ring Assignments ........................................................................................... 4-5
CO Night Ring Assignments for Hunt Groups.. .............................................................. 4-6
Hunt Group Pilot Numbers .............................................................................................. 4-7
Terminal/Circular Hunt Groups ....................................................................................... 4-9
Hunt Group Type ........................................................................................................... 4-11
Call Next Hunt Group .................................................................................................... 4-13
Hunt Group Members .................................................................................................... 4-14
Transfer Extension ......................................................................................................... 4-15
Hunt Group Transfer Timer.. ......................................................................................... 4- 16
Hunt Group Members .................................................................................................... 4-17
Call Coverage Group Members ..................................................................................... 4-18
DBS-70-400
DBS Manual - Issued 8/l/95
Technical Manuals Online! - http://www.tech-man.com
- ix -
CO Delayed Day Ring Assignments .............................................................................
CO Delayed Day Ring Assignments for Hunt Groups ..................................................
CO Delayed Night Ring Assignments ...........................................................................
CO Delayed Night Ring Assignments for Hunt Groups ................................................
Extension Ring Table .....................................................................................................
Extension Delayed Ring Table ......................................................................................
CO Night 2 Ring Assignments ......................................................................................
CO Night 2 Ring Assignments for Hunt Groups ...........................................................
CO Delayed Night 2 Ring Assignments ........................................................................
CO Delayed Night 2 Ring Assignments for Hunt Groups.............................................
4-20
4-2 1
4-22
4-23
4-25
4-26
4-27
4-28
4-29
4-30
Chapter 5. FF Key Programming (FF5)
FF Key Assignments for Extensions ............................................................................... 5-3
FF Key Assignments for DSS Consoles .......................................................................... 5-8
Attendant Feature Package Key Assignments ............................................................... 5-10
Chapter 6. Name and Message Assignments (FF6)
General Notes ..................................................................................................................
Extension Name ...............................................................................................................
System Speed Dial Names ...............................................................................................
.
Personal Speed Dial Names .............................................................................................
Absence Messages ...........................................................................................................
Trunk Name Assignment .................................................................................................
Hunt Group Name Assignment.. ............... . ......................................................................
Call Waiting/OHVA Text Reply ...................................................................................
DID/DNIS Text Name Assignment ...............................................................................
Chapter 7. Toll Restrictions (FF7)
6-2
6-3
6-4
6-5
6-6
6-8
6-9
6-10
6-11
.
An Overview of Toll Restrictions .................................................................................... 7-2
International Calling For TRS Types 3-6 ........................................................................ 7-5
DTMF Signaling During Incoming Calls for TRS Types O-6 ......................................... 7-6
Maximum Dialed Digits For TRS Types 3-6 .................................................................. 7-7
3-Digit Toll Restriction For TRS Types 2-6.. .................................................................. 7-8
7-Digit Toll Restriction For TRS Types 2-6.. .................................................................. 7-9
Dialing Plan Switch ....................................................................................................... 7-10
Operator Access ............................................................................................................. 7-11
International Calling on Extensions ............................................................................... 7-12
-X-
DBS Manual - Issued 8/l/95
Technical Manuals Online! - http://www.tech-man.com
DBS-70-400
Table of Contents
Section 400-Programming
Country Code Table.. ......................................................................... .:. ......................... 7- 13
Equal Access Code Format............................................................................................ 7-14
Office Code Restriction Table For TRS Types 2-6 ....................................................... 7-15
Area Code Table For TRS Types 3-6 ............................................................................ 7-16
Office Code Table For TRS Types 3-6.......................................................................... 7- 17
Special Area Code Table For TRS Types 3-6 ............................................................... 7- 18
Special Office Code Table For TRS Types 3-6 ............................................................. 7-19
Special 7-Digit Table For TRS Types 2-6.. ................................................................... 7-20
Day TRS Types O-7 for Trunks ..................................................................................... 7-2 1
Night TRS Types O-7 for Trunks.. ................................................................................. 7-22
Area Code Table For TRS Types 3-6 (Global Copy).................................................... 7-23
Office Code Table For TRS Types 3-6 (Global Copyj ................................................. 7-24
Area & Office Code Table for TRS Types 3-6 (Global Copy)..................................... .7-25
Special Office Code Table For TRS Types 3-6 (Global Copy). ................................... .7-26
Chapter 8. Least Cost Routing (FF8)
An Overview of Least Cost Routing ................................................................................
Before Programming LCR..........................................................................................
LCR Setup ...................................................................................................................
Activating LCR ...........................................................................................................
LCR Call Processing ...................................................................................................
Using LCR With a PBX System.. ...............................................................................
LCR Area Codes ..............................................................................................................
LCR Office Codes ......................................... . .................................................................
Special LCR Area Codes .................................................................................................
Special LCR Office Code Tables .....................................................................................
Time Priority Route Tables.. ..........................................................................................
LCR Trunk Groups ........................................................................................................
LCR Delete Tables .........................................................................................................
LCR Add Tables ............................................................................................................
8-3
8-3
8-2
8-4
8-4
8-5
8-6
8-7
8-S
8-9
8- 10
8- 12
S-13
8-14
Chapter 9. Copy Program Settings (FF9)
Trunk Copy ......................................................................................................................
Extension Copy ................................................................................................................
FF Key Copy ....................................................................................................................
DBS-70-400
DBS Manual - Issued 8/l/95
Technical Manuals Online! - http://www.tech-man.com
9-3
9-4
9-5
- xi -
JGLLIUII wuu-riuyldlillliii~y
Chapter IO. Speed Dial Programming (FFIO)
System Speed Dial Numbers .........................................................................................
Personai Speed Dial Numbers .......................................................................................
IO-3
10-5
Appendix A. Large-Screen Displays
Menu Screens During Different Call States (FF3 ExtPor# 26-33#) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Al thru A5
Appendix B. Terminal Programming
Terminal Programming Through a Direct Connection.. .................................................. B- 1
Terminal Programming Through a CO or DISA Trunk .................................................. B-2
Terminal Programming Commands ................................................................................. B-2
Resuming SMDR or Bus Monitor Mode After Terminal Programming.. ....................... B-3
Section 400~Index
- xii -
DBS Manual - Issued 8/l/95
Technical Manuals Online! - http://www.tech-man.com
DBS-70-400
1 acie ot Lontents
sectron 4owrrogrammlng
List of Figures
Figure 1. CPC memory clear switch ................................................................................. Intro-4
Figure 2. Phone keys used in programming mode ............................................................ Intro-7
Figure l-l. Sofi key numbering on large-display phones.. ................................................... I-73
Figure I-2. Example of a CO Ring Cycle and its Detection Timer .................................... I -I 07
Figure I-3. Trunk Closure Example in a DBS 96 (32~trunk system) .................................. I-200
Figure 5-I. FF key layout on a 34-button phone.. ................................................................. .5-4
Figure 5-2. FF key layout on an EM124 unit .......................................................................... 5-4
Figure 5-3. FF key layout on a DSSl72 console.. .................................................................. .5-9
Figure 6-I. Key layout of a DSSi72 console for text name assignment. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-2
DBS-70-400
DBS Manual - issued 8/l/95
Technical Manuals Online! - http://www.tech-man.com
*..
- XIII -
Section 400-Programming
Table of Contents
List of Tables
Table I. DBS program structure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Intro-6
Table 2. Default program settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Intro-9
.
Table I-l. SLT Hookflash Control Settings.. ......................................................................... I-15
Table I-2. Analog Transfer Ring Patterns ............................................................................ I-38
Table l-3. AEC Disconnect Signal Duration values ............................................................. I-43
Table I-4. RAI Modem Card Compatibility .......................................................................... l-62
Table I-5. Class of Service features ...................................................................................... I-68
Table I-6. Feature codes for Flexible Function Screen soft keys ......................................... I-74
Table I-7. Door phone ring timer values.. .................................................... . ...................... I-88
Table l-8. Attendant Hold Recall Timer values for CO calls ............................................... I-93
Table I-9. Extension Hold Recall Timer values for CO calls ............................................... I-94
Table I-IO. Attendant Transfer Recall Timer values for CO calls.. ...................................... I-95
Table I-11. Extension Transfer Recall Timer values for CO calls.. ...................................... I-96
Table I-12. Attendant Hunt Group Recall Timer values for CO calls .................................. I-97
Table I-13. Extension Hunt Group Recall Timer values for CO calls.. ................................ I-98
Table I-14. Attendant Park Hold Recall Timer values ......................................................... I-99
Table I - 15. Extension Park Hold Recall Timer values ....................................................... I-100
Table I-1 6. Attendant Call Reversion Timer values ........................................................... I-IOI
Table I -I 7. Unsupervised Conference Timer values ........................................................... l-102
Table I-18. Automatic Pause Timer values.. ....................................................................... I-103
Table I -I 9. CO Flash Timer values .................................................................................... I-l 04
Table I-20. SLT Onhook Flash Timer values.. .................................................................... l-l 06
Table I-2 I. Inbound Ring Cycle Expansion Timer values.. ................................................ I - IO8
Table I-22. Dial Pause Timer values .................................................................................. I-109
Table I-23. PBX Flash Timer values ................................................................................... I-110
Table I-24. Ring Control for Call Forward-No Answer Timer ............................................ l-111
Table I-25. Call Forward-No Answer Timer values ............................................................ I-111
Table l-26. Outbound Ground Start Detection Timer values .............................................. I -II2
Table I-27. Inbound Ground Start Detection Timer values ................................................. l-113
Table l-28. Attendant Hold Recall Timer values for intercom calls .................................... I-114
Table l-29. Extension Hold Recall Timer values for intercom calls .................................... l-11.5
Table I-30. Attendant Transfer Recall Timer values for intercom calls .............................. I-116
Table I-3 I. Extension Transfer Recall Timer values for intercom calls .............................. l-117
Table I-32. CO Delayed Ring Timer values ........................................................................ l-118
Table l-33. Extension Delayed Ring Timer values ............................................................. I-120
Table I-34. Hunt Group No Answer Timer values .............................................................. 1-122
Table l-35. System Configuration for Tl installation ......................................................... l-135
Table I-36. Minimum Tl programming.. ............................................................................ l-136
Table I-37. TI Disconnect Timer values ............................................................................. I-146
Table I-38. TI Guard Timer values .................................................................................... I-147
- xiv -
DBS Manual - Issued 8/l/95
Technical Manuals Online! - http://www.tech-man.com
DBS-70-400
secrlon 4uwrrogrammlng
Table I-39.
Table l-40.
Table l-41.
Table I-42.
Table I-43.
Table I-44.
Table l-45.
Table l-46.
Table I-47.
Table l-48.
Table I-49.
Table l-50.
Table I-51.
Table I-52.
Table I-53.
Table 2 -1.
Table 2-2.
Table 2 -3.
Table 2-4.
Table 2 -5.
Table 2-6.
I
ama
OT
c;ontenrs
Release Acknowledge Timer values .................................................................
Outpulse Delay Timer values.. .........................................................................
Wink Timeout Timer values .......................... .; ..................................................
Incoming Detection Timer values ....................................................................
Answer Supervision Timer values.. ..................................................................
Immediate Glare Timer values.. .......................................................................
Wink Glare Timer values.. ................................................................................
Digital Pad Settings - circuit types ..................................................................
Digital Pad Settings - pad numbers and related dB levels ..............................
Digital Pad Settings - default values ...............................................................
Yellow Alarm Detection timer values.. .............................................................
Yellow Alarm Recovery timer values ...............................................................
Other Alarms Detection timer values ...............................................................
Other Alarms Recovery timer values ...............................................................
DIDIDNIS Flexible Ring settings in diferent CPC-B versions .......................
I-148
l-149
I-150
I-151
I-152
l-153
I-154
l-155
I- 156
I-156
I-167
I - I69
l-171
I -I 73
I-l 98
Ring Patterns for inbound trunk calls.. ............................................................... .2 -I 4
Trunk Disconnect Detection Timer values ........................................................... 2-15
Wink Start Timer settings ........: ........................................................................... .2 -22
DID Dialed Digit Timer values ........................................................................... .2 -23
DID Interdigit Timer values.. .............................................................................. -2 -24
Trunk Port Class - circuit types ........................................................................... 2-25
Table 3-1. Terminal. Types ....................................................................................................... 3-5
Table 3-2. Sof key menus during idle mode ........................................................................ .3-23
Table 3-3. Soft key menus during intercom dial tone.. ......................................................... .3-25
Table 3-4. Soft key menus when calling an e.utension .......................................................... .3-2 7
Table 3-5. Soft key menus when accessing CO dial tone.. ................................................... .3-29
Table 3-6. Soft key menus during a trunk call.. ..................................................................... 3-3 I
Table 3-7. Soft key menus when receiving a page.. ............................................................... 3-33
Table 3-8. Sofr key menus after receiving a call waiting tone .............................................. 3-35
Table 3-9. Soft key menus when dialing a busy exten.sion ................................................... .3-37
Table 3-10. Station Port Class - circuit types ....................................................................... 3-43
Table 3-11. Extension ring patterns ..................................................................................... .3-46
Table 5-I. Feature codes for FF key assignment ,...................................................:............... 5-5
Table 6-1. Preset Absence Messages O-4 ................................................................................ 6-6
Table 6-2. Default call waitinglOHVA text reply messages.. ................................................ 6-10
Table 7-I. Toll restriction types.. ............................................................................................. 7-2
Table 7-2. NANP changes ....................................................................................................... 7-3
Table 7-3. h4aximum number of dialed digits for TRS types 3-6 ............................................ 7-7
Table 7-4. Diferences between. old and new dialing plans ........................................ ..t ....... 7-10
DBS-70-400
DBS Manual - Issued 8/l/95
Technical Manuals Online! - http://www.tech-man.com
- xv -
Table 8-1. Time Priority Route Table format.. ........................................................................ 8-3
Table 8-2. Time Priority Route Table format.. ...................................................................... 8-10
Table 8-3. LCR table ........................................................................ .;. .................................... 8-5
Table 8-4. LCR time periods and positions used ................................................................... S-11
Table 8-5. LCR trunk selection ............................................................................................. 8-13
Table 1 O-I. DSS key filnctions in System Speed Dial programming.. ................................... I O-4
Table IO-2. QSS key finctions in Personal Speed Dial programming ................................. IO-4
Table B-l. Terminal programming commands.. ...................................................................... B-2
Table B-2. Codes for switching SMDRIBus Monitor modes.. ................................................. B-3
- xvi -
DBS Manual - issued 8/l/95
Technical Manuals Online! - http://www.tech-man.com
DBS-70-400
,About This Section
This Section 400 is intended for use as a technical reference manual for DBS programming via the
FF keys on a DBS key phone. (Other programming methods are described in Appendix B of this
section.)
Structure
Section 400 is structured according to FF key numbering. For example,
Chapter 1 covers FFl programs; Chapter 2 covers FF2 programs; and so on.
The FF keys categorize the programs by subject -- each FF key represents a
group of related programs as follows:
Chapter 1
Chapter 2
Chapter 3
Chapter 4
Chapter 5
Chapter 6
Chapter 7
Chapter 8
Chapter 9
Chapter 10
FFl -- System
FF2 -- Trunks
FF3 -- Extensions
FF4 -- Ring Assignments & Hunt/Call Coverage Groups
FF5 -- FF Key Features
FF6 -- Displayed Names & Messages
FF7 -- Toll Restriction
FFS -- Least Cost Routing
FFP -- Program Copy
FFlO -- Speed Dial Numbers
FF Key Programming
FF key programming is accomplished by entering programming mode, then
punching in each program’s address (press the FF key, then enter a string of
numbers that are separated by the pound #key). The phone’s LCD display
will show prompts while you are punching in the string, to guide you through
the programming. Within each address string (usually at the end of it), you
have a choice of numbers to press in order to set the program; the number you
press determines the program setting.
Once you’ve entered programming mode and punched in an FF key address,
you do not have to keep pressing the FF key to go to the next [sequential]
address -- the DBS will automatically display the next prompt after you set
the fust one (or press # to accept the displayed setting). To jump to an
address in another FF key, simply press that FF key while still in
programming mode.
Program Sequence
Although FF key programming separates DBS programs into groups, it is
important to note that the numerical sequence of the FF keys and the
addresses within them, does not necessarily represent a logical progression
for programming a particular feature or application. For example, some DID
settings are in FFl (System), while others are in FF2 (Trunks), FF3
(Extensions) and FF6 (Names and Messages).
In Section 400, each program explanation includes related information about
the feature or application it affects (if any). Also, the forms in Section 450 of
the DBS Manual provide a more concise view of programming DBS features.
DBS-70-400
DBS Manual - Issued 8/l/95
Technical Manuals Online! - http://www.tech-man.com
- xvii -
.
Introduction to DBS Programming
This introduction provides an overview of DBS programming from a phone.
For descriptions of other DBS programming methods. see Appendix B of this
manual.
The following table summarizes the topics contained in this introduction.
DBS-70-400
Topic
Page
Before You Begin
Preparations for Programming
Initializing DBS Systems (RAMCLR)
Upgrading CPC-B Software (New Function Reset)
Understanding FF Key Programming
Program Structure
How to Enter the Programming Mode
Example Programming Entry
Default Program Settings
Intro-3
DBS Manual - Issued 8/l/95
Technical Manuals Online! - http://www.tech-man.com
IllUO-3
Intro-4
Intro-5
Intro-6
Intro-6
Intro-7
Intro-9
Intro-9
Intro-l
Intro-2
DBS Manual - Issued 8/l/95
Technical Manuals Online! - http://www.tech-man.com
DBS-70400
Introduction to DES Programming
Section 400~Programming
Before You Begin
This section describes preparations that should be completed before you start
programming. If you are familiar with FF key programming for DBS
systems, you may begin programming as soon as these preparations have
been made.
If you are new to DBS programming, be sure to read “Understanding FF
Key Programming” on page Intro-5 before you begin.
Preparations for Programming
Prior to programming the DBS system, make sure you have completed the
following steps:
1. Confirm that the DBS features meet customer requirements. See Section
700-Feature Operation for DBS feature descriptions.
2. Confirm that you have the DBS hardware required for the end user. See
Section 300-Installation for details.
3. Use Forms and Tables (Section 450) to record the customer’s site data.
Use the following guidelines when completing Forms and Tables:
l
l
l
Be sure to record all program entries.
Leave the default values for equipment that is not connected.
Pay careful attention to program items that require a power-down to take
effect. Be sure to complete the necessary programming in these areas
before you make the system operational.
4. To program a new DBS system, you must first initialize the software to
default values (see “Initializing DBS Systems”, next page). If you are
performing an upgrade and the system is using a CPC-B card, you must
first perform the New Function Reset procedure (see “Upgrading CPC-B
Softtiare” on page Intro-5).
Once these steps are completed, use the site data in Forms and Tables to
program the system.
D BS-70-400
DBS Manual - issued 8/l/95
Technical Manuals Online! - http://www.tech-man.com
Intro-3
Initializing DBS Systems (RAMCLR)
After installing a new DBS system, or when upgrading to Version 7.0, you
must initialize the CPC (Central Processing Card) before programming the
system.
IMPORTANT: This procedure must be performed before you program
the DBS system. Failure to initialize the CPC before programming may
cause operational problems.
The procedure described below re-initializes the entire DBS memory, and
resets all programs to their default values. This means that all programs used,
as well as features set on individual extensions, must be reprogrammed. If
you have PCAS, you can download existing settings (thru CPC Version 4.0)
and upload them to the new version. The new features introduced in CPC
Versions 5.0 thru 6. lx. as well as the Permanent Call Forwarding feature,
must be manually reprogrammed.
1. Power-off the DBS (set power switch to OFF).
2. Slide the CPC’s SW1 switch to “RAMCLR”.
3. Power-on the DBS. Wait until the bottom status LED on the CPC card
stops flashing (this takes less than a minute).
4. Slide SW 1 back to “RAMHOLD”.
5. From any display phone, verify the software version by pressing
ON/OFF. CONF 7777
Figure 1.
T memory clear switch
STATUS
LED
Intro-4
DBS Manual - Issued 8/l/95
Technical Manuals Online! - http://www.tech-man.com
DBS-70-400
Introduction to DBS Programming
Section 400-Programming
Upgrading CPC-B Software (New Function Reset)
Perform the following procedure when upgrading CPC-B software to a new
version. Exception: If upgrading to Version 7.0, the system must be
initialized instead: see “‘Initializing DBS Systems (RAMCLR)“. previous
page.
IMPORTANT: Perform New Function Reset if upgrading to a new
release -- from 5.0 to 6.0, for example. It is not necessary for a “point”
release (e.g., from 5.0 to 5.2).
New Function Reset clears unused registers and adds new programs, but
retains all current DBS settings. If you are upgrading from a CPC-B version
prior to 3.1, New Function Reset will also clear any existing DID numbers
that are extension-based.
1. Power-off the DBS. Remove the CPC-B card.
2. Replace the existing EPROMs l-4 with new EPROMs.
3. Re-install the CPC-B card, then power the system back on.
4. If upgrading to a new release (e.g., from 5.0 to 6.0), perform New Function
Reset as shown below:
FFl 8# I# (0 or l)#
t
O=Do not perform New Function Reset.
l=Perfonn New Function Reset.
NOTE: If you enter “1” (to reset), the following displays:
This is to confirm that you want to reset the data before the DBS
actually performs the reset. Press one of the following:
O=Do not complete the reset.
l=Complete the reset.
5. Power-off the system, wait at least 3 seconds, then power it back on.
DBS-70-400
DBS Manual - Issued 8/l/95
Technical Manuals Online! - http://www.tech-man.com
Intro-5
Introduction to DBS Programming
Section 400-Programming
Understanding FF Key Programming
Program Structure
Program entries for the DBS are organized into 10 primary groups, which are
listed in Table 1 below. Each group has its own Flexible Function (FF) key
on the phone. These keys can be identified by the LED on the left side of the
key. On key telephones, the FF keys are numbered left-to-right, starting on
the bottom row.
After you enter the programming mode (see “How to Enter the
Programming Mode”, next page), press the desired FE key to start
programming the entries (“addresses”) of the group. The phone’s LCD
display will prompt you through the addresses.
Tuble 1.
JIBS program structure
FF Key
FFl
FF2
FF3
FF4
FF5
FF6
FF7
I
FF8
FF9
FFlO
Programming Group
System settings
CO Trunk settings
Extension settings
Ring Assignments and Hunt Groups
FF Key Assignments
1 Names and Messages on LCD Display
1 Toll Restrictions (TRS)
Least Cost Routing (LCR)
Copy Program Settings
1 Speed-Dialing (system and personal)
In the programming mode, some of the phone keys can be used to store your
settings and move forward or backward through the program addresses.
Figure 2 (next page) identifies these keys and what they do in programming
mode.
intro-6
DBS Manual - Issued 8/l/95
Technical Manuals Online! - http://www.tech-man.com
D BS-70-400
Introduction to DES Programming
Section 400-Programming
‘imrre 2.
Phone kevs used in womamming mode
CONF: Resets entry
to default setting.
VOL “: Moves backward to the previous
programming level.
FLASH: Stores your entry and moves
backward (decrements port number in
the same address; or decrements program
address number).
HOLD: Stores your entry and moves
forward (increments port number in
the same address; or increments program
address number).
*: Stores your entry and
moves backward (decrements
program address number).
# : Stores your entry and
moves forward (increments
program address number).
How to Enter the Programming Mode
From the Atiendant port...
Programming can be performed from an Attendant display phone. The phone
connected to extension port 1, assigned extension number 100 is
automatically the Primary Attendant phone. By default, extension port 2
(extension number 101) is the Second Attendant phone (although this
extension assignment can be reprogrammed). Up to two other phones can
also be programmed as Third and Fourth Attendant phones. Programming is
also possible from other extensions (see ‘%rom a Non-Attendant Port”, next
page).
To enter the programming mode from any Attendant phone, press:
ON/OFF PROG ## [desired FF key]
DBS-70-400
DBS Manual - Issued 8/l/95
Technical Manuals Online! - http://www.tech-man.com
Intro-7
introduction to DBS Programming
Section 400-Programming
Notes:
l
l
Name settings can only be progammed from the Attendant phone or a
DSS console connected to it.
When you enter the programming mode on the Attendant phone -- and the
DBS is set for only one Attendant -- the system will automatically change
to the “Night” mode. After you exit the programming mode (by pressing
ON/OFF), the system will return to the appropriate mode according to the
system clock and the mode’s start time.
From a non-Attendant port . . .
When programming from a display phone other than an Attendant, press:
ON/OFF #98 [NNNN] PROG ## [desired FF keyJ
(where “[NW” is the programming authorization code -- “9999” by
default)
.i
Notes:
l
l
In CPC-A versions prior to 3.3, if a non-Attendant phone is used for
programming, you must enter the programming authorization code twice -once to begin programming, and once to exit programming. Otherwise,
other non-Attendant extensions cannot enter the programming mode.
Beginning with CPC-A Version 3.3, and CPC-B versions, a non-Attendant
phone only has to enter the authorization code once, to begin
programming. As soon as programming is complete, any other nonAttendant phone can enter the programming mode.
From the Test Terminal port . . .
You can also program from a phone connr .:ted to the test terminal (CN3) of
the main DBS cabinet:
1. Slide the SW1 switch on the cabinet to ‘Test” mode. This will provide a
direct connection to ports 7 and 8 (if the DBS is already in service, make
sure beforehand that placing ports 7 and 8 out of service is acceptable).
ON/OFF #98 [NNNN] PROG ##### [desired.FF key]
(where “[NNNNJ” is the programming authorization code -- “9999” by
default)
2. Press:
When you are finished programming, be sure to return SW1 to the “ST”
position.
Intro-8
DBS Manual - Issued 8/l/95
Technical Manuals Online! - http://www.tech-man.com
DBS-70-400
Technical Manuals Online! - http://www.tech-man.com
Introduction to DBS Programming
Section 400-Programming
Program Address
Topic
ITI 2# I# 5# ( 0 orl)#
SSD Display Restriction
FFl 2# 1# 6P ( 0 orl)#
Auto Flash Redial
FFl
FFl
FFl
hi
IFFi
2f
2#
2#
2Rc
2#
1P
18
l#
iRc
i#
7# (Oorl)#
8# (Oorl)#
9# (Oorlj#
io# (Oorlj#
li# (Oorl)#
Extension Number Digits
Alternate Attendant (CPWBpriorto2.0)
Attendant Intercom Calling
Extension Intercom Calling
I Alert Tone for Voice Calls
/Alert Tone for BUSY Override & OHVA
System Installation Area Code
SSD Name Display
APVAEC Slot Assianment
IVoice Mail Busy Tone
Analog Transfer Ring Pattern
FFl 2# l# 22# (l-15)#
Attendant Overflow for Primary Attendant
FFl 2# l# 23# (Oorl)#
FFl 2# l# 23f (O-15)8
Delayed Ring (CPC-AIIIB)
AEC Disconnect Signal Duration
FFl
FFl
FFl
FFl
FFl
FFl
Second Attendant Position
Third Attendant Position
Fourth Attendant Position
Attendant Transfer Extension
Attendant Override
Attendant LED Alarm Indication
l# 24#(11-69orlOl-699)#
l# 25#(11-69 or 101-699)#
l# 26#(11-69orlOl-699)#
l# 27#(11-69orlOl-699)P
l# 28# (0 orlj#
l# 29# (Oorlj#
Page
O(Display D B S dialed digits)
1 (REDIAL
sends flash)
1 (Enabled)
1 (Enabled)
0
I (Disabledj
!
11 &tern hold) 1
11 (Retrieves held
I
call)
1 (3 digits)
1 (Enabled)
1 (Voice)
1 (Voice)
1 (Enabled)
10 (Disabled)
I
1 (1tArea)
O(5 names)
Noassianment
IO (Silence)
t
OneTouch Dial
OnhookTransfer
Kev
BankHold
I
/Non-Appearing Trunk Hold
ISLT Flash Control
FFl 2# l# 12# (Oorl)##
FFl 2# l# 13# (Oorlj#
FFl 2# l# 14f ( 0 orl)f
FFl 2# l# 155 (0 orl)P
FFl 2# l# 16# (Oorlj#
IFFi 2# i# 17# (oar I)#
FFI 2# l# 18# (Oorl)#
FFl 2# l# 19# (Oorl)#
FFl 2# l# 20# (2-9 or 2-18)#
1~~1 2# I# 21# (Oorl)#
FF1.2# l# 22# .(O-6)f
2#
2#
2#
2#
2W
2#
Default
I
-
I
l-9
l-10
l-11
1-12
1-13
1-14 1.
) l-15 1,
l-17
l-18
1-19
l-20
1-21
l-22
l-23
l-24
l-25
l-26 1
(CPGA3.21 orhigher)
(CPC-B 1.0 only)
(CPC-A 3.3 or higher)
(CPC-B 2.09thru 4.0with AFP)
FFl 2# l# 30# (Oorl)#
FFl 2# l# 31# (0-6)#
Extension (BLF) Delayed Ring
Analog Transfer Ring Pattern (CPC-Ail/B)
FFl 2C l# 32# (Oorl)#
FFl 2# l# 33# (0 orl)#
FFl 2# l# 34# (Oorl)#
Multiple DID/DNIS (CPC-84.0orhighcr)
Page Duration
SLT DISA Ring Pattern
FFl 2# l# 35# (0-15j#
AEC Disconnect Signal Duration
Intro-l 0
DBS Manual - Issued 8/i/95
I l-31
1 (Enabled)
1 (can assign
alarm)
0 (Disabled)
1 1-35
l-36
I
1 l-37
0 (Unlimited)
O(1 secon/
3 secoff)
0 (No signal sent)
(CPC-All/B 5.0 or higher)
Technical Manuals Online! - http://www.tech-man.com
Ext.11 or101
.
l-41
1-42
1-43
DBS-70-400
0
Introduction to DBS Programming
Section 400-Programming
Program Address
FFl 2# l# 36# (O-2)P
FFl 2P l# 37# (6 char.)#
Topic
Default
DID/DNIS to a Voice Mailbox
0 (No DIDIDNIS
digits transmitted)
None
1-44
0 (5 set)
0 (Disabled)
0 (Not required)
1-48
1-49
l-50
1-51
1-52
(CPC-8 6.0 or higher)
DID/DNIS Answer Code
Page
(CPC-8 6.0 or higher)
FFl 2t l# 38P (0-2)#
FFl 28 1X 39# (0 or l)#
FFl 2# If 4OP (0 or 1)P
LCD Timer for Caller ID (CPC-AH/B 6.1 or higher)
Internal Hold Tone (CPC-All/l3 7.0 or higher)
Door Opener Access Code Required
FFl 2# 1X (41 or 42)# 1X (0 or l)#
FFl 2P l# (41 or 42)P 2f (0 or l)#
API Port Type (CPCAWE 7.0 or higher)
API Baud Rate (CPC-All/B 7.0 or higher)
0 (Standard API)
0 (9600 bps)
Program Address
1 Topic
IDefault
l-46
(CPC-AWE 7.0 or higher)
FFl:- *#,.2*!. ,8erid Port Parameters (TTY Settings)
FFl
FFl
FFl
hi
FFl
FFl
2# 2% 1Y (0 or l)#
2# 2f 2# (0 or l)#
28 2# 3# (l-4)#
2t 2# 4,dc ii-sir
2# 2# 51 (3 or 4)#
21 2# 6# (0 or l)#
FFl 2# 2# 7# (0 or l)#
FFl 2# 2# 8P (0 or l)#
FFl 2# 2# 9# (0 or 1)X
FFl 2# 2# lO# (0 or l)#
1-53
Parity Check
l-53
1 (On)
l-54
Odd/Even Parity
1 (Even)
Baud Rate
. I
I 4 .19600 bos)
I l-55
1 Stop Bit Length
11 (1 bit)
1 l-56
Data Length
l-57
4 (8 bits)
l,-58
SMDR Printing Mode 1: Outbound and Inbound 1 (Outbound and
Inbound)
l-59
SMDR Printing Mode 2: Long-Distance and
1 (Long-distance
Local Calls
and local)
SMDR Printing Mode 3: Header Title
0 (No header
l-60
titles)
1-61
Serial.Port Flow Control (XON / XOFF)
1 (No DBS flow
control)
l-62
RAI Baud Rate
0 (300 bps)
1-63
FFl, 2# 3#: PBX Settings
FFl 2P 3f (l-8)1% (O-999 or
o*-99ya
FFl 2# 3P (9-18)# (l -3)#
Page
PBX Access Code(s)
None
1-63
Automatic Pause Position for PBX Access
Codes
None
l-64
1-66
FF1 2# d#z-.: Exknal (UNA) Relay Control
FFl 28 4# 1Y (0 or 1)#
Ring Patterns for UNA Terminals (M, C and B)
FFl 2# 4# (2-9)Y (0 or l)#
External Page Interface Control for Paging
Grouts
I,FFl- 2# 5#:. Class of Service
,’
FFl 2# 5P (l-8)# (l-21)W (0 or 1)#
Extension Class of Service
D BS-70-400
DBS Manual - issued 8/l/95
Technical Manuals Online! - http://www.tech-man.com
0 (1 set on/
l-66
3 set off)
0 (Internal paging l-67
onlv)
11-68
0 (All features
disabled)
1-68
Intro-11
introduction to DBS Programming
Program Address
Section 400-Programming
Topic
Default
P
FFl 2# 6#: Account Codes
None set
0 (TRS type 0 -intercom calls
(CPGAIIB 6.0 or higher)
Flexible Function Screen Soft-Key Assignment
FFl 2# 7# 1# (2539)# (I-lO)#
ICodeI#
FFl 2# 7% 2# (2539)# (l-lO)# (Text)# Flexible Function Screen Text
FFl 2# 7# 3# (2539)# (0 o r lI#
Flexible Function Screen Default
’
FFl 2# 7# 4# i0 or 1 j# ~
(Flexible Function Screens Default (All)
t-73
None
1-73
I
None
l-78
0 (Do not default)r , 1 - 7 9
(0 ~DO not default) 1 l-80
FFl 2# 8#: Caller ID Automatic DISA
FFt 2# 9#: Door Phones
FFl 2# 9#
FFl 2# 9#
(Oorl)#
FFl 2# 9#
FFl 2# 9%
FFl 2# 9#
FFl 2# 9#
(l-4)% l# (3-144)#
(l-4)# 2# (1-144)X
(i-4)#
(l-4)#
(1-4)#
(l-4)#
3# (OOOO-9999)f
4# (0 or l)#
5% (O-15)8
6# (0-5)#
(CPGAIIIB 6.1 or higher)
1 Automatic DISA Callers
(WC-AIVB 7.0 or higher)
1 Door Phone Extensions
Door Phone Ring Assignments
Door Opener Access Code
Door Phone Tone Type
Door Phone Ring Timeout Timer
Door Phone Ring Pattern
I-81
INone
1-81
.’
.
: t-82
/No assignment 1 1-82
0 (Do not ring)
1-84 ’
1~~1 2~ 9# (i-4)ry 7# (0-514~
1 Door Opener Relay Timer
9999
1-86
0 (Slow chime1
l-87
3 (20 set)
l-88
1 (4 set between
1-89
.
rinas)
I1 (Open for 4 secll l-90 I
Program Address
T o p i c
Default
-
3# 1# (OOOO-2359)#
3# 2# (0-12)#
3# 3# (0-12)#
3# 4# (0-12)#
3# 5# (0-12)#
3# 6# (O-12)t
3# 7# (0-12)#
3# 8# (O-12)#
3# 9# (o-l 2)~
38 lO# (O-1 2)#
3# ll# (0-15)#
3# 12# IO-15)f
3# 13# (0-15)P
3# 14# (O-6)8
Intro-l 2
I
I
Page
1-h
FFI 3#: System Timers
FFl
FFl
FFl
FFl
FFl
FFl
FFl
FFl
1~~1
FFl
FFl
FFl
FFl
FFl
e
l-70
1-72
FFI 2# ?#: Flexible Function Screens
FFl 2# 8# (l-lO)# (PhoneNo.)#
g
l-70
FFl 2t 6# (l-1OO)P 1# (OOOl-9999)# Verified Forced Account Codes
FFl 2# 6# (1 -lOO)# 2# (0-7)#
Toll Restriction for Verified Forced Account
Codes
,
a
[Automatic Night Mode Start Time
Attendant Hold Recall Timer for CO Calls
Extension Hold Recall Timer for CO Calls
Attendant Transfer Recall Timer for CO Calls
Extension Transfer Recall Timer for CO Calls
Attendant Hunt Group Recall Timer
Extension Hunt Group Recall Timer
Attendant Park Hold Recall Timer
1 Extension Park Hold Recall Timer
Attendant Call Reversion Timer for CO Calls
Unsupervised Conference Timer
Automatic Pause Timer
CO Flash Timer
SLT Onhook Flash Timer
DBS Manual - Issued 8/l/95
Technical Manuals Online! - http://www.tech-man.com
1 Not set
1 (20 set)
7 (140 set)
1 (20 set)
7 (140 secl
1 (20 set)
7 (140 set)
1 (20 set)
17 (140 set)
1
9 (180 set)
2 (10 min)
7 (3.5 set)
9 (1 set)
4 (200 - 1500 ms)
l-91
1-93
1-94
l-95
1-96
l-97
1-98
1-99
l-1001
l-101
l-102
l-103
l-104
I-106
DBS-70-400
,’
Section 400-Programming
Introduction to DES Programming
Program Address
Topic
Default
Page
FFl
FFl
FF1
l~Fl
FFl
FFl
CO Ring Cycle Detection Timer
Inbound Ring Cycle Expansion Timer
i Dial Pause Timer
1 PBX Flash Timer
Call Forward-No Answer Timer
Outbound Ground Start Detection Timer
1 (6 set)
l-107
3#
38
3X
3Rc
3f
3#
15#
16#
17#
la#
19#
20#
(O-3)#
(0-15)#
(O-15M
;o-lob
(0-15)#
(l -8)#
FFl 3# 21# (l-8)#
I *
I7 (.I3 set)
(CPC-8only)
Inbound Ground Start Detection Timer
(CPC-Bonly)
4 (4 set)
FFl 3P 22# (0-12)#
FFl 3# 23# fO-12)#
1~~1 3# 24# ;o-12k
.
,
Attendant Hold Recall Timer for Intercom Calls
I Extension Hold Recall Timer for Intercom Calls
1 Attendant Transfer Recall Timer for Intercom 11 (20 set)
FFl 3# 25# (0-12)#
FFl 3# 26# (O-15)8
Extension Transfer Recall Timer for Intercom
Calls
CO Delayed Ring Timer
1 FF~ 7# (oooo-9999)#
1 ID Code for System Programming
Program Address
Topic
I‘
’
7 (140 set)
2 (After 12 set)
Default
New Function Reset
Confirm New Function Reset
DBS-70-400
DBS Manual - Issued 8/l/95
Technical Manuals Online! - http://www.tech-man.com
I
/
I
l-117
1-118
Page
l-132
FFl 8# I# and 2#: Neti Function Reset @PC-B only, 4.0 or higher)
FF1 8# l# (0 or l)#
FFl 8# 2# (0 or l)#
I
1 1-116
0 (Do not reset)
0 (Do not complete reset)
l-132
1-132
Intro-l 3
Introduction to DBS Programming
Intio-14
Section 400-Programming
DBS Manual - Issued 8/l/95
Technical Manuals Online! - http://www.tech-man.com
D BS-70-400
Section 400-Programming
Introduction to DBS Programming
1~~1 8f 48 6# (i-64)1 7# (0 or l)#
FFl 8# 4P 7# (0000-9999)# (lo-69 o r DNIS Number Settin
FFl 8P 51 (0000-9999)# (lo-69 or
100-699)# (0000[00]-llll[ll])P
r 6P (0000-9999)P (lo-69 o r DNIS Flexible Ringing Assignments
100-699)P (0000[00]-llll[ll])#
FFl 8# 7# (1/2)# (l-4)# (1-8)# (0 or l)# Tl Trunk Closure
disabled)
1100 or 111000
(Ringing enabled:
Delayed ringing
disabled)
l-198
l-200
0 (Own)
1 Topic
Default
Page
Program Address
., . . . .:. : .:.:.;. . .~.~.~.~.~.~.~.~.~.: ._,.,.j,. .,.,. .:,:._ :,: :,:,: : ., ,:. ..,/,,,,,,,
..___..,,,
:.......,.....
. ,:.,:.:.:..: .:.:.:.:.,.:.:,.~. ~:.,:.:.:.:~~.:.:,~C.:,:,:.,~,:.,:.r, : :i:i:I:i: .:~~:: ‘: :~~:~:
.
:
.
:
.
:
‘
:
.
:
:
.
:
.
:
.
:
.
~
~;
~
~.
~
.
~
.
~
.
:
~
:
~
:
~
~:
.
~
:
:
.
:
.
:
.
~
.
:
:
~~~~~~~~~~B~~~~~~:~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~.~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
,,...,( , ;:.:... ........‘. .:.:. ‘.:. .:,‘:~:~,. . . . . . . _. . . . . . . . . . . . . . ,. ., ., _, .,. . . .,.,
,. ,. .,_: _,.,.,., ,.,i. . . . . . . . _. . . . . , .:. ,I. . . . .,.,. . . :,:.: . . . .:.:.:.:.: ... . . . . . . . . .:. . .
IFF2 (l-64)# l# (0 or l)#
/Trunk Port Operation
DTMF/Pulse Dialing for Trunks
Pooled Trunk Access for Group “9”
10 (In service)
0 (DTMF)
1 (Trunk is
included)
1
2-3
2-4
2-5
Pooled Trunk Access for Groups “81-86”
FF2 (1-64)X lO# (1 or 2)#
FF2 (l-64)# ll# (0 or l)#
FF2 (1-64)X 15# (l-3)#
FF2 (l-64)P 16Y (0 or 1)#
DBS-70-400
Outbound DTMF Signal Duration for Auto-Dialed 1 (75 ms on/
Dioits
I 50 ms off)
Unsupervised Trunk Conference
0 (Disabled on
trunk)
DBS Manual - Issued 8/l/95
Technical Manuals Online! - http://www.tech-man.com
I
2-l 2
2-13
Intro-l 5
Introduction to
DBS Programming
Section 400-Programming
Program Address
Topic
Default
Page
:~ia:s~~~~~~~~~~~~~~,
: ;: :;: :; .:.: :y.:.. . . . . . . i. . . . . ~. .~. . . . . . . . ....:. .~:.:.:i.:.~: .: .:;:~.~:~: : : : .~~~:~;,:.: ‘.~~:~:~: .,.:‘. ::., :~~~~~~~~ili:;:.:i:i:;:‘.ii.:::.i::i~~:,
:.:. : . : . . ,. ,. . :. :.:. :. . . . . : . . . :, .: ;.
,::~~~~~~~~
. . . . . . . > . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 ::..:,.:. ........ ._. . . . . . ,. . . . . .~. . ,. . . .~. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
_..
.A.
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ......... .
FF3 (l-l 44)k: I# (1 O-69 or 1 OO-699)#
Extension Numbers .
FF3 (I-144)# 17# (0 or l)#
FF3 (l-144)P (Ia-25)# (0 or l)#
FF3 ( l - l 44)# 26W (0-24/39)#
lO/lOO (Port 1)
1lM0l (Port 2)
. . . etc.
Terminal Type
4 (34-button key
phone)
No assignment
EM/24 Port Assignment
Forced Least Cost Routing
0 (Disabled)
Forced Account Codes
0 (Voluntary)
Extension Lockout Code
Not set
0 (Disabled)
Offhook Signal (CO)
1 (Enabled for
Primary Attendant only)
1 (Enabled)
Call Waiting/OHVA
Busy Override Send
0 (Disabled)
Busy Override Receive
1 (Enabled)
Prime Line Pickup
0 (Disabled)
1 (Enabled)
Auto Pickup (Ringing Line)
0 (Disabled)
Unsupervised Conference
1 (Extension is
Station Message Detail Recorder (SMDR)
included in
Report
SMDR report)
Offhook Signal Volume
2 (Mid-level)
Offhook Signal Pattern
0 (Repeated tone
burst)
PSD Name Display on Large-Sized LCD Phones 0 (5 PSD names)
Page Group Extensions
0 (None)
0 (Prev. menu)
Display When Idle
Intio-16
DBS Manual - Issued 8/l/95
FF3 (I-144)f 2# (I-48)#
FF3 (l-144)# 3# (l-144)#
FF3 (l-144)# 4# ( 0 o r I)#
FF3 (1-l 44)# 5# (O-2)#
FF3 ( l - l 44)# 6# (OOOO-9999)#
FF3 (l-144)f 7# (0 or I)#
FF3
FF3
FF3
FF3
FF3
FF3
FF3
(l-144)#
(l-144)+!
(l-144)f
(l-144)#
(I-144)#
(I-144)t
(I-144)#
8# (0 or l)#
9# (0 or l)#
lO# (Oor l)#
ll# (Oorl)#
12# (0 or l)#
135 (Oar I)#
14# (Oor I)#
FF3 (l-144)# 15# (O-4)#
FF3 (i-144)# 16f (Oor l)#
Technical Manuals Online! - http://www.tech-man.com
3-3
3-5
3-7
3-8
3-9
3-20
D BS-70-400
I
Section 400-Programming
Introduction to DBS Programming
Program Address
Topic
Default
FF3 (l-144)#
FF3 (l-144)#
FF3 (l-144)#
FF3 (l-144)#
FF3 (l-144)P
FF3 (l-144)#
FF3 (l-l 44)#
FF3 (l-144)#
Display During Intercom Dial’Tone
Display When Calling an Extension
Display When Accessing CO Dial Tone
Display When Conversing on a CO Trunk
Display When Receiving a Page
Display After Receiving a Call Waiting Tone
Display When Dialing a Busy Extension
Extension Directory Display
(CPC-Ail; CPC-B 2.0 or higher)
VAU Port Assignment @PC-A 3.3 or higher)
Extension Class of Service Assignment
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
27# (0-24/39)#
28# (0-24/39)#
29# (0-24/39)#
30t (0-24/39)#
31# (O-24/39)8
32# (0-24/39)#
33# (0-24/39)#
34# (0 or l)#
FF3 (l-72)# 34# (0 or l)#
FF3 (l-144)# 35# (0-8)#
Page
(Prev. menu)
(Prev. menu)
(Prev. menu)
(Prev. menu)
(Prev. menu)
(Prev. menu)
(Prev. menu)
(5 names)
3-25
3-27
3-29
3-31
3-33
3-35
3-37
3-39
(see paQe 3-56)
0 (Class 0; all
3-40
(CPC-All; CPC-B 3.1 or higher)
features allowed)
Inbound DID Dial Numbers (cPc-B 2.0 only)
FF3 (l-1 44)# 35# (0000-9999)#
No assignment
3-41
AEC Disconnect (CPGA3.3 or higher)
FF3 (l-72)# 35# (0 or l)#
0 (Disabled)
3-41
1 Ringback Tone From ML Keys
FF3 (l-1 4b)# 36#‘ (0-2)c
10 (Ringback, then 1 3-42
busy tone)
FF3 (l-l 44)# 37# (l-2 or 7-8)#
Station Port CkiSS (CPC-84.0 or higher)
Automatically
3-43
assianed
SLT Hookflash (CPGB3.1 or higher)
0 (Broker’s hold)
FF3 (l-144)# 38# (0 or l)#
3-45
Extension Ring Pattern
FF3 (l-144)8 39# (0-9)#
0 (Determined by 3-46
CO)
DiQitaf
SLT
ReceivinQ
Volume
3-48
FF3 (l-144)# 40# (0 or 1 )#
0 (Normal)
Auto Set Relocation Code
Not set
3-49
FF3 (l-144)# 418 (OOOl-9999)#
Permanent Call Forward Type
3-51
FF3 (l-144)# 42# (0-3)#
cl (Off)
No assignment
FF3 (l-l 44)# 43# (1 O-69 or l OO-699)# Permanent Call Forward Extension
3-52
ML/MC0 Separation
0 (MC0 keys)
3-53
FF3 (l-144)# 44# (0 or l)#
VAU Hunting Priority
0 (No priority)
3-54
FF3 (l-144)# 456 (0 or l)#
AEC Disconnect
0 (Disabled)
3-55
FF3 (l-144)# 46# (0 or l)#
VAU Port Assignment
3-56
FF3 (l-144)# 47# (0 or 1)#
0 (Off)
Hot Dial Pad (CPC-All/B 7.0 or higher)
IO (Disabled)
3-57
FF3 (1-l 44)# 48# (0 or l)#
[Auto-Redial on Extensions (CPC-AIuB7.0 or higher)/1 (Enabled)
1 3-58 1
(FF3 (l-144)# 49# (0 or l)#
_
I
DBS-70-400
DBS Manual - Issued 8/l/95
Technical Manuals Online! - http://www.tech-man.com
I
*
I
Intro-l 7
introduction to DBS Programming
Program Address
Section 400-Programming
Topic
Default
Page
FF4 3# (l-8)# I# (11-69 or 101-699)# Hunt Group Pilot Numbers
No assignment 4-7
FF4 3# (I-8)P
. , I# (0 or l)#
Terminal/Circular Hunt Groups
FF4 3# (l-8)# 2# (0-2)#
Hunt Group Type (CPC-Ak CPC-B 2.0orhigher)
0 (Terminal
‘hunting)
0 (Terminal
hunting)
No assignment
No assignment
(CPC-All: CPC-8 2.0 or higher)
(CPC-A;CPC-B priorto 2.0)
FF4 3# (1-8)# 2# (l-8)1
Call Next Hunt Group (CPC-A; CPC-I3 prior to 2.0)
FF4 3# (l-8)# (3-lO)# (IO-690r
Hunt Group Members (CPC-A; CPC-B prior to 2.0)
l OO-699)#
FF4 3# (I-8)# 3# (1 O-69 or l OO-699)# Transfer Extension (CPC-All; CPC-B 2.0 or higher) 000
FF4 3# (l-S)# 4# (0-32)#
Hunt Group Transfer Timer (CPC-All; CPC-B 2.0 or 2 (2 set)
FF4 3% (l-8)P (5-12/20)# (lo-69 or
Hunt Group Members (CPC-All; CPC-B 2.0 or higher) No assignment
100-699)#
FF4 4# (1-16)# (l-8)# (IO-690r
Call Coverage Group Members
No assignment
IOO-699)#
FF4 5# (l-73/145)# (l-64)% (0 or 1)P CO Delaved Dav Rino Assionments
0 (No rina)
FF4 5# (79-86 or 151-158)# (l-64)#
CO Delayed Day Ring Assignments for Hunt
0 (No ring)
(Oorl)#
G r o u p s
FF4 6# (l-73/145)# (l-64)# (0 or l)# CO Delayed Night Ring Assignments
0 (No ring)
FF4 6# (79-86 or 151-158)# (l-64)#
CO Delayed Night Ring Assignments for Hunt 0 (No ring)
(Oorl)#
Groups
FF4 7# (l-144)# (l-144)# (0 or l)#
Extension Ring Table
0 (No ring)
FF4 8# (l-144)# (1-144)f (Oorl)#
Extension Delayed Ring Table
0 (No ring)
CO Night 2 Ring Assignments
FF4 9# l# (l-73/145)# ( l - 6 4 ) f
0 (No ring)
(CPC-All/B 7.0 or higher)
(Oorl)#
FF4 9# l# (79-86 or 151-158)# (i-64),+ CO Night 2 Ring Assignments for Hunt Groups 0 (No ring)
(CPC-All/B 7.0 or higher)
(Oorl)#
FF4 9# 2# (1-73/145)# (l-64)#
CO Delayed Night 2 Ring Assignments
0 (No ring)
(CPC-All/B 7.0 or higher)
(Oorl)#
FF4 9# 2# (79-86 or 151-158)X (l-64)$ CO Delayed Night 2 Ring Assignments for Hunt 0 (No ring)
Grouos (CPC-AIVB7.0 or higher)
(0 or 1)#
., .,., .,. ., .,. ., ,. ,.,_,. ,.,.
FF5 (l-144)# (l-24)# CONF (Code)# (FF Kev Assignments for Extensions
FF5 (73-76 or 145-l 48)# CONF (1-72)P FF Key Assignments for DSS Consoles
(Code)#
FF5 (149-152)# (1-32)# CONF (Code)# Attendant Feature Package Key Assignments
CPC-B 2.0to 4.Owith AFP
intro-l 8
DBS Manual - Issued 8/l/95
Technical Manuals Online! - http://www.tech-man.com
., ., ,.,.,.,.,.,.,.,.
,_,.,.,,,.,.,. .,.,,,.,.
4-11
4-13
4-14
4-15
(i-16
higher)
.,.,..,_,_,...,.,.,.,.,.,.,.,.,.,.,.,.,..i, ..,..:...............,...,.,.,.,...,..,
4-9
4-l 7
4-l 8
4-20
4-21
4-22
4-23
4-25
4-26
4-27
4-28
4-29
4-3c
...
INoassionment 1 5 - 3
No assignment 5-8
No assignment
5-10
D BS-70-400
I
I
Section 400-Programming
Program Address
Introduction to DBS Programming
Topic
FF6 1# (l-144)# CONF (up to 10 char.)#
FF6 21 (00-89 or 000-l 99)# CONF
(up to 16 char.)%
FF6 3# (l-144)P (90-99 or 900-909)#
CONF (up to 16 char.)#
FF6 4# (59)P CONF (up to 15 char.)%
FF6 51 (l-64)P CONF (up to 6 char.)#
FF6 6# ([email protected]# CONF (up to 10 char.)#
FF6 7# (l-5)P CONF (up to 15 char.)#
FF6 8/9# (l-200)# (1 or 2)# (OOOO9999)R (up to 6 char.)#
Extension Name
System Speed Dial Names
Program Address
1 Topic
1 Default
No assignment 6-3
No assignment 6-4
Personal Speed Dial Names
No assignment 6-5
Absence Messages
Trunk Name Assignment
Hunt Group Name Assignment
Call Waiting/OHVA Text Reply
DID/DNIS Text Name Assignment
No
No
No
No
No
(CPM 5.0 or higher)
assignment 6-6
a s s i g n m e n t S-6
assignment 6-9
assignment
6-l 0
assignment
6-l 1
Default
International Calling For TRS Types 3-6
FF7 1P 21 (0 or l)#
FF7 l# 3# (l-15)#
FF7 l# (4-ll)# (0 or l)#
FF7 If (12-16)# (0 or l)#
FF7 l# 17# (0 or I)#
FF7 l# 18X (l-144)# (Oar l)#.
FF7 l# 19# (l-144)# (Oor 1)#
Page
0 (Deny/Check
Country Code
Table)
DTMF Signaling During Incoming Calls for TRS 1 (Enable DTMF
Types O-6
signaling during
incoming calls)
Maximum Dialed Digits For TRS Types 3-6
* (Unlimited)
3-Digit Toll Restriction For TRS Types 2-6
0 (Allow)
7-Digit Toll Restriction For TRS Types 2-6
1 (Check 7-digit
table)
Dialing Plan Switch (CPC-AWE 6.0 or higher)
0 (Old dial plan)
Operator Access (CPC-All/B 6.0 or higher)
0 (Deny)
international Calling on Extensions
0 (Dew)
l
Page
~~~~:
1..
7-5
7-6
7-7
7-8
7-9
7-l 0
7-l 1
7-l 2
(CPC-All/B 6.0 or higher)
Country Code Table (CPC-All/B 6.0 or higher)
Equal Access Code Format
FF7 l# 225 (l-lO)# (000-999)#
No assignment
0 (Old 10XxX
(CPC-All/B 6.0 or higher)
format)
Office Code Restriction Table For TRS Types 2-6 No assignment
FF7 2% (3-6)# (000-999)P (0 or 1)#
Area Code Table For TRS Types 3-6
FF7 3# (3-6)# (000-999)# (0 orl)#
Office Code Table For TRS Types 3-6
DBS-70-400
DBS Manual- Issued 8/l/95 .
FF7 l# 20# (l-lO)# (0-999)#
FF7 l# 21Y (0 or l)#
7-13
7-14
7-l 5
(CPC-All/B 6.0 or higher)
Technical Manuals Online! - http://www.tech-man.com
0 (Allow) for TRS
types 5 and 6
1 (Deny) for TRS
types 3 and 4
0 (Allow) for TRS
types 4-6
1 (Deny) for TRS
tvoe3
7-l 6
7-l 7
Intro-19
Introduction to DBS Programming
K-7 9# (13-16)# (0 or l)#
Section 400-Programming
Special Office Code Table For TRS Types 3-6
(Global
Copy)
.
0 (Allow) for Sp.
AlCs 3 and 4
1 (Deny) for Sp.
A/Cs 1 and 2
7-26
No assignment
No assignment
No assignment
8-12
8-13
8-14
Off ice Code Tables
FF8
FF8
FF8
FF8
5#
6#
7#
8#
(l-15)# (I-48)# (l-8)#
(l-8)# (l-8)# (l-64)#
(l-8)P (up to 16 digits)#
(l-8)# (up to 16 digits)#
Intro-20
LCR Trunk Groups
LCR Delete Tables
LCR Add Tables
DBS Manual - Issued 8/l/95
Technical Manuals Online! - http://www.tech-man.com
.
DBS’70-400
Section 400-Programming
Introduction to DBS Programming
Topic
Program Address
Default
Page
‘. .‘.‘.A . . . . . . . .i. .:+.:.:yy..: :.:.: .... i.\: :.:.:.:. ~~ .:,:. .:.:.:.: :.:.: :>>:: :; ;>; :. ‘.:~i$~~~::‘.‘.: . . . .: ; 5- . <I :., ~,.i.i.i.:,: ,i :i ~~:~:~:~~~~~:: :~~::.~~~~~~:~.~: ~: ~~:~~:~:~:~~~:: .i : : :, ; :...y c : :.,: : ‘.’ :. ‘. .:.. . . \. . ‘.‘:‘.‘.‘.“:‘: .:i: .:, j. : ,: . ,. : 3’,:,: : :.j:;~: : i: : : i.i: :.:. : :; . ,. :+ .:.: : j:j
:~~~~~~~:~~~~~a~~~~~~~~~~~~.~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~l~~~~~~~
._.
. . . . ., ., ., ., . . .,_. ,. ., . . . ., :. . . . . . . .
. ..,. . . ..,.,.,.,. . . . . . . . . . . . .:.:. .:. .: .,.,.,. . . .(. ., .: .:.:. .,., . :.:.;,: .:.:. . . , . , .,. . A. . . . . y:.: . ...... .:.,. . :. : ., ., .,. . ., . . . . . . .,.,. . ,.,. .,.,. .,. .,
FF9 1# (l-64)P (l-64)##
FF9 2# (l-144)# ( I - 1 4 4 ) f t
FF9 3# (l-144)# (1-144)##
/Trunk Copy
Extension Copy
FF Key COPY
1 Not set
Not set
Not set
/
1
9-3
9-4
i 9-5
Topic
Default
Page
Program Address
:‘. . ,. : .: .:.:. .,..y :,:.:.: . . . . . .:. :.:. .:.:.:.>.,>:. :.>. ._,:;,: .:. ,..:.:.:.I:.:,..‘, : ,.;::.: :.j :.~:.: : : :. .: :.~:‘~.‘-~:.:.~: : .:.~: ;~~~:~: : ~. : .: l.: : .:i,:-j:-;.: : .: ~. .,.: .:.:.,.:. ............ ._ ~ ~ ~.~.~.~ ~.~.,~ .~ ,.,.,. . ,.,.,., .,.,., : .,.,. . . . .:. .:: :::+, .:. ‘. 2.. .: .:.: .::. ,. ;. .‘. -:; . . : (. y . :., .J,
;..iia~~~~~~~~~.a~~~~~~~~~,~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
.,. . ., . . . . . ... ,. ,. . . . .,:. . . . . . . . . . .
. . ........ .... ...............
,. . . . . . .,. . . . ‘.’ . . . . . :.
FFlO l# (00-89 or 000-199)# (up to 16 System Speed Dial Numbers
diaitslf
I
FFlO 2# (l-144)f (90-99 or 900-909)# Personal Speed Dial Numbers
(up to 16 digits)#
DBS-70-400
DBS Manual - Issued 8/l/95
Technical Manuals Online! - http://www.tech-man.com
I
Not set
Not set
I
10-3
10-5
Intro-21
1. System Programming (FFl)
This chapter describes DBS system settings using programming key FFl.
This chapter covers the following FFl addresses:
F’Fl Address
Topic
FFl
FFl
FFl
FFl
FFl
FFl
FFl
FFl
Date and Time Settings
General System Settings
Serial Port Parameters (TTY Settings)
PBX Settings
External (UNA) Relay Control
Class of Service
Account Codes
Flexible Function Screens
Caller ID Automatic DISA
Door Phones (CPC-AII/B 7.0 or higher)
System Timers
Programming and DISA Codes
New Function Reset
DlD/DNTS and Tl Settings (CPC-B only)
l#
2#
2#
2#
2#
2#
2#
2#
l#
2#
3#
4##
5#
6#
7#
FF1 2# 8#
FF1 2# 9#
FFl
FFl
FFl
FFl
DBS-70-400
3#
4##thru7#
8# l# and 2#
8# 3# thru 7#
DBS Manual - Issued 8/t/95
Technical Manuals Online! - http://www.tech-man.com
Page
l-3
==i
-I
l-5
1-53
l-68
l-70
l-73
1-81
I
I
I
1
1-133 1
Page l-l
Page l-2
DBS Manual - Issued 8/l/95
Technical Manuals Online! - http://www.tech-man.com
DBS-70-400
Section 400-Programming
Chapter 1. System Prog;arnming (FFl)
Date and Time Settings
Day/Date Setting
Software Version: Ail Versions
Address: FFl l# l# (MMDDYY)#
Description
This program sets the date in the DBS system clock.
The day and date are printed on the Station Message Detail Recording
(SMDRj printout Proper LCR (Least Cost Routing) operation depends on
correct date settings. Proper operation of peripheral equipment may also
depend on correct date settings.
Programming
I
FFl 1# 1# (MM.DDYY)#
t
Month, day, and year in numeric format
(for example, January 1.1995 would be
entered as 010193.
DBS-70-400
DBS Manual - Issued 8/l/95
Technical Manuals Online! - http://www.tech-man.com
Page l-3
Section 400-Programming
Chapter 1. System Programming (FFl)
Time Setting
Software Version: All Versions
Address: FFl 1# 2# (HHMM)#
Description
This program sets the time in the DBS system clock. The time appears on key
phones that have LCDs. The time is also recorded in SMDR call records.
Note: Correct time settings are necessary for proper LCR (Least Cost
Routing) operation.
Programming I
Time setting in 24-hour format
(for example, 3:00 pm would be
entered as 1500).
Page l-4
DBS Manual - Issued 8/l/95
Technical Manuals Online! - http://www.tech-man.com
DBS-70-46?j
Section 400-Programming
Chapter 1. System Programming (FFl)
General System Settings
Call Duration Display
Software Version: All Versions
Address: FFl 2# 1# l# (0 or l)#
Description
This program determines whether call duration will be displayed on
telephones with LCDs. By default, call duration will display.
Programming
FFl 2# 1# l# (0 or l)#
t
O=Call duration is not displayed.
l=Call duration is displayed.
Related Programming
SMDR Display Start Timer for CO Calls: FFl 2# 1# 2# (0, 1 or 2)#
LCD Timer for Caller ID: FFl 2# l# 38# (0, 1 or 2)#
Notes
No Interaction With SMDR Records. This setting does not affect SMDR
record generation.
Timing of Call Duration Display. In CPC-AH/B Version 6.1 or higher using
Caller ID, the LCD Timer for Caller ID address (FF12# l# 38#) determines
the delay before call duration is displayed, so that Caller ID information can
appear first. In versions prior to 6.1, the SMDR Display Start Timer for
CO Calls (see next address) controls the delay.
D&-70-400
DBS Manual - issued 8/l/95
Technical Manuals Online! - http://www.tech-man.com
Page l-5
Chapter 1. System Programming (FFl)
Section 400-Programming
SMDR Display Start Timer for CO Ca!ls
Software Version: All Versions
Address: FFl 2# l# 2# (0, 1, or 2)#
Description
This address determines the delay between the start of a call and the
beginning of the SMDR record (5 seconds by default). In CPC-AII/B
versions prior to 6:1, it also controls the delay before call duration is
displayed on LCD phones.
l
l
For Incoming Calls: An incoming call starts when the extension user
answers an incoming trunk calI. If the user hangs up before the Timer
ends, the system will not generate an SMDR record for the call.
For Outgoing Calls: An outgoing call starts after the extension user dials
the outgoing phone number. This allows time for the CO to connect the
call, or the called party to answer, before beginning the SMDR record.
Programming
FFl 2# I# 2# (0, 1, or 2)#
+
O= SMDR record begins after 5 seconds.
l= SMDR record begins after 16 seconds.
2= SMDR record begins after 30 seconds.
Related Programming
Call Duration Display: FFl 2# l# l# (0 or l)#
SMDR Communications Parameters: FFl 2# 2# (l# thru 9#)
SMDR Report (including the extension in): FF3 (ExtPort)# l# (0 or l)#
Notes
Caller ID Interaction. In CPC-AII/B Version 6.1 or higher using Caller ID,
the SMDR Display Start Timer does not control when call duration starts
displaying on LCD phones. Instead, the LCD Timer for Caller ID address
controls when the display begins.
Settings In Older DBS Versions. In CPC-A and CPC-B versions prior to
3.1, the SMDR Display Start Timer has only two settings -- “0” (16 seconds)
or “1” (30 seconds).
DBS Manual - Issued 8/I/95
Page l-6
Technical Manuals Online! - http://www.tech-man.com
DBS-70-400 .
Chapter 1. System Programming (FFI)
Section 400-Programming
Least Cost Routing (LCR) Access
Software Version: All Versions
Address: FFI 2# l# 3# (0 or l)#
Description
This program specifies whether Least Cost Routing (LCR) is used when “9”
is dialed to make an outside call.
Prdgramming
FFl 2# l# 3# (0,or I)#
0=“9” indicates a pooled-trunk call.
1=“9’* indicates an LCR call.
I
I
Related Programming
Forced Least Cost Routing: FF3 (ExtPort)# 4# (0 or l)#
LCR Settings: all FF8 programs
Notes
Restriction With Call Forward-Outside Feature (in CPC-AII and CPC-B
Version 7.0 and above). LCR will not work with the Call Forward-Outside
feature. If LCR is activated (the above address is set to “l”), extensions set to
Call Forward-Outside must use trunk groups l-6 (trunk group “9” cannot be
used). See Section 700~Feature Operation for more information.
Required Hardware Setting. Cut strap S 1 on the CPC card to enable LCR.
See Section 300~Installation for instructions.
FCC Regktration. If strap S 1 is cut, a different FCC registration number
should be used to identify the DBS syste,m. Both registration numbers -- one
for the DBS as a PBX system (Sl is cut), and one for the DBS as a KSU (Sl
is not cut) -- are printed on a label in the main cabinet. See Section 300Installation for more information.
DBS-70-400
DBS Manual - Issued 8/l/95
Technical Manuals Online! - http://www.tech-man.com
.
Page 1-7
Section 400-Programming
Chapter 1. System Programming (FFl)
Override Toll Restriction With SSD Numbers
Software Version: All Versions
Address: FFl 2# l# 4# (SSD)#
Description
This address allows you to set a range of System Speed Dial (SSD) codes that
will override Toll Restriction Service (TRS) types 2-6.
The number entered in this address is the lower boundary for SSD codes that
will override TRS. In other words, all SSD numbers higher than the one
entered will also override TRS types 2-6.
Programming
To set a range of SSD numbers to override TRS settings
(enter the lowest SSD code in the range) . . .
FFl 2# l# 4# (00-89 or 0001199)#
+
Lowest SSD Code that will override TRS
(all SSDs above this number will also override TRS)
OO-89=SSD code range for CPC-A (all versions),
CPC-AII and CPC-B versions prior to 7.0
OOO-199=SSD code range for CPC-AI1 and CPC-B
Version 7.0 or higher
To reset to the default value . . .
By default, SSD,numbers do not override TRS types 2-6. To reset to default:
I
FFl 2# l# 4# CONF ON/OFF
I
Related Programming
TRS Settings: all FF7 programs
SSD Numbers: FFlO l# (SSD)# (PhoneNo.)#
Notes
SLT Audio Delay. If “Override Toll Restriction With SSD Numbers” is
executed on an SLT phone, there is a 15-second delay before audio is passed
to the receiver.
Page 1-8
DBS Manual - Issued 8/l/95
Technical Manuals Online! - http://www.tech-man.com
D&-70-400
Chapter 1. System Programming (FFl)
Section 400-Programming
SSD Display Restriction
Software Version: All Versions
Address: FFl 2# I# 5# (0 or l)#
Description
This address determines whether the telephone’s LCD will display the phone
number actually sent by the DBS when an SSD code is dialed (or redialed
with the REDIAL key). By default, the phone number will display.
This address affects SSD codes 80-89 (or 160-199, in CPC-AR/B Version 7.0
or higher). The phone numbers associated with SSD codes 00-79 (or OOO159) will always display during dialing, regardless of the setting here.
If SSD Display Restriction is enabled (set to “1” in this address), the text
assigned to the SSD code will display, but the dialed digits will not.
Programming
FFl 2# l# 5# (0 cy l)#
O=DBS-dialed digits of SSD are displayed.
.
1 =DBS-dialed digits are not displayed
(only the SSD name is displayed).
SSD Codes Affected By This Address -80-89 (all CPC versions prior to 7.0)
or 160-199 (CPC-AH/B Version 7.0 or higher)
Related Programming
Override TRS With SSD Numbers: FFI 2# 1# # (SSD)#
SSD Name Display: FFl 2# I# 19# (0 or l)#
SSD Names: FF6 2# (SSD)# CONF (Name)#
SSD Numbers: FFlO l# (SSD)# (PhoneNo.)#
DBS-70-400
DBS Manual - Issued 8/l/95
Technical Manuals Online! - http://www.tech-man.com
Page l-9
Section 400-Programming
Chapter 1. System Programming (FFi)
Auto Flash Redial
Software Version: All Versions
Address: FFl 2# 1# 6# (0 or l)#
Description
This address determines whether the DBS will send a “flash” signal to the CO
on loop-start trunks when the REDIAL key is pressed. By default, the
REDIAL key sends a flash before redialing a number.
If your DBS system is connected to a PBX, set this address to “0” (sending a
flash may place the line to the PBX on hold).
Programming
FFl 2# l# 6# (0,or l)#
O=REDIAL does not send “flash”.
l=REDIAL sends 6‘flashy’.
Related Programming
COFlash Timer: FFl 3# 13# (0-15)#
PBXFlash Timer: FFl 3# 18# (0-lO)#
Trunk Port Type: FF2 (Trunk)# lO# (1 or 2)#
Notes
Flash Timing. The CO Flash Timer (FF13# 1 l#) determines the duration of
a flash when REDIAL is pressed.
Ground-Start Trunk Restriction. The Flash and Redial features are not
functional for ground-start trunks. See Technote 13 (March 1992) for more
information.
DBS Manual - Issued 8/l/95
Page I-10
Technical Manuals Online! - http://www.tech-man.com
DBS-70-400
Section 400-Programming
Chapter 1. System Programming (FFI )
One Touch Dial
Software Version: All Versions
A d d r e s s : FFl 2# l# 7# ( 0 o r l)#
Description
DBS-70-400
The One-Touch Dial feature enables users to dial an extension by pressing a
single programmable key. This feature is enabled regardicss of the program
setting (One-Touch Dial cannot be deactivated).
DBS Manual- Issued 8/l/95
Technical Manuals Online! - http://www.tech-man.com
Page l-11
Section 400-Programming
Chapter 1. System Programming (FFl)
Onhook Transfer
Software Version: All Versions
Address: FFl 2# 1# 8# (0 or l)#
Description
This address determines whether a call can be transferred without pressing
the PROG key.
If Onhook Transfer is enabled (default setting), the user can transfer a call
by placing the call on hold, dialing the extension number, and then hanging
UP* If Onhook Transfer is disabled, the user places the call on hold, dials the
extension number, then presses PROG (or “8” if using an SLT or DSLT
phone) and hangs up to transfer the call.
l
Programming
O=Onhook Transfer is disabled.
l=Onhook Transfer is enabled.
Related Programming
Attendant Transfer Recall Timer for CO Calls: FFl 3# 4# (0-12)#
Extension Transfer Recall Timer for CO Calls: FFl 3# 5# (0-12)#
Attendant Transfer Recall Timer for Intercom Calls: FFl 3# 24# (0-12)#
Extension Transfer Recall Timer for Intercom Calls: FFl 3# 25# (0-12)#
Notes
Call Transfer Limitation With CPC-A. In CPC-A versions, only trunk calls
can be onhook-transferred to other extensions. In CPC-AI1 and CPC-B, both
trunk and intercom calls can be onhook-transferred.
Transfer Recalls. If a transferred call recalls to an extension and is not
answered, it will automatically transfer to the attendant. Timing for the
attendant transfer is controlled by the Attendant Call Reversion Timer (FFl
3# lO# o-12+9.
VA U Interaction. If a VAU (Voice Announce Unit) is used, enable Onhook
Transfer to allow the VAU to transfer calls.
DBS Manual - Issued 8/l/95
Page 1-12
Technical Manuals Online! - http://www.tech-man.com
DBS-70-400
Chapter 1. System Programming (FFl)
Section 400-Programming
Key Bank Hold
Software Version: All Versions
Address: FF1 2# l# 9# (0 or l)#
Description
Use this address to enable or disable the Key Bank Hold feature in the DBS
system.
l
If Key Bank Hold is enabled:
- a phone user can switch back and forth between trunk calls (by
pressing the FF key for each trunk) without placing the current
trunk on hold.
- an Attendant phone can press a DSS/BLF key to automatically
transfer a trunk call to an extension without pressing HOLD
first.
l
In both cases, the DBS will automatically place the current trunk call on
System Hold (anyone can pick up the call) when the phone user presses the
FF key or DSS/BLF key.
If Key Bank Hold is disabled (default setting), the phone user must press
HOLD before accessing a second trunk or transferring a call.
Programming L
O=Key Bank Hold is disabled.
l=Key Bank Hold is enabled.
DBS-70-400
DBS Manual - Issued 8/l/95
Technical Manuals Online! - http://www.tech-man.com
Page 1-13
Chapter I. System Programming (FFl)
Section 400-Programming
Non-Appearing Trunk Hold
Software Version: All Versions
Address: FFl 2# l# lO# (0 or l)#
Description
This address determines who can pick up trunk calls that are on hold. It
applies to DBS phones that don’t have dedicated key appearances for trunk
calls (the phone user can’t tell which trunk is being used for incoming or
outgoing calls).
Choose one of the following:
l
l
Exclusive Hold: The call can be retrieved only on the extension where it
was placed on hold.
System Hold (default setting): Any extension can pick up the call.
Programming
I
I
Notes
O=Exclusive Hold is used for non-appearing trunk calls.
l=System Hold is used for non-appearing trunk calls.
Applicable Phone Types. This feature applies to both single-line and digital
telephones.
Number of Trunks That Can Be Held Without Key Appearances. Phones
that do not have a key appearance for trunk calls can only hold one trunk at a
time.
VAU Interaction. If a VAU (Voice Announce Unit) is used, set Non-
Appearing Trunk Hold to “Exclusive Hold” to prevent other extensions from
picking up calls being handled by the VAU.
Page l-14
DBS Manual - Issued 8/l/95
Technical Manuals Online! - http://www.tech-man.com
DBS-70-400
Section 400-Programming
Chapter 1. System Programming (FFl)
SLT Flash Control
Software Version: All Versions
A d d r e s s : FFl 2# 1# 11# ( 0 o r l)#
Description
This address determines how the DBS will respond to a second hookflash
during a call transfer on an SLT (Single-Line Telephone). By default, the
second hookflash will retrieve the held call.
To transfer a call on an SLT, the user hookflashes to place the call on hold,
then dials the extension number to transfer the call to. If the extension is busy
or not answered, the SLT user can hookflash again to either returu to dial tone
or retrieve the held call. depending on the setting.(“O” or “l”, respectiveiy) in
this address.
The following table further explains the SLT call transfer process for both
settings:
Table l-l. SLT Hookflash Control Settings
If SLT Flash Control is Set to “0” . . .
If SLT Flash Control Is Set to “1” . . .
-- ;;eh;y;r hookflashes to place a call
-- i;eh;y;r hookflashes to place a call
-- The.user dials an extension number to
transfer the call. The extension is
busy or does not answer.
-- The user dials an extension number to
transfer the call. The extension is
busy.
-- The user hookflashes a second time
to receive dial tone.
-- The user hookflashes a second time
to retrieve the held call.
-- The user dials another extension*.
-- The user can then hookflash a third
time to place the call on hold and
receive dial tone.
-- When the extension rings, the user
hangs up to transfer the held call.
* Or, the user can hookflash a third
time to retrieve the held call.
-- The user dials another extension.
-- When the extension rings, the user
hangs up to transfer the held call.
NOTE: This address does not affect how the hookflash functions when the
SLT user is listening to dial tone.
DBS-70-400
DBS Manual - Issued 8/l/95
Technical Manuals Online! - http://www.tech-man.com
Page l-l 5
Lnapter 1. system rrogramming (t f- i )
section 400~Wogrammlng
Programming
FFI 2# 1# 11# (0 or l)#
t
O=A second SLT hookflash results in dial tone.
l=A second SLT hookflash retrieves a held call.
Page 1-16
DBS Manual - Issued 8/l/95
Technical Manuals Online! - http://www.tech-man.com
DBS-70-400
Section 400-Programming
Chapter 1. System Programming (FFl)
Extension Number Digits
Software Version: Ail Versions
Address: FFl 2# l# 12# (0 or l)##
Description
This address determines whether the DBS will use 2-digit or 3-digit extension
numbers.
l
l
If 2-digit numbers are used, a maximum of 60 extension numbers are
available for assignment. Number Range: 10 thru 69.
If 3-digit numbers are used (default setting), a maximum of 600 extension
numbers are available. Number Range: 100 &u-u 699.
Programming
FFl 2# l# 12#qr l)# (#jr *)
[email protected] numbers
1=3-digit numbers
A second ‘W’ is required to ’
confirm the new numbering
plan. (Or, enter “*” to cancel
the new numbering plan.)
Related Programming
Extension Numbers: FF 3 (ExtPortj# l# (lo-69 or lOO-699)kt
Notes
Interaction With Larger Systems. If more than 60 phones are installed in
your system, use 3-digit extension numbers. Sites with fewer than 60 phones
can use either 2-digit or 3-digit extension numbers.
Interaction With Voice Mail. If your system uses Voice Mail, use 3-digit
numbers in order to match extensions with Voice Mail boxes.
Precaution for Changing Extension Number Digits. Changing this setting
can adversely affect other DBS settings that are based on extension numbers,
such as entries for DSWBLF keys and Call Forwarding.
DES-70-400
DBS Manual - Issued 8/l/95 .
Technical Manuals Online! - http://www.tech-man.com
Page 1-17
Section 400-Programming
Chapter 1. System Programming (FFl)
Alternate’ Attendant
Software Version: CPC-A and CPC-B Versions Prior to 2.0
Address: FFl 2# l# 13# (0 or l)#
Description
Use this address to enable or disable the use of an Alternate Attendant phone.
By default, the Alternate Attendant is enabled.
When enabled, the Alternate Attendant phone receives overflow intercom
calls from the Primary Attendant. The Alternate Attendant also has full
access to Attendant features.
Programming
I
I
FFI 2# 1# 13# (0 or l)#
t
O=Disables the Alternate Attendant.
l=Enables the Alternate Attendant.
Related Programming
Attendant Overflow for Primary Attendant (CPC-B Version 1.0 only):
FFl 2# 1# 22# (l-15)#
Extension Numbers (assigning to ports): FF3 (ExtPort)# l# (ExtNo.)#
Terminal Type: FF3 (ExtPort)# 2# (Type)#
Notes
Alternate Attendant Phone Settings In Later DBS Versions. In CPC-B
Version 2.0 and above, and in all CPC-AII versions, you can program Second,
Third, and Fourth Attendant phones instead of just one Alternate Attendant. .
See FF12# l# 24# thru 26# for more information.
Limitations on Assigning Attendant Phones. The DBS system always
recognizes the Primary Attendant location at extension port 1, with extension
number 10 or 100; this cannot be changed. However, you can change the
assignment of the Alternate Attendant -- but it is recommended that you leave
its default extension number at 11 or 101, so that a DSS/BLF console can be
used with it. (The Alternate Attendant is assigned by default to port 2, but it
can be reassigned to another port -- as long as extension 11 or 101 is assigned
to the new port.)
Page 1-18
DBS Manual - Issued 8/l/95
Technical Manuals Online! - http://www.tech-man.com
,
DBS~70-400
.
Section 400-Programming
Chapter 1. System Programming (FFI)
Attendant Intercom Calling
Software Version: All Versions
Address: FFl 2# l# 14# (0 or l)#
Description
Use this address to determine how intercom calls from an Attendant phone
are announced at extension phones -- by ringing the extension, or by
immediately establishing a voice path over the extension loudspeaker. By
default, a voice path is established when an Attendant dials an extension.
After the connection is established, the Attendant can change from voice to
ring (or vice versa) by dialing “ 1”.
Programming
I
FFl 2# l# 14#I (0 orl)#
+
I
O=Ring tone intercom calling from Attendant.
l=Voice intercom calling from Attendant.
Related Programming
Alert Tone for Voice Calls: FFI 2# l# 16# (0 or l)#
Notes
DBS-70-400
Interaction With VAU. If this address is set to “Voice intercom calling” and a
VAU is used, the VAU will not answer a call from an Attendant unless the
Attendant dials a “1” after dialing the VAU.
DBS Manual - issued 8/l/95
Technical Manuals Online! - http://www.tech-man.com
Page 1-19
section 400~Wogramming
uapter 1. system rrogrammlng (t-i- 1)
Extension Intercom Calling
Software Version: Ail Versions
Address: FFl 2# I# 15# (0 or l)#
Description
Use this address to determine how intercom calls from another extension will
be announced at extension phones -- by ringing the extension, or by
imrnediately establishing a voice path over the extension loudspeaker. By
default, a voice path is established when an extension dials another extension
-- the called party can hear and talk to the caller without lifting the handset.
After the connection is established, the caller can switch from voice to ring
(or vice versa) by dialing “1”.
Programming
FFl 2# 1# 15# (0 or I)#
4
I
O=Tone intercom calling from extension.
l=Voice intercom calling from extension.
Related Programming
Alert Tone for Voice Calls: FFl 2# 1# 16# (0 or l)#
Notes
Page l-20
Interaction With VAU. If this address is set to “Voice intercom calling” and a
VAU is used, the VAU will not answer a call from an extension unless the
extension dials a “1” after dialing the VAU.
DES Manual - Issued 8/l/95
Technical Manuals Online! - http://www.tech-man.com
OBS-70-400
Section 400-Programming
Chapter 1. System Programming (FFl)
Alert Tone for Voice Calls
Software Version: All Versions
Address: FFl 2# l# 16# (0 or l)#
Description
Use this address to determine whether voice intercom calls are preceded by
an initial alert (“splash”) tone. By default, the alert tone is enabled.
The alert tone (if enabled) will be sounded for 0.5 seconds before the caller’s
voice path is established.
Programming
I
I
FFl 2# l# 16# (0 or l)#
f
O=Alert tone is disabled.
l=Alert tone is enabled.
Related Programming
Attendant Intercom Calling: FFl 2# l# 143 (0 or l)#
Extension Intercom Calling: FFl 2# l# 15# (0 or l)#
DBS-70-400
DBS Manual - Issued 8/l/95
Technical Manuals Online! - http://www.tech-man.com
Page l-21
Section 400-Programming
Chapter 1. System Programming (FFl)
Alert Tone for Busy Override & OHVA
Software Version: All Versions
Address: FFI 2# l# 17# (0 or l)#
Description
This address determines if Attendant Override, Busy Override, and Offhook
Voice Announce (OHVA) calls are preceded by an alert tone. By default, the
alert tone is disabled.
This feature is governed by state law -- some states require the alert tone.
Programming
FFl 2# I# 17# (0 or l)#
O=Alert tone is disabled.
l=Alert tone is enabled.
Related Programming
Busy Override Send: FF3 (ExtPort)# 9# (0 or l)#
Busy Override Receive: FF3 (ExtPort)# lO# (0 or l)#
Page Group Extensions: FF3 (ExtPort)# 18# thru 25# (0 or l)#
Page 1-22
DBS Manual - Issued 8/l/95
Technical Manuals Online! - http://www.tech-man.com
DBS-70-400
Chapter 1. System Programming (FFl)
Section 400-Programming
System Installation Area Code
Software Version: All Versions
Address: FFl 2# 1# 18# (0 or l)#
Description
This address determines if the DBS site requires a “1” to be dialed before the
area code to make long-distance calls. This setting will affect the way the
DBS handles Toll Restriction (TRS) and Least Cost Routing (LCR) for longdistance calls.
In almost all cases, the default setting (“1” must be dialed) should not be
changed.
Programming
FFl 2# I# 18# (0 or l)#
t
O=“l” is not required before a long-distance call.
t=“l” must be dialed before a long-distance call.
Related Programming
Toll Restrictions: FF7
Least Cost Routing: FF8
Notes
Interaction With TRS and LCR. If “0” is selected above (,‘l” is uot required
before a long-distance call), the system will look at the fiist three digits of the
number dialed, whether it’s a “1” or not. This would severely limit the
capability of TRS and LCR, which are based on 3-digit area codes.
If “1” is selected (“1” is required before dialing a long-distance call), the
system will ignore the first dialed digit (could be “0” or “1”) and look at the
next three digits dialed as the area code.
DBS-70-400
DBS Manual - Issued 8/l/95
Technical Manuals Online! - http://www.tech-man.com
Page 1-23
C
h
a
p
t
e
r
SSD Name Display
Software Version: AH Versions
Address: FFl 2# l# 19# (0 or l)#
Description
TJse this address to determine how many SSD (System Speed Dial) names can
be displayed at a time on large-display phones, whenever an SSD menu is
displayed.
When 5 names are displayed (default setting), the maximum length for each
name is 16 characters. When 10 names are displayed, the maximum length
for each name is 5 characters.
Programming
FFl 2# l# 19# (0 cy l)#
O=Displays 5 SSD names.
l=Displays 10 SSD names.
Related Programming
Override TRS with SSD Numbers: FFl 2# l# 3# (SSD)#
SSD Display Restriction: FFl 2# l# 5# (0 or I)#
SSD Menu display during call states: FF3 (ExtPort)# 26# thru 33# 3#
System Speed Dial Names: FF6 2# (SSD)# CONF (Name)++
System Speed Dial Numbers: FFlO l# (SSD)# @ialedNo.)#
Page 1-24
DBS
Manual - Issued 8/l/95
Technical Manuals Online! - http://www.tech-man.com
DBS-70-400
Chapter 1. System Programming (FFI)
Section 400-Programming
APVAEC Slot Assignment
software VetSiOn:
CPC-A Version 3.3 or higher; CPC-All; and CPC-B Version 5.0 or higher
Address: FFl 2# 1# 20# (2-9 or 2-18)#
Description
Programming
This program is only used with third-party API applications. Its purpose is to
designate which Analog Extension Card (AEC) is used for voice channel
connections to the API product.
1
FFl 2# l# 20# (2-9 oy 2118)#
t
Analog Extension Slot used for voice
paths to a third-party API product.
NOTE: Do not set this to “1” (slot 1
must be a digital port).
Valid Ranges -CPC-A and CPC-AII: 2-9
CPC-B: 2-18
I.
Default: **
(no assignment)
Related Programming
Voice Mail Busy Tone: FFl 2# l# 21# (0 or l)#
Terminal Type: FF3 (ExtPort)# 2# (21-28,31-38 or 41-48)#
Notes
Third-Party Voice Mail Systems Not Integrated With the DBS. In these
systems, the API card is not required. Set up Call Forward ID codes so that
the DTMF codes will be sent to the appropriate Voice Mail box (ON/OFF PROG - AUTO - * - [Ext] - [up to 16 char.] - HOLD). See Section 700Feantre Operation for more information.
DBS-70-400
DBS Manual - Issued 8/l/95
Technical Manuals Online! - http://www.tech-man.com
Page 1-25
Chapter 1. System Programming (FF1)
Section 400-Programming
Voice Mail Busy Tone
Software Version: All-Versions
Address: FFl 2# 1# 21# (0 or l)#
Description
This address determines what is sent to a voice-mail uort at the conclusion of
a call -- either silence or a busy tone. By default, the DBS sends silence.
L
Programming
I
FFl 2# l# 21# (0 or l)#
O=Silence.
1 =B usy tone.
Related Programming
API/AEC Slot Assignment: FF1 2# l# 20# (2-18)#
Page l-26
DBS Manual - Issued 8/l/95
Technical Manuals Online! - http://www.tech-man.com
DBS-70-400 .
Section 400-Programming
Chapter 1. System Programming (FFl)
Analog Transfer Ring Pattern
Software Version: CPC-A Only (Version 3.21 or higher)
Address: FFl 2# l# 22# (O-6)#
Description
This address determines which ringing pattern is used for transferred calls to
devices connected to analog extension ports. By default, the ringing pattern
is .4 seconds on 13.6 seconds off.
This setting is typically used to assign specific ringing patterns for calls
transferred to a modem, or for SLTs that require distinctive ringing for
transferred calls.
Programming
FFl 2# l# 22# (O-6)#
f
Setting (in seconds):
O= .4 on / 3.6 off
l= .8 on I .2 off / .8 on / .2 off / .8 on / .2 off / 1 off
2= .8 on / .2 off / .8 on / 2.2 off
3= .8 on 12.2 off
4= .8 on 13.2 off
5= .8 on / 5.2 off
6= .8 on 13.2 off / .8 on / 7.2 off
Notes
DBS-70-400
Analog Transfer Ring Pattern Setting for CPC-AN and CPC-B. The
Analog Transfer Ping Pattern for CPC-AI1 (all versions) and CPC-B (Version
2.11 orhigher)issetinFFl 2# 1#31#.
DBS Manual - Issued 8/l/95.
Technical Manuals Online! - http://www.tech-man.com
Page l-27
Chapter 1. System Programming (FFl)
Section 400-Programming
Attendant Overflow for Primary Attendant
Software Version: CPC-B Version 1 .O only
Address: FFl 2# l# 22# (l-15)#
Description
This address determines the maximum number of trunk calls that can be
stacked at the Primary Attendant phone. By default, up to 8 calls can be
stacked at a time.
Calls exceeding the set limit are automatically transferred to other extensions.
To determine which extensions receive ovefflow trunk calls, use the Day and
Night Delayed Ring tables (FF4 5#, FF4 6#, and FF4 9# 2#).
The following types of calls can be stacked at the Primary Attendant:
Incoming trunk calls.
Hold recalls.
Transferred recalls.
Hunt group recalls.
Call reversions.
l
l
l
l
l
Programming
FFl 2# I# 22# (l-15)#
f
Number of Calls That Can Be Stacked
(default: 8)
Related Programming
Attendant Hold Recall Timer: FFl 3# 2# (0-12)#
Extension Hold Recall Timer: FFl 3# 3# (0-12)#
Attendant Transfer Recall Timer: FFl 3# 4# (0-12)#
Extension Transfer Recall Timer: FFl 3# 5# (0-12)#
Attendant Hunt Group Recall Timer: FFl 3# 6# (0- 12)#
Extension Hunt Group Recall Timer: FFl 3# 7# (0-12)#
Attendant Call Reversion Timer: FFl 3# lO# (0-12)#
Notes
Overflow Intercom Calls. Intercom calls will automatically ovefflow to the
Alternate Attendant, if enabled in FFl 2# I# 13#.
Page 1-28
DBS Manual - Issued 8/l/95
Technical Manuals Online! - http://www.tech-man.com
DBS-70-400
Section 400-Programming
Chapter 1. System Programming (FFl)
Delayed Ring
Software Version: CPC-All (all versions) and CPC-B Version 2.0 or higher
FFl 2# l# 23# (0 or l)#
Address:
Description
This address determines if delayed ringing is allowed for CO trunks. By
default, delayed ringing is disabled.
Delayed ringing is an automatic transfer of unanswered calls -- if an incoming
call is not answered at one extension, the system will send the call to another
extension (the first extension will cease ringing).
Programming
O=Delayed ringing is disabled.
l=Delayed ringing is enabled.
Related Programming
CO Delayed Ring Timer (CPC-AI1 and CPC-B Ver 3.1 or higher): FFl 3#
26#
(O-15)#
CO Delayed Day Ring Assignments: FF4 5# (ExtPort)# (Trunk)#
CO Delayed Day Ring Assignments for Hunt Groups: FF4 5# (HuntGrp)#
(Trunk)#
CO Delayed Night 1 Ring Assignments : FF4 6# (ExtPort)# (Trunk)#
CO Delayed Night 1 Ring Assignments for Hunt Groups: FF4 6#
(HuntGrp)# (Trunk)#
CO Delayed Night 2 Ring Assignments: FF4 9# 2# (ExtPort)# (Trunk)#
CO Delayed Night 2 Ring Assignments for Hunt Groups: FF4 9# 2#
(Hun tGrp)# (Trunk)#
DBS-70-400
DBS Manual - Issued 8/l/95
Technical Manuals Online! - http://www.tech-man.com
Page 1-29
Chapter I. System Programming (FFI)
Section 400-Programming
AEC Disconnect Signal Duration
Software Version: CPC-A Version 3.3 or higher
Address: FFl 2# l# 23# (0115)#
Description
Use this address to set the AEC card (VB-43621A) to provide a positive
disconnect signal, and determine the duration of the signal. By default, the
disconnect signal is not sent.
If set, analog extension ports will provide a disconnect signal (open loop)
upon hangup. Sending this signal allows quick disconnect from third-party
voice mail systems.
Programming
FFI 2# l# 23# (0-15)#
t
O=No disconnect signal.
l=lOO ms signal will be sent.
2=200 ms signal will be sent.
3=300 ms signal will be sent.
4=400 ms signal will be sent.
5=500 ms signal will be sent.
6=600 ms signal will be sent.
7=700 ms signal will be sent.
8=800 ms signal will be sent.
9=900 ms signal will be sent.
lO=l-second signal will be sent.
1 l=lS-second signal will be sent.
12=2-second signal will be sent.
13=2.5-second signal will be sent.
14=3-second signal will be sent.
15=3.5-second signal will be sent.
Related Programming
AEC Disconnect (CPC-A 3.3 or higher): FF3 (ExtPort)# 35# (0 or l)#
AEC Disconnect (CPC-AIIB 5.0 or higher): FF3 (ExtPort)# 46# (0 or l)#
Notes
AEC Disconnect Signal Duration for CPC-B Versions. For CPC-B Version
5.0 and higher, the AEC Disconnect Signal Duration is set in FF12# l# 35#.
Page l-30
DBS Manual - Issued 8/l/95
Technical Manuals Online! - http://www.tech-man.com
DBS-70-400
Section 400-Programming
Chapter 1. System Programming (FFl)
Second Attendant Position
Software Version: CPC-All (all versions) and CPC-B Version 2.0 or higher
FFI 2# I# 24# (11-69 or 10%699)#
Address:
Description
This address assigns an extension number as the Second Attendant position.
By default, the Second Attendant position is extension 101.
When all line appearances at the Primary Attendant are busy, calls will
transfer in sequence to the Second. Third, and Fourth Attendants. If all line
appearances are busy on all Attendants, calls will transfer to the Attendant
Transfer Extension (if assigned).
Programming
To assign a Second Attendant position . . .
FFl 2# 1# 24# (11-69 or 101 to699)#
+
Extension Number
(default: 11 or 101)
To clear the Second Attendant position . . .
FFl 2# 1# 24# CONF ON/OFF
Related Programming
Extension Number Digits: FFl 2# I# 12# (0 or l).##
Third Attendant Position: FFl 2# 1# 2% (11-69 or lOl-699)#
Fourth Attendant Position: FFl 2# l# 26# (1 l-69 or IO 1-699)#
Attendant Transfer Extension: FFl 2# l# 27# (1 l-69 or lOl-699)#
Extension Numbers (assigning to ports): FF3 (ExtPortj# l# (ExtNo.)#
Notes
Programming Restrictions. A telephone must be plugged into the Second
Attendant port before its extension number can be programmed or cleared.
Also, use another phone to program or clear its extension number (e.g., you
can’t use ext. 101’s phone to program ext. 101 as the Second Attendant
position).
Limitations on Assigning Attendant Phones. It is recommended that you
leave the Second Attendant at the default assignment (extension 11 or lOl>,
so that a DSS/BLF console can be used. System default for the Primary
Attendant phone is extension 10 or 100, assigned to port 1 -- and Primary
Attendant assignments cannot be changed.
DBS-70-400
DBS Manual - Issued 8/l/95
Technical Manuals Online! - http://www.tech-man.com
Page 1-31
Chapter 1. System Programming (FFl)
Section 400-Programming
Third Attendant Position
Sofhuare Version: CPC-Ail (all versions) and CPC-8 Version 2.0 or higher
Address: FFl 2# l# 25# (11-69 or 101-699)#
Description
This address assigns an extension number as the Third Attendant position.
By default, no extension is assigned as the Third Attendant.
When all line appearances at the Primary Attendant are busy, calls will
transfer in sequence to the Second, Third, and Fourth attendants. If all line
appearances are busy on all Attendants, calls will transfer to the Attendant
Transfer Extension (if assigned).
Programming
To assign a Third Attendant position . . .
FFl 2# 1# 25# (11-69 or 101 to 699)#
t
Extension Number
(default: no Third Attendant assigned)
To clear the Third Attendant position . . .
FFl 2# l# 25# CONF ON/OFF
Related Programming
Extension Number Digits: FFl 2# l# 12# (0 or l)##
Second Attendant Position: FF 1 2# l# 24# (1 l-69 or lOl-699)#
Fourth Attendant Position: FFl 2#, l# 26# (11-69 or lOl-699)#
Attendant Transfer Extension: FFI 2# l# 27# (11-69 or lOl-699)#
Extension Numbers (assigning to ports): FF3 (ExtPort)# l# (ExtNo.)#
Notes
Programming Restrictions. A telephone must be plugged into the Third
Attendant port before its extension number can be programmed or cleared.
Also, use another phone to program or clear its extension number (e.g., you
can’t use ext. 102’s phone to program ext. 102 as the Third Attendant
I position).
Limitation on Assigning the Third Attendant. The DBS system wili not
allow you to assign extension 10 or 100 as the Third Attendant position. This
is the system default for the Primary Attendant phone, which cannot be
changed.
Page 1-32
DBS Manual - Issued 8/l/95
Technical Manuals Online! - http://www.tech-man.com
DBS-70-400
Chapter 1. System Programming (FFl)
Section 400-Programming
Fourth Attendant Position
Software Version: CPC-All (all versions) and CPC-B Version 2.0 or higher
Address: FFl 2# 1# 26# (11-69 or 10%699)#
Description
This address assigns an extension number as the Fourth Attendant position.
By default, no extension is assigned as the Fourth Attendant.
When all line appearances at the Primary Attendant are busy, calls will
transfer in sequence to the Second, Third, and Fourth Attendants. If all line
appearances are busy on all Attendants, calls will transfer to the Attendant
Transfer Extension (if assigned).
Programming
To assign a Fourth Attendant position . . .
FFl 2# I# 26# (11-69 or 101 to 699)#
f
Extension Number
(default: no Fourth Attendant assigned)
To clear the Fourth Attendant position . . .
FFl 2# l# 26# CONF ON/OFF
Related Programming
Extension Number Digits: FFl 2# l# 12# (0 or l)#
Second Attendant Position: FFl 2# 1# 24## (1 l-69 or lOl-699)#
Third Attendant Position: FFl 2# l# 25# (11-69 or 101-699)#
Attendant Transfer Extension: FFl 2# l# 27# (11-69 or lOl-699)#
Extension Numbers (assigning to ports): FF3 (ExtPort)# l# (ExtNo.)#
Notes
Programming Restrictions. A telephone must be plugged into the Fourth
Attendant port before its extension number can be programmed or cleared.
Also, use another phone to program or clear its extension number (e.g., you
can’t use ext. 103’s phone to program ext. 103 as the Fourth Attendant
position).
Limitation on Assigning the Fourth Attendant. The DBS system will not
allow you to assign extension 10 or 100 as the Fourth Attendant position.
This is the system default for the Primary Attendant phone, which cannot be
changed.
DBS-70-400
DBS Manual - Issued 8/l/95
Technical Manuals Online! - http://www.tech-man.com
Page l-33
Section 400-Programming
Chapter 1. System Programming (FFI)
Attendant Transfer Extension
Sofhnrare Version: CPC-All (all versions) and CPC-B Version 2.09 or higher
FFl 2# 1# 27# (11-69 or lOl-699)#
Address:
Description
If all line appearances are busy on all Attendants (Primary, Second, Third and
Fourth), calls will transfer to the extension assigned in this address.
Programming
To assign an Attendant Transfer Extension . . .
FFl 2# l# 27# (11-69 or 10%699)#
t
Extension Number
(default: no Transfer Extension assigned)
To clear the Attendant Tra.nsfer Extension . . .
I
Notes
FFl 2# I# 27# CONF ON/OFF
I
Pilot Number Restriction. The overflow position must be an installed
extension -- it cannot be a hunt group pilot number.
Page 1-34
DBS Manual - Issued 8/l/95
Technical Manuals Online! - http://www.tech-man.com
DBS-70-400
Chapter 1. System Programming (FFi j
Section 400-Programming
Attendant Override
Software Version: CPC-Ail (all versions) and CPC-B Version 2.09 or higher
Address: FFl 2# l# 28# (0 or l)#
Description
Use this address to enable or disable the Attendant Override feature. which
allows an Attendant phone to “barge into” a trunk or intercom call in progress
on any extension -- even if the extension has been programmed to block
barge-ins. By default, Attendant Override is enabled.
When a barge-in occurs, all three parties can hear and talk to each other.
Programming
FFl 2# l# 28# (0 or l)#
O=Disables Attendant Override.
l=Enables Attendant Override.
Related Programming
klert Tone for Busy Override & OHVA: FFl 2# l# 178 (0 or l)#
DBS-70-400
DBS Manual - Issued 8/l/95
Technical Manuals Online! - http://www.tech-man.com
.
Page l-35
Chapter 1. System Programming (FFI)
Section 400-Programming
Attendant LED Alarm Indication
Software Version: CPC-B Versions 2.09 to 4.0 (requires Attendant Feature Package)
Address: FFl 2# l# 29# (0 or l)#
Description
Use this address to allow or disallow the Alarm feature (LED lights to
indicate an alarm condition) to be assigned to an FF key on an Attendant
phone. By default, the Alarm feature can be assigned.
NOTE: The Attendant Feature Package (AFP) was discontinued in CPC-B
Version 5.0.
Programming
I
FFI 2# 1# 29# (0 or I)#
f
O=Alarm feature cannot be assigned to Attendant FF key.
I=Alarm feature can be assigned to Attendant FF key.
Related Programming
AFP Key Assignn tents: FF5 ( 1 W 152)# ( 1-72)# (FF 12 4)#
Notes
InstaUing AFZ? Installation of the AFP software requires the replacement of
EPROM Chip 1 on the CPC-B card with an AFP chip. Make sure the new
chip is installed in the proper direction. See Technote 4 (September 1991) for
complete infomlation.
Page l-36
DBS Manual - Issued 8/l/95
Technical Manuals Online! - http://www.tech-man.com
DBS-70-400
Chapter 1. System Programming (FFl)
Section 400-Programming
Extension (BLF) Delayed Ring
Software Version: CPC-All (all versions) and CPC-6 Version 2.0 or higher
Address: FFI 2# l# 30# (0 or l)#
Description
Use this address to enable or disable Delayed Ringing for intercom calls. By
default, Extension (BLF) Delayed Ringing is disabled.
Delayed Ringing is a call-forwarding feature for unanswered calls -- if an
incoming call is not answered at one extension, the system will send the call
to another extension.
NOTE: The extension to which the call is forwarded must have a DSS/BLF
key.
Programming
FFl 2# 1# 30# (0 or l)#
t
O=Extension Delayed Ringing is disabled.
l=Extension Delayed Ringing is enabled.
Related Programming
Extension Delayed Ring Table: FF4 8# (ExtPort)# (ExtPort)# (0 or l)#
Extension Delayed Ring Timer (CPC-B 2.0 or higher): FFl 3# 27# (0-15)#
Call Forward-No Answer Timer (CPC-B prior to 2.0): FFl 3# 19# (0-lS)#
DBS-70-400
DBS Manual - Issued 8/l/95
Technical Manuals Online! - http://www.tech-man.com
Page l-37
Chapter 1. System Programming (FFl)
Section 400-Programming
Analog Transfer Ring Pattern
Software Version: CPC-All (all versions) and CPC-B Version 2.11 or higher
Address: FFl 2# 1# 31# (016)#
Description
Use this address to choose a distinctive ringing pattern for calls transferred to
analog SLT phones. This setting is typically used for calls transferred to a
modem, or for SLT phones requiring distinctive ringing for transferred calls,
There are 7 different patterns (numbered O-6) to choose from. The pattern for
each setting depends on the analog connection -* an SLT phone connected directly to an AEC card;
an SLT phone connected to an OPX Adapter; or
an SLT phone connected to an SLT-A (6port Adapter).
l
l
Programming
FFl 2# I# 31# (0-6)#
Transfer Ring Pattern setting
(see table below)
Table 1-2. Analog Transfer Ring Patterns (vary depending on analog connection)
I
Ring Pattern (no. of seconds on/off) for SLT phones connected to . . .
I
I
OPX Adapter
AEC Card
SLT Adapter (SLT-A)
Address
Setting
0
son/40ff
5on135off
25 on I .25 off I 25 on I 3.5 off
1
lon/.25off/lon/.25off/
3onlloff
.25 on I 3.5 off
2
3
4
5
6
lon/.25off(lon/3off
2onl2off
1 on 13.5 off
1 on/2 off
I on/3 off
I
1
onl2off
I lonl3off
I
I 1 on/ 3.5 off
I lonl7off
1 onl6off
1 onl5off
.50nl7 off
1 onl4offll onl7off
1 onl7off
.25 on I .25 off / .25 on I 7 off
Related Programming
Analog Transfer Ring Pattern (CPC-A 3.21 or higher): FFI 2# 1# 22# (0-6)#
Terminal Type: FF3 (ExtPort)# 2# (Type)#
Extension Ring Pattern: FF3 (ExtPort)# 39# (O-9)#
Page l-38
DBS Manual - Issued 811195
Technical Manuals Online! - http://www.tech-man.com
.
DBS-70-400
Section 400-Programming
Chapter 1. System Programming (FFl)
Multiple DID/DNIS
Software Version: CPC-B Version 4.0 or higher
Address: FFl 2# l# 32# (0 or l)#
Description
Use this address to enable or disable Multiple DID for analog trunks, or
Multiple DID and DNIS for Tl trunks. By default. Multiple DID/DNIS is
disabled.
With Multiple DID/DNIS enabled, one DID or DNIS number can be assigned
to multiple extensions, which will simultaneously ring when an outside caller
dials the DID or DNIS number.
l
l
DID stands for “Direct Inward Dialing.” DID can be used only in systems
using analog trunks exclusively (no other types of trunks are used in the
system). Up to 500 DID numbers can be assigned to extension numbers in
FFl 8# 3# (0000-9999)# (ExtNo.)#.
DNIS stands for “Dialed Number Identification Service.” DNIS is
available only with the Tl Interface. You can use DID and DNIS
simultaneously in a Tl system. Up to 500 DNIS numbers can be assigned
to extension numbers in FFl 8# 4# 7# (0000-9999)# (lo-69 or lOO-699)#,
in addition to the 500 DID numbers allowed.
Programming
FFl 2# l# 32# (0 or l)#
$
O=Disabies Multiple DID/DNIS ringing.
l=Enables Multiple DID/DNIS ringing.
Related Programming
Inbound DID Dial Numbers: FFl 8# 3# (0000-9999)# (loo-699)##
DID/DNIS (enabling trunks for): FFl 8# 4# 6# (Trunk)# 2# (0-2)#
DNIS Number Setting: FFl 8# 4# 7# (0000-9999)# (lo-69 or 100-699)#
DID Flexible Ringing Assignments: FFl 8# 5# (DIDNo.)# (ExtNo.)#
(000000- 11111 l>#
DNIS Flexible Ringing Assignments: FFl 8# 6# (DNISNo.)# (ExtNo.)#
(000000-llllll)#
Extension Numbers (assigning to ports): FF3 (ExtPort)# l# (ExtNo.)#
DES-70-400
DBS Manual - Issued 8/l/95
Technical Manuals Online! - http://www.tech-man.com
Page 1-39
Chapter 1. System Programming (FFl)
Notes
Section 400-Programming
Restrictiun Far CPC-B Version 3.1. This address is also present in CPC-B
Version 3.1; however, it only controls Multiple DID (DMS cannot be used
with this version).
DID Hardware and Power Requirements. The DID trunk card is required:
each card provides 8 ports. The card requires dial-pulse dialing and an
external, -48V power supply. See Section 300-Installation for cabling
instructions.
DZDIDNZS Digit Length Requirement. The DBS only supports 4-digit DID/
DMS numbers.
Central Oj’j?ce Requirement. When the CO sends a DID/DMS call to the
DBS, it fist receives a wink from the DBS before sending the digits. Once
the wink is received, the CO should wait at least 200 ms before sending the
digits.
Trunk Requirement. Individual trunks must be enabled for DID or DMS
(see FP 1 8# 4# 6# Trunk# 2#).
Simultaneous Ringing. If Multiple DID/DNIS is enabled, all extensions
assigned the same DID/DNTS number will ring for the incoming DlD/DMS
call. If you later disable Multiple DID/DNIS, only the extension at the
lowest-numbered’port wi!l ring for the DID/DMS call.
Call Forwarding Interaction.. If Multiple DID/DMS is enabled, and the
DID/DXIS extensions are programmed to call-forward to different
extensions. the simultaneous ringing will also apply to the call-forward
destination extensions. In other words, all call-forward paths will be
followed simultaneously for the same DID/DNIS call, until someone picks it
up. If you later disable Multiple DlD/DNIS, only the call-forwarding path
assigned to the extension at the lowest-numbered port will be followed.
Page l-40
DBS Manual - issued 8/l/95
Technical Manuals Online! - http://www.tech-man.com
DBS-70-400
Chapter 1. System Programming (FFI)
Section 400~Programming
Page Duration
Software Version: CPC-All (all versions) and CPC-B Version 3.1 or higher
FFI 2# l# 33# (0 or l)#
Address:
Description
This address determines whether the DBS system will automatically close the
paging circuit 60 seconds after a page is initiated. By default, the paging
circuit is left open indefinitely, until the paging person closes the circuit by
hanging up.
Programming
O=The page circuit remains open indefinitely.
l=The paging circuit remains open for 60 seconds before
the system closes it.
DBS-70-400
DBS Manual - Issued 8/l/95
Technical Manuals Online! - http://www.tech-man.com
Page 1-41
Section 400-Programming
Chapter 1. System Programming (ITI)
SLT DISA Ring Pattern
Software Version: CPC-All (all versions) and CPC-B Version 3.1 or higher
Address: FFl 2# l# 34# (0 or l)#
Description
Use this address to specify a distinctive ring pattern for DISA calls on SLT
phones, or follow the Analog Transfer Ring Pattern setting. By default, the
pattern is 1 second on / 3 seconds off.
Programming
FFl 2# 1# 34# (0 or l)#
1
kl second on / 3 seconds off.
i=Same as the Analog Transfer Ring Pattern.
Related Programming
Analog Transfer Ring Pattern
Page 1-42
(CPC-AI1 and CPC-B):
DBS Manual - issued 8/l/95
Technical Manuals Online! - http://www.tech-man.com
FFl 2# l# 31# (0-6)#
DBS-70-400
3wau11
b11dp3
4uu-rluylatitiwlg
I
. 3yaica11 riuyiaii!~iiiiiy [t-r I;
AEC Disconnect Signal Duration
Software Version: CPC-All (all versions) and CPC-B Version 5.0 or higher
Address: FFl 2# 1# 35# (0-15)#
Description
Use this address to set the duration of a positive disconnect signal sent from
analog extension ports (VB-43621A version of the AEC card). Sending this
signal allows quick disconnect from third-party voice mail systems. By
default, no disconnect signal is sent.
This address applies to CPC-AI1 and CPC-B. The AEC Disconnect Signal
Duration address for CPC-A (Version 3.3 or higher) is FFl 2# l# 23# (0-15)#.
The sending of the AEC disconnect signal can be enabled or disabled on
individual extensions using FF3 (ExtPort)# 46#.
Programming
I
FFl 2# l# 35# (O-1 5)#
t
AEC Disconnect Signal Duration setting
Default: 0 (no signal sent)
(see table below)
Table 1-3. AEC Disconnect Signal Duration values
Setting
0
1
I
2
3
4
5
6
7
Value
No disconnect signal sent
I 100 ms
200 ms
300 ms
400 ms
500 ms
600 ms
700 ms
I 800 ms
I
9
11
12
13
14
15
DBS-70-400
1 900 ms
1 1 second
1.5 seconds
2 seconds
2.5 seconds
3 seconds
3.5 seconds
DBS Manual - Issued 8/l/95
Technical Manuals Online! - http://www.tech-man.com
Page l-43
Chapter 1. System Programming (FFl)
Section 400-Programming
DIDlDNlS to a Voice Mailbox
Software Version: CPC-8 Version 6.0 or higher
Address: FFl 2# l# 36# (O! 1 or 2)#
Description
This address determines whether (and how many) final digits of a DlD/DNTS
phone number are transmitted to Voice Mail, in cases where the DID/DMS
trunk is assigned to ring directly to Voice Mail (not to a DBS extension
phone). This address allows DWDNIS calls to be routed to a Voice Mailbox
system that is not connected to a physical extension.
To implement this feature, assign the DID/DNIS trunks to ring at the Voice
Mail system (using FF4 ring assignment addresses). Once Voice Mail
answers, the DBS sends a DID/DMS Answer Code that signals the Voice
Mail system to open the appropriate mailbox, plus the final DID/DNIS digits
(if any) specified in this address.
Programming
I
FFl 2# 1# 36# (0,l or2)#
t
O=No DID/DNIS digits are transmitted (only the Answer Code).
l=Answer Code, then final 4 DID/DMS digits are transmitted.
2=Answer Code, then final 3 DBYDMS digits are transmitted.
Related Programming
DBXDMS Answer Code: FFl 2# l# 37# (NNNNNN)#
DlD/DMS (enabling trunks for): FFl 8# 4## 6# (Trunk)# 2# (0-2)#
Inbound DID Dial Numbers: FFl 8# 3# (0000-9999)# (loo-699)#
DMS Number Setting: FFl 8# 4# 7# (0000-9999)# (lo-69 or lOO-699)#
Terminal Type: FF3 (ExtPort)# 2# (Type)#
Ringing Assignments (trunks to extensions): FF4 addresses
Notes
DIDIDNIS Digit Transmission. The DID/DNTS digits are sent only to ports
that are assigned as Voice Mail.
Voice Mail Ports and Hunt Groups. The DIDPMS digits can be sent to a
specific Voice Mail port or a Voice Mail hunt group.
Second Hunt Group. If the DID/DNIS call rings into a hunt group that is
programmed to transfer calls to a second hunt group, the DtD/DMS call will
not be transferred to the second hunt group.
.
Page 1-44
DBS Manual - Issued 8/l/95
Technical Manuals Online! - http://www.tech-man.com
DBS-70-400
Third-Party Voice Mail. This feature can be used with Panasonic’s Voice
Mail system or with third-party Voice Mail systems. If the feature is used
with third-party Voice Mail systems, the Voice Mail can be connected through
analog extension ports or OPX ports.
Call Forward ID Code for DIDfDNIS Calls To An Extension. If a DIDI
DNIS call is assigned to ring an extension, and the extension is programmed
to forward to Voice Mail, only the Call Forward ID Code will be transmitted
to Voice Mail (the DID/DNIS digits will not).
DZDfDNZS Data Transmission. The DID/DNIS digits are transmitted over
the API link using the existing API key code packet.
DBS-70-400
DBS Manual - issued 8/l/95
Technical Manuals Online! - http://www.tech-man.com
Page l-45
DID/DNIS Answer Code
Software Version: CPC-6 Version 6.0 or higher
Address: FFl 2# l# 37# (Code)#
Description
Use this address to specify a DID/DNIS Answer Code. The Answer Code is
used for routing DID/DNIS calls to a Voice Mailbox system that is not
connected to a physical extension.
To implement this feature, assign DID/DNIS trunks to ring directly to the
Voice Mail system using FF4 ring assignment addresses. Once Voice Mail
answers, the DBS sends the DID/DNIS Answer Code, which signals the
Voice Mail system to open the appropriate mailbox.
Programming
I
FF1 2# 1# 37# (NNNNNN)#
t
DID/DNIS Answer Code
(up to 6 characters)
Valid Entries: O-9, *, #, or REDIAL (pause)
Related Programming
DID/DMS to a Voice Mailbox: FFl 2# l# 36# (0,l or 2)#
DID/DNIS (enabling trunks for): FFl 8# 4# 6## (Trunk)# 2# (0-2)##
Inbound DID Dial Numbers: FFl 8# 3# (0000-9999)# (loo-699)##
DNIS Number Setting: FFl 8# 4# 7# (OOOO-9999)## (lo-69 or lOO-699)##
Terminal Type: FF3 (ExtPort)# 2# (Type)#
Ringing Assignments (trunks to extensions): FF4 addresses
Notes
Assigning the DIDIDNIS Answer Code When Not In Programming
Mode. The DlD/DNIS Answer Code may be entered from an Attendant
phone, or from a key phone where the programming access code has been
entered. Press PROG ##!I5 NNNNNN HOLD -- where “NNNNNN” is the Answer
Code of up to 6 characters, including O-9, *, #, or REDLAL (for “pause”).
DIDIDNIS Digit Transmission. The DID/DNIS digits are sent only to ports
that are assigned as Voice Mail.
Page 1-46
DBS Manual - Issued 8/i/95
Technical Manuals Online! - http://www.tech-man.com
DBS-70-400
Voice Mail Ports and Hunt Groups. The DIDIDNIS digits can be sent to a
specific Voice Mail porr or a Voice Mail hunt group.
Second Hunt Group. If the DID/DNIS call rings into a hum group that is
programmed to transfer calls to a second hunt group, the DID/DNTS call will
not be transferred to the second hunt group.
Third-Party Voice Mail. This feature can be used with Panasonic’s Voice
Mail system or with third-party Voice Mail systems. If the feature is used
with third-party Voice Mail systems, the Voice Mail can be connected through
analog extension ports or OPX ports.
Call Forward ID Code for DZDIDNZS Calls To An Extension. Lf a DID/
DNIS call is assigned to ring an extension, and the extension is programmed
to forward to Voice Mail, only the Call Forward ID Code will be transmitted
to Voice Mail (the DID/DNIS digits will not).
DZDIDNIS Data Transmission. The DIDPNIS digits are transmitted over
the API link using the existing API key code packet.
DBS-70-400
DBS Manual - Issued 8/l/95
Technical Manuals Online! - http://www.tech-man.com
Page l-47
Sectlon 400~Programming
Chapter 1. System PrOgrammIng (Wl )
LCD Timer for Caller ID
Software Version: CPC-All and CPC-B, Version 6.1 or higher
Address: FFl 2# l# 38# (0,l or 2)#
Description
The LCD Timer determines how long the DBS waits before displaying call
duration timing on the phone’s LCD. This Timer allows Caller ID
information (if available) to appear before the call duration timing is
displayed.
For example, if the LCD Timer is set to 5 seconds (default), call duration
timing will start displaying on the phone’s LCD 5 seconds after an outgoing
number is dialed, or 5 seconds after an incoming call is answered.
Programming
FFl 2# l# 38# (0,l or 2)#
0=5 seconds
1= 16 seconds
2=30 seconds
Related Programming
Call Duration Display: FFl 2# l# l# (0 or l)##
SMDR Display Start Timer for CO Calls: FFl 2# l# 2# (0, 1 or 2)#
Notes
SMDR Interaction. The LCD Timer only affects the display of call duration.
The system begins the actual SMDR recording of the call according to the
SMDR Start Timer address (FFl 2# l# 2#). In order for call duration to be
displayed, the LCD Timer has to expire after the SMDR Start Timer -- which
means the LCD Timer setting must be equal to or greater than the SMDR
Start Timer.
Caller ID Interaction. The LCD ‘Timer setting will be the actual length of
time that Caller ID information is displayed before the LCD changes to call
duration timing. However, the Timer also controls when call duration display
begins for all types of trunk calls, not just Caller ID calls.
Page 1-48
DBS Manual - issued 8/l/95
Technical Manuals Online! - http://www.tech-man.com
DBS-70-400
Internal Hold Tone
Software Version: CPC-All and CPC-B, Version 7.0 or higher
Address: FF1 2# l# 39# (0 or l)#
Description
Use this address to enable or disable Internal Hold Tone, which is a doublebeep heard every 7 seconds by a caller on hold.
Programming
FFl 2# l# 39# (0 or I)#
&Disabled (no Internal Hold Tone)
l=Enabled (Internal Hold Tone heard)
Notes
MOH Override. Internal Hold Tone (if enabled) will override any MOH
(Music-On-Hold) sound source installed.
DBS-70-400
DBS Manual - Issued 8/l/95
\
Technical Manuals Online! - http://www.tech-man.com
Page l-49
Lnapter 1. System Programmtng (FFl)
Section 400-Programming
Door Opener Access Code Required
Software Version: CPC-All and CPC-8, Version 7.0 or higher
Address: FFl 2# l# 40# (0 or l)#
Description
This address determines whether a Door Opener Access Code must be
entered on an extension to unlock the Door Box. This applies to Door Boxes
connected to digital extension ports (not trunk ports).
Programming
I
FFl 2# l# 40# (0 or l)#
t
O=Not required
1=Required
Related Programming
Door Phone Extensions: FFl 2# 9# (l-4)# l# (ExtPort)##
Door Opener Access Code: FFl 2# 9# (l-4)# 3# (0000-9999)#
Notes
Unlocking the Door Box During a Door Phone Call. If this address is set to
“1” (Required), an extension user answering a door phone call would unlock
the door by pressing #3 NNNN * (where NNNN=Access Code). If set to
“0” (Not required), the extension user answering the door phone call would
simply press #3*.
Unlocking the Door Box From Another Extension. The door can also be
unlocked from any other extension not engaged in a door phone call. If this
address is set to “1” (Required), dial ON/OFF #3 XXX NNNN * on any
extension (where XXX=Door Box extension number, and NNNN=Access
Code) to unlock the door. If set to “0” (Not required), dial ON/OFF #3
XXX * to unlock the door.
Hardware Requirement. The Door Opener Access Code applies to door
phone devices connected to the VB-437 11 Door Phone Adaptor, which
connects the Door Box to a digital extension port Door Boxes connected to
trunk ports use another Adaptor (VB-43701), and do not utilize the Access
Code.
Page l-50
DBS Manual - Issued 8/l/95
Technical Manuals Online! - http://www.tech-man.com
DBS-70-400
Chapter 1. System Programming (FFl j
Section 400-Programming
API Port Type
Software Version: CPC-All and CPC-8, Version 7.0 or higher
Address: FFl 2# 1# (41 or 42)# l# (0 or l)#
Description
Use this address to configure the appropriate API port for TSAPI protocol.
Only one API port should be configured for TSAPI.
Programming
FFI 2# 1# (41 or 42)# 1# (0 or l)#
+
API Port Number:
41=API Port 1
42=API Port 2
-r
Port Type:
O=Standard API protocol
l=TSAPIprotocol
Related Programming
API Baud Rate: FFl 2# I# (41 or 42)# 2# (0 or l)#
DBS-70-400
DBS Manual - Issued 8/l/95
Technical Manuals Online! - http://www.tech-man.com
Page l-51
section 400~Programming
Chapter 1. system rrogrammlng (t t 1)
API Baud Rate
Software Version: CPC-Ail and CPC-B, Version 7.0 or higher
Address: FFl 2# 1# (41 or 42)# 2# (0 or l)#
Description
The baud rate for the TSAPI port can be set to either 9600 or 19200 bps.
Programming
FFl 2# 1# (41 or 42)# 2# (0 qr l)#
API Port Number:
41=API Port 1
42=API Port 2
Baud Rate:
0=9600 bps
1=19200 bps
Related Programming
API Port Type: FFl 2# l# (41 or 42)# 1# (0 or l)#
Notes
Using Both API Ports. If both API ports are being used, both baud rates
must be set to 9600 bps.
,
Page l-52
DBS Manual - Issued 8/l/95
Technical Manuals Online! - http://www.tech-man.com
DBS-70-400
3eGu011 4uu-I- I uyl
w~apiai
al I I I I Ill ly
I.
~y3~c111 rluyiaiiiiiwly it-r 11
Serial Port Parameters (TTY Settings)
Parity Check
Software Version: All Versions
Address: FFl 2# 2# l# (0 or l)#
Dbscription
This address determines whether the DBS checks parity over serial port CN6.
By default, parity checking is turned on.
If parity checking is activated, select the parity count -- “Even” or “Odd” -- in
FF12# 2# 2#.
Serial Port CN6 is normally used for SMDR.
Programming
.
FFl 2# 2# 1# (0 qr l)#
O=Turns off the parity check.
l=Turns on the parity check.
Related Programming
Odd/Even Parity: FFl 2# 2# 2# (0 or l)#
Notes
DBS-70-400
Checking Communications Parameters. If you later change this address
value, be sure to check all Serial Port addresses -- FF12# 2# l# thru 9# -- to
make sure they are set properly.
DBS Manual - Issued 8/l/95
Technical Manuals Online! - http://www.tech-man.com
Page l-53
Gnapter 1. system rrogrammtng p-1 )
sectron 400~Programming
Odd/Even Parity
Software Version: All Versions
Address: FFl 2# 2# 2# (0 or l)#
Description
If parity checking for Serial Port CN6 was activated in FF12# 2# l#, this
address (Odd/Even Parity) determines whether the check is based on an even
count or an odd count. By default, the parity count is even.
Programming FFl 2# 2# 2# (0 or l)#
t
O=Odd parity.
l=E ven parity.
Notes
Page 1-54
Checking Communications Parameters. If you later change this address
value, be sure to check all Serial Port addresses -- FF12# 2# l# thru 9# -- to
make sure they are set properly.
DBS Manual - Issued 8/l/95
Technical Manuals Online! - http://www.tech-man.com
DBS-70-400
Baud Rate
Software Version: All Versions
Address:
FFl 2# 2# 3# (114)#
Description
Use this address to set data transmission speed (baud rate) between Serial
Port CN6 and the peripheral equipment attached to it. By default, baud rate is
set at 9600 bits per second.
Programming
I
I
FFl 2# 2# 3# (3;4)#
1=300 bps
2=1200 bps
3-4800 bps
4=9600 bps
Notes
Checking Communications Parameters. If you later change this address
value, be sure to check all Serial Port addresses -- FFl 2# 2# I# thru 9# -- to
make sure they are set properly.
DBS-70-400
DBS Manual - Issued 8/l/95
Technical Manuals Online! - http://www.tech-man.com
Page 1-55
Stop Bit Length
Software Version: All Versions
Address: FFl 2# 2# 4# (103)#
Description
This address sets the length of the stop-bit parameter for transmitted data over
Serial Port CN6. By default, the stop bit length is set to 1 bit.
Programming
FFl 2# 2# 4# (I- 3)#
r
l=l bit
2-1.5 b i t s
3=2 bits
Notes
Page 1-56
Checking Communications Parameters. If you later change this address
value, be sure to check all Serial Port addresses -- FFl 2# 2# l# thru 9# -- to
make sure they are set properly.
DBS Manual - issued 8/l/95
Technical Manuals Online! - http://www.tech-man.com
DBS-70-400
biiapiei I. r>ysittiii
rruyrammlrig (rf
I
Data Length
Software Version: All Versions
Address: FFl 2# 2# 5# (3 or 4)#
Description
This address sets the length of the transmitted data string over Serial Port
CN6. By default, data length is set to 8 bits.
Programming
FFl 2# 2# 5# (3 or 4)#
t
3=7 bits
44 bits
Notes
Checking Communications Parameters. If you later change this address
value, be sure to check all Serial Port addresses -- FFl 2# 2# 1# thru 9# -- to
make sure they are set properly.
DBS-70-400
DBS Manual - Issued 8/l/95
Technical Manuals Online! - http://www.tech-man.com
Page 1-57
j
3twu1
I
4uu-rrogrammlng
SMDR Printing Mode 1: Outbound and Inbound
Software Version: All Versions
Address: FFl 2# 2# 6# (0 or l)#
Description
The SMDR data sent to Serial Port CN6 can be programmed to include both
outbound and inbound calls, or it can be limited to outbound calls only. By
default, both outbound and inbound calls are recorded.
Programming
FFl 2# 2# 6# (0 or 1 )#
t
O=Include outbound calls only.
Hnclude both inbound and outbound calls.
a
Notes
Bus Monitor Mode Interaction. If the DBS is switched to Bus Monitor
mode for troubleshooting, the SMDR mode must be reactivated to resume
SMDR output. The SMDR mode can be reactivated from any Attendant
phone by pressing ON/OFF - #93 - ON/OFF.
Page 1-58
DBS Manual - Issued 8/l/95
Technical Manuals Online! - http://www.tech-man.com
DBS-70-400
SMDR Printing Mode 2: Long-Distance
and Local Calls
-
Software Version: fii Versions
Address: FFl 2# 2# 7# (0 or l)#
Description
The SMDR data sent to Serial Port CNh can be pro&rarnmed to include both
local and long-distance calls. or it can be limited to !ong-distance calls only.
By default, both local and long-distance calls are included.
Programming .
FFl 2# 2# 7# (0 or l)#
U=Tnclude long-distance calls only.
Mnclude local and long-distance calls.
Notes
DBS-70-400
Bus Monitor Mode Interaction. If the DBS is switched to Bus Monitor
mode for troubleshooting, the SMDR mode must be reactivated to resume
SMDR output. The SMDR mode can be reactivated from any Attendant
phone by pressing ON/OFF - #93 - ON/OFF.
DBS Manual - issued 8/l/95
Technical Manuals Online! - http://www.tech-man.com
Page 1-59
Chapter 1. System Programming (FFl)
Section 400-Programming
SMDR Printing Mode 3: Header Title
Software Version: All Versions
FFl 2# 2# 8# (0 or l)#
Address:
Description
The SMDR data sent to Serial Port CN6 can be programmed to include a
header title (inserted every 60 lines on the SMDR report); or the header title
can be excluded from the report. By default, the header title is excluded.
The header title identifies the SMDR information in each column on the
report -- “Time,” “Duration,” “COW, etc.
Programming
I
FFl 2# 2# 8# (0 or l)#
t
&Do not include the header title.
l=Include the header title.
Notes
Bus Monitor Mode Interaction. If the DBS is switched to Bus Monitor
mode for troubleshooting, the SMDR mode must be reactivated to resume
SMDR output, The SMDR mode can be reactivated from any Attendant
phone by pressing ON/OFF - #93 - ON/OFF.
Page l-60
DBS Manual - Issued 8/l/95
Technical Manuals Online! - http://www.tech-man.com
DBS-70-400
briaprer I. 3ysrem rrogrammlng (t-t1 )
wcnon 4uu-rwgramming
Serial Port Flow Control (XON / XOFF)
Software Version: All Versions
Address:
FFl 2# 2# 9# (0 or l)#
Description
If “XON/XOFF” is activated in this address, the DBS will stop the flow of
data when the SMDR device’s memory buffer becomes full, and resume the
flow when the buffer empties.
“XON/XOFF” should be deactivated (default setting) if a flow control
mechanism is present elsewhere in the interface (i.e., in the printer, or RTS
and CTS lines). A flow control mechanism should always be present in order
to prevent data from being lost during transmission.
Programming
FFl 2# 2# 9# (0 0’ I)#
O=DBS does not use ‘6XON/XOFF’
(flow control is present elsewhere).
l=DBS uses “XON/XOFF’.
’ Notes
DBS-70-400
DBS Buffer Size. The size of the DBS buffer for SMDR is 8 kB. This is the
maximum amount of data that the system can hold while the SMDR device is
emptying its buffer.
DBS Manual - Issued 8/l/95
Technical Manuals Online! - http://www.tech-man.com
Page 1-61
RAI Baud Rate
Software Version: CPC-All (all versions); CPC-B Version 1.0 or higher
Address: FFl 2# 2# lO# (0 or l)#
Description
The baud rate used for the DBS’s internal RAI modem can be set to 300 or
1200 bps. By default, 300 bps is used for remote programming.
Programming
FFl 2# 2# lO# (0 or l)#
f
0=300 bps
1=1200 bus
Related Programming
Remote Progamming ID Code: FFl 4# (0000-9999)#
Notes
Modem Card Requirement for Remote Programming. Remote
programming is provided through a modem card installed on the SCC card.
Two versions of the Remote Administration Interface (RAI) modem card are
available: I&AI-A and RAI-B. The following table shows the transmission
rate of each card, along with the SCC version with which it can be used:
Table 14. RAI Modem Card Compatibility
RAI Version/Part No.
RAI-A (VB-43706)
/ RAI-B (VB-43707)
Transmission Rate
300 bps
1 300 or 1200 bps
SCC Compatibility
SCC-A or SCC-B
1 SCC-B only
Restrictions for Two-Cabinet Systems Using Voice Mail In dual-cabinet
DES systems that have a Voice Mail system connected to an analog extension
port, the RAI card’s baud rate must be set to 300 bps. See Technote 3 (April
1991) for complete information.
RAI Data Communications Parameters. When using the lU1 card with
CPC-A, set the Serial Port parameters as follows:
Parity: None
Data Length: 8 bits
Stop Bit Length: 1 bit
l
l
l
In CPC-B configurations, the DBS will automatically set these parameters for
the RAI card.
Page l-62
DBS Manual - Issued 8/l/95
Technical Manuals Online! - http://www.tech-man.com
DBS-70-400
Section 400-Programming
Chapter 1. System Programming (FFl)
PBX Settings
PBX Access Code(s)
Software Version: All VersionsAddress: FFl 2# 3# (l-8)# (O-999 or O*-99*)#
Description
Use this address to program PBX Access Codes for DBS systems installed
behind a PBX or Centrex, with Toll Restriction (TRS) enabled. By default,
no PBX Access Codes are created.
Creating a PBX Access Code in this address will “activate” the PBX feature;
the DBS will recognize the fist dialed digits as the PBX Access Code
(separate from the outgoing phone number being dialed). Otherwise, the
DBS will regard the Access Code as part of the outgoing phone number.
.
The DBS can use as many as 8 different PBX Access Codes. Each Access
Code can be one, two, or three digits long.
Programming
To program a PBX Access Code . . .
FFI 2# 3# (I-8)# (O-999 or O*-99*)#
/
t
Access Code Required to Dial the PBX
(*=wildcard; press FFll to enter it)
Access Code Number
To reset PBX Access Codes to default (*** no codes created) . . .
FFl 2# 3# (l-8)# CONF ON/OFF
Access Code Number
f
Related Programming
Automatic Pause Position for PBX Access Codes: FFl 2# 3# (9- 18)# (I-3)#
Trunk Port Type: FF2 (Trunk)# lO# (1 or 2)#
DBS-70-400
DBS Manual - Issued 8/l/95
Technical Manuals Online! - http://www.tech-man.com
Page l-63
Section 400-Programming
Chapter 1. System Programming (FFl)
Automatic Pause Position For PBX Access Codes
Software Version: All Versions
Address: FFl 2# 3# (9~18)# (l-3)##
Description
Use this address to insert a pause in the PBX Access Code (and in SSD and
PSD codes) after the output of the first, second, or third digit.
The pause ensures that the PBX has time to connect to the CO before the DBS
sends the PBX any digits. If the pause is inadequate, the DBS will send digits
to the PBX too quickly, causing the call attempt to fail.
Different pause sequences can be assigned to each PBX Access Code.
Programming
To program an Automatic Pause . . .
FFl 2# 3# (9-18)# (113)#
f
First Digit of PBX Access Code
(see table below)
Address No.
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
Page l-64
t
1 =Pause after 1 st digit
2=Pause after 2nd digit
3=Pause after 3rd digit
Dialed Digit
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
0
DBS Manual - Issued 8/l/95
Technical Manuals Online! - http://www.tech-man.com
DBS-70-400
Section 400-Programming
Chapter 1. System Programming (FFl)
To clear an Automatic Pause from a PBX Access Code . . .
FFl 2# 3# (9~18)# CONF ON/OFF
t
Pirst Digit of PBX Access Code
(see table, previous page)
Programming Examples
Insetting a pause after PBX Access Code “9X” . . .
To insert a pause after the PBX access code “9X” is dialed, enter this address
(“X” represents the numbers O-9):
ml 2# 3#/ 17# 2#
This sequence will insert a pause between the “9X” and the rest of the dialed
digits. For example,
91+PAUSE +404-555-5793
Inserting a pause after PBX Access Code “8” . . .
To insert a pause after the PBX access code ?Y’ is dialed, enter this address:
FFl2#3##16#1#
This sequence will insert a pause between the “8” and the rest of the dialed
digits. For example,
8+PAUSE+404-555-5793
Related Programming
Automatic Pause Timer: FFl 3# 12# (0-15)#
Automatic Pause for PBX Line: FF2 (Trunk)# 13# (0 or l)#
DBS-70-400
DBS Manual - Issued 8/l/95
Technical Manuals Online! - http://www.tech-man.com
Page 1-65
Section 400-Programming
Chapter 1. System Programming (FF1)
External (UNA) Relay Control
Ring Patterns For UNA Terminals (M, C and B)
Software Version: All Versions
Address: FFl 2# 4# l# (0 or l)#
Description
Use this address to set the ring pattern for incoming trunk calls sent to
Universal Night Answer (UNA), where calls ring over a loudspeaker or
amplifier. By default, the ring pattern is 1 second on / 3 seconds off.
This address controls the UNA relay terminals labeled “M”, “C” and “B” on
the DBS Connector Panel. A bell or tone device can be attached to these
relay terminals to transmit incoming ring over the loudspeaker. See Section
300~Installation for more information about UNA.
Programming
FFl 2# 4# l# (0 or l)#
f
O=l second ON / 3 seconds OFF
l=Continuous ring
Related Programming CO Ring Assignments: FF4 addresses
CO Ping Cycle Detection Timer: FFl 3# 15# (0-3)#
Notes
Port Assignments for UNA Ringing (FF4). With CPC-A and CPC-AII, use
extension port 73 to assign ringing to UNA -- with CPC-B, use extension port
145.
Page l-66
DBS Manual - Issued 8/i/95
Technical Manuals Online! - http://www.tech-man.com
DBS-70-400
Chapter 1. System Programming (FIT j
Section 400-Frogramming
External Page Interface Control For Paging Groups
Software Version: All Versions
Address: FFl 2# 4## (219)# (0 or l)#
Description
Use this address to activate external paging (e.g., loudspeaker installed in
ceiling) for paging groups 00-04. Paging groups 05-07, although included in
this address, cannot be activated for external paging.
Internal paging, where a page is announced on the speakers of extension
phones belonging to the page group dided, is activated with either setting.
Proaramminrr
Odnternal paging only.
(see table below)
Address
Number (2-9)
Page
Group
2
3
00
01
4
5
02
03
6
7
8
9
04
05
06
07
l=Extemal and Internal paging
(see table below).
If External Paging is activated (“1” selected above) _.
Audio Path
Relay Contacts on DBS Connector Panel
20 activated
21 activated
Audio path is
. “M”. “B” and
22 activated
“C” contacts are
established via CN4
23 activated
activated.
(to which amplifier
is connectedj.
24 activated
Internal Paging Only (not ued with Extemai Paging)
Related Programming
Page Group Extensions: FF3 (ExtPort)# (18-25)# (0 or l)#
Notes
Puging Control. When a page is initiated, either zone paging or general
paging occurs. For external paging, this is determined by the hardware
connections to the DBS Connector Panel’s CN2 terminal block (see Section
300-Installation for instructions). For internal paging, this is determined by
progamming (assigning extensions to page groups in FF3 ExtPort# 18-25#).
Page Group 00. Pages to group 00 will be heard in all paging zones.
D BS-70-400
DBS Manual - Issued 8/l/95
Technical Manuals Online! - http://www.tech-man.com
Page l-67
Section 400-Programming
Chapter 1. System Programming (FFl)
Class of Service
Extension Class Of Service
Software Version: CPC-All (all versions); CPC-B Version 3.1 or higher
Address: FFl 2# 5# (1-8)# (l-21)# (0 or l)#
Description
This address allows you to define up to 8 different Classes of Service, by
enabling or disabling the phone features of each. Up to 21 features are
available (see table below). The definable Classes of Service are numbered
1-8. An additional Class of Service “0” automatically enables all features and
cannot be changed.
Classes of Service are assigned to extensions using FF3 ExtPort# 35# (0-8)#.
Programming 7
.
FFl 2# 5# (198)# (1121)# (0 or l)#
/(
+
t(
Class of Service
Class of Service
Features (see
table below)
&Off (disabled)
! =On (enabled)
Note: All features are
defaulted to “Off’ for
Classes of Service l-8.
Table l-5, Class of Service features
I
I
I
1
I
1
Page 1-68
Setting
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
1 Value (Feature Description)
Dial Tone On/Off (#50)
Head/Handset Exchange (#51)
BGM On/Off (#53)
1 Absence Message Set/Reset (7 1)
1 Call Forward Set/Reset (72)
I Do Not Disturb (73)
1 Station Lockout (74)
1 Park Access (75)
. Park Pick Up (76)
Meet Me Answer (77)
UNA Pickup (78)
DBS Manual - Issued 8/l/95
Technical Manuals Online! - http://www.tech-man.com
I
-1
I
I
I
I
DBS-70-400
Section 400~Programming
I
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
Chapter 1. System Programming (FFl)
Direct Pickup (79)
Group Pickup (70)
Tone/Voice Mode (1)
Message Waiting Set (2)
Busy Override (4)
call waiting (3)
Offhook Voice Announce (5)
1 Central Office Call Queuing (2)
I
forwarding for internal calls in CPC-B
Related Programming
Extension Class of Service Assignment: FF3 (ExtPort)# 3%
Notes
Interaction with Extension Class of Service Assignment. By default, every
extension is assigned to Class of Service “0” (all 21 features are enabled). To
restrict feature usage on the extension, assign another Class of Service (l-8)
to it.
Caution When Changing A Class of Service Feature Setting. If you disable
a previously enabled feature for a Class of Service, make sure the feature is
not currently being used on the extension(s) assigned that Class of Service.
Otherwise, the extension user may not be able to deactivate the feature.
For example, if you reset Feature No. 3 to “0” (disabled) while an extension
has Background Music turned on, the extension user will not be able to turn it
off. (If this occurs, re-enable Feature No. 3 for the Class of Service, then turn
Backgound Music off at the extension -- then disable Feature No. 3 again.)
Call Forward--Outside (21) Feature Expansion. Beginning with CPC-AI1
and CPC-B Version 7.0, any call (not just internal calls) can be call-forwarded
to an outside number.
DBS-70-400
DBS Manual - Issued 8/l/95
Technical Manuals Online! - http://www.tech-man.com
Page l-69
Section 400-Programming
Chapter 1. System Programming (F F1)
Account Codes
Verified Forced Account Codes
Software Version: CPC-All (all versions); CPC-8 Version 3.1 or higher
Address: FFl 2# 6# (10lOO)# l# (OOOl-9999)#
Description
Use this address to assign up to 100 four-digit verified account codes. Once
the account codes are assigned, use address FE1 2# 6# (l-lOO)# 2# (0-7)# to
assign a Toll Restriction Setting (TRS) value to the account code.
Forcing the use of account codes, as well as system verification of the entered
account code, can be enabled or disabled on individual extensions (see FF3
ExtI?ort# 5#). After verifying the entered account code, the DBS will allow
or disallow an outgoing call based on the TRS type assigned to the account
code. However, if the system does not find a match for the account code in
this address, or if the TRS type restricts it, the user cannot make the call.
Programming
To assign an Account Code . . .
FFl 2# 6# (l-l OO)# l# (OOOl -9999)#
-f
Account Code Entry Number
t
Account Code
To clear an Account Code (reset to *** default) . . .
FFl 2# W (11lOO)# l# CONF ON/OFF
f
Account Code Entry Number
Programming Examples
Assigning 1234 as Account Code 1 . . .
To assign “1234” as Account Code 1, enter this address:
FFl 2# 6# l# l# 1234#
Page l-70
DBS Manual - Issued 8/l/95
Technical Manuals Online! - http://www.tech-man.com
DBS-70-400
Section 400~Programming
Chapter 1. System Programming (FFl)
Assigning 9999 as Account Code 100 . . .
To assign “9999” as Account Code 100, enter this address:
FFl 2# 6#! low l# 9999#
Related Programming
Toll Restriction For Verified Forced Account Codes: FFl 2# 6# (l- 1 OO)##
2# (O-7)#
Forced Account Codes: FF3 (ExtPort)# 5# (0 or l)#
Toll Resttiction Settings: FF7 addresses
Notes
Forced Unverij’ied Account Codes. With CPC-AII and CPC-B versions
prior to 6.0, Unverified Account Codes can only be used on a voluntary basis
-- Forced Unverified is not available. However, beginning with Version 6.0,
Forced Unverified Account Codes can be used. See FF3 (ExtPort)## 5# (0-2)#
for more information.
TRS Interaction. The default TRS type for Verified Forced Account Codes is
“0,” which generally allows intercom calling only. Therefore, if you assign
an account code but do not assign a TRS value to it, the Account Code will
restrict outside dialing.
Assignment Restriction. “0000” cannot be assigned as an Account Code.
SMDR Format. In the SMDR report, the Account Code that was used to
access the CO trunk will appear starting in position 70 of the call record line.
DBS-70-400
DBS Manual - !ssued 8/l/95
Technical Manuals Online! - http://www.tech-man.com
Page 1-71
Section 400-Programming
Chapter 1. System Programming (FFl)
Toll Restriction For Verified Forced Account Codes
Software Version: CPC-All (all versions); CPC-B Version 3.1 or higher
Address: FFl 2# 6# (l-lOO)# 2# (017)#
Description
Use this address to assign toll restriction (TRS) types to Verified Forced
Account Codes. A caller who enters the account code will be restricted by the
TRS type assigned to the acccurzt code (not the TRS type assigned to the
exterdion).
Programming
1
FFl 2# 6# (1.f)O)# 2#‘,$
Account Code Entry Number
TRS Types O-7
Default: TRS Type 0
Related Programming
Forced Account Codes: FF3 (ExtPort)# 5# (0, 1 or 2)#
Toll Restriction Settings: FF7 addresses
Notes
TRS Interaction. The default TRS type for Verified Forced Account Codes is
“0,” which generally allows intercom calling only. Therefore, if you assign
an account code but do not assign a TRS value to it, the code will restrict
outside dialing.
Page l-72
DBS Manual - issued 8/l/95
Technical Manuals Online! - http://www.tech-man.com
DBS-70-400
Chapter 1. System Programming (FFl)
Section 400-Programming
Flexible Function Screens
Flexible Function Screen Soft-Key Assignment
Software Version: CPC-All and CPC-B, Version 6.0 or higher
Address: FFl 2# 7# l# (Screen)# (SoftKey)# (Feature)#
Description
Use this program to create up to 15 menu screens for large-display phones.
Each screen can contain up to 10 feature codes (one feature code per soft
key). “Soft keys” are the 10 buttons located on the left and right sides of the
LCD display window on the large-display phone (see figure below). Soft key
1 is the top left button; soft key 2 is beneath it; and so on.
When creating these flexible function screens, you are programming the soft
keys to perform one of the following special functions while the screen is
displayed:
*
One-touch access to directories. Pressing the soft key will display a
directory of extension numbers, Personal Speed-Dial numbers, or System
Speed-Dial numbers.
One-touch initiation of a specific feature. The soft keys can also execute
any feature operation code except for “Conference” and “Flash”, which
already have their own fixed keys on the phone.
After the flexible function screens are built, you can assign them to display
during different call states (phone idle, intercom dial tone, CO dial tone,
during a CO call, etc.), using another programming address -- FF3 (ExtPort)#
(26-33)# (Screen)#.
l
l
When deciding what feature codes to assign to the soft keys on the screens,
keep in mind that the DBS system already has 24 preprogrammed menus (see
Appendix A) that can also be assigned to display during different call states.
Figure l-l. Soft ke
lumbering on large-d&&y phones
KeyI
-
DND
OVERRIDE - Key 6
TAXBACK-KW7
P8D - K e y 8
Key3
a
8GM
MulE
Key4
0
#)RlAMD S S D - K e y 9
Key2 -
1
Key5 0 C O N F L O C K O U T - by 10
DBS-70-400
DBS Manual - Issued 8/i/95
Technical Manuals Online! - http://www.tech-man.com
Page 1-73
Chapter 1. System Programminq (FFI)
Section 400-Programming
Programming
FFl 2# 7# l# (2539)# (l-lO)# (xxxxxx)#
t
Screen Number: ’
25=Flex.Func. Screen 1
26=Flex.Func. Screen 2
27=Flex.Func. Screen 3
28=Flex.Func. Screen 4
29=Flex.Func. Screen 5
30=Flex.Func. Screen 6
3 l=Flex.Func. Screen 7
32=Flex.Func. Screen 8
33=Flex.Func. Screen 9
34=Flex.Func. Screen 10
35=Flex.Func. Screen ! 1
36=Flex.Func. Screen 12
37=Flex.Func. Screen 13
38=Flex.Func. Screen 14
39=Flex.Func. Screen 15
Feature Code
Soft Key Number
(see figure, previous page) (see table below
Table l-6. Feature codes for Flexible Function Screen soft keys
Code to be assigned to soft key
(FFll enters an asterisk *)
(FF12 enters a pound sign #)
Feature
Absence Message
Account Code
Answer Key
Any Key
Attendant Park Hold
BGM (Background Music) On/Off
Busy Override
Call Forward--Outside
71
PF12 7 (if using SLT or DSLT) or
AUTO FF12 (all other phones)
PFll 1
PROG PROG XXXXXX
Note: The “Any Key” feature allows you to store
digits other than extension numbers, CO trunks, or
feature codes. For example, Any Key can be used to
store an account code or a Voice Mail password.
75 (00-09)
FF12 53
PROG PROG 4
723
’
(CPC-AH/B versions prior to 7.0)
Page 1-74
DBS Manual - Issued 8/l/95
Technical Manuals Online! - http://www.tech-man.com
DBS-70-400
Section 400-Programming
Chapter 1. System Programming (FFl)
Code to be assigned to soft key
Feature
Call Forward
Call Forward--All Calls
Call Forward--Busy/No Answer
Call Forward--Busy
Call Forward--No Answer
Call Park
Call Pickup
Call Waiting
Caller ID Log
Day Mode
Day/Night/Night:! Mode Toggle
(CPC-AH/B Version 7.0 or higher)
Dial Tone Off
DND (Do Not Disturb)
DP to DTMF Signal Conversion
DSS/BLF Key (internal calls)
Extension Directory
Extension Lockout
Group Call Pickup
Headset
Intercom Key
Internal Dial Tone
MC0 or ML Keys
Meet-Me Answer
Message Waiting Answer
Mute
Night Mode
Night 2 mode
(FFll enters an asterisk *)
(FF12 enters a pound sign #)
72
720
721
722
724
Note: Beginning with CPC-AIL/B Version
7.0, you can call-forward to an outside
phone number. Use an existing PSD or SSD
code as the destination phone number, with a
“CX-PhoneNo.” format (where C is the
CONF key, and X is l-6 or 9 for trunk group
8 l-86 or 89).
75
79
PROG PROG 3
FFll 6
FF12 521
FF12 520
Note: The FF key LED will be off during Day
mode: red during Night mode: and green during
Night 2 mode.
FFl2 50
’ 73
PROG PROG FFl 1 -or- PROG PROG FF 12
PROG (lo-69 or 100-699)
900002
74
70
FF12 51
FF12 8
FF12 50
(8 1-86 or 89)
Note: See “ML/MC0 Separation” (FF3 ExtPort#
44#) to determine which type of key is available with
your software.
77
AUTO REDIAL
FFll FF12
FF 12 52 (CPC-AII/B versions prior to 7.0)
FFl2 522 (CPC-AU/B Version 7.0 or higher)
FF12 523
(CPC-AII/B Version 7.0 or higher)
DBS-70-400
DBS Manual - Issued 8/l/95
Technical Manuals Online! - http://www.tech-man.com
Page 1175
Section 400-Programming
Chapter 1. System Programming (FFl)
I
Feature
Offhook Voice Announce
Offhook Voice Announce Answer
Page
Park Hold
PSD (Personal Speed Dial) Directory
PSD (Personal Speed Dial) Number Release
Reminder
Save Number Redial Access
Save Number Redial Set
SSD (System Speed Dial) Directory
SSD (System Speed Dial) Number
Tl Alarms -Frame Loss
Red Alarm
Signal Loss
Slips
Sync Loss
Yellow Alarm
Talkback
Tone/Voice Calling
Transfer
Trunk Group Selection
(same as “MC0 or ML Keys”)
Trunk Queuing
Trunk Selection
UN.4 Pickup
Voice Mail One-Touch Access
Code to be assigned to soft key
(FFll enters an asterisk *)
(FF12 enters a pound sign #I
PROG PROG 5
FFll 3
FFt2 (00-07)
75
900000
AUTO (90-99 or 900-909)
FFll 2
FF12 4
AUTO FFll
AUTO AUTO FFll
90000 1
AUTO (00-89 or 000- 199)
(MasZrorSlave)
(101 or 121) FF12
(103 or 123) FF12
(104 or 124) FF12
(102 or 122) FF12
(105 or 125) FF12
(107 or 127) FF12
FFll 3
PROG PROG 1
PROG PROG PROG
(81-86 or 89)
PROG PROG 2
(0 l-64)
PROG AUTO NNN (XXX
or AUTO SSD/PSD)#
(CPC-B Version 5.0 or higher)
78
f
VM Pilot Number
Press the # key to
register the string.
Note: The password (if used) can be 1 to 3 digits long. If the
password is over 3 digits, it must be assigned as a speed-dial
code (be sure to include an ending pound # sign after the password when creating the speed-dial code).
Voice Mail Transfer
Password (optional)
PROG AUTO AUTO NNN
(NNN=VM Pilot Number)
Page 1-76
DBS Manual - issued 8/l/95
Technical Manuals Online! - http://www.tech-man.com
DBS-70-400
Chapter 1. System Programming (FF:)
Section 400~Programming
Related Programming
Flex.Func. Screen Text: FFl 2# 7# 2# (Screen)++ (Key)# (Text)#
Flex.Func. Screen Default: FF1 2# 7# 3# (Screen)++ (0 or l)#
Flex.Func. Screens Default (All): FFl 2# 7# 4#I (0 or 1)k
Display Screens During Call States: FF3 (ExtPort)# (26-33Hf (Screen)#
Notes
FFll and FF12 in the Feature Codes. The * and # phone keys are used as
movement keys (for scrolling through addresses) while in programming
mode. Therefore, when programming feature codes for soft keys, FFl 1 and
FF12 are used instead to represent * and # (FFll enters *; FF12 enters #).
The phone will not display the symbol when you press FFll or FF12, but it
will register * or # as part of the feature code.
Initial Displays. The 15 flexible function screens are blank by default.
Displaying Feature Codes. To display an existing feature code assignment
for a soft key, use the same address (FFl 2# 7# l# Screen# SoftKey#).
DBS-70-400
DBS Manual - Issued 8/i/95
Technical Manuals Online! - http://www.tech-man.com
Page 1-77
J~LLIUI I 4uwr I 0y1 al I II I III iy
Flexible Function Screen Text
Software Version: CPC-All and CPC-B, Version 6.0 or higher
Address: FFl 2# 7# 2# (Screen)# (SoftKey)# (Text)#
Description
Use this program to create the text that identifies the soft keys on a flexible
function screen for large-display phones. The text for each soft key can be up
to 8 characters long.
Use a DSW’2 console (with alphabetic keys) or the remote programming
mode on a large-display phone (scroll through the alphabetic characters on
the digital keypad) to assign the text in this address.
Programming
FFl 2# 7# 2# (2539)# (l-1 0)# (xxxxxxxx)#
_ Screen Number:
25=Flex.Func. Screen 1
26=FlexFunc. Screen 2
27=Flex.Func. Screen 3
28=Flex.Func. Screen 4
29=Flex.Func. Screen 5
30=Flex.Func. Screen 6
31=Flex.Func. Screen 7
32=Flex.Func. Screen 8
33=Flex.Func. Screen 9
34=Flex.Func. Screen 10
35=Flex.Func. Screen 11
36=Flex.Func. Screen 12
37=Flex.Func. Screen 13
38=Flex.Func. Screen 14
39=Flex.Func. Screen 15
f
Soft Key Number
(see Figure l- 1
on page l-7 1)
t
Text (up to 8 char.)
Related Programming
Flex.Func. Screen for Soft Keys: FFl 2# 7# l# (Screen)# (Key)# (Code)#
Flex.Func. Screen Default: FFl 2# 7# 3# (Screen)++ (0 or l)#
Flex.Func. Screens Default (All): FFl 2# 7# 4# (0 or l)#
Display Screens During Call States: FF3 (ExtPort)# (26-33)# (Screen)#
Page 1-78
DBS Manual - issued 8/l/95
Technical Manuals Online! - http://www.tech-man.com
DBS-70-400
Chapter 1. System Programming (FFl)
Section 400~Programming
Flexible Function Screen Default
Software Version: CPC-All and CPC-B, Version 6.0 or higher
Address: FFl 2# 7# 3# (Screen)# (0 or l)#
Description
Use this program to reinstate individual flexible function screens to the
default value (blank: no features assigned to soft keys).
Pr.ogramming
FFI 2# 7# 3# (2539)# (0 or l)#
Screen Number:
25=Flex.Func. Screen 1
26=Flex.Func. Screen 2
27=Flex.Func. Screen 3
28=Flex.Func. Screen 4
29=Flex.Func. Screen 5
3O=Flex.Func. Screen 6
3 1 =Flex.Func. Screen 7
32=Flex.Func. Screen 8
33=Flex.Func. Screen 9
34=Flex.Func. Screen 10
35=Flex.Func. Screen 11
36=Flex.Func. Screen 12
37=Flex.Func. Screen 13
38=Flex.Func. Screen 14
39=Flex.Func. Screen 15
t
O=Do not rehrn to default setting.
I=Rerurn to default setting.
Related Programming
Flex.Func. Screen for Soft Keys: FFl 2# 7# l# (Screen)# (Key)## (Code)++
Flex.Func. Screen Text: FFl 2# 7# 2# (Screen)# (Key)## (Text)#
Flex.Func. Screens Default (All): FFl 2# 7# 4# (0 or l)#
Display Screens During Call States: FF3 (ExtPort)# (26-33)# (Screen)#
DBS-70-400
DBS Manual - Issued 8/l/95
Technical Manuals Online! - http://www.tech-man.com
Page 1-79
Section QOO-Programming
Chapter 1. System Programming (FFl)
Flexible Function Screens Default (All)
Sofhrvare Version: CPC-AII and CPC-B, Version 6.0 or higher
Address: FFl 2# 7# 4# (0 or l)#
Description
Use this program to reinstate all 15 flexible function screens to the default
value (blank; RO features assigned to soft keys).
Programming
FFI 2# 7# 4# (0 or l)#
O=Do not return to default setting.
l=Return to default setting.
Related Programming
Flex.Func. Screen for Soft Keys: FFl 2# 7# l# (Screen)# (Key)# (Code)#
Flex.Func. Screen Text: FFl 2# 7# 2# (Screen)# (Key)# (Text)#
Flex.Func. Screen Default: FFl 2# 7# 3# (Screen)# (0 or l)#
Display Screens During Call States: FF3 (ExtPort)# (26-33)# (Screen)#
.
Page l-80
DBS Manual - Issued 8/l/95
Technical Manuals Online! - http://www.tech-man.com
DBS-70-400
Chapter 1. System Programming (FFl)
Section 400-Programming
Caller ID Automatic DISA
Automatic DISA Callers
Software Version: CPC-All and CPC-8, Version 6.1 or higher
Address: FFl 2# 8# (l-lO)# (PhoneNo.)#
Dehcription
Use this program to assign up to 10 phone numbers for the Caller ID
Automatic DISA (Direct Inward System Access) feature. When a caller (e.g.,
company salesman) calls from one of the phone numbers assigned in this
address, the trunk receiving the call will automatically switch to DISA
without requiring the caller to enter an ID Code.
The DISA feature gives the caller access to inside features normally available
only to another extension.
Note: In order to use the Automatic DISA feature, the DBS system must
have a Caller ID package installed. See Caller ID Installation and Operation
(Sectiun 510) for more information.
Programming
I
FFl 2# 8# (l-lO)# (PhoneNo.)#
Phone Number Assignment
Notes
I
f
+
Caller’s Phone Number (up to 10 digits)
Matching The Caller’s Phone Number. The caller’s phone number entered
in this address must exactly match the phone number received by Caller ID
(usually 10 digits).
Enabling DISA on Trunks. If the Caller ID Automatic DISA feature is
used, do not enable DISA on any trunks (see FF2 Trunl# 1 l#). The Caller ID
feature will automatically switch the trunk to DISA based on the originating
phone number.
Hardware Requirement For DZSA. MFR Card VB-4343 1 is required for
Caller ID Automatic DTSA, so that the system can interpret DTMF tones
entered via the DISA connection.
DES-70-400
DBS Manual - Issued 8/l/95
Technical Manuals Online! - http://www.tech-man.com
Page 1-81
Section 400-Programming
Chapter 1. System Programming (FFi)
Door Phones
A “Door Phone” (also called “Door Box”) is an intercom with a single button,
installed on building entrance doors, that allows visitors to announce their presence
by pressing the button. It is used with a Door Opener (not sold by Paruzsonic), which
is an electronic lock that can be unlocked from an extension phone inside.
The DBS supports two types of door phone connections -- one to trunk ports (using a
VB-43701 Door Phone Adaptor) and the other to digital extension ports (using a
VB-43711 Door Phone Adaptor). The extension port connection is supported
beginning with CPC-AIIICPC-B Version 7.0, and is controlled by the FFl 2# P#
addresses below.
Door Phone Extensions
Software Version: CPC-All and CPC-B, Version 7.0 or higher
Address: FFl 2# 9# (DoorPhone)# l# (ExtPort)#
Description
Use this address to establish the extension ports that are connected to door
phones. Up to 4 door phones cam be assigned (one per extension port).
Programming
I
FFl 2# 9# (l-4)# 1# (3-72 or 39144)#
t
Door Phone Number
(l-4)
t
Extension Port
CPC-AII: 3-72
CPC-B: 3- 144
NOTE: Do not assign Extension Port 1 or 2 to a door phone.
Related Programming
Door Phone Access Code Required: FFl 2# l# 40# (0 or l)#
Door Phone Ring Assignments: FFl 2# 9# (l-4)# 2# (ExtPort)# (0 or I)#
Door Opener Access Code: FFl 2# 9# (l-4)# 3# (0000-9999)#
Door Phone Tone Type: FFl 2# 9# (l-4)# 4## (0 or l)#
Door Phone Ring Timer: FFl 2# 9# (l-4)# 5# (0-15)#
Door Phone Ring Pattern: FFl 2# 9# (l-4)# 6# (0-5)#
Door Opener Relay Timer: FFl 2# 9# (l-4)# 7# (0-5)#
Extension Numbers: FF3 (ExtPort)# l# (ExtNo.)#
Page 1-82
DBS Manual - issued 8/l/95
Technical Manuals Online! - http://www.tech-man.com
DBS-70-400
Chapter 1. System Programming (FFl)
Section 400~Programming
Notes
Reset Requirement. After setting FFl 2# 9# addresses, activate the door
phones by unplugging them from their extension ports, then plugging them
back in.
Restiictions for Door Phones:
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
*
l
Door phones cannot be Attendants (ports 1 or 2).
Door phones cannot be included in a conference call.
Door phones cannot be members of a hunt group or call coverage group.
Door phone calls are not subject to barge-ins (Busy Override), regardless
of the extension’s program settings.
It is not possible to Call Forward to a door phone.
It is not possible to Auto-Redial to a door phone.
Door phone calls have the same priority as intercom extension calls.
All calls to a door phone are established as voice calls, regardless of the
extension’s program settings.
The DTMF path is disabled during a door phone call. When the extension
user dials the access code to unlock the door, the visitor will not hear the
DTMF digits.
Calling a Door Phone from an Internal Extension. Any extension can
establish a call to a door phone by dialing the door phone’s extension number.
Extension numbers can be assigned to door phone ports using the ‘Extension
Numbers” address, FF3 (ExtPort)# l# (ExtNo.)#.
DBS-70-400
DBS Manual - Issued 8/l/95
Technical Manuals Online! - http://www.tech-man.com
Page 1-83
Door Phone Ring Assignments
Software Version: CPC-All and CPC-6, Version 7.0 or higher
Address: FFl 2# 9# (DoorPhone)# 2# (ExtPort)# (0 or l)#
Description
Use this address to determine which extension(s) will ring when a door phone
caller initiates a call. This applies to door phones connected to digital
extension ports only (,not trunk ports).
It is possible to assign several or all extensions to ring for a door phone call.
Programming
I
FFl 2# 9# fl-4)# 2# (l-72 or l-144)# (0 or l)#
f
Door Phone Number
(l-4)
4
Extension Port
CPC-AII: l-72
CPC-B: l- 144
+
O=Do not ring.
l=Ring.
Related Programming
Door Opener Access Code Required: FFl 2# l# 40## (0 or l>#
Door Phone Extensions: FFl 2# 9# (l-4)## l# (ExtPort)#
Door Opener Access Code: FFl 2# 9# (l-4)# 3# (0000-9999)#
Door Phone Tone Type: FFl 2# 9# (l-4)# 4# (0 or l)#
Door Phone Ring Timer: .FFl 2# 9# (l-4)## 5# (0-15)#
Door Phone Ring Pattern: FFl 2# 9# ( l-4)# 6# (0-5)#
Door Opener Relay Timer: FF1 2# 9# (l-4)# 7# (0-5)#
Notes
Power-Cycling Requirement. ln order for changes to this parameter to take
effect, the system must be turned off, then back on.
Programming Restriction. Programming an extension to ring for a door
phone call must be performed from another extension.
Interaction With SLT Phones. An SLT phone (no speaker) can receive a
door phone call (same ring pattern as a normal intercom call).
Interaction With ML Keys. If the extension is programmed as an ML key, it
can receive a door phone call while the extension is on another call (the phone
will “buzz”j. However, the door phone call will not transfer to another
Page 1-84
DBS Manual - Issued 8/l/95
Technical Manuals Online! - http://www.tech-man.com
DBS-70-400
Chapter 1. System Programming (FFl)
Section 400~Programming
extension, even if the phone is programmed to transfer (the phone will
continue to buzz, until the user picks it up).
Restrictions for Door Phone Calls:
l
l
l
l
l
Door phones cannot be included in a conference call.
Door phones cannot be members of a hunt group or call coverage group.
Door phone calls are not subject to barge-in (Busy Override), regardless of
the extension’s program settings.
Door phone calls have the same priority as intercom extension calls.
The DTMF path is disabled during a door phone call. When the extension
user dials the access code to unlock the door, the visitor will not hear the
DTMF digits.
Receiving a Door Phone Call. When a visitor presses the door phone
button, an intercom call is generated automatically to the extension(s)
assigned to ring for a door phone call.
l
l
DBS-70-400
If the extension is on-hook, the visitor will hear ringing tones. The tones
will stop when the extension user answers the door phone call.
If the extension is busy, the door phone call will ring in as a normal call (for
example, the extension user will hear a “beep” in the receiver, indicating
another call) -- and the visitor will hear silence. When the extension user
hangs up, a call will be established between the door phone and the extension (it will either ring or establish an intercom voice path, depending on
the extension’s programming).
DBS Manual - issued 8/t/95
Technical Manuals Online! - http://www.tech-man.com
Page 1-85
Section 400-Programming
Chapter 1. system rrogrammlng (I-Fl)
Door Opener Access Code
Software Version: CPC-Ail and CPC-B, Version 7.0 or higher
Address: FFl 2# 9# (DoorPhone)# 3# (OOOO-9999)#
Description
Use this address to establish a 4-digit door opener access code that can be
entered on any extension phone to unlock the door. This applies to door
phones connected to digital extension ports only (not trunk ports).
NOTE: To require the use of the access code to unlock the door, address
FF12# l# 40# must be enabled.
Programming
I
FFl 2# 9# (114)# 3f (OOOO-9999)#
f
Door Phone Number
(l-4)
t
Door Opener Access Code
Default: 9999
Related Programming
Door Opener Access Code Required: FFl 2# l# 40# (0 or l)#
Door Phone Ring Assignments: FFl 2# 9# (l-4)# 2# (ExtPort)# (0 or l)#
Door Opener Relay Timer: FFl 2# 9# (l-4)# 7# (O-5)#
Notes
Unlocking the D.oor With the Access Code. If Access Code NNNN is
established in this address, and “Door Opener Access Code Required” is
enabled, the extension user receiving the door phone call can press
#3 NNNN l (while still engaged in the call) to unlock the door. Or, from any
other extension not engaged in a door phone call, press ON/OFF #3 XXX
NNNN * (where “XXX” is the extension number assigned to the door phone
port).
Unlocking the Door Without the Access Code. If an access code is not
established (and its use is not required), extension users can still unlock the
door by pressing #3* (if engaged in a door phone call) -- or, ON/OFF #3
XXX l (from another extension).
Setting the Amount of Time the Door Will Remain Unlocked Use the
“Door Opener Relay Timer” address (FF12# 9# l-4# 7#) to set the number
of seconds the door will remain open after it is unlocked.
Page 1-86
DBS Manual - Issued 8/l/95
Technical Manuals Online! - http://www.tech-man.com
DBS-70-400
---..-..
.--
-~
.-........,
v.,y
.“.
.
.
-,-.-...
.
.-= .- . . . . . . . . .
.
Door Phone Tone Type
Software Version: CPC-All and CPC-B, Version 7.0 or higher
Address: FFl 2# 9# (DoorPhone)# M (0 or l)#
Description
This address specifies the type of tone heard by the cal,led extension when a
visitor presses the door phone button. This appiies to door phones connected
to digital extension ports only (not trunk ports).
Prdgramming
1
FFI 2# 9# (I-4)# 4# (0 or I)#
f
Door Phone Number
(l-4)
4
I
Tone Type: (heard by extension)
O=Slow chime
l=Fast chime
Related Programming
Door Phone Ring Assignments: FFI 2# 9# (DoorPhone)# 2# (Extl?ort)#
(0 or l)#
Door Phone Ring Timer: FFl 2# 9# (DoorPhone)# 5# (C- 15)#
Door Phone Ring Pattern: FFl 2# 9# (DoorPhone)# 6# (0-W
Notes
DBS-70-400
Reset Requirement. Jf changing the Tone Type setting, activate the change
by unplugging the door phone from its port and plugging it back in.
DBS Manual - Issued 8/l/95
Technical Manuals Online! - http://www.tech-man.com
Page l-87
Section 400-Programming
Chapter 1. System Programming (FFl)
Door Phone Ring Timeout Timer
Software Version: CPChl and CPC-6, Version 7.0 or higher
Address: FFl 2# 9# (DoorPhone)# 5# (O-15)#
Description
This address sets the amount of time (in seconds) that a door phone will ring
an extension before it goes on-hook (extension stops ringing). This applies to
door phones connected to digital extension ports only (not trunk ports).
If the door phone caller re-initiates the call before this Timer is up, the Timer
will automatically reset and the extension will begin ringing again.
Programming
I
FFl 2# ,,%,, 5# (Oi15p
Door Phone Number
U-4)
.
Ring Timer
Default: 3 (20 seconds)
(see table below)
Table l-7. Door phone ring timer values
Setting 1 Value
0
1 5 seconds
1
10 seconds
2
15 seconds
3
20 seconds
I
4
5
6
25 seconds
30 seconds
35 seconds
Setting V a l u e
8
45. seconds
9
1 50 seconds
10
55 seconds
11
60 seconds
12
13
14
65 seconds
70 seconds
75 seconds
I
Related Programming
Door Phone Ring Pattern: FFl 217 9# (DoorPhone)# 6# (0-5)#
Notes
Page 1-88
Reset Requirement. If changing the Ring Timer setting, activate the change
by unplugging the door phone from its port and plugging it back in.
DBS Manual - Issued 8/l/95
Technical Manuals Online! - http://www.tech-man.com
DBS-70-400
Chapter 1. System Programming (FFI)
Section 400-Programming
Door Phone Ring Pattern
Software Version: CPC-AlI and CPC-8, Version 7.0 or higher
Address: FFl 2# 9# (DoorPhone)# 6# (O-5)#
Description
This address specifies the ring pattern heard at the extension receiving a door
phone call. This applies to door phones connected to digital extension ports
only (not trunk ports).
This address specifies the number of seconds between rings (4 seconds by
’ default). The ring itself has a fixed duration of approximately 3 seconds.
Programming
I
FFl 2#74)# 6# (Of)#
Door Phone Number
(l-4)
Number of Seconds Between Rings:
O=Rings one time only (no repeat ringing)
1=4 seconds between rings
2=6 seconds between rings
3=8 seconds between rings
4=10 seconds between rings
5=12 seconds between rings
Related Programming
Door Phone Ring Timer: FFl 2# 9# (DoorPhone)# 5# (0-15)#
Notes
DBS-70-400
Reset Requirement. If changing the Ring Pattern setting, activate the change
by unplugging the door phone from its port and plugging it back in.
DBS Manual - issued 8/l/95
Technical Manuals Online! - http://www.tech-man.com
Page 1 -a9
Door Opener Relay Timer
Sofhnfare V&ion: CPC-Alland CPC-B, Version 7.0 or higher
Address: FFl 2# 9# (DoorPhone)# 7# (*5)#
Description
Use this address to determine the number of seconds a “buzzing” (unlocked)
door will remain unlocked for the visitor to enter the building (4 seconds by
default). This applies to door phones connected to digital extension ports
only (not trunk ports).
This Relay Timer begins immediately after an extension enters the
appropriate codes (#3*, #3 NNNN *, #3 XXX *, or #3 Xxx NNNN *) to
unlock the door.
Programming
I
FFl2#!3#/ -4)#3#/5)#
Door Phone Number
U-4)
Number of Seconds Door Will Remain Open
0=2 seconds
1=4 seconds (default)
2=6 seconds
3=8 seconds
4=10 seconds
5=12 seconds
.
Related Programming
Door Opener Access Code Required: FFl 2# l# 40## (0 or l>#
Door Opener Access Code: FFl 2# 9# (l-4)# 3# (0000-9999)#
Page I-90
DBS Manual - Issued 8/l/95
Technical Manuals Online! - http://www.tech-man.com
DBS-70-400
Chapter 1. System Programming (FFi j
Section 400~Programming
System Timers
Automatic Night Mode Start Time
Software Version: All Versions
Address: FFl 3# 1# (OOOO-2359)#
Description
Set the time when the DBS will automatically switch from Day to Night
mode. Use the 24-hour military time format (e.g.. enter “1700” for 5:00 pmj.
You can program trunks to ring incoming calls at different extensions when
the system is in Night mode (see FF4 addresses). And different TRS types
can be programmed to be used during Night mode (see FF8 addresses).
NOTE: Starting with Version 7.0 of the CPC-AII and CPC-B cards, a
second Night mode is also available -- see FFl 3# 30# for more information.
Programming
To set the Automatic Night Mode start time . . .
FFI 3# I# (OOOO-2359)#
t
Night Mode Start Time
(in 24-hour military format)
To clear the start time (disable Automatic Night Mode) . . .
I---
FFl 3# 1# CONF ON/OFF
Related Programming
Time Setting: FFl I# 2# HHMM#
Automatic Day Mode Start Time: FFl 3# 29# HHMM#
Automatic Night 2 Mode Start Time: FFl 3# 30# HHMM#
CO Ring Assignments: FF4 addresses
Toll Restriction: FF8 addresses
Notes
DBS-70-400
System Clock. The Automatic Night Mode start time depends on the DBS
system clock being set correctly.
DBS Manual - Issued 8/l/95
Technical Manuals Online! - http://www.tech-man.com
Page 1-91
bnaprer I. 3ystw11 rrogrammlrly (rr
I
1
3ec11on 4uu-rrogrammlng
NIGHT Key Operation. If only one of the Auto Mode Start Times is set, the
Attendant NIGHT key can be used to manually switch to another mode. For
instance, if Night mode has been activated automatically, the Attendant can
press the NIGHT key to go into Day mode. (However, the Attendant must
wait at least 3 minutes after the mode is automatically activated, before using
the NIGHT key to switch the mode again.)
In CPC-AU/B versions prior to 7.0, if both Auto Day and Auto Night Mode
Start Times are set, the Attendant NIGHT key cannot be used to manually
switch modes. (However, it will work in Version 7.0 or higher; or press #520
to toggle between Day, Night and Night 2 modes.)
SUGGESTION (for versions prior to 7.0): Set only the Auto Night
Mode Start Time, so that the DBS will automatically switch to Night
mode each night -- and each morning the Attendant phone user can
press the NIGHT key to manually switch to Day mode.
Required Intervak Between Auto Day and Night Modes. If you set both
Auto Mode Start Times, it is recommended that the start times differ by at
least 1 hour.
Page l-92
DBS Manual - Issued 8/l/95
Technical Manuals Online! - http://www.tech-man.com
DBS-70-400
Chapter 1. System Programming (FFl)
Section 400-Programming
Attendant Hold Recall Timer for CO Calls
Software Version: All Versions
Address: FFl 3# 2# (O-12)#
Description
This timer determines how long a trunk call can be held by an Attendant
phone before it will recall (20 seconds by default).
Programming
I
FFl 3# 2# (0112)#
t
Attendant Hold Recall Timer setting for CO calls
Default: 1 (20 seconds) (see table below)
Table l-8. Attendant Hold Recall Timer values for CO calls
7
.
Setting
0
2
3
5
t
I
I
6
7
8
9
Value
No recall
i 20 seconds
I 40 seconds
1 60 seconds
1 80 seconds
100 seconds
120 seconds
1I 140 seconds
1I 160 seconds
1 180 seconds
1 200 seconds
1 220 seconds
240 seconds
I
1
1
1
I
t
11
12
Related Programming
Attendant Hold Recall Timer for Intercom Calls: F’Fl 3# 22# (0-12)#
DBS-70-400
DBS Manual - Issued 8/l/95
Technical Manuals Online! - http://www.tech-man.com
Page 1-93
Section 400-Programming
Chapter I. System Programming (FFi)
Extension Hold Recall Timer for CO Calls
Software Version: All Versions
Address: FFl W 3#! (O-12)#
Description
This timer determines how long a trunk call remains on hold at an extension
before it recalls (starts ringing the extension again; 140 seconds by default).
Programming
FFl 3# 3# (092)#
Extension Hold Recall Timer setting for CO calls
Default: 7 (140 seconds) (see table below)
Table l-9. Extension Hold Recall Timer values for CO calls
Related Programming
Attendant Call Reversion Timer for c.0 Calls: FFl 3# lO# (0-12)#
Notes
Recall Treatment for CO Calls. If a trunk recall is unanswered, it will revert
to the Attendant phone after ringing for the amount of time set in the
Attendant Call Reversion Timer.
Page 1-94
DBS Manual - Issued 8/l/95
Technical Manuals Online! - http://www.tech-man.com
DBS-70-400
Chapter 1. System Programming (FFl)
Section 400-Programming
Attendant Transfer Recall Timer for CO Calls
Sofhrvare Version: All Versions
Address: FFl 3## 4# (0112)#
Description
When an Attendant phone transfers a trunk call to an extension or hunt group,
the transferred call will recall to the Attendant if it is not answered. This
timer determines how long a transferred trunk call will go unanswered before
it recalls (20 seconds by default).
Programming
I
1
FFl 3# 4# (0112)#
t
Attendant Transfer Recall Timer setting for CO calls
Default: 1 (20 seconds) (see table below)
Table I-10. Attendant Transfer Recall Timer values for CO calls
Setting
0
I
2
3
5
6
7
Value
No recall
/ 20 seconds
I
1 40 seconds
1 60 seconds
1
I
1 100 seconds
120 seconds
140 seconds
/ 160 seconds
1 180 seconds
I200 seconds
1 220 seconds
1 240 seconds
I
I
12
Related Programming
Attendant Transfer Recall Timer for Intercom Calls: FFl 3# 24f# (0-l2)#
DBS-70-400
DBS Manual - Issued 8/l/95
Technical Manuals Online! - http://www.tech-man.com
Page 1-95
Gnapter 1. system rrogrammlng [i-i-i )
Extension Transfer Recall Timer for CO Calls
Software Version: All Versions
Address: FFI 3## 5# (O-12)#
Description
When an extension transfers a trunk call to another extension or to a hunt
group, the transferred call will recall to the extension if it is not answered.
This timer determines how long a transferred trunk call will go unanswered
before it recalls (140 seconds by default).
Programming
r
FFl 3# 5# (0112)#
Extension Transfer Recall Timer setting for CO calls
Default: 7 (140 seconds) (see table below)
Table I-l.!. Extension Transfer Recall Timer values for CO calls
I
I
Setting
0
I
1
t-
3
4
Value
, No recall
I
20 seconds
I
1 60 seconds
1 80 seconds
1 100 seconds
1 120 seconds
1 140 seconds
II 160 seconds
1 180 seconds
1 200 seconds
1 220 seconds
I 240 seconds
I
I 40 seconds
I
I
I
6
I
12
Related Programming
Attendant Call Reversion Timer for CO Calls: FFl 3# 10# (O-l 2)#
Notes
Recall Treatrnentfor CO Calls. If a trunk recall is unanswered, it will revert
to the Attendant phone after ringing for the amount of time set in the
Attendant Call Reversion Timer.
Page 1-96
DBS Manual - Issued 8/i/95
Technical Manuals Online! - http://www.tech-man.com
DBS-70-400
Chapter 1. System Programming (FFl)
Section 400-Programming
Attendant Hunt Group Recall Timer
Software Version: All Versions
Address: FFl 3#I 6# (O-12)#
Description
Programming
When an Attendant phone transfers a trunk call to a hunt group, the
transferred call will recall to the Attendant if it is not answered, This timer
determines how long the call will go unanswered before it recalls (20 seconds
by default).
I
FFI 3# 6#/ CO-12)#
Attendant Hunt Group Recall Timer setting
Default: 1 (20 seconds) (see table below)
Table l-12. Attendant Hunt Group Recall Timer values for CO calls
Setting
0
Value
i No recall
I 20 seconds
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
12
DBS-70-400
i 40 seconds
1 60 seconds
’ 80 seconds
100 seconds
120 seconds
140 seconds
160 seconds
180 seconds
200 seconds
I 220 seconds
1 240 seconds
DBS Manual - Issued 8/l/95
Technical Manuals Online! - http://www.tech-man.com
Page 1-97
Extension Hunt Group Recall Timer
Software Version: All Versions
A d d r e s s : FFl 3## 7# (O-12)#
Description
When an extension transfers a trunk call to a hunt group, the transferred call
will recall to the extension if it is not answered. This timer determines how
long a transferred trunk call will go unanswered before it recalls (140 seconds
by default).
Programming
I
FFl 3# 7# (0112)#
Extension Hunt Group Recall Timer setting
Default: 7 (140 seconds) (see table below)
Table I-13. Extensizyz Hunt Group Recall Timer values for CO calls
Setting
0
1
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
12
Page l-98
Value
No recall
1 20 seconds
1 40 seconds
60 seconds
80 seconds
100 seconds
120 seconds
140 seconds
160 seconds
180 seconds
200 seconds
1 220 seconds
1 240 seconds
DBS Manual - issued 8/l/95
Technical Manuals Online! - http://www.tech-man.com
DBS-70-400
Chapter 1. System Programming (FFl)
Section 400~Programming
Attendant Park Hold Recall Timer
Software Version: Ali Versions
Address: FFl 3# 8# (0112)#
Description
An Attendant phone can use up to 10 call park numbers (00-09) to hold trunk
calls. These park numbers can be assigned to an FF key or accessed by
placing a call on hold, then dialing 7500-7509. Anyone can pick up the call
by dialing 7600-7609.
This address determines how long a parked call will be held before it recalls
(20 seconds by default).
Programming
1
FFl 3# 8# (0912)#
Attendant Park Hold Recall Timer setting
Default: 1 (20 seconds) (see table below)
Table l-14. Attenaht Park HoM Recall Timer values
Setting
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
DBS-70-400
Value
No recall
20 seconds
40 seconds
, 60 seconds
80 seconds
100 seconds
120 seconds
140 seconds
160 seconds
180 seconds
200 seconds
220 seconds
240 seconds
DBS Manual - Issued 8/l/95
Technical Manuals Online! - http://www.tech-man.com
Page l-99
_..I
.I.
.-
-,
----..
.
._
._....
.
_
.
-_..-..
.__
..I........._
Extension Park Hold Recall Timer
Software Version: All Versions
Address: FFl 3# 9# (0112)#
Description
If an extension parks a trunk call, the parked call will recall (start ringing at
the extension) if it is not picked up. This address determines how long the
parked call remains on hold before it recalls (140 seconds by default).
Programming
1
I
FFl 3# 9# (0912)#
Extension Park Hold Recall Timer setting
Default: 7 (140 seconds) (see table below)
Table I-15. Extension Park Hold Recall Timer values
11
12
220 seconds
240 seconds
Related Programming
Attendant Call Reversion Timer for CO Calls: FFl 3# lO# (0-12)#
Notes
Recall Treatment for CO Calls. If a trunk recall is unanswered. it will revert
to the Attendant phone after ringing for the amount of time set in the
Attendant Call Reversion Timer.
Page1-100
DBS Manual- Issued 8/l/95
Technical Manuals Online! - http://www.tech-man.com
DBS-70-400
Chapter 1. System Programming (FFl)
Section 400-Programming
Attendant Call Reversion Timer for CO Calls
Software Version: All Versions
Address: FFl 3# lO# (O-l 2)#
Description
By default, the DBS will ultimately revert unanswered trunk recalls on
extensions to the Attendant phone. This timer determines how long an
unanswered trunk recall will ring at the last possible answering position
(extension) before it reverts to the Attendant phone (180 seconds by default).
This applies to trunk calls in the following states:
l
l
l
Programming
Hold recalls that are unanswered on the holding extension.
Transfer recalls that are unanswered by the transferring extension.
Park recalls that are unanswered by the parking extension.
I
FFl 3# lO# (O-1 2)#
4
Attendant Call Reversion Timer setting
Default: 9 (180 seconds) (see table below)
Table l-16. Attendant Call Reversion Timer values
L
I
Setting
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
Value
No recall
j 20 seconds
1 40 seconds
60 seconds
80 seccnds
100 seconds
120 seconds
140 seconds
1 160 seconds
180 seconds
200 seconds
220 seconds
240 seconds
1
Related Programming
Extension Hold Recall Timer for CO Calls: FFl 3# 3# (0-12)#
Extension Transfer Recall Timer for CO Calls: FFl 3# 5# (0-12)#
Extension Park Hold Recall Timer: FFl 3# 9# (0-12)#
Night Mode Restiction. This feature is not available when the DBS is in
“Night” or “Night 2” mode.
DBS-70-400
DBS Manual - Issued 8/l/95
Technical Manuals Online! - http://www.tech-man.com
Page l-101
Section 400-Programming
Chapter 1. System Programming (FFl )
Unsupervised Conference Timer
Software Version: All Versions
Address: FFl 3## ll# (0115)#
Description
This address determines how long a conference call can continue between
two trunks after the DBS extension drops out of the conference (10 minutes
by default). When the timer expires, the DBS will automatically disconnect
the conferenced trunks.
This timer also determines how long outbound trunk calls made through
DISA can last.
Programming
FFI 3# 11# (0115)#
f
Unsupervised Conference Timer setting
Default: 2 (10 minutes j (see table below)
Table l-17. Unsupervised Conference Timer values
Setting
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
.
Value
Unlimited (DBS will not disconnect the
two conferenced trunks)
5 minutes
10 minutes
15 minutes
20 minutes
25 minutes
30 minutes
35 minutes
40 minutes
45 minutes
50 minutes
55 minutes
60 minutes
65 minutes
70 minutes
75 minutes
Related Programming
Unsupervised Trunk Conference: FF2 (Trunk)# 16# (0 or l)#
Unsupervised Conference: FF3 (ExtPort)# 13# (0 or l)#
Page l-102
DBS Manual - Issued 8/l/95
Technical Manuals Online! - http://www.tech-man.com
DBS-70-400
Section 4uu-rrogramming
Uiapter 1. system Progfammrng (FFl)
Automatic Pause Timer
Software Version: All Versions
Address: FFI 3# 12# (0-15)#
Description
When users program their phones with PBX access codes, Personal Speed
Dial numbers, or System Speed Dial numbers, they can insert pause(s) in
these numbers (by pressing the REDIAL key for each pause) so the system
will dial the numbers correctly. This address determines the length of each
pause inserted by the REDIAL programming key (3.5 seconds by default).
Programming
FFl 3# 12# (0115)#
f
Automatic Pause Timer setting
Default: 7 (3.5 seconds) (see table below)
Table 1-18. Automatic Pause Timer values
s
I--+
I+I
It+10
E=
1.5 seconds
2 seconds
2.5 seconds
3 seconds
3.5 seconds
4.0 seconds
4.5 seconds
5 seconds
5.5 seconds
6 seconds
6.5 seconds
7 seconds
7.5 seconds
Related Programming
Automatic Pause for PBX Line: FF2 (Trunk)++ 13# (0 or l)#
PBX Access Codes: FFl 2# 3# (l-8)# (O-999 or 0*-99*)#
Automatic Pause Position for PBX Access Codes: FFl 2# 3# (9-18)# (l-3)4+
Speed Dial Programming: FFlO addresses
DBS-70-400
DBS Manual - Issued 8/l/95
Technical Manuals Online! - http://www.tech-man.com
Page l-103
wmpia~
I.
oya~t311 riuyialIIiIIiIiy
GG~LIUI I Lcuu-r I uyl ai I II IIII iy
\r-r- 11
CO Flash Timer
Software Version: All Versions
A d d r e s s : FFl 351 13# (O-15)#
Description
A DBS phone user can press the FLASH key to disconnect from and then
reseize a CO loop-start trunk (this operation is called a “flash”). Pressing the
REDIAL key also performs a flash before automatically redialing a phone
number.
This CO Flash Timer determines how long the flash will last if FLASH or
RED&IL is depressed (1 second by default).
Exceptions: If the FLASH key is pressed and held down, the flash signal will
last as long as the key is pressed. (The flash generated by pressing REDIAL
is always controlled by the CO Flash Timer, regardless of how long REDIAL
is held down.) Also, if you are using a PBX or Centrex line, the FLASH key
will place the call on hold.
Programmjng ,
FFI 3# 13# (0115)#
$
CO Flash Timer setting
Default: 9 (1 second) (see table below)
NOTE: Settings 11 to 15 are available with CPC-A Version 3.3
or higher, and CPC-AU/B 5.0 or higher. These settings require
Loop-S tart Trunk Card VB-435 1 OA or VB -435 11 A.
Table I-19. CO Flash Timer values
Page l-104
DBS Manual - Issued 8/l/95
Technical Manuals Online! - http://www.tech-man.com
DBS-70-400
maprer I. oysiwi rrograrrwwig (t-t i 1
Yectton 4uwrrogrammtng
I
10
11
12
13
14
15
1 1.1 seconds
1 1.5 seconds
2 seconds
2.5 seconds
3.0 seconds
1 3.5 seconds
I
1
I
1
I
Related Programming
PBX Flash Timer: FFl 3# 18# (0- lO)#
Auto Flash Redial: FFl 2# l# 6# (0 or l)#
Trunk Circuit Type: FF2 (Trunk)# 21# (0 or l)#
Dialing Restriction During Inbound Trunk Calls for TRS Types 3-6: FF7 l#
2# (0 or l)#
Notes
Circuit Card Requirements. Timer settings 1 l- 15 are only available with the
loop-start trunk card (Part No. VB-435 10A or VB-435 11A).
Phone Type Restriction. The FLASH key function applies only to digital and
digital single-line telephones.
Tnrnk Type Restriction. This timer only applies to loop-start trunks.
.
FLASH and REDZAL Restriction. FLASH and REDIAL features are not
available with ground-start trunks. See Technote 13 (March 1992) for further
information.
SLT Flash Operation. Single-line telephones must press the hookswitch and
dial “87” to activate this feature.
Using FLASH Key With PBX or Centrex Lines. If you are using a PBX or
Centrex line, the FLASH key places the call on hold. See PBX Flash Timer
address (FFl 3# 18#) for more information.
DBS-70-400
DBS Manual - Issued 8/l/95
Technical Manuals Online! - http://www.tech-man.com
Page l-105
SLT Onhook Flash Timer
Software Version: All Versions
Address: Ffl 3# 14## (0-6)#
Description
This timer determines how long an SLT user must hold down the switchhook
before the DBS recognizes a hookflash (200 ms by default). This address
also includes a setting that prevents hookflashes from being performed on
SLTs.
If you change ,this setting, you must turn the system off, then back on to
activate the change.
Programming
I
FFl 3# 14# (0-6)#
t
SLT Onhook Flash Timer setting
Default: 4 (valid flash=200 to 1500 ms)
(see table below)
Table l-20. SLT Onhook Flash Timer values
Address
Setting
I
Notes
Page l-106
0
1
2
3
4
I
5
I
6
Flash Treatment
V&d Flash
Disconnect
No Detection
Greater than 500 ms
Less than 200 ms 200 to 500 ms
Greater than 700 ms
Less than 200 ms 200 to 700 ms
Less than 200 ms 200 to 1000 ms Greater than 1000 ms
1I Less than 200 ms 1 I200 to 1200 ms 1 Greater
than 1200 ms I
I
Less than 200 ms 200 to 1500 ms Greater than 1500 ms
II Greater than 200 ms I
II LCSS than 200 ms II None
Greater than 500 ms
Less than 200 ms 200-500 ms
Power-Cycling Requirement. In order for changes to this program to take
effect, the system must be turned off, then back on.
DBS Manual - Issued 8/l/95
Technical Manuals Online! - http://www.tech-man.com
DBS-70-400
Section 400-Programming
Chapter 1. System Programming (FFl j
CO Ring Cycle Detection Timer
Software Version: All Versions
Address: FFl 3# 15# (0-3)#
Description
This timer determines how long the DBS attempts to detect an incoming CO
ring cycle (6 seconds by default).
To ensure that the DBS can recognize incoming trunk calls, set this timer to
equal the duration of the ring cycle -- including the first “on” period and the
first “off’ period. For example, if the ring cycle for an incoming trunk is 2
seconds on/ 4 seconds off, this parameter should be set to at least 6 seconds to
detect the full cycle. If this timer is set too short, the DBS will not recognize
valid CO ring signals.
See Figure 1-2 below for an example of proper CO ring cycle detection
timing for an incoming pattern of 2 seconds on/4 seconds off.
Figure 1-2. Example of a CO Rinn Cycle and its Detection Timer
2 seconds on
2 saconcis on
.
Lisecondsoff
n
Incoming
Ring Cycle
I
CO Ring
- Cycle
Detection
Timer
Programming
FFI 3# 15# (O-3)#
A
I
CO Ring Cycle Detection Timer setting:
Od seconds
I=6 seconds
2=8 seconds
3=10 seconds
Related Programming
Inbound Ring Cycle Expansion Timer: FFl 3# 16# (0-15)#
DBS-70-400
DBS Manual - Issued 8/l/95
Technical Manuals Online! - http://www.tech-man.com
Page l-l 07
section 400~Programming
Chapter 1. system rrogrammlng (t-k1 )
Inbound Ring Cycle Expansion Timer
Software Version: All Versions
Address: FFl 3## 16# (0-15)#
Description
If the incoming ring pattern for an extension (FF3 ExtPort# 39#) is set to
emulate CO ringing, an extension may sometimes receive a very short ring
burst when a trunk call begins ringing. This short ring burst occurs because
the DBS received only part of the first “on” burst (see Figure l-2, previous
page) from the trunk.
To eliminate these short rings, this timer can be used to expand initial ring
bursts. For example, if the timer is set to 350 ms and the first ring burst only
lasts 50 ms, the fist ring burst sent to the extension will be 350 ms. If the
first ring burst is over 350 ms, the timer is ignored and the DBS emulates the
initial CO ring.
Programming
FFl 3# 16# (0115)#
4
Inbound Ring Cycle Expansion Timer setting
Default: 7 (350 ms) (see table below)
. Table l-21. Inbound Ring Cycle Expansion Timer valaes
Value
Setting
0
I---
2fi
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
Page I-108
1
Synchronizes to the incoming call signal
50 ms
i iOOms
150 ms
200 ms
250 ms
I 300 ms
350 ms
400 ms
450 ms
500 ms
550 ms
600 ms
650 ms
700 ms
750 ms
DBS Manual - Issued 8/l/95
Technical Manuals Online! - http://www.tech-man.com
DBS -70-400
Chapter 1. System Programming (FFl)
Section 400-Programming
Dial Pause Timer
Software Version: All Versions
Address: FFl 3# 17# (O-15)#
Description
Use this address to insert a pause (1.5 seconds by default) before outpulsing
dialed digits, once a CO trunk is accessed.
The pause is used in speed-dialing (SSD and PSD) and in Least Cost Routing
uw.
Programming
I
FFl 3#I 17# (045)#
Dial Pause Timer setting
Default: 1 (1.5 seconds) (see table below)
Tdle I-22. Dial Pause Timer values
1
Value
1 1.2 seconds
1.5 seconds
2 seconds
1 3 seconds
I
! 4 seconds
5
seconds
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
7 seconds
8 seconds
I9 seconds
10 seconds
11 seconds
12 seconds
13 seconds
14 seconds
15 seconds
Setting
1
2
3
4
1
t
I
DBS-70-400
5
.7
.8
DBS Manual - Issued 8/l/95
Technical Manuals Online! - http://www.tech-man.com
I
Page l-109
Chapter 1. System Programming (FFl)
Section 400-Programming
PBX Flash Timer
Software Version: All Versions
Address: FFl 3#I 18# (0-lO)#
Description
When a DBS trunk is defined as a PBX trunk, the FLASH key can be used to
place a call on hold.
This timer determines how long the flash signal will last if the FLASH key is
pressed then immediately released (.8 seconds by default).
If the FLASH key is pressed and held down, the flash signal will last as long
as the key is pressed.
Programming
I
FFl 3# 18# (0-lO)#
f
PBX Flash Timer setting
Default: 7 (.8 seconds) (see table below)
Table l-23. PBX Flash Timer values
Value
Setting
0
No flash
.2 seconds
seconds
seconds
.5 seconds
.6 seconds
.7 seconds
1
1
1
2
3
1
1
.3
.4
4
5
6
1
7
1
8
I
1
9
10
.8
1
.9
seconds
I
seconds
1 second
1.1 seconds
I
Related Programming
Auto Flash Redial: FFl 2# l# 6# (0 or l)#
Trunk Port Type: FF2 (Trunk)# lO# (1 or 2)#
Page l-110
DBS Manual - issued 8/l/95
Technical Manuals Online! - http://www.tech-man.com
DBS-70-400
Section 400-Programming
Chapter 1. System Programming (FFl)
Call Forward-No Answer Timer
Software Version: All Versions
Address: FFl 3# 19# (O-15)#
Description
The Call Forward-No Answer Timer determines how long an unanswered call
will ring at an extension before it is sent to a secondary destination (12
seconds by default).
NOTE: Although this address is present in all CPC versions, it controls
different ringing features in different versions (see table below):
Table I-24. King control for Call Forward-No Answer Timer
Ring Feature
Address
’ CPC-A
(aI4
CPCAll
WV
CPC-B
CPC-B
(prior to 3.1)
(3.1 or higher)
YES
YES
YES
YES
YES
I
1 (not available) 1
NO
NO
1 (not available) 1
NO
FFl 3# 19# CallForward-No Answer
] FFl 3# 28# 1 Hunt Group-No Answer
1 FFl 3# 26#
FFi 3# 27#
1 CO Delaved Rim
Extension Delayed Ring
1
I
YES
I
1
YES
i
YES
NO
I
NO
I
NO
i
YES = The Call Forward-No Answer Tier controls this ring feature.
NO = The Call Forward-No Answer Timer does nrit control this feature -- it has its own address (see “Address”
column).
(not available) = Contml of this ring feature is not available in this CPC version.
Programming .
1
FFI 3# 19# (0-15)#
t
Call Forward-No Answer Timer setting
Default: 2 (After 12 seconds) (see table below)
Table l-25. CaU Forward-No Answer Timer values
Setting 1 Value
0
After 4 seconds
1
After 8 seconds
I After 12 seconds
2
3
1 After 16 seconds
4
After 20 seconds
5
After 24 seconds
6
After 28 seconds
7
After 32 seconds
8
After 36 seconds
I
I
DBS-70-400
Setting
II
I,
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
DBS Manual - Issued 8/l/95
Technical Manuals Online! - http://www.tech-man.com
Value
After 40 seconds
After 44 seconds
I After 48 seconds
1 After 52 seconds
After 56 seconds
After 60 seconds
After 64 seconds
I
Page l-111
Chapter 1. System Programming (FFl)
Section 400-Programming
Outbound Ground Start Detection Timer
Software Version: @PC-B Version 1.0 or higher
Address: FFl 3## 20# (1-8)#
Description
This timer determines how long the DBS waits for the CO to ground the Tip
side of a trunk (4 seconds by default). before establishing a connection
between the extension and the CO.
When an extension attempts to place an outgoing call on a ground-start trunk,
the DBS grounds the Ring side of the trunk. in response, the CO grounds the
Tip side of the trunk. When the DBS detects the Tip ground, it will establish
the connection (the extension user will hear dial tone).
If the Tip ground is not received within the time set in this address, the DBS
will treat the trunk as unavailable (the extension user will hear busy signal).
Programming
I
I
FFi 3# 20# (108)#
f
Outbound Ground Start Detection Timer setting
Default: 4 (4 seconds) (see table below)
I
Table l-26. Outbound Ground Start Detection Timer values
Setting
Value
1
2
3
4
1 second
1 2 seconds
1 3 seconds
1
4
seconds
I I 5 seconds
1 6 seconds
I
7
8
I 7 seconds
I
1 8 seconds
Related Programming
Inbound Ground Start Detection Timer: FFl 3# 21# (l-8)#
Trunk Circuit Type: FF2 (Trunk)# 21# (0-4)#
Page l-112
DBS Manual - Issued 8/l/95
Technical Manuals Online! - http://www.tech-man.com
DBS-70-400
Section 400-Programming
Chapter 1. System Programming (FFl)
Inbound Ground Start Detection Timer
Software Version: CPC-B Version 1 .O or higher
Address: FFl 3## 21# (l-8)#
Description
This timer determines how long a CO Tip ground signal must be present
before the DBS recognizes it as a valid incoming call (4 seconds by default).
When the CO sends a call to a ground-start DBS trunk, it signals the incoming
call by grounding the Tip side of the trunk.
In most cases, this timer should be set to 3 seconds or longer. Otherwise, the
DBS may generate false ringing when Tip ground is not quickly removed at
the end of a call.
Programming
FFl 3# 21# (118)#
f
Inbound Ground Start Detection Timer setting
Default: 4 (4 seconds) (see table below)
Table l-27. Inbound Ground Start Detecfion Tinier values
1
Setting
1
Value
1 second
6
1 6 seconds
7 seconds
8 seconds
7
8
I
Related Programming
Outbound Ground Start Detection Timer: FFl 3# 20# (l-8)#
Trunk Circuit Type: FF2 (Trunk)# 21# (0-4)#
DBS-70-400
DBS Manual - Issued 8/l/95.
Technical Manuals Online! - http://www.tech-man.com
Page 1-113
Section 400-Programming
Chapter 1. System Programming (FFl)
Attendant Hold Recall Timer for Intercom Calls
Software Version: CPC-Ail (all versions) and CPC-B Version 2.0 or higher
Address: FFl 3## 22# (0-12)#
Description
This timer determines how long an intercom call will remain on hold at an
Attendant phone before it recalls (20 seconds by default).
Programming
I
FFl 3#
22# (0;12)#
I
Attendant Hold Recall Timer setting for Intercom Calls
Default: 1 (20 seconds) (see table below)
I
Table l-28. Attendant Hold Recall Timer values for intercom tails
Setting
0
1
t
2
3
4
11
12
Vaiue
No recall
20 seconds
40 seconds
60 seconds
80 seconds
1 100 seconds
1 120 seconds
1 140 seconds
1 160 seconds
1 180 seconds
1 200 seconds
220 seconds
240 seconds
Related Programming
Attendant Hold Recall Timer for CO Calls: FFl 3# 2# (0-12)#
Page 1-114
DBS Manual - Issued 8/l/95
Technical Manuals Online! - http://www.tech-man.com
DBS-70-400
Section 400-Programming
Chapter 1 System Programming (FFl)
Extension Hold Recall Timer for Intercom Calls
Software Version: CPC-All (ail versions) and CPC-B Version 2.0 or higher
Address: FFl 3# 23# (0-12)#
Description
This timer determines how long an intercom call will remain on hold at an
extension phone before it recalls (140 seconds by default).
Programming
FFl 3# 23# (0-12)#
f
Extension Hold Recall Timer setting for intercom calls
Default: 7 (140 seconds) (see table below)
Table l-29. Extension Hold Recall Timer values for intercom calls
I
Setting
I Value
1 No recall
I 20 seconds
1 40 seconds
1I 60 seconds
.I.80 seconds
1 100 seconds
I 120 seconds
I1 140 seconds
I 160 seconds
1 180 seconds
1 200 seconds
11 220 seconds
1 240 seconds
I
t
t
i
3
4
5
6
I
8
I
1
I
I
I
I
I
Notes
t
10
I
12
Recall Treatment for Intercom Calls. Unanswered recalls for intercom calls
will ring indefinitely at the extension.
DBS-70-400
DBS Manual - Issued 8/l/95
Technical Manuals Online! - http://www.tech-man.com
Page l-115
Attendant Transfer Recall Timer for Intercom Cdls
Software Version: CPC-Ail (ail versions) and CPC-B Version 2.0 or higher
Address: FFI 3## 24# (0-12)#
Description
This timer determines how long an Attendant-transferred intercom call will
ring at an extension before it recalls to the Attendant (20 seconds by default).
Programming
FFl 3# 24# (0912)#
f
Attendant Transfer Recall Timer setting for intercom calls
Default: 1 (20 seconds) (see table below)
Table l-30. Attendant Transfer Recall Timer values for intercom calls
Setting
0
I
6
Value
No recall
1 20 seconds
1 40 seconds
I 60 seconds
80 seconds
100 seconds
120 seconds
9
10
11
12
180 seconds
2 0 0 seconds
2 2 0 seconds
I 240 seconds
1
2
3
4
5
I
Related Programming
Attendant Transfer Recall Timer for CO Calls: FFl 3# 4# (0-12)#
Notes
Call Forward Interaction. If a call is transferred to an extension that has
Call Forwarding turned on, the call will follow the call forwarding path if the
Call Forward-No Answer Timer is less than the Recall Timer.
Page l-116
DBS Manual - Issued 8/l/95
Technical Manuals Online! - http://www.tech-man.com
DBS-70-400
Section 400-Programming
Chapter 1. System Programming (FFl)
Extension Transfer Recall Timer for Intercom Calls
Software Version: CPC-All (all versions) and CPC-B Version 2.0 or higher
Address: FFl 3# 25# (0-12)#
Description
This timer determines how long a transferred intercom call will ring at
another extension before it recalls back to the transferring extension (140
seconds by default).
Programming
FFI 3# 25# (0912)#
f
Extension Transfer Recall Timer setting for intercom calls
Default: 7 (140 seconds) (see table below)
T&le l-31. Extension Transfer Recall Timer values for intercom calls
Setting
0
1
2
3
4
11
12
Value
No recall
20 seconds
I 40 seconds
60 seconds
80 seconds
I 100 seconds
1 120 seconds
1 140 seconds
1 160 seconds
1 180 seconds
1 200 seconds
220 seconds
240 seconds
Related Programming
Extension Transfer Recall Timer for CO Calls: FFl 3# 5# (0- 12)#
Notes
Call Forward Interaction. If a call is transferred to an extension that has
call Forwarding turned on, the call will follow the call forwarding path if the
Call Forward-No Answer Timer is less than the Recall Timer.
DBS-70-400
DBS Manual - Issued 8/l/95
Technical Manuals Online! - http://www.tech-man.com
Page l-117
Section 400-Programming
Chapter 1. System Programming (FFi)
,, . .
CO Delayed Ring Timer
Software Version: CPCill (all versions) and CPC-B Version 3.1 or higher
Address: FFl 3f# 26# (O-15)#
Description
Programming
CO Delayed Ringing allows a second extension to ring when an incoming
trunk call is not answered at the first extension. This timer determines how
long a CO trunk call will ring at the first extension before it begins ringing at
the second extension. (When the second extension begins ringing, the first
extension will stop ringing.)
I
I
FFl
3#
26#
(0115)#
t
CO Delayed Ring Timer setting
Default: 2 (after 12 seconds) (see table below)
Table l-32. CO Delayed Ring Timer values
Sktting
0
1
2
I
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
Page 1-118
Value
After 4 seconds
After 8 seconds
1 After 12 seconds
1 After 16 seconds
1 After 20 seconds
1 After 24 seconds
1 After 28 seconds
After 32 seconds
After 34 seconds
After 36 seconds
After 44 seconds
After 48 seconds
After 52 seconds
After 56 seconds
After 60 seconds
After 64 seconds
I
I
I
DBS Manual - Issued 8/i/95
Technical Manuals Online! - http://www.tech-man.com
D68-70-400
Section 400-Programming
Chapter 1. System Programming (FFl)
Related Programming
Delayed Ring: FFl 2# 1# 21# (0 or l)#
CO Delayed Day Ring Assignments : FF4 5# (ExtPort)# (Trunk)#
CO Delayed Day Ring Assignments for Hunt Groups: FF4 5# (HuntGrp)#
U’~W+
CO Delayed Night 1 Ring Assignments: FF4 6# (ExtPort)# (Trunk)#
CO Delayed Night 1 Ring Assignments for Hunt Groups: FF4 6#
(HuntGrp)# (Trunk)#
CO Delayed Night 2 Ring Assignments: FF4 9# 2# (ExtPort)# (Trunk)#/
CO Delayed Night 2 Ring Assignments for Hunt Groups: FF4 9# 2#
(HuntGrp)# (Trunk)##
Notes
DES-70-400
CO Delajed Ring Cot&o1 in Older CPC-B Versions. In CPC-B versions
prior to 3.1, CO delayed ringing is controlled by the Call Forward-No Answer
Timer (FF13# 19#0-1%).
DBS Manual - Issued 8/l/95
Technical Manuals Online! - http://www.tech-man.com
Page 1-119
Chapter 1. System Programming (FFl)
Section 400-Programming
Extension (DSS/BLF) Delayed Ring Timer
Software Version: CPC-All (all versions) and CPC-B Version 3.1 or higher
Address: FFl 3# 27# (O-15)#
Description
Extension Delayed Ringing allows a second extension to ring when an
intercom call is not answered at the first extension. This timer determines
how long the intercom call will ring at the first extension before it begins
ringing at the second extension. (When the second extension begins ringing,
the first extension will stop ringing.)
Note: The covering station needs a DSS/BLF key.
Programming
I
FFl 3# 27# (0115)#
f
Extension Delayed Ring Timer setting
Default: 2 (after 12 seconds) (see table below)
Table l-33. Extension Delayed Ring Timer values
11
12
13
14
15
Page l-120
After 48 seconds
After 52 seconds
After 56 seconds
After 60 seconds
After 64 seconds
DBS Manual - Issued 8/l/95
Technical Manuals Online! - http://www.tech-man.com
DBS-70-400
Chapter 1. System Programming (FFl)
Section 400~Programming
Related Programming
Extension (BLF) Delayed Ring: FFl .2# l# 30# (0 or l)#
Extension Delayed Ring Table: FF4 8# (ExtPort)# (ExtPort)## (0 or l)#
Notes
Extension Delayed Ring Control in Older CPC-B Versions. In CPC-B
versions prior to 3.1, extension delayed ringing is controlled by the Call
Forward-No Answer Timer (FF13# 19# 0-15#).
DBS-70-400
DBS Manual - Issued 8/l/95
Technical Manuals Online! - http://www.tech-man.com
Page l-121
section 4uu-Programming
Lnapter 1. system rrogrammrng (t-I-1 )
Hunt Group No Answer Timer
Software Version: CPC-All (all versions) and CPC-B Version 3.1 or higher
Address: FFl 3# 28# (0-15)#
Description
If a call has entered a hunt group and the first extension to ring is not
answered, this timer determines how long the extension will ring before the
next idle extension in the hunt group begins ringing (12 seconds by default).
Programming
I
FFl 3# 28# (0115)#
f
Hunt Group No Answer Timer setting
Default: 2 (after 12 seconds) (see table below)
Table l-34. Hunt Group No Answer Timer values
Setting
0
1
2
3
Notes
! Value
After 4 seconds
After 8 seconds
After 12 seconds
After 16’ seconds
Extension Delayed Ring Control in Older CPC-B Versions. In CPC-B
versions prior to 3.1, extension delayed ringing is controlled by the Call
Forward-No Answer Timer (FFl 3# 19# 0- 1%).
Page 1-122
DBS Manual - Issued 8/l/95
Technical Manuals Online! - http://www.tech-man.com
DBS-70-400
Section 400-Programming
Chapter 1. System Programming (FFI)
Automatic Day Mode Start Time
Software Version: CPC-All (all versions) and CPC-6 Version 4.0 or higher
Address: FFl 3## 29# HHMM#
Description
Setting the Automatic Day Mode Start Time allows the DBS to switch from
Night mode to Day mode automatically.
You can program trunks to ring incoming calls at different extensions during
Day or Night mode (see FF4 addresses). And different TRS types can be
programmed for use in each mode (see FF8 addresses).
i
To set the automatic start time for Night mode, use FFl 3# l# HHMM. A
second Night mode is also available in Version 7.0 or higher of CPC-AII or
CPC-B -- see FFl 3# 30# HHMM.
Programming
To set the Automatic Day Mode Start Time . . .
Enter the time using the 24-hour format. The following example sets the time
.
to 8:30 a.m.:
I
I
FFl 3# 29# 0830#
Time Setting (8330 a.m.)
(in 24-hour format)
To clear the Start Time (disable Day Mode) . . .
I
FFl 3# 29# CONF ON/OFF
I
Related Programming
Time Setting: FFl l# 2# HHMM#
Automatic Night Mode Start Time: FFl 3# l# HHMM#
Automatic Night 2 Mode Start Time: FFl 3# 30# HHMM#
CO Ring Assignments: FF4 addresses
Toll Restriction: FF8 addresses
DBS-70-400
DBS Manual - Issued 8/l/95 ,
Technical Manuals Online! - http://www.tech-man.com
Page 1-l 23
Chapter 1. System Programming (FFl)
Notes
Section 400-Programming
System Clock. The Automatic Day Mode start time depends on the DBS
system clock being set correctly.
NIGHT Key Operation. If only one of the Auto Mode Start Ties is set, the
Attendant NIGHT key can be used to manually switch to another mode. For
instance, if Night mode has been activated automatically, the Attendant can
press the NIGHT key to go into Day mode. (However, the Attendant must
wait at least 3 minutes after the mode is automatically activated, before using
the NIGHT key to switch the mode again.)
In CPC-AU/B versions prior to 7.0, if both Auto Day and Auto Night Mode
Start Times are set, the Attendant NIGHT key cannot be used to manually
switch modes. (However, it will work in Version 7.0 or higher; or press #520
to toggle between Day, Night and Night 2 modes.)
SUGGESTION (for versions prior to 7.0): Set only the Auto Night
Mode Start Xme, so that the DBS will automatically switch to Night
mode each night -- and each morning the Attendant phone can press
the NIGHT key to manually switch to Day mode.
Required Intervals Between Auto Day and Night Modes. If you set both
Auto Mode Start Times. it is recommended that the start times differ by at
least 1 hour.
Page l-124
DBS Manual - Issued 8/l/95
Technical Manuals Online! - http://www.tech-man.com
DBS-70-400
Chapter 1. System Programming (FFl )
Section 400-Programming
Automatic Night 2 Mode Start Time
Scftware Version: CPC-All and CPC-B, Version 7.0 or higher
Address: FFl 3#! 30# HHMM#
Description
In this address, you can activate a second Night mode by setting the
Automatic Night 2 Mode Start Time. This allows the DBS to switch from
Night to Night 2 mode automatically at the time set in this address.
You can program trunks to ring incoming calls at different extensions during
Day or Night mode (see FF4 addresses). And different TRS types can be
programmed for use in each mode (see FF8 addresses).
To set the automatic start time for Night mode, use FF13# l# HHMM. To set
the Automatic Day Mode Start Time, use FF13# 29# HHMM.
Programming
To set the Automatic Night 2 Mode Start Time . . .
I
FFl 3# 30# (OOOO-2359)#
Night 2 Mode Start Time
(in 24-hour format)
To clear the start. time (disable Night 2 Mode) . . .
I
FFl 3# 30# CONF ON/OFF
I
Related Programming
Time Setting: FFl l# 2# HHMM#
Automatic Day Mode Start Time: FFl 3# 29# HHMM#
Automatic Night 1 Mode Start Time: FFl 3# l# HHMM#
CO Ring Assignments: FF4 addresses
Toll Restriction: FF8 addresses
Notes
DBS-70-400
System Clock. The automatic start time for Night 2 depends on the DBS
system clock being set correctly.
DBS Manual - Issued 8/l/95
Technical Manuals Online! - http://www.tech-man.com
Page 1-125
NIGHT Key Operation. If only one of the Auto Mode Start Times is set, the
Attendant NIGHT key can be used to manually switch to another mode. For
instance, if Night mode has been activated automatically, the Attendant can
press the NIGHT key to go into Day mode. (However, the Attendant must
wait at least 3 minutes after the mode is automatically activated, before using
the NIGHT key to switch the mode again.)
In CPC-AII/B versions prior to 7.0, if both Auto Day and Auto Night Mode
Start Ames are set, the Attendant NIGHT key cannot be used to manually
switch modes. (However, it will work in Version 7.0 or higher; or press #520
to toggle between Day, Night and Night 2 modes.)
SUGGESTION (for versions prior to 7.0): Set only the Auto Night
Mode Start Time, so that the DBS will automatically switch to Night
mode each night -- and each morning the Attendant phone can press
the NIGHT key to manually switch to Day mode.
Required Intervals Between Auto Day and Night Modes. If you set both
,4uto Mode Start Times, it is recommended that the start times differ by at
least 1 hour.
Page 1-126
DBS Manual - Issued 8/l/95
Technical Manuals Online! - http://www.tech-man.com
DBS-70-400
Section 400-Programming
Chapter 1. System Programming (FFl)
Programming and DISA Codes
Remote Programming ID Code
Software Version: All Versions
Address: FFl 4## (0000-9999)#
Description
The Remote Programming ID Code allows you to enter the terminal
programming mode. This programming mode is used to enter programming
commands from a remote PC or a local PC connected directly to the SMDR
port (CN6).
You can enter the remote programming mode through any of these three
methods:
By dialing into the system through a direct DISA trunk
By dialing into the system through a regular CO trunk, then recjuesting the
operator to enter the Remote Programming ID Code
By using a local PC and communications package to connect directly to
the DBS serial port.
For more information on the terminal programming mode. see Appendix B.
l
l
l
Programming
To set the Remota Programming ID Code . . .
To reset the ID Code to the default (9999)...
FFl 4## CONF ON/OFF
DBS-70-400
DBS Manual - Issued 8/l/95
Technical Manuals Online! - http://www.tech-man.com
I
Page l-l 27
Section 400-Programming
Chapter 1. System Programming (FFl)
DISA Inbound Call ID Code
Software Version: All Versions
Address: FFl 5## (0000-9999)#
Description
Use this address to set a valid ID code for inbound DISA (Direct Inward
System Access) callers. By default, no ID code is defined. which means a
caller who dials a DISA trunk will receive intercom dial tone immediately
without entering an ID code.
If you define a DISA Inbound Call ID Code in this address, callers dialing in
on the DISA trunk will receive a fast-busy tone. The caller must then dial the
DISA Inbound Call ID Code to receive the intercom dial tone.
Programming
To set the DISA ID Code . . .
I
FFI 5# (0000;9999)#
J-Digit DISA Inbound ID Code
(Default: ****>
To clear the DISA ID Code . . .
FFl 5# CONF ON/OFF
Related Programming
DISA Outbound Call ID Code 1: FFl 6# l# (0000-9999)#
DISA Outbound Call ID Code 2: FFl 6# 2# (0000-9999)#
DISA Start lime: FF2 (Trunk)!+ 19# HHMM#
DISA End Time: FF2 (Trunk)# 20# HHMM#
DISA Auto Answer: FF2 (Trunk)# 1 l# HHMM#
Page 1-128
DBS Manual - Issued 8/i/95
Technical Manuals Online! - http://www.tech-man.com
DBS-70-400
Chapter 1. System Programming (FFl)
Section 400-Programming
DISA Outbound Call ID Code 1
Software Version: All Versions
Address: FFl 6## l# (0000-9999)#
Description
Once a caller has dialed in on the DISA trunk and accessed intercom dial
tone, he/she can access a trunk line by dialing #7, then the ID code set in this
address (1111 by default), then 9 or 81-86 to access the MC0 trunk.
Programming
To set DISA Outbound ID Code 1 . . .
I
FFl 6# l# (0000;9999)#
4-Digit DISA Outbound ID Code 1
(Default: 1111)
To reset DISA Outbound ID Code 1 to default “1111” . . .
I
FFI 6# 1# CONF ON/OFF
I
Reiated Programming
DISA Auto Answer: FF2 (Trunk)# ll# (0 or l)#
DISA inbound Call ID Code: FFl 5# (0000-9999)#
DISA Outbound Call ID Code 2: FFl 6# 2# (0000-9999)#
DISA Start Time: FF2 (Trunk)# 19# (HHMM)#
DISA l&d Time: FF2 (Trunk)# 20# (HHMM)#
Notes
-.
DISA Limitations -1) A 16-second timer is set between the dialing of the DISA Outbound ID
Code. If a time-out results, the DISA call is treated as a normal call.
2) The DBS supports up to two valid 4-digit DISA Outbound ID Codes, so
that you can track two different groups of DISA callers on SMDR reports.
3) Accessing trunks via DISA can take place only on trunk (MCO) groups.
4) LCR (Least Cost Routing) is not supported on DISA trunks.
5) Trunk calling with DISA will override all TRS.
DBS-70-400
DBS Manual - Issued 8/l/95
Technical Manuals Online! - http://www.tech-man.com
Page l-l 29
Chapter 1. System Programming (FFi)
Section 400-Programming
DISA Outbound Call ID Code 2
Software Version: All Versions
Address: FFl 6## 2# (OOOO-9999)#
Description
Once a caller has dialed in on the DISA trunk and accessed intercom dial
tone, he/she can access a trunk line by dialing #7, then the ID code set in this
address (9999 by default), then 9 or 81-86 to access the MC0 trunk.
Programming
To set DISA Outbound Call ID Code 2 . . .
FFl 6# 2# (OOOO-9999)#
t
4-Digit DISA Outbound ID Code 2
(Default: 9999)
To reset DISA Outbound ID Code 2 to default “9999” . . .
I
FFl 6# 2# CONF ON/OFF
1
Related Programming
DISA Auto Answer: FF2 (Trunk)# ll# (0 or l>#
DISA Inbound Call ID Code: FFl 5# (0000-9999)#
DISA Outbound Call ID Code 1: FFl 6# l# (0000-9999)#
DISA Start Time: FF2 (Trunk)# 19# (HHMM)#
DISA End Timei FF2 (Trunk)## 20# (HHMM)#
Notes
DISA Limitations -1) A 16-second timer is set between the dialing of the DISA Outbound ID
Code. If a time-out results, the DISA call is treated as a normal call.
2) The DBS supports up to two valid 4-digit DISA Outbound ID Codes, so
that you can track two different groups of DISA callers on SMDR reports.
3) Accessing trunks via DISA can take place only on trunk (MCO) groups.
4) LCR (Least Cost Routing) is not supported on DISA trunks.
5) Trunk calling with DISA will override all TRS.
Page 1-130
DBS Manual - Issued 8/i/95
Technical Manuals Online! - http://www.tech-man.com
DBS-70-400
Section 400~Programming
Chapter I. System Programming (FFl)
ID Code For System Programming
Software Version: Ail Versions
Address: FFl 7# (0000-9999)#
Description
This program assigns an ID code that can be dialed from a non-Attendant
phone to enter the programming mode (9999 by default).
Non-Attendant extensions enter the programming mode by dialing #98 and
then the ID Code entered in this address.
Programming
To assign the ID Code for system programming . . .
FFI 7# (OOOO-9999)#
f
4-Digit ID Code for System Programming
(Default: 9999)
To reset the ID Code to default “9999” . . .
FFI 7# CONF ON/OFF
Notes
DBS-70-400
Entering the Programming Mode. Oniy one extension can be in
programming mode at a particular time.
DBS Manual - Issued 8/l/95
Technical Manuals Online! - http://www.tech-man.com
Page 1-131
Section 400-Programming
Chapter 1. System Programming (FFl)
New Function Reset
New Function Reset
Software Version: CPC-B Only, Version 4.0 or higher
Address: FFI 8# 1# (0 or l)# (to select the reset)
FFI 8# 2# (0 or l)# (to complete the reset)
Description
Perform this address if you are upgrading CPC-B software to a new release
(such as from 5.0 to 6.0). However, it is not necessary if you are upgrading to
a “point” release (such as 6.0 to 6.1). New Function Reset should be
performed immediately after changing-out the EPROM chips on the CPC-B
card.
New Function Reset initializes SRAM (Static Random Access Memory). It
clears unused registers and adds new programs, but retains all current DBS
program settings. Exception: If you are upgrading from a CPC-B version
prior to 3.1, New Function Reset will clear existing DID numbers (which are
extension-based -- see FF3 ExtPort## 3%). Beginning with Version 3.1, DID
numbers are stored in the ‘Inbound DID Numbers” table (see FFl 8# 3#
address). New Function Reset will erase extension-based DID numbers, but
it will not erase the Inbound DID Numbers table.
Prdgramming
FFl 8# l# (Oor l)#
+
O=Do not perform New Function Reset.
l=Perform New Function Reset.
NOTE: If you enter “1” (to reset), the following displays:
ir%EE-j
This is to confirm that you want to reset the data before the DBS
actually performs the reset. Press one of the following:
O=Do not complete the reset.
1 =Complete the reset.
Related Programming
CO Ring Assignments: FF4 addresses
CO Ring Cycle Detection Timer: FFl 3# 1% (0-3)#
Page 1-132
DBS Manual - Issued 8/l/95
Technical Manuals Online! - http://www.tech-man.com
.
DBS70-400
Chapter 1. System Programming (FFl)
Section 400-Programming
DID/DNIS and Tl Settings
Inbound DID Dial Numbers
Software Version: CPC-B Version 3.1 or higher
Address: FFl 6# 3## (OOOO-9999)## (IO-69 or lOO-699)#
Description
Use this address to assign DID number(s) to extension(s).
Up to 500 DID numbers can be assigned.
One DID number can be assigned to multiple extensions (this will take up
only one entry in the 500 available entries).
One extension can have multiple DID numbers assigned to it. (The
number of entries taken up is equal to the number of DID numbers
assigned to the extension.)
Programming
I
I
FFl 8# 3# (OOOO-9999)# (lo-69 or lOO-699)#
+
+
4-D&$ DID Number
I
Extension Number
I
Related Programming
Multiple DID,DNIS: FFl 2# l# 32# (0 or l)#
DID/DNIS (enabling trunks for): FFl 8# ## 6# (Trunk)# 2# (0-2)#
DID Flexible Ringing Assignments: FFl 8# 5# (DIDNo.)# (ExtNo.)#
(0000[00]-1111[11])#
.
DID Immediate or Wink Start: FF2 (Trunk)# 22# (0 or l)#
Wink Start Timer: FF2 (Trunk)# 23# (0-15)#
Time Out for Dialed DID Digits: FF2 (Trunk)# 24# (0-15)#
DID Interdigit Timeout: FF2 (Trunk)++ 25# (0-15)#
Extension Numbers: FF3 (ExtPort)# l# (ExtNo.)#
Notes
DID Number Assignment in Older CPC-B Version. In CPC-B Version 2.0,
DID numbers were stored with extension port settings, rather than in a
separate table (see FF3 ExtPort# 35# for more information).
DBS-70-400
DBS Manual - Issued 8/l/95
Technical Manuals Online! - http://www.tech-man.com
Page 1-133
DID Hardware and Power Requirements. The DID trunk card is required
(each DID card provides 8 ports). The DID trunk card requires an external,
-48V power supply. Also, SCC-B Card Version 1.2 or higher is required. See
Section 300~Installation for cabling instructions.
Dial Pulse Requirement. Ti:e DID trunk card requires dial-pulse dialing.
Digit Length Requirement. The DBS only supports 4-digit DID numbers.
DID Ring Control. Ringing for the DID number at the assigned extension(s)
is controlled by the DID Flexible Ringing Assignments address (FFl 8# 5#).
Page 1-134
DBS Manual - issued 8/l/95
Technical Manuals Online! - http://www.tech-man.com
DBS-70-400
Section 400-Programming
Chapter 1. System Programming (FFI)
System Configuration
Software Version: CPC-B Version 4.0 or higher
A d d r e s s : FFl 8# 4## l# 1# (0-8)#
Description
Use this address to identify the DBS system configuration in which the Tl
interface is installed (DBS 40 by default).
This is one of the required addresses to make Tl operational. See
YHinimum Tl Programming” below for more information.
Programming
System Configuration
Default: 0 (DBS 40)
(see table below)
Table l-35. System ConfQzuatitm for TI installation
Setting
I
Notes
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
Value
DBS40
DBS 72
1 DBS 96
1 DBS 40 + DBS 40
DBS 72 + DBS 40
DBS 72 + DBS 72
1 DBS 96 + DBS 40
1 DBS 96 + DBS 72
1 CBS 96 + DBS 96
’ Notes
1
/ TI must be in slave cabinet 1
Tl is not supported
Tl must be in slave cabinet
Power-Cycling Requirement. For changes to this parameter to take effect,
the system must be turned off, then back on.
Minimum Tl Programming. The following table (see next page) lists the
programs that need to be set in order to make Tl operational. Default settings
appear in bold. In most cases, you do not have to change the defaults for any
remaining Tl programs.
DBS-70-400
DBS Manual - Issued 8/l/95
Technical Manuals Online! - http://www.tech-man.com
Page l-135
Section 400-Programming
Chapter 1. System Programming (FFI)
Table l-36. Minimum Tl programming (default settings appear in bold)
STEP 1 -- NEW FUNCTION RESET
Address:
Description:
Options:
,
FFl 8# l# (0 or l)# (to select the reset)
FFl 8# 2# (0 or l)# (to complete the reset)
Must be performed if you are installing Tl while upgrading
to a new CPC-B release (e.g., from 6.2 to 7.0). Not needed
if you are upgrading to a “point” release (e.g., from 6.0 to
6.2).
O=Do not reset
l=Reset
STEP 2 -- SYSTEM CONFIGURATION
FFl 8# 4# l# l# (O-8)#
Enter the DBS cabinet configuration.
\
I
O=DBS 40
l=DBS 72
2=DBS 96
3=DBS 40 + DBS 40 (Tl must be in slave cabinet)
4=DBS 72 + DBS 40 (Tl is not supported)
5=DBS 72 + DBS 72 (Tl must be in slave cabinet)
6=DBS 96 + DBS 40
7=DBS 96 + DBS 72
S=DBS 96 + DBS 96
STEP 3 -- SYNC SOURCES
FFl 8# 4# l# 2# (l-3)# for Sync Source 1
FFl 8# 4# l# 3# (0-3j# for Sync Source 2
FFl 8# 4# l# 4# (0-3)# for Svnc Source 3
Assign the sync sources.
The Sync Card (installed on the CPC-B) provides a method
of synchronizing the DBS with the public network. If the
first sync source fails, the DBS will switch to the second
sync source, and will then attempt to return to the first
source based on the “Network Re-Sync Timer” value. If
the second source fails and the first source is not working,
the system will switch to the third source.
The DBS considers a clock source to have failed when the
‘Slip Rate Error Counter” is exceeded within a 24-how
period.
(continued)
Page 1-136
DBS Manual - Issued 8/l/95
Technical Manuals Online! - http://www.tech-man.com
DBS-70-400
Section 400-Programming
iddress:
continued)
Iescrip tion:
continued)
lp tions:
Zxamples:
Chapter 1. System Programming (FFl)
FFl 8# 4# l# 2# (l-3)# for Sync Source 1
FFl 8# 4# I# 3# (0-3)# for Sync Source 2
FFl 8# 4# l# 4# (0-3)# for Sync Source 3
The “Free run” setting is the only setting that can be
entered for more than one sync source. One of the three
sync sources should be set to “Free run”, so that the Tl can
provide its own clocking if the network clock fails.
For changes to this parameter to take effect, the system
must be Powered down. then Dowered back UD.
O=None (default for Sync Sources 2 and 3)
l=Tl of the master cabinet
2=Tl of the slave cabinet
3=Free run (internal clocking) (default for Sync
Source 1)
In most cases, the sync sources should be set as follows for
these system configurations:
Tl in a Single Cabinet, or Tl in a Master Cabinet:
Sync Source 1 = 1 (Tl of the master cabinet)
Sync Source 2 = 3 (Free run)
Sync Source 3 = 0 (None)
Tl in a Slave Cabinet:
Sync Source 1 = 2 (Tl of the slave cabinet)
Sync Source 2 = 3 (Free run)
Sync Source 3 = 0 (None)
Tls in the Master and Slave Cabinets:
Sync Source 1 = 1 (Tl of the master cabinet)
Sync Source 2 = 2 (Tl of the slave cabinet)
Svnc Source 3 = 3 (Free run)
STEP 4 -- TRUNK CONFIGURATION
Address:
Description:
op tions:
DBS-70-400
I FFl 8# # 4## l# l# (0 or l)# for Master Cabinet
lFF1 844 # 5# l# l# (0 or l)# for Slave Cabinet
Specify the trunk configuration.
O=Analog only
l=Tl and analog trunks
DBS Manual - Issued 8/l/95
Technical Manuals Online! - http://www.tech-man.com
I
I
Page 1-137
Chapter 1. System Programming (FFl )
Section 400-Programming
STEP 5 -- NUMBER OF Tl CHANNELS
Address:
Description:
FFl 8# # 4# l# 2# (0-24)# for Master Cabinet
FFl 8# 4# 5# l# 2# (0-24)# for Slave Cabinet
Specify the number of Tl channels used when “Fractional
Tl” is needed (using only a portion of the 24 available
channels on the Tl card).
Options:
0 = None (no Tl channels are used)
1 thru 24 = Number of Tl channels used
STEP 6 -- FRAME FORMAT
iddress:
Jescription:
Options:
FFl 8# # 4# l# 3# (0 or l># for Master Cabinet
FFl 8# 4# 5# l# 3# (0 or l)# for Slave Cabinet
Specify the framing format used by the Tl.
Be sure to match the framing format ordered from the CO.
In most cases, SF (SuperFrame; also known as D4) is used.
SF consists of 12 frames, with each frame including 192
information bits.
ESF (Extended SuperFrame) can also be selected. ESF
consists of 24 frames, and supports monitoring and mainte
nance capabilities not available in the SF format.
For changes to this parameter to take effect, the system
must be powered down, then powered back up.
0 = SF (D4)
l=ESF
STEP 7 -- LINE CODING (CLEAR CHANNEL) FORMAT
Address:
Description:
Options:
FFl 8# 4#/ 4# l# 4# (0 or l)# for Master Cabinet
FFl 8# 4## 5# l# 4## (0 or l)# for Slave Cabinet
Specify the clear channel format used by the Tl for line
coding.
Be sure to match the clear channel format ordered from the
CO. In most cases, AM1 (Alternate Mark Inversion) is
used. B8ZS (Binary 8-Zeros Suppression) can also be
selected.
For changes to this parameter to take effect, the system
must be powered down, then powered back up.
O=AMI
1 = B8ZS
Page 1-138
DBS Manual - Issued 8/l/95
Technical Manuals Online! - http://www.tech-man.com
DBS-70-400
Chapter 1. System Programming (FFC
Section 400-Programming
STEP 8 -- TRUNK CIRCUIT TYPE
Iddress:
>escription:
1p tions:
FF2 (l-64)# 21# (0-4)##
Specify which trunk channels are used for Tl.
When assigning trunks as circuit type “3” (Tl), start from
the highest-numbered trunk port in the DBS cabinet structure, and move down sequentially from there.
If Fractional Tl is used, make sure that the number of
trunks assigned to circuit type “3” (Tl) matches the “Num
ber of Tl Channels” setting (see STEP 5 above). Also, if
your CPC-B version is 5.0 to 6.02, make sure the remaining
trunk ports on the TRK card are opened for analog usage in
the “Tl Trunk Closure” address (see FFl 8# 7# in this DBS
Manual).
For changes to this parameter to take effect, the system
must be powered down, then powered back up.
0 = Loop Start
1 = Ground Start
2 = Analog DID
3=Tl
4 = Caller ID (loop start) (available only with CPC-B
Version 6.1 or higher)
STEP 9 -- Tl TRUNK TYPE EMULATION
Address:
Description:
Options:
DBS-70-400
FFl 8# 4#! 6# (l-64)# l# (0-3)##
Specify the type of trunk signaling that each Tl channel
emulates.
Be sure to match the signaling ordered from the CO. If
your system uses Tl COP Version 1.1 or 1.2 and you wish
to use the “Ground Start” setting, it must be upgraded to
Version 1.4 or higher.
For changes to this parameter to take effect, the system
must be powered down, then powered back up.
0 = Loop Start emulation
1 = (reserved for future use)
2 = Ground Start emulation
3=E&M
DBS Manual - Issued 8/l/95
Technical Manuals Online! - http://www.tech-man.com
Page 1-139
Chapter 1. System Programming (FFi)
Section 400-Programming
STEP 10 -- OUTGOUNG SIGNALING TYPE
Address:
Description:
FFl 8# # 6# (l-64)# 3# (0-2)#
Specify the outgoing signaling type used by the Tl.
Be sure to match the signaling ordered from the CO.
For changes to this parameter to take effect, the system
must be powered down, then powered back up.
Options:
0 = Immediate Start
l=WinkStart
2 = Dial Tone Start
STEP 11 -- INCOMING SIGNALING TYPE
4ddress:
Description:
FFl 8# 4#/ 6# (l-64)# 4# (0\ or l)#
Specify the incoming signaling type used by the Tl.
Be sure to match the signaling ordered from the CO.
For changes to this parameter to take effect, the system
must be powered down, then powered back up.
3ptions:
0 = Immediate Start/Ringdown
1 =WinkStart
Page l-1 40
DBS Manual - issued 8/l/95
Technical Manuals Online! - http://www.tech-man.com
DBS-70-400
Chapter 1. System Programming (FFl)
Section 400-Programming
Sync Source 1
Software Version: CPC-6 Version 4.0 or higher
Address: FFl 8## 4# 1# 2# (l-3)##
Description
The Sync Card (installed on the CPC-B) provides a method of synchronizing
the DBS with the public network. This address determines the first clocking
source for network synchronization (internal clocking by default).
If the first clocking source fails, the system wili switch to the second source.
The system will attempt to go back to the fist source based on the Network
Re-Sync Timer setting (see FFl 8# 4#/ 2# l# 0-25#).
The system considers a clock source to have failed when the Slip Counter is
exceeded within a 24hour period. See FFl 8# 4## 4/5# 3# 2# (0-9000)# for
instructions on setting the Slip Counter.
Typically, Sync Source 1 is Tl of the master cabinet. See “Notes” below for
a list of typical sync source settings for single- and double-cabinet systems.
Programming
I
FFl 8# 4# I# 2# (193)#
f
l=Tl of the master cabinet
2=Tl of the slave cabinet
3=Free run (internal clocking)
Note: Settings 1 and 2 synchronize
Tl clocking with the public network.
Notes
Typical Sync Settings. In most cases, sync sources should be set as follows
for these configurations:
Tl in a Single Cabinet -- or -- Tl in a Master Cabinet
Source 1:
Source 2:
Source 3:
1 (Tl of the master cabinet)
3 (Free run)
0 (None)
Tl in a Slave Cabinet
Source 1:
Source 2:
Source 3:
2 (Tl gf the slave cabinet)
3 (Free run)
0 (None)
Tls in the Master and Slave Cabinets
Source 1:
Source 2:
Source 3:
DBS-70-400
1 (Tl of the master cabinet)
2 (Tl of the slave cabinet)
3 (Free run)
DBS Manual - Issued 8/l/95
Technical Manuals Online! - http://www.tech-man.com
Page l-141
Chapter 1. System Programming (FFl)
Section 400-Programming
Restriction on Duplicate Sync Settings. “Free run” is the only setting that
can be entered for more than one sync source.
Power-Cycling Requirement. For changes to this parameter to take effect,
the system must be turned off, then back on.
Page l-142
DBS Manual - Issued 8/l/95
Technical Manuals Online! - http://www.tech-man.com
DBS-70-400
Chapter 1. System Programming (FFl)
Section 400-Programming
Sync Source 2
Software Version: WC-6 Version 4.0 or higher
A d d r e s s : FFl 8# 4# l# 3# (O-3)#
Description
Determines the source of clocking for the second sync source, which is used
if the first sync source fails.
If the second sync source is used, the DBS system will attempt to switch back
to the first source based on the value set for the Network Re-Sync Timer (see
FFl 8# 4# 2# l# 0-25#). If the second source fails and the first source is not
working, the system will switch to the third source.
In most cases, a system with one Tl has the second sync source set to “3”
(Free run). Systems with two Tls normally have the second sync source set
to “2” (Tl of the slave cabinet).
NOTE: One of the three sync sources should be set to “3” (Free run), so that
the Tl can provide its own clocking if the network clock fails.
See the Sync Source 1 address for an introduction to Tl clocking, and a list
of typical sync source settings in single-cabinet and double-cabinet systems.
Programming
kF1 8# 4# 1# 3# (093)#
P
O=None (default)
l=Tl of the master cabinet
2=Tl of the slave cabinet
3=Free run (internal clocking)
Note: Settings 1 and 2 synchronize
Tl clocking with the public network.
Notes
Restriction on Duplicate Sync Settings. “Free run” is the only setting that
can be entered for more than one sync source.
Power-Cycling Requirement. For changes to this parameter to take effect,
the system must be turned off, then back on.
DBS-70-400
DBS Manual - issued 8/l/95
Technical Manuals Online! - http://www.tech-man.com
Page l-143
waprer
I.
sysrem rrogrammlng (t-r
I
3ecIion 4uu-rrogrammwig
1
Sync Source 3
Software Version: CPC-B Version 4.0 or higher
Address: FFI 8# 4# 1# 4# (0-3)#
Description
Deterrnines the source of clocking for the third sync source, which is used if
both the first and second sources fail.
If the third sync source is used, the DBS system will attempt to switch back to
the first source based on the value set for the Network Re-Sync Timer (see
FFl 8# # 2# l# O-2%).
In most cases, a system with one Tl has the third sync source set to “0”
(None). Systems with two Tls normally have the third sync source set to “3”
(Free run).
NOTE: One of the three sync sources should be set to “3” (Free run), so that
the Tl can provide its own clocking if the network clock fails.
See the Sync Source 1 address for an introduction to Tl clocking, and a list
of typical sync source settings in single-cabinet and double-cabinet systems.
Programming
FFI 8# 4# l# 4# (093)#
O=None (default)
l=Tl of the master cabinet
2=Tl of the slave cabinet
3=Free run (internal clocking)
Note: Settings 1 and 2 synchronize
Tl clocking with the public network.
Notes
Restriction on Duplicate Sync Settings. “Free run” is the only setting that
can be entered for more than one sync source.
Power-Cycling Requirement. For changes to this parameter to take effect,
the system must be turned off, then back on.
Page 1-144
DBS Manual - issued 8/i/95
Technical Manuals Online! - http://www.tech-man.com
DBS-70-400
Section 400-Programming
Chapter 1. System Programming (FFI)
Network Re-Sync Timer
Sofhwate Version: CPC-B Version 4.0 or higher
Address: FFl 8# M 2# 1# (O-25)#
Description
If one clock source fails, the system will switch to another clock source. The
Network Re-Sync Timer determines how many times (once an hour) the
system attempts to return to the original clock source.
For example, if the first clocking (sync) source fails, the system will switch to
the second source, and then will attempt to return to the first source once an
hour for the number of times set in Network Re-Sync Timer. Likewise, if the
system switches to the third source (after the first and second sources fail), the
Network Re-Sync Tier determines how many times the system will attempt
to return to the original clocking source.
Programming
I
FFI 8# 4# 2# 1# (0925)#
Y
O=Immediate (DBS attempts to return
to first sync source immediately).
1-24=Number of hours the DBS attempts
to return to first sync source (once
an hour).
~&NO retries (DBS does not attempt
to switch to first sync source).
DBS-70-400
DBS Manual - Issued 8/l/95
Technical Manuals Online! - http://www.tech-man.com
Page l-145
Disconnect Timer
Software Version: CPC-B Version 4.0 or higher
Address: FFl 8# 4# 2# 2# (0112)#
Description
Determines how long the DBS waits before sending a disconnect signal from
the Tl to the CO (200 ms by default).
NOTE: The CO Disconnect Timer (FF2 Trunks 18# O-l%) determines how
long the system waits to receive a disconnect signal from the CO.
Programming
FFl 8# 4# 2# 2# (0112)#
;I
Disconnect Timer setting
Default: 1 (200 ms) (see table below)
Table l-37. TI Disconnect Timer values
Setting
0
2
3
4
II
1
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
Notes
Value
150 ms
I 200 ms
250 ms
300 ms
400 ms
500 ms
1000
ms
1500 ms
2000 ms
2500 ms
3000 ms
3500 ms
Off (DBS does not automatically
send a disconnect signal)
Power-Cycling Requirement. For changes to this parameter to take effect,
the system must be turned off, then back on.
Page 1-146
DBS Manual - Issued 811195
Technical Manuals Online! - http://www.tech-man.com
DBS-70-400
Chapter 1. System Programming (FFi)
Section 400-Programming
Guard Timer
Software Version: CPC-B Version 4.0 or higher
Address: FFl 8# 4# 2# 3# (0-15)#
Description
Determines how long the system guards a Tl circuit (1200 ms by default).
When the DBS “guards” a circuit, it holds the circuit after it has been released
to make sure the previous call is properly disconnected. This means the
channel cannot be used for another call until the Guard Timer has expired.
Programming
I
FFI 8# 4# 2# 3# (O-15)#
Guard Timer setting
Default: 6 (1200 rns) (see table below)
Table l-38. Tl Guard Timer values
Notes
DBS-70-400
Power-Cycling Requirement. For changes to this parameter to take effect,
the system must be turned off, then back on.
DBS Manual - issued 8/l/95
Technical Manuals Online! - http://www.tech-man.com
Page 1-147
Section 400-Programming
Chapter 1. System Programming (FFl)
Release Acknowledge Timer
Software Version: CPC-6 Version 4.0 or higher
Address: FFl 8# 4## 2# 4# (0-15)#
Description
Determines how long the DBS waits for the CO to acknowledge a disconnect
signal (240 seconds by default).
Once this timer expires, the DBS will abandon the call even if the CO has not
acknowledged the disconnect. This allows the DBS to disconnect idle Tl
trunks if the CO is not signaling properly.
Programming
FFl 8# 4# 2# 4# (0-15)#
f
Release Acknowledge Timer setting
Default: 9 (240 seconds) (see table below) I
Table l-39. Release Acknowledge Timer values
Setting
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
I
I
11
Value
1 second
2 seconds
5 seconds
1 10 seconds
20 seconds
30 seconds
60 seconds
90 seconds
120 seconds
240 seconds
11 480 seconds
1 960 seconds
1 1,080 seconds
1 1,420 seconds
1,920 seconds
An infinite number of seconds
I
I
t
Page 1-148
13
14
15
DBS Manual - Issued 8/l/95
Technical Manuals Online! - http://www.tech-man.com
DBS-70-400
c;napter 1. system rrogrammlng (FFI)
Section 4uo-rrogrammtng
Outpulse Delay Timer
Software Version: CPC-B Version 4.0 or higher
Address: FFl 8## 4# 2# 5# (0-S)##
Description
Determines how long the system waits before outpuising dialed digits to the
network (500 ms by default).
Programming
FFl 8## 4# 2# 5# (018)#
f
Outpulse Delay Timer setting
Default: 2 (500 ms) (see table below)
Table l-40. Outpulse Delay Timer values
DBS-70-400
DBS Manual - Issued 8/l/95
Technical Manuals Online! - http://www.tech-man.com
Page 1-149
Section 400-Programming
Chapter 1. System Programming (FFl)
Wink Timeout Timer
Software Version: CPC-B Version 4.0 or higher
Address: FFl 8# 4# 2# 6# (O-15)#
Description
When wink-start signaling is used, the DBS waits for a wink signal from the
CO when an extension user goes off-hook. Once a wink signal is received,
the DBS sends CO dial tone to the extension.
This timer determines how long the DBS waits for a wink signal once an
extension user goes off-hook (5500 ms by default). If the DBS does not
receive a wink signal before the timer expires, the DBS disconnects the Tl
channel and returns busy tone to the user.
Programming
I
FFl 8# 4# 2# 6# (0115)#
f
Wink Timeout Timer setting
Default: 15 (5500 ms) (see table below)
Table 1-41. Wink Timeout Timer values
Page l-l 50
DBS Manual - Issued 8/l/95
Technical Manuals Online! - http://www.tech-man.com
DBS-70-400
Chapter 1. System Programming (FFl)
Section 400-Programming
Incoming Detection Timer
Software Version: CPC-B Version 4.0 or higher
Address: FFl 8# 4## 2# 7# (0-15)#
Description
Once an incoming call seizes a DBS Tl trunk, this timer determines how long
the DBS waits before recognizing the seizure as an incoming call (90 ms by
default). The purpose of this timer is to prevent false incoming ringing.
This parameter only applies when E&M signaling is used.
Programming
1
1
FFl 8# 4# 2# 7# (0-15)#
f
Incoming Detection Timer setting
Default: 7 (90 ms) (see table below)
Table l-42. Incoming Detection Timer values
Setting
0
1
2
3
4
!
5
r
D&-70-400
~~
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
1
15
4
Value
20 ms
30 ms
40 ms
50 ms
60 ms
70 ms
80 ms
90 ms
100 ms
110 ms
120 ms
130 ms
140 ms
150 ms
160 ms
170 ms
DBS Manual - Issued 8/l/95
Technical Manuals Online! - http://www.tech-man.com
!
Page 1-151
Section 400-Programming
Chapter 1. System Programming (FFl)
Answer Supervision Timer
Sofhvare Version: CPC-B Version 4.0 or higher
Address: FFl 8# 4## 2# 8# (0-8)#
Description
When the DBS generates a call over the Tl. answer supervision is provided to
determine if the call is actually answered. This timer determines how long
the offhook signal from the called party must last before the DBS treats the
offhook signal as an answer.
Programming
I
FFl 8# 4# 2# 8# (018)#
f
Answer Supervision Timer setting
Default: 3 (600 ms) (see table below)
Table l-43. Answer Supervision Timer values
Setting
0
1
2
7
8
Page l-152
Value
50 ms
100 ms
200
ms
.
1 1000 ms
] 2000 ms
I3000 ms
4000 ms
10,000 ms
DBS Manual - Issued 8/l/95
Technical Manuals Online! - http://www.tech-man.com
DBS-TO-400
Chapter 1. System Programming (FFl)
Section 400-Programming
Immediate Glare Timer
Software Version: CPC-B Version 4.0 or higher
Address: FFl 8# 4## 2# 9# (0115)#
Description
“Glare” occurs when both ends of the same trunk are seized simultaneously,
resulting in connection between an incoming call and a DBS phone user
attempting to access an outside line.
Use this address to prevent glare when immediate-start signaling is used.
This timer determines how long the DBS will search for an incoming call on a
trunk channel before connecting a DBS extension user to it (60 ms by
default). The timer begins when the extension goes off-hook.
Programming
FFI 8# 4# 2# 9# (O-15)#
f
Immediate Glare Timer setting
Default: 3 (60 ms) fsee table below)
Table l-44. Immediate Glare Timer values
DBS-70-400
DBS Manual - Issued 8/l/95
Technical Manuals Online! - http://www.tech-man.com
. Page 1-153
Section 400-Programming
Chapter I. System Programming (FF’l)
Wink Glare Timer
Software Version: CPC-B Version 4.0 or higher
Address: FFl 8# 4# 2# 10# (0-15)#
Description
“Glare” occurs when both ends of the same trunk are seized simultaneously,
resulting in connection between an incoming call and a DBS phone user
attempting to access an outside line.
Use this address to prevent glare from occurring when wink-start signaling is
used. This timer determines how long the DBS will search for an incoming
call on a trunk channel before connecting a DBS extension user to it (60 ms
by default). The timer begins when a wink is received.
Programming
FFl 8# 4# 2# lO# (O-15)#
t
Wink Glare Timer setting
Default: 3 (60 ms) (see table below)
Table l-45. Wink Glare Timer values
Setting
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
Page l-1 54
Value
.
The DBS does not check for glare
20 ms
40 ms
6Oms
80 ms
100 ms
120ms
140 ms
160 ms
180 ms
200 ms
250 ms
300 ms
350 ms
400 ms
1 450 ms
DBS Manual - Issued 8/l/95
Technical Manuals Online! - http://www.tech-man.com
I
DBS-70400
Chapter 1. System Programming (FFl)
Section 400~Programming
Digital Pad Settings
Software Version: CPC-Bversion 4.0 or higher
Address: FFl 8# 4## 3# (l-12)# (l-12)# (0-30)#
Description
Adjusts the volurne of connections made via the Tl. Default volume levels
are included for connections between different types of terminals or circuits.
For example, a KTel-to-T1 connection may use one volume setting, while an
SLT-to-T1 connection may use another.
The volume settings are controlled by changing a pad number, which in turn
changes the loss or gain of the connection. In most cases, the default pad
settings do not need to be changed.
If the volume level of a connection is unsatisfactory, include the Receiving
and Sending circuit types in this program, and then adjust the volume by
assigning a new pad number.
Programming
FFl 8# 4# 3# (l-12)# (I-12)# (0130)#
f
f
Receiving
Sending
Circuit Type Circuit Type
(“To” Side) (“From” Side)
(see table below)
t
Pad No.
(see table, .
next page)
Table l-46. Digital Pad Settings - circuit types
Circuit Type
Setting
1
2
3
4
DBS-70-400
Value
K-Tel
SLT
Data
Analog CO Trunk
8
Option 2
9
10
11
12
DTMF
CON-F (SCC)
Tone 1 (MFR 1)
Tone 2 (MFR 2)
Notes
Reserved for future use.
.~I
pad levels to circuits that require
Reserved for future use.
DBS Manual - Issued 8/l/95
Technical Manuals Online! - http://www.tech-man.com
Page l-155
Chapter 1. System Programming (FFl)
Section 400-Programming
Table l-47. Digital Pad Setthgs - pad numbers and related dB levels
Table l-48. Digital Pad Settings - default values
Related Programming
Trunk Port Class: FF2 (Trunk)# 26# (4-8)#
Station Port Class: FF3 (ExtPort)# 37# (l-2 or 7-8)#
Page 1-156
DBS Manual - Issued 8/l/95
Technical Manuals Online! - http://www.tech-man.com
DBS-70-400
Section 400-Programming
Notes
Chapter 1. System Programming (FFl)
Example Digital Pad Adjustment. If calls to SLTs via a master Tl have low
volume levels, the pad levei for connections from the master Tl to all SLTs
can be changed.
By default, the pad level for connections from the master Tl to all SLTS is 16
(or -2 dB). To raise the volume by 2 d.B, change the pad value to 0 (or 0 dB)
by programming the following:
FFl 8# 4# 3## 2# !5f# O##
where:
DES-70-400
2% is the circuit type for SLTs;
5# is the circuit type for Tl in the master cabinet; and
O#I is the pad number for 0 dB loss/gain.
DBS Manual - Issued 8/l/95
Technical Manuals Online! - http://www.tech-man.com
Page l-l 57
Section 400-Programming
Chapter 1. System Programming (FFl)
Trunk Configuration
Software Version: CPC-B Versions 4.0 to 6.02
Address: Master Cabinet: FFl 8# 4## 4## 1# I# (0 or l)#
FFl 8# 4# 5# 1# 1# (0 or l)#
Slave Cabinet:
Description
Specifies the trunk combinations used in the DBS system (analog trunks only
by default).
Setting this address to “Tl and Analog trunks” tells the DBS system that Tl
and analog trunks are being used in the same cabinet. (Each Tl channel uses
up one trunk port on the analog trunk card.)
Programming
I
FFI 8# 4# (4 or 5)# 1# 1# (0 or l)#
+
4=Master Cabinet
5=Slave Cabinet
+
O=Analog trunks only.
l=Tl and Analog trunks.
Related Programming
Number of Tl Channels: FFl 8# 4# (4 or 5)# l# 2# (0-24)#
Tl TrunkClosure: FFl 8# 7# (1 or 2)# (l-4)# (l-8)# (0 or l)#
Trunk Circuit Type: F’F2 (Trunk)# 21# (0-3)#
Notes
Power-Cycling Requirement. For changes to this parameter to take effect,
the system must,be turned off, then back on.
CPC-B Versions Beginning With 6.03. The Trunk Configuration address
is no longer present -- simply use the Trunk Circuit Type address to assign
trunk ports as Loop-Start, Ground-Start, DID or Tl trunks.
Page 1-158
DBS Manual - Issued 8/l/95
Technical Manuals Online! - http://www.tech-man.com
DBS-70-400
Chapter 1. System Programming (FFl)
Section 400-Programming
Number of Tl Channels
Software Version: CPC-B Version 4.0 or higher
Address: Master Cabinet: FFl 8# 4# 4## 1# 2# (0-24)#
Slave Cabinet: FFl 8# 4# 5# l# 2# (O-24)#
Description
This program determines how many TI channels will be used in the DBS
system. This address provides “Fractional Tl” capability -- using only a
portion of the 24 available channels on the Tl card.
Since each Tl channel used will need one analog trunk port dedicated to it,
this setting will decrement the number of available analog trunk ports -- in
other words, each Tl channel used will subtract from the total number of
trunk ports available for analog usage.
In CPC-B 4.x versions (prior to 5.0), the entry for Number of Tl Channels
must be in increments of 8. This is because the entire analog trunk card (all 8
trunk ports on the same card) must be dedicated to Tl, even if only some of
the ports are used for Tl channels. In other words, the remaining (unused)
ports on the card are not available for use as analog trunks.
In CPC-B Version 5.0 and above, those remaining ports cuz be used as analog
trunks. Make sure the Number of Tl Channels setting equals the number of
trunks programmed for Tl in Trunk Circuit Type (FF2 Trunk# 21#).
Programming
I
I
FFI 8# 4# (4 or 5)# I# 2# (0-24)#
$
+
4=Master Cabinet Number of Tl Channels Used
5=Slave Cabinet
NOTE: In CPC-B versions prior to 5.0, this setting must be an increment
of “8” (0, 8, 16 or 24).
Related Programming
Trunk Configuration: FFl 8# # (4 or 5)# l# l# (0 or l)#
Tl Trunk Closure: FFl 8# 7# (1 or 2)# (l-4)# (l-8)# (0 or l)#
Trunk Circuit Type: FF2 (Trunk)# 21# (0-3)#
Notes
Power-Cycling Requirement. For changes to this parameter to take effect,
the system must be turned off, then back on.
Closing Analog Trunk Ports for Tl Usage. In CPC-B Versions 5.0 to 6.02;
make sure the trunk ports reserved for Tl are “closed” from loop-start usage
in the Tl Trunk Closure address (FFl 8# 7#).
DBS-70-400
DBS Manual - Issued 8/l/95
Technical Manuals Online! - http://www.tech-man.com
Page l-159
Chapter 1. System Programming (FFl)
Section 400-Programming
Frame Format
Software Version: CPC-6 Version 4.0 or higher
Address: Master Cabinet: FFl 8# 4# 4# l# 3# (0 or l)#
Slave Cabinet:
FFl 8# 4# 5# l# 3# (0 or l)#
Description
Selects the framing format used by the Tl. Either “Superframe” (SF) or
“Extended Super-frame” (ESF) can be selected.
The SF consists of 12 frames, with each frame including 192 information bits
and 1 framing bit. The ESF consists of 24 frames (double the length of the SF
format). ESF also supports monitoring and maintenance capabilities that are
not available with the SF format.
Programming
FFl 8# 4# (4 or 5)# l# 3# (0 or l)#
f
4=Master Cabinet
5=Slave Cabinet
Notes
t
O=Superframe (SF)
l=Extended Super-frame (ESF)
Central Office Requirement. The framing format must match what is
ordered from the CO.
Power-Cycling Requirement. For changes to this parameter to take effect,
the system must be turned off, then back on.
Page l-160
DBS Manual - Issued 8/l/95
Technical Manuals Online! - http://www.tech-man.com
DBS-70-400
Chapter 1. System Programming (FFI)
Section 400-Programming
Line Coding
Software Version: CPC-B Version 4.0 or higher.
Address: Master Cabinet: FFl 8# 4# 4# 1# 4# (0 or I)#
FFl 8# 4## 5## l# 4# (0 or l)#
Slave Cabinet:
Description
Programming
Selects the line coding format used by the Tl. Either “BSZS” (binary g-zeros
suppression) or “AMP (Alternate Mark Inversion) can be selected. In most
cases (and by default), AMI is used.
I
~
FFl 8# 4# (4 or 5)# l# 4# (0 or l)#
f
f
4=Master Cabinet
5=Slave Cabinet
Notes
O=AMI (Alternate Mark Inversion)
l=B8ZS (binary g-zeros suppression)
Central Ofice Requirement. The framing format must match what is
ordered from the CO.
Power-Cycling Requirement. For changes to this parameter to take effect,
.the system must be turned off. then back on.
DBS-70-400
DBS Manual - Issued 8/l/95
Technical Manuals Online! - http://www.tech-man.com
Page 1-161
sectlon 400~Programming
Lnapter 1. System Programming (FFl)
Failure Mode
Software Version: CPC-6 Version 4.0 or higher
Address: Master Cabinet: FFl 8# 4## 4## I# 5# (0 or l)#
Slave Cabinet:
FFl 8# 4# 5# l# W (0 or l)#
Description
Determines the way the system responds to alarms. By default, the system
will continue to operate even if errors are detected.
Programming
I
FFl 8# 4## (4 or 5)# 1# 5# (0 or I)#
f
4=Master Cabinet
5=Slave Cabinet
Notes
P?ge l-l 62
f
O=Mode 1 (the Tl continues to
operate even if errors
are detected)
l=Mode 2 (the Tl shuts down if
errors are detected)
Power-Cycling Requirement. For changes to this parameter to take effect,
the system must be turned off, then back on.
DBS Manual - Issued 8/l/95
Technical Manuals Online! - http://www.tech-man.com
DBS-70-400
Section 400-Programming
Chapter 1. System Programming (FF1)
Remote Loopback
Software Version: CPC-B Version 4.0 or higher
Address: Master Cabinet: FFl 8# 4#I 4# l# 6# (0 or l)#
Slave Cabinet:
FFl 8# 4# 5# l# 6# (0 or l)#
Description
DBS-70-400
This address is reserved for future use.
DBS Manual - Issued 8/l/95.
Technical Manuals Online! - http://www.tech-man.com
Page l-163
Chapter 1. System Programming (FFl)
Section 400-Programming
Yellow Alarm Send
Software Version: CPC-B Version 4.0 or higher
Address: Master Cabinet: FFl 8# 4## 4# 1# 7# (0 or l)#
Slave Cabinet:
FFl 8# 4## 5# 1# 7W (0 or l)#
Description
Determines whether the DBS sends a yellow alarm signal to the CO.
A yellow alarm is sent to the distant end of the Tl link to indicate that a red
alarm has occurred. If a red alarm occurs at the CO, the CO sends a yellow
alarm to the DBS. If a red alarm occurs at the DBS, the DBS sends a yellow
alarm to the CO.
Programming
I
FFl 8# 4# (4 or5)# l# 7# (0 or l)#
+
4==Master Cabinet
5=S1 ave Cabinet
f
O=No
l=Yes
Related Programming
Yellow Alarm Detection: FFl’ 8# 4# (4 or 5)# 2# 2# (0-15)#
Yellow Alarm Recovery: FFl 8# 4# (4 or 5)# 2# 3# (0-15)#
Yellow Alarm Counter: FFl 8# # (4 or 5)# 3# 6# (0-15)#
Yellow Alarm Relay: FFl 8# 4# (4 or 5)# 4# l# (0-15)#
Yellow Alarm FF Key: FF5 (ExtPort)# (Key)# CONF (107# or 127#)#
Page 1-164
DBS Manual - Issued 8/l/95
Technical Manuals Online! - http://www.tech-man.com
DBS-70-400
Chapter 1. System Programming (FFl)
Section 400-Programming
Flash Key Operation
Software Version: CPC-B Version 4.0 or higher
Address: Master Cabinet: FFl 8## 4## 4## l# 8# (0 or l)#
Slave Cabinet:
FFl 8## 4# 5# 1# 8# (0 or l)#
Description
In the current version of DBS Tl, a “switchhook flash” releases and reseizes
the Tl line.
Programming
1
$
4=Master Cabinet
5=Slave Cabinet
DBS-70-400
1
FFl 8# 4#I (4 or 5)# l# 8# (0 or l)#
DBS Manual - Issued 8/l/95
Technical Manuals Online! - http://www.tech-man.com
$
O=Release and reseize
l=Reserved for future use
Page 1-165
Chapter 1. System Programming (FFi)
Section 400-Programming
Red Alarm Detection
Software Version: CPC-6 Version 4.0 or higher
Address: Master Cabinet: FFl 8# 4# 4# 2# 1# (015)#
Slave Cabinet:
FFI 8# 4## 5# 2# 1# (015)#
Description
The default value for this parameter is determined by network specifications.
It should not be changed.
If a red alarm occurs, the “CFA” LED on the Tl card lights. Also, if the Red
Alarm Relay (FFl 8# 4# 4/5# 4# 2#) is enabled, the alarm relay on the Tl
MDF card closes.
Programming
I
FFl 8# 4# (4 or 5)# 2# l# (O-5)#
$
4=Master Cabinet
5=Slave Cabinet
$
0=4
1=6
2=8
3=10
4=12
5=14
Related Programming
Red Alarm Counter: FFl 8# 4# (4 or 5)# 3# 3# (0-9000)#
Red Alarm Relay: FFl 8# # (4 or 5)# 4# 2# (0 or l)#
Red Alarm FF Key: FF5 (ExPort)# (Key)# CONF (103# or 123#)#
Page l-l 66
DBS Manual - Issued 8/l/95
Technical Manuals Online! - http://www.tech-man.com
DBS-70-400
Chapter 1. System Prcgramming tFF1)
Section 400-Programming
Yellow Alarm Detection
Software Version: CPC-B Version 4.0 or higher
Address: Master Cabinet: FFl 8# 4# 4## 2# 2# (0-15)#
Slave Cabinet:
FFl 8## 4# 5# 2# 2# (0-15)#
Description
Programming
Determines how long a yellow alarm signal must be on before the system
detects a yellow alarm. When a yellow alarm occurs, the “YEL” LED on the
Tl card lights. Also, if the Yellow Alarm Relay (FFl 8i: 4# 4/5n” 1# l#) is
enabled, the alarm relay on the TI MDF card closes.
I
1
FFl 8# 4## (4 or 5)# 2# 2# (045)#
7
4=Master Cabinet
5=Slave Cabinet
$
I
Yellow Alarm Detection timer setting
Default: 1 (50 ms) fsee tabie below!
Table I-49. Yellow Alarm Detection timer values
I
Setting
!
Value
( 150 ms
4
1 200 ms
5
1250ms
I
1
[ 3OOms
I350 ms
1 400 ms
I450 ms
DBS-70-400
10
500 ms
11
550ms
12
600 ms
13
650 ms
14
,700 ms
15
750ms
DBS Manual- Issued 8/l/95
Technical Manuals Online! - http://www.tech-man.com
Page1 -167
Chapter 1. System Programming (FFl)
Section 400-Programming
Related Programming
Yellow Alarm Send: FFl 8# 4#/ (4 or 5)# l# 7# (0 or l)#
Yellow Alarm Recovery: FFl 8# 4# (4 or 5)# 2# 3# (0-15)#
Yellow Alarm Counter: FFl 8# 4## (4 or 5)# 3# 6# (0-9000)#
Yellow Alarm Relay: FFl 8# 4# (4 or 5)# # l# (0 or l)#
Notes
Page 1-168
Power-Cycling Requirement. For changes to this parameter to take effect,
the system must be turned off, then back on.
DBS Manual - Issued 8/l/95
Technical Manuals Online! - http://www.tech-man.com
DBS-70-400
Chapter 1. System Programming (FFI)
Section 400-Programming
Yellow Alarm Recovery
Software Version: CPC-B Version 4.0 or higher
Address: Master Cabinet: FFl 8# 4## 4## 2# 3# (0115)#
FFl 8# 4#I 5# 2# 3# (0115)#
Slave Cabinet:
Description
Determines how long the DBS tries to recover from a yellow alarm before it
re-syncs the Tl trunk.
Programming
FFl 8# 4# (4 or 5)# 2# 3# (0115)#
7
4=Master Cabinet
5=Slave Cabinet
f
Yellow Alarm Recovery timer setting
Default: 1 (10 rns) (see table below) I
Table l-50. Yellow Alarm Recovery timer values
I
Setting
Value
0
Orlis
1
1 1oms
2
20 ms
3
30 ms
4
5
40 ms
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
DBS-70-400
I
50 ms
60 ms
70 ms
80 ms
90 ms
110 ms
120 ms
130 ms
140 ms
150 ms
160 ms
DBS Manual - Issued 8/l/95
Technical Manuals Online! - http://www.tech-man.com
Page 1-169
Chapter 1. System Programming (FFi)
Section 400-Programming
Related Programming
Yellow Alarm Send: FFl 8# 4## (4 or 5)# l# 7# (0 or l)#
Yellow Alarm Detection: FF1 8# # (4 or 5)# 2# 2# (0-15)##
Yellow Alarm Counter: FFl 8# 4# (4 or 5)# 3# 6# (0-9000)#
Yellow Alarm Relay: FFl 8# 4# (4 or 5)# 4## l# (0 or l)#
Notes
Power-Cycling Requirement. For changes to this parameter to take effect,
the system must be turned off, then back on.
Page l-l 70
DBS Manual - Issued 8/i/95
Technical Manuals Online! - http://www.tech-man.com
DBS-70-400 _
Section 400-Programming
Chapter 1. System Programming (FFl)
Other Alarms Detection
Software Version: CPC-B Version 4.0 or higher
Address: Master Cabinet: FFl 8# 4## 4# 2# 4# (0-15)#
FFl 8# 4# 5# 2# 4# (0015)#
Slave Cabinet:
Description
Determines how long an out-of-frame (OOF), loss of signal, sync loss, or AIS
signal must be on before the system generates an alarm.
If an OOF, Sync Loss, or AIS alarm occurs, a corresponding LED on the Tl
card lights. (Sync Loss alarms light the “SLIP” LED.)
The alarm relay on the Tl MDF card will also close if the corresponding relay
parameter is enabled.
Programming
I
I
FFI 8# 4# (4 or 5)# 2# 4# (0-15)#
7
4=Master Cabinet
5=Slave Cabinet
t
Other Alarms Detection timer setting
Default: 1 (250 rns) (see table below)
Table l-51. Other Alarms Detection timer values
Setting
0
Value
Oms
I 250ms
I
I
I
2
3
4
5
6
I1 500 ms
I 750 ms
1000 ms
I 1250 ms
I 1500 ms
I 1750ms
1 2000 ms
II 2500 ms
I 3000 ms
I 3500 ms
4000 ms
4500 ms
5000 ms
I 5500 ms
1
1
I
8
10
12
13
14
15
DBS-70-400
I
DBS Manual - Issued 8/l/95
Technical Manuals Online! - http://www.tech-man.com
1
Page l-171
C
h
a
p
t
e
r
Related Programming
Other Alarms Recovery: FFl 8# 4## (4 or 5)# 2# 5# (0-15)#
Notes
Power-Cycling Requirement. For changes to this parameter to take effect,
the system must be turned off, then back on.
Page 1-l 72
DBS Manual - issued 8/l/95
Technical Manuals Online! - http://www.tech-man.com
.
DBS-70-400
Section 400-Programming
Chapter 1. System Programming (FFl)
Other Alarms Recovery
Software Version: CPC-B Version 4.0 or higher
Address: Master Cabinet: FFl 8# 4#I 4# 2# 5# (O-15)#
Slave Cabinet:
FFl 8## 4# 5# 2# 5# (O-15)#
Description
Determines how long the DBS tries to recover from an Out-Of-Frame (OOF),
Loss of Signal, Sync Loss, or AIS alarm before it re-syncs the Tl trunk.
Programming
I
FFI 8# 4## (4 or 5)# 2# 5# (0115)#
7
4=Master Cabinet
5=Slave Cabinet
Other Alarms Recovery timer setting
Default: 1 (250 ms) (see table below)
Table I-52. Other Alarms Recovery timer values
Setting
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
Value
Oms
250 ms
500 ms
750 ms
1000 ms
1500 ms
2000 ms
2500 ms
3000 ms
4000 ms
5000 ms
6000 ms
7000 ms
8000 ms
9000 ms
10000 ms
Related Programming
Other Alarms Detection: FFl 8# 4## (4 or 5)# 2# 4## (0-15)#
Notes
DBS-70-400
Power-Cycling Requirement. For changes to this parameter to take effect,
the system must be turned off, then back on.
DBS Manual - issued 8/l/95
Technical Manuals Online! - http://www.tech-man.com
Page l-173
3ection 4uwrrogrammlng
bikiprer I. 3ysrerr1 rrogrammwg \rr I)
Frame Loss Counter
Software Version: CPC-B Version 4.0 or higher
Address: Master Cabinet: FFl 8# 4# 4## 3# 1# (019000)#
FFl 8# 4# 5# 3# 1# (O-9000)#
Slave Cabinet:
Description
Determines how many frame losses occur before a Frame Loss Alarm FF key
is lit. The FF key lights when the counter exceeds the specified number
within a 24-hour period.
For instructions on programming Tl alarm keys, see the TI Reference
Manual (Section 500).
Programming
FFl 8# 4#/ (4 or 5)# 3# l# (019000)#
f
4=Master Cabinet
5=Slave Cabinet
Number of Frame Losses that occur
within a 24-hour period before a
Frame Loss Alarm FF key is lit
Default: 9000
Related Programming
Frame Loss Relay: FFl’ 8# 4# (4 or 5)# 4# 4# (0 or l)#
Page l-l 74
DBS Manual - issued 8/l/95
Technical Manuals Online! - http://www.tech-man.com
DBS-70-400
Section 400-Programming
Chapter 1. System Programming (FFl)
Slip Counter
Software Version: CPC-B Version 4.0 or higher
Address: Master Cabinet: FFl 8# 4# 4# 3# 2# (0-9000)#
FFl 8# 4#I 5# 3# 2# (0-9000)#
Slave Cabinet:
Description
Determines how many slips occur before a Slip Alarm FF key is lit. (“Slips”
are losses of data bits due to framing errors.) The FF key lights when the
counter exceeds the specified number within a 24-hour period.
This parameter also determines the number of slips that can occur before the
system switches to the next clock source, at which time the slip error
counter for the first clock source is reset, and all phone calls in progress
are disconnected. It takes 20 seconds for the Tl to reboot.
For instructions on programming Tl alarm keys, see the Tl Reference
Manual (Section 500).
Programming
I
FFl 8# 4# (4 or 5)# 3# 2# (O-9000)#
f
4=Mas ter Cabinet
5=Slave Cabinet
Number of Slips that must occur
within a 24-hour period before a
Slip Alarm FF key is lit
Default: 9000
Related Programming
Sync Source 1: FFl 8# 4# l# 2# (l-3)#
Sync Source 2: FF1 8# # l# 3# (0-3)#
Sync Source 3: FFl 8# 4# l# 4# (0-3)#
Slip FF Key: FF5 (ExtPort)# (Key)# CONF ( 102# or 122#)#
DBS-70-400
DBS Manual - Issued 8/l/95
Technical Manuals Online! - http://www.tech-man.com
Page 1-175
Chapter 1. System Programming (FFl)
Section 400-Programming
Red Alarm Counter
Software Version: WC-6 Version 4.0 or higher
Address: Master Cabinet: FFl 8# 4# 4# 3# 3# (019000)#
FFl 8# 4# 5# 3# 3# (O-9000)#
Slave Cabinet:
Description
Determines how many red alarms occur before a Red Alarm FF key is lit.
The FF key lights when the counter exceeds the specified number within a
24-hour period.
For instructions on programming Tl alarm keys, see the TI Reference
Manual (Section 500).
Programming
FFl 8# 4# (4 or 5)# 3# 3# (O-9000)#
f
1
f
4=Master Cabinet Number of Red Alarms that must occur
5=Slave Cabinet
within a 24-hour period before a
Red Alarm FF key is lit
Default: 9000
Related Programming
Red Alarm Relay: FFl 8# 4# (4 or 5)# # 2# (0 or l)#
Red Alarm Detection: FFl 8# 4# (4 or 5)# 2# l# (0 or l)#
Red Alarm FF Key: FF5 (ExtPort)# (Key)# CONF (103# or 123#)#
Page l-l 76
DBS Manual - Issued 8/l/95
Technical Manuals Online! - http://www.tech-man.com
DBS-70-400
Section 400-Programming
Chapter 1. System Programming (FFl)
Loss of Signal Counter
Software Version: CPC-B Version 4.0 or higher
Address: Master Cabinet: FFl 8# 4# 4# 3## 4# (O-9000)#
Slave Cabinet:
FFl 8# 4# 5# 3# 4#I (0-9000)#
Description
Determines how many instances of loss of signal must occur before a Signal
Loss Alarm FF key is lit. Signal loss occurs when the incoming Tl signal is
not received for more than 150 ms. The FF key lights when the counter
exceeds the specified number within a 24-hour period.
For instructions on programming Tl alarm keys, see the TI Reference
h4anuai (Section 500).
Programming
FFl 8# 4# (4 or 5)# 3# 4# (0=9llOO)#
4=Master Cabinet
5=Slave Cabinet
Instances of Signal Loss that must occur
within a 24-hour period before a
Signal Loss Alarm FF key is lit
Default: 9000
Related Programming
Red Alarm Relay: FFl 8# 4# (4 or 5)# 4# 2# (0 or l)#
Red Alarm Detection: FFl 8# 4## (4 or 5)# 2# l# (0 or l)#
DBS-70-400
DBS Manual - Issued 8/l/95
Technical Manuals Online! - http://www.tech-man.com
Page l-1 77
Chapter 1. System Programming (FFl)
Section 400-Programming
Sync Loss Counter
Software Version: CPC-8 Version 4.0 or higher
Address: Master Cabinet: FFl 8# 4# 4# 3# 5# (O-9000)#
Slave Cabinet:
FFl 8# 4# 5# 3# 5# (019000)#
Description
Determines how many instances of sync loss must occur before a Sync Loss
Alarm FF key is lit. The FF key lights when the counter exceeds the specified
number within a 24-hour period.
For instructions on programming Tl alarm keys, see the Tl Reference
Manual (Section 500).
Programming
FFl 8# 4# (4 or 5)# 3# 5# (019000)#
/f
&Master Cabinet
5=Slave Cabinet
$
Instances of Sync Loss that must occur
within a 24hour period before a
Sync Loss Alarm FF key is lit
Default: 9000
Related Programming
Sync Loss Relay: FFl 8# # (4 or 5)# 4# 3# (0 or l)#
Page 1-178
DBS Manual - Issued 8/l/95
Technical Manuals Online! - http://www.tech-man.com
DBS-70-400
Chapter 1. System Programming (FFl)
Section 400-Programming
Yellow Alarm Counter
Software Version: CPC-B Version 4.0 or higher
Address: Master Cabinet: FFl 8# 4# 4# 3# 6# (O-9000)#
Slave Cabinet:
FFl 8# 4# 5# 3# 6# (0-9000)#
Description
Determines how many yellow alarms must occur before a Yellow Alarm FF
key is lit. The FF key lights when the counter exceeds the specified number
within a 24-hour period.
For instructions on programming Tl alarm keys, see the TI Reference
Manual (Section 500).
Programming
FFl 8# 4# (4 or 5)# 3# 6# (0-9000)#
4=Master Cabinet
5=Slave Cabinet
Number of Yellow Alarms that must
occur within a 24-hour period before
a Yellow Alarm FF key is lit
Default: 9000
Related P ogramming
Yellow Alarm Send: FFl 8# 4# (4 or 5)# l# 7# (0-15)#
Yellow Alarm Detection: FFl 8# 4# (4 or 5)# 2# 2# (O-15)+/
Yellow Alarm Recovery: FFl 8# 4# (4 or 5)# 2# 3# (0-15)#
Yellow Alar-n-t Relay: FFl 8# 4## (4 or 5)# 4# l# (0-15)#
Yellow Alarm FF Key: FF5 (ExtF’ort)# (Key)# CONF (107# or 127#)#
DBS-70-400
DBS Manual - Issued 8/l/95
Technical Manuals Online! - http://www.tech-man.com
Page 1-179
Section 400-Programming
Chapter 1. System Programming (FFl )
Yellow Alarm Relay
Software Version: CPC-B Version 4.0 or higher
Address: Master Cabinet: FFl 8# 4## 4## 4# l# (0 or l)#
FFl 8# 4# 5# 4# l# (0 or l)#
Slave Cabinet:
Description
Determines whether the system closes the alarm relay on the Tl MDF card in
the event of yellow alarms.
The alarm relay can be connected to an external alarm device such as a
buzzer. (This device must be purchased separately; it is not provided with the
DBS Tl.)
The Yellow Alarm Detection address (FFl 8# 4# 4/5# 2# 2# 0-15#)
determines how many yellow alarms occur before the relay closes.
Programming
FFl 8# 4# (4 or 5)# 4# l# (0 or l)#
4=Master Cabinet
5=Slave Cabinet
f
O=Off (Yellow Alarm relay does not close)
l=On (Yellow Alarm relay closesj
Related, Programming
Yellow Alarm Send: FFl 8# 4# (4 or 5j# l# 7# (0-15)#
Yellow Alarm Detection: FFl 8# 4## (4 or 5)# 2# 2# (0-15)#
Yellow Alarm Recovery: FF 1 8# 4# (4 or 5)# 2# 3# (0- lS)#
Yellow Alarm Counter: FFl 8# 4#+ (4 or 5)# 3# 6# (0-15)#
Yellow Alarm FF Key: FF5 (ExtPort)# (Key)# CONF (107# or 127#)#
Page l-180
DBS Manual - Issued 8/l/35
Technical Manuals Online! - http://www.tech-man.com
DES-70-400
Chapter 1. System Programming (FFl)
Section 400-Programming
Red Alarm Relay
Software Version: C&-B Version 4.0 or higher.
Address: Master Cabinet: FFl 8## 4# 4# 4#/ 2# (0 or l)#
Slave Cabinet:
FFl 8# 4#I 5## 4## 2# (0 or l)#
Description
Determines whether the system closes the alarm relay on the Tl MDF card in
the event of red alan-ns. A red alarm indicates that a loss of frame (OOF) or
loss of signal has continued for more than 2.5 seconds.
The alarm relay can be connected to an external alarm device such as a
buzzer. (This device must be purchased separately; it is not provided with the
DBS Tl.)
The Red Alarm Detection address (FFl 8# 4# 4/5# 2# l# 0-5#) determines
how many red alarms occur before the relay closes.
Programming
I
I
FF1 8# 4# (4 or 5)# 4# 2# (0
or I)#
f
4=Master Cabinet
5=Slave Cabinet
O=Off (Red Alarm relay does not close)
l=On (Red Alarm relay closes)
Related Programming
Red Alarrn Detection: FFl 8# 4## 4/5# 2# l# (0-15)#
Red Alarm Counter: FFl 8# 4## 4/5# 3# 3# (0-9000)#
DBS-70-400
DBS Manual - Issued 8/l/95
Technical Manuals Online! - http://www.tech-man.com
Page 1-181
Chapter 1. System PrOgrammIng (Wl)
Sectlon 400~Programming
Sync Loss Relay
Software Version: CPC-B Version 4.0 or higher
Address: Master Cabinet: FFl 8# 4## 4## 4#I 3# (0 or l)#
Slave Cabinet:
FFl 8W 4# 5# 4#I 3# (0 or l)#
Description
Determines whether the system closes the alarm relay on the Tl MDF card in
the event of sync loss alarms, which result from clocking errors.
The alarm relay can be connected to an external alarm device such as a
buzzer. (This device must be purchased separately; it is not provided with the
DBS Tl.)
Programming
FFI 8# 4# (4 or 5)# 4# 3# (0 or l)#
f
4=Master Cabinet
5=Slave Cabinet
O=Off (Sync Loss relay does not close)
l=On (Sync Loss relay closes)
Related Programming
Sync Loss Counter: FFl 8# 4# 4/5# 3# 5# (0-9000)#
Page 1-182
DBS Manual - Issued 8/l/95
Technical Manuals Online! - http://www.tech-man.com
DBS-IO-400
Chapter 1. System Programming (FFI )
Section 400-Programming
Frame Loss Relay
Software Version: CPC-6 Version 4.0 or higher
Address:. Master Cabinet: FFl 8# 4## 4# 4#! 4# (0 or l)#
FFl 8# 4## 5# 4# 4## (0 or l)#
Slave Cabinet:
Description
Determines whether the system closes the alarm relay on the Tl MDF card in
the event of frame loss alarms.
The alarm relay can be connected to an external alarm device such as a
buzzer. (This device must be purchased separately: it is not provided with the
DBS Tl.)
Programming
FFI 8# 4# (4 or 5)# 4# 4# (0 or l)#
I
4=Master Cabinet
5=Slave Cabinet
f
O=Off (Frame Loss relay does not close)
l=On (Frame Loss relay closes)
I
Related Programming
Frame Loss Counter: F?Fl 8# 4# 4/5# 3# l# (0-9000)#
DBS-70-400
DBS Manual - Issued 8/l/95
Technical Manuals Online! - http://www.tech-man.com
Page l-l 83
Section 400-Programming
Chapter 1. System Programming (FFl)
AIS Relay
Software Version: CPC-B Version 4.0 or higher
Address: Master Cabinet: FFl 8# 4# 4# 4# 5# (0 or l)#
FFl 8# 4# 5# 4# 5# (0 or I)#
Slave Cabinet:
Description
Determines whether the system closes the alarm relay on the Tl MDF card in
the event of Alarm Indication Signals (AIS), which are comprised of all l’s
and are unframed.
The alarm relay can be connected to an external alarm device such as a
buzzer. (This device must be purchased separately; it is not provided with the
DBS Tl.)
Programming
I
FFI 8# 4# (4 or 5)# 4# 5# (0 or I)#
I
4=Master Cabinet5=Slave Cabinet
f
O=Off (AIS relay does not close)
l=On (AIS relay closes)
Related Programming
Other Alarms Detection: FFL 8# 4## 4/5# 2# 4# (0-15)#
Other Alarms Recovery: FFl 8# # 4/5# 2# 5# (0-15)#
Page 1-l 84
DBS Manual - Issued 8/l/95
Technical Manuals Online! - http://www.tech-man.com
DBS-70-400
Chapter 1. System Programming (FFI)
Section 400-Programming
Relay Reset
Sofhwak Version: CPC-B Version 4.0 or higher
Address: Master Cabinet: FFl 8# 4# 4## 4# 6# (0 or I)#
Slave Cabinet:
FFl 8# 4## 5## 4#/ 6# (0 or l)#
Description
Determines whether the Tl alarm relay is cleared (opened) automatically or
manually.
l
l
If cleared automatically, the relay is opened approximately one second
after the alarm condition ceases.
If cleared manually, the relay can be opened by entering the Alarm Relay
Clear code:
- First, enter the programming authorization code -#98 9999
- Then enter one of the following codes:
ON/OFF #94 8 (for Master Cabinet)
ON/OFF #95 8 (for Slave Cabinet)
Programming
I
I
FFl 8# 4## (4 or 5)# 4## 6# (0 for l)#
4=Master Cabinet
5=Slave Cabinet
.
O=Automatically cleared
l=Must be manually cleared
Related Programming
Yellow Alarm Relay: FFl 8# 4#I 4/5# 4# l# (0-15)#
Red Alarm Relay: FFl 8# 4# 4/5# 4#+ 2# (0-15)#
Sync Loss Relay: FFl 8# 4# 4/5# 4# 3# (0-15)#
Frame LossRelay: FFl 8# 4# 4/5# 4# 4# (0-15)#
AIS Relay: FFl 8# 4# 4/5# 4## 5# (0- 15)#
DBS-70-400
DBS Manual - Issued 8/l/95
Technical Manuals Online! - http://www.tech-man.com
Page l-l 85
Section 400-Programming
Chapter 1. System Programming (FFl)
Tl Trunk Type Emulation
Software Version: CPC-6 Version 4.0 or higher
Address: FFl 8# 4# 6# (Trunk)## 1# (OS)#
Description
Programming
Determines the type of trunk signaling that each Tl channel emulates (E&M
by default).
I
FFl 8# 4## 6# (1164)# l# (013)#
f
Trunk Number (l-64)
Notes
+
O=Loop start
1 =ireserved for-future use)
2=Ground Start (used for
ground start emulation)
3=E&M
Power-Cycling Requirement. For changes to this parameter to take effect,
the system must be turned off, then back on.
Ground Start Requirement. If your system uses Tl COP (Central Office
Protocol) Version 1.1 or 1.2, it must be ,upgraded to Version 1.4 or higher if
you wish to use the “Ground Start” setting.
Page l-l 88
DBS Manual - Issued 8/l/95
Technical Manuals Online! - http://www.tech-man.com
DBS-70-400
Chapter 1. System Programming (FFl )
Section 400-Programming
DID/DNS
Software Version: CPC-B Version 4.0 or higher
Address: IFFi W 4# W (Trunk)# 2# (O-2)#
Deskiption
Use this address to enable trunks for DID or DNIS calls.
l
l
If DID is seiected, the system will use the DID Numbers Table (see FFl
8# 3#) to detemine which extension(s) will receive the DID call.
If DNTS is selected (available only with Tl interface), the system will
use the DNIS Numbers Table (see FFl 8# 4# 7#) to determine which
extension(s) will receive the DNIS call.
The DID Numbers Table can be used for DID or DNIS. Therefore, ifall 500
entries in the DNIS Numbers Table are filled, a Tl channel can be set to DID,
and DNIS service can still be used.
Programming
i
FFI 6# 4# 6# (1-64)# 2# (0-2)#
f
Trunk Number (l-64)
4
O=Neith& DID nor DNIS
is used.
l=DID is used.
25DNIS is used.
Related Programming
Inbound DID DialNumbers: FFl 8# 3# (DIDNo.)# (ExtNo.)#
DNIS Number Setting: FFl 8# # 7# (DNISNo.)# (ExtNo.)#
DIDIDNIS Flexible Ringing Assignments: FFl 8# (5# or 6#) @lD/DNIS
No.)# (ExtNo.)# (OOOO[OO]-l l l l [ 1 l])#
Notes
Digit Length Requiremen& The DBS only supports 4digit DIDAlMS
numbers.
CO Requirement When the CO sends a DIDIDNIS call to the DBS, it first
receives a “wink” signal &om the DBS before sending the digits. Once the
wink is received, the CO should wait at least 200 ms before sending the
digits.
Power-C’chg Requirement. For changes to this parameter to take effect,
the system must be tumed off, then back OIL
DBS Manual - Issued 8/l/95
DBS-70-400
;..
Technical Manuals
Online! - http://www.tech-man.com
Page l-1 87
Section 400-Programming
Chapter 1. System Programming (FFl)
Soha= k~;xi~n: CPC-B Version 4.0 or higher
Address: #-I T r;a# 4# 6# (Truwk)# 3# (012)#
Description
Determines the signaling class used by Tl channels on outgoing calls
(Immediate Start by de&&). ’
Programming
FFI 8# 4# 6# (144)# 3# (0-2)#
f
Trunk Number (l-64)
O=Immediate Start.
l=Wink start.
2=Dial Tone Start.
CO Requirement. The Outgoing Type setting must match what is ordered
f?om the CO.
.
Power-Cycling Requirement. For changes to this parameter to take effect,
the system must be turned off, then back on.
DBS Manual - Issued 8/l/95
Page 1-188
Technical Manuals Online! - http://www.tech-man.com
DBS-70-400
Section 400-Programming
Chapter 1. System Programming (FFl)
Incoming Signaling Type
Software Version: CPC-8 Version 4.0 or higher
Address: FFI 8# 4# 6## (Trunk)# 4#I (0 or I)#
Description
Determines the signaling class used by Tl channels on incoming calls
(Immediate Start/Ringdown by default).
Programming
r
FFI 8# 4# 6# (I-64)# 4# (0 or l)#
f
Trunk Number (l-64)
Notes
+
O=Immediate Start/
Ringdown.
l=Wink Start.
CO Requirement. The Incoming Type setting must match what is ordered
from the CO.
Power-Cycling Requirement. For changes to this parameter to take effect,
the system must be turned off, then back on.
DBS-70-400
DBS Manual - Issued 8/l/95
Technical Manuals Online! - http://www.tech-man.com
Page 1-189
Section 400-Programming
Chapter 1. System Programming (FF’l)
Trunk Mode
Software Version: CPC-6 Version 4.0 or higher
Address: FFI 8# 4#I 6# (Trunk)# 5# (0 or l)#
Description
Determines whether Tl channels are used for only outgoing calls, or for both
incoming and outgoing calls.
Programming
I
FFI 8# 4# 6# (l-64)# 5# (0 or l)#
f
Trunk Number (l-64)
Notes
+
O=Incoming and Outgoing.
l=Outgoing only.
Power-Cycling Requirement. For changes to this parameter to take effect,
the system must be turned off, then back on.
Page l-190
DBS Manual - Issued 8/l/95
Technical Manuals Online! - http://www.tech-man.com
DBS-70-400
Chapter 1. System Programming (FFl)
Section 400-Programming
Robbed Bit Setting
Software Version: CPC-B Version 4.0 or higher
Address: FFl 8# 4## 6# (Trunk)# 6# (0 or l)#
Description
The Robbed Bit Setting determines if AB or ABCD signaling is used.
AB/ABCD signaling robs bits from the Tl channels, and uses those bits to
transmit signaling information. SF (SuperFrame) normally uses AB
signaling; ESF (Extended SuperFrame) normally uses ABCD signaling.
Programming
I
FFl 8# 4# 6# (l-64)# 6# (0 or l)#
i(
Trunk Number ( l-64)-
Notes
lr
O=Robbed Bit Off
(AB/ABCD signaling not used)
l=Robbed Bit On
(AB/ABCD signaling is used)
Yower-Cycling Requirement. For changes to this parameter to take effect,
the system must be turned off, then back on.
DBS-70-400
DBS Manual - Issued 8/l/95
Technical Manuals Online! - http://www.tech-man.com
Page 1-191
Section 400-Programming
Chapter 1. System Programming (FFl)
Incoming Dialing Method
Software Version: CPC-B Version 4.0 or higher
Address: FFl 8# 4# 6# (Trunk)# 7# (0 or l)#
Description
Programming
Determines whether the system expects dial-pulse or DTMF digits for
incoming DID or DNIS calls over the Tl.
I
FFl 8# 4# 6# (1164)# 7# (0 or l)#
f
Trunk Number (l-64)
Notes
f
O=Dial-Pulse (10 PPS)
l=DTMF
Power-Cycling Requirement. For changes to this parameter to take effect,
the system must be turned off..then back on.
Hardware Requirement. An MFR card is required for DID/DNIS if DTMF
signaling is used.
Page l-l 92
DBS Manual - Issued 8/l/95
Technical Manuals Online! - http://www.tech-man.com
DBS-70-400
Chapter 1. System Programming (FFl)
Section 400-Programming
Dial Tone Transmission
Software Version: CPC-B Version 4.0 or higher.
Address: FFl 6# 4# 6# (Trunk)#I W (0 or l)#
Description
DBS-70-400
This address is reserved for future use.
DBS Manual - Issued 8/l/95
Technical Manuals Online! - http://www.tech-man.com
Page 1-193
Chapter 1. System Programming (FFl)
Section 400-Programming
Busy Tone Transmission
Software Version: CPC-B Version 4.0 or higher
Address: FFl 8# 4# 6# (Trunk)# 9# (0 or l)#
Description
Page 1-194
This address is reserved for future use.
DBS Manual - Issued 8/l/95
Technical Manuals Online! - http://www.tech-man.com
.
DBS-70-400
Section 400-Programming
Chapter 1. System Programming (FFi)
Dial Tone Receive
Software Version: CPC-B Version 4.0 or higher
Address: FFl 8# 4# 6# (Trunk)# lO# (0 or l)#
Description
Determines whether dial tone is transmitted from the DBS Tl channel to DBS
stations.
Set this address to “On” only if the far end does not provide Tl dial tone.
Programming
I
I
FFl 8# 4# 6# (l-64)# 1 O# (0 or l)#
f
Trunk Number (1-64)
Notes
+
O=Off
l=On
Or&ring Tones From Carrier. If a carrier is supplying Tl services, always
order Dial Tone and Ringback Tones from the carrier.
DBS-70-400
DBS Manual - Issued 8/l/95
Technical Manuals Online! - http://www.tech-man.com
Page 1-195
Section 400-Programming
Chapter 1. System Programming (FFl)
Ringback Tone Transmission
Software Version: CPC-B Version 4.0 or higher
Address: FFl 8## 4#I 6# (Trunk)# 11# (0 or l)#
Description
Determines whether ringback tone is transmitted from the DBS Tl channel to
the CO.
Set this address to “On” only if the far end does not provide ringback tone.
Programming
I
1
FFI 8# 4# 6# (l-64)# 11# (0 or l)#
+
/4
Tmnk Sumber i l-64)
&Off
l=On
Notes
Page l-196
Or&ring Tones From Currier. If a carrier is supplying Tl services, always
order Dial Tone and Ringback Tones from the carrier.
DBS Manual - Issued 8/l/95
Technical Manuals Online! - http://www.tech-man.com
DBS-70-400
Section 400~Programming
Chapter 1. System Programming (FFl)
DNIS Number Setting
Software Version: CPC-B Version 4.0 or higher
Address: FFl 8## 4## 7# (DNISNo.)# (ExtNo.)#
Description
Use this address to assign DNIS number(s) to extension(s).
l
l
l
Up to 500 different DNIS numbers can be assigned.
One DNIS number can be assigned to multiple extensions (this takes up
only one entry in the 500 available entries).
One extension can have multiple DNIS numbers assigned to it. (The
number of entries taken up is equal to the number of DNIS numbers
assigned to the extension.)
Programming
I
FFl 8# 4# 7# (0000-9999)# (1 O-69 or 1009699)#
f
4-digit DNIS Number
I
+
Extension Number
Related Programming .
Multiple DID/DNIS: FFl 2# l# 32# (0 or l)#
DlD/DNIS (enabling trunks for): FFl 8# # 6# (Trunk)# 2# (0-2)##
DNIS Flexible Ringing Assignments: FFl 8# 6# (DNISNo.)# (ExtNo.)#
(0000[00]-llll[ll])#
Extension Numbers: FF3 (ExtPort)# l# (ExtNo.)#
Notes
DZVZ,S Requiremenf. DNIS is available only with the Tl interface.
Digit Length Requirement. The DBS supports 4-digit DNIS numbers with
either dial pulse or DTMF transmission.
DlVZ,S Ring ControL Ringing for the DNIS number at the assigned
extension(s) is controlled by the next address (FFl 8# 6#).
DBS-70-400
DBS Manual - Issued 8/l/95
Technical Manuals Online! - http://www.tech-man.com
Page l-197
Section 400-Programming
Chapter 1. System Programming (FFl)
DlDlDNlS Flexible Ringing Assignments
Sofbvare Version: CPC-B Version 5.0 or higher
Address: for DID:
FFl 8# 5# (DIDNo.)# (ExtNo.)# (OOOO[OO]-llll[Sl])#
for DNIS: FFl 8# 6# (DNISNo.)# (ExtNo.)# (OOOO[OO]-llll[ll])#
Description
This address allows you to enable or disable ringing for specific DID/DNTS
numbers during Day, Night and Night 2 modes. This also applies to delayed
ringing.
Note: The DID/DNIS number must already be assigned to an extension
number before you can assign it for flexible ringing. See FFl 8# 3# (for
DID) and FFl 8# 4# 7# (for DNIS).
Programming
FFl 8# (5 or 6)# (XXXX)# (lo-69 or lOO-699)# (OOOO[OO-llll[ll])##
f
5=DID
6=DNTS
1
+
+
Extension Number
Ring Settings
4-digit DID or
that will receive
(see table below)
DNIS number
ringing
(must already
O=Disabled
be assigned to
1=Enabled
an extension, or
the system won’t
Default: Ringing enabled;
accept the number
Delayed ringing disabled.
here)
L
Table l-53. DIDIDNIS Flexible Ring settings in different CPC-B versions
Ring Control
for each digit
setting
1st digit
2nd digit
3rd digit
4th digit
5th digit
6th digit
Default Setting:
CPC-B
Version 5.0 to 6.1
Day ring
Night ring
Delayed Day ring
Delayed Night ring
[not available]
[not available]
1100
CPC-B
Version 7.0 or higher
Day ring
Night ring
Night 2 ring
Delayed Day ring
Delayed Night ring
/ Delayed Night 2 ring
111000
Related Programming
Delayed Ring: FFl 2# l# 23# (0 or l)#
Page l-l 98
DBS Manual - Issued 8/l/95
Technical Manuals Online! - http://www.tech-man.com
D BS-70-400
Section 400-Programming
Chapter 1. System Programming (FFl)
CO Delayed Ring Timer: FFl 3# 26# (0-15)#
Inbound DID Dial Numbers: FFl 8# 3# (D1DNo.H (ExtNo.)#
DID/DNIS (enabling trunks for): FFl 8# 4# 6# (Trunk)# 2# (0-2)##
DNIS Number Setting: FFl 8# # 7# (DNISNo.)# (ExtNo.)#
Notes
Delayed Ring Timing. Timing for DID/DNIS delayed ringing is controlled
by the CO Delayed Ring Timer (FFl 3# 26# O-l%).
DBS-70-400
DBS Manual - issued 8/l/95
Technical Manuals Online! - http://www.tech-man.com
Page l-199
Chapter 1. System Programming (FFl)
Section 400-Programming
.
Tl Trunk Closure
Software Version: WC-B Versions 5.0 to 6.02
Address: Master Cabinet: FFl 8# 7# 1# (l-4)# (118)# (0 or l)#
Slave Cabinet:
FFl 8# 7# 2# (l-4)# (1,8)# (0 or l)#
Description
In CPC-B Versions 5.0 to 6.02, use this address to facilitate Fractional Tl,
where not all of the 24 available channels on the Tl card are used.
Lf the trunk ports on the highest-numbered analog trunk card are divided
between Tl and analog, use this address to close the trunk ports dedicated to
Tl -- and open the trunks to be used for analog. (see illustration below for an
example)
Use the “Number of Tl Channels” address (FFl g# 4# 4/5# l# 2#) to tell the
system how many channels you want to use. The system will automatically
assign one analog trunk port for each Tl channel used. Channel #l
automatically uses the highest-numbered port on the highest-numbered trunk
card; Channel #2 uses the next highest port; etc.
Figure 1-3. Trunk Cl
we Eramnle in a
Trunk Cards (each card has 8 trunk ports,
numbered as shown)
Card 1
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
Ca;d 2/ I[
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
In this example, the following was
programmed:
Trunk Configuration set to “Tl and Analog” (see FFl 8# 4## 4# 1# l#).
Number of Tl Channels set to “12” (see FFl 8# 4## 4# l# 2#).
Tl Trunk Closure set Tl trunks 5-8 on Card 3 to “Close”:
FFl 8# 7# l# 3# (5 thru 8)# l#
Page l-200
DBS Manual - Issued 8/l/95
Technical Manuals Online! - http://www.tech-man.com
DBS-70-400
Chapter 1. System Programming (FFl)
Section 400-Programming
Programming
I
r
FFl 8# 7#
l=Master Cabinet
2=Slave Cabinet
Trunk Slot
T&k Port
on Card
O=Open
l=Close
Related Programming
Trunk Configuration: FFl 8# 4## (4 or 5)# l# l# (0 or l)#
Number of Tl Channels: FFl 8# 4## (4 or 5)# l# 2# (0-24)#
Trunk Circuit Type: FF2 (Trunk)# 21# (0-3)#
Notes
Loop-Start Card Version Requirement. This Tl Trunk Closure address
can only be used with the VB-435 10A or VB-43511A versions of the loopstart card.
CPC-B Versions Beginning With 6.03. The Tl Trunk Closure address is
no longer present. Instead, simply use the Trunk Circuit Type address (FF2
Trunk# 21#) to assign trunk ports as Loop Start, Ground Start, DID or Tl.
DBS-70-400
DBS Manual - Issued 8/l/95
Technical Manuals Online! - http://www.tech-man.com
Page l-201
2. Trunk Programming (FF2)
Use the FF2 programming addresses in this chapter to set parameters for the
CO trunks of the DBS system.
Most of these FF2 addresses require a trunk number and/or extension port
entry. The acceptable range of trunks/extension ports varies according to the
configuration of your DBS system. In this chapter, the range used for trunks
is l-64. which is the maximum available number of trunks in a DBS 96 +
DBS 96 system with a CPC-B card. The range used for extension ports is
1-144, which is also the maximum in a DBS 96 + DBS 96 with CPC-B.
For more information, see Section 300-Installation.
This chapter covers the following FF2 program addresses:
FF Key Address
Topic
Page
FF2 (Trunk)# I# (O-l)#
Trunk Port Operation
2-3
12-4
FF2 (Trunk)# 2% (O- l)#
DTMF/Pulse Dialing for Trunks
FF2 (Trunk)# 3# (O-l)#
Pooled Trunk Access for Group “9”
2-5
FF~ (TnnrH# 4+~ thru 9# (o-l)# Pooled Trunk Access for Groups
- “81-86”
, 2-6
FF2 (Trunk)# lo# (l-2)#
1 Trunk Port Type
1 2-7
J?F2 (Trunk)# 11# (0-I)#
DISA Auto Answer
1 2-8
FF2 VrunH# 12# (Ext.Pon)# Private Trunk Line
I 2-9
FF2 (Trunk)#’ 13# (0-l)#
Automatic Pause for PBX Line
2-10
FF2 (Trunk)# 14# (0-l)#
Dial Tone Detection
2-11
FF2 (Trunk)# 1% ( I-3)#
Outbound DTMF Signal Duration for Auto-Dialed
Digits
FF2 (Trunk)# 16# (0- I)#
Unsupervised Trunk Conference
1 FF2 (Trunk)# 17# (0-l)#
1 Inbound Ring Pattern
12-14
JYF2 (Trunk)# 18# (0-15)#
1 Trunk Disconnect Detection Timer
t 2-15
FF2 (Trunk)# 19# HHMM#
DISA Start Time
1 2-16
1 FF2 (Trunk)# 20# HHMM# I DISA End Time
12-17
FF2 (Trunk)# 21# (0-4)#
Trunk Circuit Type (CPC-AII/B)
2-18
FF2 (Trunk)# 22# (0-l)#
DID Immediate or Wink Start (CPC-B only)
2-21
FF2 (Trunk)# 23# (0-15)#
1 2-22
Wink Start Timer (UC-B only)
FF2 (Trunk)# 24# (O- 15)#
2-23
Time Out for Dialed DID Digits (CPC-B onb)
FF2 (Trunk)# 25# (O- 15)#
2-24
DID Interdigit Timeout (CPC-B only)
FF2 (Trunk)# 26# (4-8)#
2-25
Trunk Port Class (WC-B only)
I
I
I
DBS-70-400
DBS Manual - Issued 8/l/95
Technical Manuals Online! - http://www.tech-man.com
Page 2-l
’
1
1
I
I
Page 2-2
DBS Manual - Issued 8/l/95
‘\
Technical
Manuals Online! - http://www.tech-man.com
*
DE!%70-400
Trunk Port Operation
Software Version: All Versions
Address: FF2 (Trunk)# l# (0 or l)#
Description
Use this feature to put a CO trunk in service or “busy it out”.
Programming
FF2 (li”” 1# (0 y l)#
Trunk Nuniber
Notes
O=Place trunk in service.
l=Busy-out the trunk.
Precaution on Putting Lines Out of Service. If you busy-out a trunk, an
incoming caller on that trunk will still hear ringing, even though the trunk is
not functional.
D BS-70-400
DBS Manual - Issued 8/l/95
Technical Manuals Online! - http://www.tech-man.com
Page 2-3
DTMF/PuIse Dialing for Trunks
Software Version: All Versions
Address: FF2 (Trunk)# 2# (0 or l)#
Description
Use this feature to set a trunk for DTMF or pulse dialing (10 pulses per
second).
Programming
I
Trunk Number
O=DTMF
l=Pulse dialing (10 pps)
Notes
-Door Box Adapter Setting. CO trunk ports used for Door Box Adapter
Sensors should be set for “Pulse dialing”.
Page 2-4
DBS Manual - Issued 8/l/95
Technical Manuals Online! - http://www.tech-man.com
DBS-70-400
3ecuon 4uu-rrogramming
c;naprer 2. i runK rrogramming (i-q
Pooled Trunk Access for Group “9”
Software Version: All Versions
Address: FF2 (Trunk)# 3# (0 or l)#
Description
Use this feature to place a trunk in a group from which trunks are
automatically chosen for outbound dialing. When you dial “9” from an SLT
or digital extension, or press an FF key that is set as a pooled trunk key, any
available trunk in the group will be accessed.
The trunk selection is made from the highest trunk number in the group to the
lowest.
Programming
t
FF2 (l-64)# 3# (0 or I)#
f
t
Trunk Num bkr
O=Trunk is not included in access group “9”.
l=Trunk is included in access group “9”.
Related Programming
LCR Access: FFl 2# l# 3# (0 or l)#
Notes
Interaction with LCR. Set the “LCR Access” option (address FF12# l# 3#)
so that dialing “9” indicates a Pooled Trunk call. If this option is set so that
dialing “9” indicates an LCR call, trunk selection will default to pooled trunk
line access group 9 if all lines that could be used for LCR access are busy.
Required Hardware Setting. To use pooled trunks, Strap S 1 on the CPC card
must be cut. See Section 300~Installation for instructions.
DBS-70-400
DBS Manual - issued 8/l/95
Technical Manuals Online! - http://www.tech-man.com
Page 2-5
Section 400-Programming
Chapter 2. Trunk Programming (FF2)
Pooled Trunk Access for Groups 1L81-86”
Software Version: All Versions
Address: FF2 (Trunk)# (419)# (0 or I)#
Description
Use this feature to place a trunk in a group from which trunks are
automatically chosen for outbound dialing. When you dial 81,82,83,84,85,
or 86 from an SLT or digital extension, or press an FF key that is set as a
pooled trunk key, any available trunk in the group will be accessed.
The trunk selection in a particular group is made from the highest available
trunk number to the lowest available trunk number.
Programming
y-64)# (i,', (0 orf#
Trunk Number
Notes
Pooled Trunk Group:
4==Group 81
5=Group 82
6=Group 83
7=Group 84
8=Group 85
9=Group 86
O=The trunk is not
included.
l=The trunk is included.
Placing Trunks In More Than One Group. The same trunks may appear in
more than one pooled trunk group, including trunk group 9.
Required Hardware Setting. To use pooled trunks, Strap S 1 on the CPC
card must be cut. See Section 300~Installation for instructions.
Page 2-6
DES Manual - Issued 8/l/95
Technical Manuals Online! - http://www.tech-man.com
DBS-70-400
Chapter 2. Trunk Programming (FF2)
Section 400-Programming
Trunk Port Type
Software Version: -All Versions
Address: FF2 (Trunk)# lO# (1 or 2)#
Description
Each trunk port must be identified as a regular CO trunk or as a PBX line.
Programming
.
FF2 (I-64)# lO# (1 or 2)#
t
Trunk Number
t
l=Regular (CO) trunk
2=PBX line
Related Programming
Auto Flash R&al: FFl 2# l# 6# (0 or l)#
PBX Access Codes: FFl 2# 3# (l-8)# (O-999 or 0* to 99*)#
Automatic Pause Position for PBX Access Codes: FFl 2# 3# (9-18)# (l-3)#
Automatic Pause Timer: FFl 3# 12# (0- 15)#
PBX Flash Timer: FFl 3# 18# (O-10)+!
Trunk Port Type: FF2 (l-64)# lO# ( 1 or 2)#
Automatic Pause For PBX Line: FF2 (l-64)# 13# (0 or l)#
Notes
Toll Restriction Interaction. TRS settings (FM addresses) can be affected by
this parameter.
DBS-70-400
DBS Manual - Issued 8/l/95
Technical Manuals Online! - http://www.tech-man.com
Page 2-7
Chapter 2. Trunk Programming (FF2j
Section 400-Programming
DISA Auto Answer
Software Version: All Versions
Address: FF2 (Trunk)# ll# (0 or l)#
Description
Use this feature to set a trunk(s) to automatically provide DISA tone upon
connection with an inbound caller. (However, after hearing the DISA tone,
the caller will still have to enter an ID code in order to use DISA.)
If a trunk is set to provide DISA tone, you can limit DISA operation on that
trunk to a certain number of hours each day, using the DISA Start Time and
DISA End Time addresses.
Programming
FF2 (l-64)# 11# (0 or l)#
t
Trunk Number
t
O=DI!SA tone is not provided.
l=DISA tone is urovided.
Related Programming
Caller ID Automatic DISA: FFl 2# 8# (l-lO)# (PhoneNo.)#
Direct Inward System Access (DISA) ID Code: FFl 5# (0000-9999)#
DISA Outbound Call ID Code 1: FFl 6# l# (0000-9999)#
DISA Outbound Call ID Code 2: FFl 6# 2# (0000-9999)#
DISA Start Time: FF2 (Trunk)# 19# (HHMM)##
DISA End Tie: FF2 (Trunk)# 20# (HHMM)#
Notes
Caller ID Znferaction. If your DBS system supports Caller ID, do not enable
DISA on any trunk using this address. (Caller ID will automatically enable or
disable DISA to the caller based on the phone number he is calling from.)
DZSA Hardware Requirement. An MFR card is required for DISA, so that
the system can interpret DTMF tones entered via the DISA connection.
Page 2-8
DBS Manual - Issued 8/l/95
Technical Manuals Online! - http://www.tech-man.com
DBS-70-400
Chapter 2. Trunk Programming (FF2)
Section 400-Programming
Private Trunk Line
Software Version: All Versions
Address: FF2 (Trunk)# 12# (ExtPort)#
Description
Use this address to assign a private trunk line to an extension. A number of
private trunks can belong to one extension.
Once a private trunk is assigned to an extension, other extensions cannot
make outbound calls or receive inbound calls on that trunk (the system wili
assign Toll Restriction Type 0 to the trunk on all other extensions). The
system will assign TRS Type 7 (no restrictions) to the private trunk assigned
to the extension.
Programming
To assign a Private Trunk Line(s) to an exterision . . .
FF2 (l-64)# 12# (11144)#
t
Trunk Number
f
Extension Port Number
To cancel Private Trunk assignment(s) for an extension . . .
I
FF2 (l-64)# 12# (19144)# CONF ON/OFF
I
Related Programming
Day TRS Types O-7 for Trunks: FF7 7# (ExtPort)## (Trunk)# (0-7)#
Night TRS Types O-7 for Trunks: FM 8# (ExtPort)# (Trunk)++ (0-7)#
Notes
DBS-70-400
Reprogramming Toll Restrictions for Disabled Private Trunks. If a private
trunk setting is enabled and then later disabled, the system will not
automatically make that trunk available to other extensions. (TRS Type 0
will apply to that trunk on all extensions.) Therefore, the trunk’s TRS type
must be manually reprogrammed for each extension wishing to use that trunk
(using addresses FF7 7# and FF7 8#).
DBS Manual - Issued 8/l/95
Technical Manuals Online! - http://www.tech-man.com
Page 2-9
bnaprer 2. I ruiln rrogrammlng (rrq
3ecwtl 4uu-rrogrammlng
Automatic Pause for PBX Line
Software Version: All Versions
Address: FF2 (Trunk)# 13# (0 or l)#
Description
This address determines if a pause is automatically inserted during the dialing
of a PBX access code.
If this address is enabled, the system will automatically pause after dialing the
first, second, or third digit of the PBX access code. See the PBX Access
Code(s) address (FFl 2# 3# 9-18# l-3#) for more information.
If this address is disabled (default setting), the phone, user must manually
insert a pause by pressing REDIAL. The length of the pause (whether
inserted manually by the user or automatically by the system) is determined
by the Automatic Pause Timer, which isset at address FFl 3# 12#.
Note: Before assigning the automatic pause, you must first designate the
trunk as a “PBX line” (FF2 Trunk# lO# 2#).
Programming
FF2 (l-64)# 13# (0 or l)#
Trunk Number
O=Automatic pause is enabled.
l=Automatic pause is disabled.
Related Programming
Automatic Pause Position for PBX Access Codes: FFl 2# 3# (9-18)# (l-3)#
PBX Flash Timer: FFl 3# 18# (0-lO)##
Trunk Port Type: FF2 (Trunk)# lO# (1 or 2)#
Page 2-10
DBS Manual - Issued 8/l/95
Technical Manuals Online! - http://www.tech-man.com
DBS-70-400
Dial Tone Detection
Software Version: All Versions
Address: FF2 (Trunk)# 14# (0 or l)#
Description
This program determines when dialed digits are outpulsed -- either according
to the Dial Pause Timer setting (FFl 3# 17#), or after the DBS detects dial
tone.
Programming
FF2 (I-64)# 14#I (0 or l)#
Trunk Number
O=Digits are outpulsed according to the
Dial Pause Timer.
l=Digits are outpulsed after dial tone
is detected.
.
Related Programming
Dial PauseTimer: FFl 3# 17# (0-15)#
DBS-70-400
DBS Manual - Issued 8/l/95
Technical Manuals Online! - http://www.tech-man.com
Page 2-11
Outbound DTMF Signal Duration for Auto-Dialed Digits
Software Version: All Versions
Address: FF2 (Trunk)# 15# (1.3)#
Description
This address controls DTMF signal duration when digits are dialed
automatically by the system rather than the user.
Examples of DBS dialing include:
l
l
l
l
Redial
Saved Number Redial
Speed Dialing
Adding LCR digits
Programming
I
FF2 (I-64)# 15# (113)#
t
Trunk Number
t
1=75 ms on/50 m off
24125 ms on/125 ms off
3=250 ms on/250 ms off
Notes
DTMF Tone for Manual Dialing. If you dial manually (press a digit key),
the DTMF tone will emit until the button is released.
Page 2-l 2
DBS Manual - issued 8/l/95
Technical Manuals Online! - http://www.tech-man.com
DES-70-400
Section 400-Programming
Chapter 2. Trunk Programming (FF2)
Unsupervised Trunk Conference
Software Version: All Versions
Address: FF2 (Trunk)# 16# (0 or l)#
Description
Use this feature to enable trunk(s) to be used in an unsupervised conference
call.
Pro,gramming
FF2 (l-64)# 16# (0 or l)#
f
Trunk Number
t
O=The CO’trunk cannot be used for
an unsupervised conference.
l=The CO trunk can be used for an
unsupervised conference.
Related Programming
Unsupervised Conference Timer: FFl 3# 1 l# (0-15)#
Unsupervised Conference: FF3 (ExtPortj# 13# (0 or l)#
Notes
DES-70-400
Unsupervised Conference Timer Operation. A conference call will be
automatically disconnected according to the Unsupervised Conference Timer
setting (FF13# ll# O-l.%).
DBS Manual - Issued 8/l/95
Technical Manuals Online! - http://www.tech-man.com
Page 2-13
bIlaprttr L.
I
runK rrograrrwaiiy
3w.xu11 4uu-rroyrairirriirig
\tt-2)
Inbound Ring Pattern
Software Version: All Versions
Address: FF2 (Trunk)# 17# (0-9)#
Description
Each CO trunk can be assigned a distinctive ring pattern for easy recognition
of the trunk during an incoming call. Up to 9 different ring patterns are
available.
Programming
r
FF2 (1164)# 17#
f
Trunk Number
Inbound Ring Pattern
Default: 0 (determined by CO)
(see the following table)
Table 2-1. Ring P&ems for inbound trunk calls
I
1
Setting
0
1
2
3
4
5
I
6
I
7
I
Value
Synchronize (ring pattern determined by CO)
3 sec. on’1 sec. off
1 2 sec. on/2 sec. off
1 sec. on/l sec. off
1 sec. on/2 sec. off
1 sec. on/3 sec. off
.5 sec. on/S sec. off
1 .5 sec. on/.5 sec. off/.5 sec. on/%.5 sec. off.
1 .5 sec. on/3.5 sec. off
1 1 sec. on/7 sec. off
I
I
Notes
Transferred Calls. This setting does not affect transferred calls. The ring
pattern for transferred calls can be set in the Transfer Ring Pattern address
(FFl 2# l# 31# 0-6#).
Precedence of Extension Ring Pattern Setting. The ring pattern (if any)
assigned to the extension (FF3 ExtPor# 39# Pattem#) will override this
Inbound Ring Pattern for incoming trunk calls.
Page 2-l 4
DBS Manual - Issued 8/l/95
Technical Manuals Online! - http://www.tech-man.com
DBS-70-400
Chapter 2. Trunk Programming (FF2)
Seotion 400~Programming
Trunk Disconnect Detection Timer
Software Version: All Versions
Address: FF2 (Trunk)# 18# (O-15)#
Description
When the trunk side of a CO call disconnects, the CO sends the DBS a
disconnect signal by opening the loop (cutting voltage) for a specified length
of time.
This timer determines how long the DBS expects the disconnect signal to last.
By default, an open loop of 350 ms or more will be interpreted as a disconnect
signal.
The standard range for CO disconnect signals is 350 to 600 ms.
Programming
FF2 (1164)# 16# (0115)#
t
f
Trunk Number
Trunk Disconnect Detection Timer setting
Default: 7 (over 350 ms) (see table below)
Table 2-2. Trunk Disconnect Detection Timer values
Setting
0
1
2
3
4
13
14
15
DBS-70-400
Value
I_gnore disconnect
Over 50 ms
Over 100 ms
Over 150 ms
Over 200 ms
I Over 250ms
I Over 300ms
1 Over 600 ms
Over 650 ms
Over 700 ms
Over 750 ms
DBS Manual - issued 8/l/95
Technical Manuals Online! - http://www.tech-man.com
Page 2-15
Chapter 2. Trunk Programming (FF2)’
Section 400-Programming
DISA Start Time
Software Version: All Versions
Address: FF2 (Trunk)# 19# (HHMM)#
Description
Use this address to program a DISA trunk to begin DISA operation at a
specified time each day. Trunks are enabled for DISA using the DISA Auto
Answer address (FF2 Trunk# 1 l#). Use this DISA Start ‘lime address, and
the DISA End Time address following, to limit DISA operation on a trunk to
a certain time period each day.
Programming
To set the DISA Start Time . . .
Enter the time using the 24-hour format. For example, enter 1515 to set the
time to 3:15 p.m.
FF2 (l-64)# 19# (HHMM)#
t
Trunk Number
t
Time Setting (24~hr. format)
Default: **** (not set)
To clear the DISA Start Time . . .
I
-1
FF2 (1164)# 19# CONF ON/OFF
Related Programming
Time Setting: FFl l# 2# (HHMM)#
DISA Inbound Call ID Code: FFl 5# (0000-9999)#
DISA Outbound Call ID Code 1: FFl 6## l# (0000-9999)#
DISA Outbound Call ID Code 2: FFl 6# 2# (0000-9999)#
DISA Auto Answer: FF2 (Trunk)# 1 l# (0 or l>#
DISA End Time: FF2 (Trunk)# 20# (HHMM)#
Notes
DISA Operation With Default Setting. If DISA Start Tiie is not set in this
address (left at default ****), DISA operation will be on all the time.
Caller ID Automatic DZSA. This DISA Start Time setting does not affect
Automatic DISA operation with Caller JD (FF12# 8# 1-W PhoneNo.#).
Page 2-l 6
DBS Manual - Issued 8/l/95
Technical Manuals Online! - http://www.tech-man.com
DBS-70-400
Chapter 2. Trunk Programming (FF2)
Section 400-Programming
DISA End Time
Software Version: All Versions
Address: FF2 (Trunk)# 20# (HHMM)#
Description
Use this address to program a DISA trunk to stop DISA operation at a
specified time each day. Trunks are enabled for DISA using the DISA Auto
Answer address (FF2 Trunks 1 l#). Use this DISA End Tiie address, and the
DISA Start Time address (previous page), to limit DISA operation on a trunk
. to a certain time period each day.
NOTE: The DBS will disable DISA to the trunk one minute after the time
set in this address. (For example, if DISA End Time is set to 0815, DISA will
actually end when the system clock reaches 8: 16 am.)
Programming
To set the DISA End nrne . . .
Enter the time using the 24-hour format. For example, enter 0815 to set the
time to 8:15 a.m. DISA will actually end when the system clock reaches
8: 16 a.m.
FF2 (l-64)# 20# (HHMM)#
Trunk Number
I
Time Setting (in 24-hr. format)
Default: **** (not set)
I
To clear the DISA End Time . . .
I
FF2 (1164)# 20# CONF ON/OFF
I
Related Programming
Time Setting: FFl l# 2# (HHMM)#
DISA Inbound Call ID Code: FFl 5# (0000-9999)#
DISA Outbound Call ID Code 1: FFl 6# l# (0000-9999)#
DISA Outbound Call ID Code 2: FFl 6# 2# (0000-9999)#
DISA Auto Answer: FF2 (Trunk)+/ ll# (0 or l)#
DISA Start Time: FF2 (T&nk)# 19# (HHMM)#
Notes
Caller ID Automatic DZSA. This DISA End Time setting does not affect
Automatic DISA operation with Caller ID (program address FFl 2# 8# l-10++
PhoneNo.#).
DBS-70-400
DBS Manual - Issued 8/l/95
Technical Manuals Online! - http://www.tech-man.com
Page 2-17
Trunk Circuit Type
Software Version: CPC-Ail and CPC-B (all versions)
Address: FF2 (Trunk)# 21# (Type)#
Description
This program determines the type of circuit for each trunk (Loop Start by
default).
NOTE: The circuit types available in each system depend on the CPC card
version. See “Notes” below for more information.
Programming
FF2 (1164)# 21# (0-4)#
+
Trunk Number
+
O=Loop Start
l=Ground Start
2=Analog DID
3=Tl
4=Caller ID (loop start)
Related Programming
Call Duration Timer (for Caller ID): FFl 2# l# 38# (0-2)#
Caller ID Automatic DISA Callers: FFl 2# 8# (l-lO)# (PhoneNo.)#
Tl settings: FFl 8# # thru 7# addresses
Outbound Ground Start Detection Timer: FFl 3# 20# (l-8)#
Inbound Ground Start Detection Timer: FFl 3# 21# (l-8)#
DID Immediate or Wink Start: FF2 (Trunk)# 22# (0 or l)#
Wink Start Timer: FF2 (Trunk)# 23# (0-15)#
Time Out for Dialed DID Digits: FF2 (Trunk)# 2# (0-15)#
DID Interdigit Timeout: FF2 (Trunk)# 25# (0-15)#
Notes
Power-Cycling Requirement. For changes to this parameter to take effect,
the system must be turned off, then back on.
Loop Sturt Circuit Type Considerations:
1. Loop Start is the most common type of CO line.
2. If a Ground Start Trunk Card is used, individual trunk ports on that
card can be set to “Loop Start”.
Page 2-18
DBS Manual - Issued 8/l/95
Technical Manuals Online! - http://www.tech-man.com
DBS-70-400
Chapter 2. Trunk Programming (FF2)
Section 400~Programming
Ground Start Circuit Type Considerations:
1. Not available with CPC-AIL
2. Ground Start lines perform similarly to Loop Start: however, in terms
of positive disconnect signals, Ground Start lines provide the most
reliable connection between the CO and the DBS, with the least
possibility of call collision or “glare”.
3. The Ground Start Trunk Card (VB-4353 1) is required for ground-start
operation.
4. The Ground Start Trunk Card requires a -48 volt power supply, which
must be properly connected to the DBS backplane terminals -- see
Section .?OO-Installation for instructions. Misconnection of the
power supply e result in serious damage to DBS equipment.
5. The FLASH and REDIAL features are not available on ground-start
trunks.
Analog DID Circuit Type Considhtions:
1. Not available with CPC-AIL
2. Available only with CPC-B Version 2.0 or higher.
3. Requires DID Trunk Card (VB-43541).
4. Requires SCC-B card Version 1.27 or higher.
5. DID (Direct Inward Dialing) lines are beneficial in that the CO can
place multiple inbound trunk calls (with different phone numbers) over
the same circuit. These numbers can also be programmed to appear on
multiple DBS extensions.
6. DID circuits can only be used for inbound calls (not for outbound).
7. The DBS supports 4-digit DID numbers with either Dial Pulse or
(more commonly) Wink Start
Tl Circuit ZQpe Considerations:
1. Not available with CPC-AII.
2. Available only with CPC-B Version 4.0 or higher.
3. Tl requires the following cards:
Tl Interface (VB-43561)
Tl MDF Card (VB-43562)
Tl Sync Card (VB-43563)
4. When assigning trunks as Circuit Type “Tl”, you must start from the
highest-numbered trunk port in the DBS cabinet structure, and move
down sequentially from there. For more information, see the trunk
assignment charts in the Tl Reference Manual (Section 500).
l
l
l
DBS-70-400
DBS Manual - Issued 8/l/95
Technical Manuals Online! - http://www.tech-man.com
Page 2-I 9
5. If Fractional Tl (using only a portion of the 24 available Tl channels)
is implemented, make sure that the number of trunks set to Circuit
Type “Tl” matches the programmed Number of Tl Channels (FFl
8# # 4/5# l# 2# O-24+0.
6. In CPC-B Versions 5.0 to 6.02, if trunk usage on an analog trunk card
is divided between Tl and analog, make sure that the Tl trunks are
closed from analog usage in the Tl Trunk Closure address (FFl8# 7#
l-2# l-# l-8# 0-l#).
Caller ID Circuit Type Considerations:
1. Available only with CPC-AII and CPC-B Version 6.1 or higher.
2. Caller ID requires the following cards:
8-port Loop Start Trunk Card (VB-435 11A)
Caller ID Card (VB-43551)
MFR Card (VB-4343 1) (if using Caller ID Automatic DISA)
CPC-B Card (VB-43411) or CPC-AII Card (VB-43412)
3. Caller ID refers to calling party information transmitted from a local
CO to the DBS. Calling party information transmitted in ANI format
from interexchange carriers @XC’s) is not supported by the DBS at this
time.
4. Caller ID data is transmitted from the local CO to the DBS between
the first and second rings. The Caller ID Card and the Loop Start
Trunk Card collect the data and distribute it to the appropriate
extension via the CPC Card. The extension displays the Caller ID
information (if the phone has an LCD) for a programmable length of
time.
5. See Caller ID Installation and Operation (Section 510) for complete
instructions and ordering specs.
l
l
l
l
Page 2-20
DBS Manual - Issued 8/i/95
Technical Manuals Online! - http://www.tech-man.com
DBS-70400
-
-
.
-
-
DID Immediate or Wink Start
Software Version: CPC-B Version 2.0 or higher
Address: FF2 (Trunk)# 22# (0 or l)#
Description
This address determines the type of signaling used with DID trunks (Wink
Start by default).
If “Wink Start” is selected, the CO seizes the DID trunk. Then the DBS sends
a wink signal to the CO. At the end of the wink signal, the CO transmits the
DID digits.
If “Immediate” is selected, the CO seizes the DID trunk. Then the DBS waits
65 milliseconds before accepting the digits of a dialed number.
Programming
FF2 (1164)# 22# (0 or l)#
r
.
Trunk Number
4
O=WinkStart
l=Immediate Start
I
Related Programming
Multiple DID/DNIS: FFl 2# l# 32# (0 or l)##
DID/DNIS to a Voice Mailbox: FFl 2# l# 36# (0-2)#
DID/DNIS Answer Code: FFl 2# l# 37# (6 char.)##
DID/DNIS: FFl 8# 4# 6# (l-64)# 2# (0-2)#
DID Flexible Ringing Assignments: FFl 8# 5# (0000-9999)# ExtNo.)#
(000000-llllll)#
Trunk Circuit Type: FF2 (Trunk)# 21# (0-4)#
wink Start Timer: FF2 (Trunk)# 23# (0-15)#
Time Out for Dialed DID Digits: FF2 (Trunk)# 24## (0-15)#
DID Interdigit Timeout: FF2 (Trunk)# 25# (0-15)#
Notes
Power-Cycling Requirement. For changes to this parameter to take effect,
the system must be turned off, then back on.
DBS-70-400
DBS Manual - issued 8/l/95
Technical Manuals Online! - http://www.tech-man.com
Page 2-21
-..-r.-. C.
I,“,,... “J..d’,,,,,
“‘J, .
-
W”V..V..
‘f
.“”
,
I”
I-.....,.,,
Wink Start Timer
Software Version: CPC-6 Version 2.0 or higher
Address: FF2 (Trunk)# 23# (0-15)#
Description
This timer determines the duration of the “wink” that is sent to the CO
following the CO’s seizure of a DID trunk (200 ms by default).
At the conclusion of the wink, the CO transmits the DID digits to the DBS.
Programming
FF2 (1164)# 23# (O-1 5)#
A
t
Trunk Number
Wink Start Timer setting
Default: 3 (200 ms)
(see table below)
Table 2-3. Wink Start Timer sem’ngs
Setting
0
1
1 A0 ms
1 X0 ms
2
3
4
200 ms
5
2411 ms
6
* 26cJ ms
7
28Cl ms
300 ms
320 ms
340 ms
360 ms
3x0 ms
400 ms
420 ms
8
9
1 (1
11
12
13
14
15
Page 2-22
Value
140 ms
220 ms
440 ms
DBS Manual - Issued 8/l/95
Technical Manuals Online! - http://www.tech-man.com
DBS-70-400
Chapter 2. Trunk Programming (FF2)
Section 400~Programming
Time Out for Dialed DID Digits
Software Version: CPC-B Version 2.0 or higher
Address: FF2 (Trunk)# 24## (O-15)#
Description
This timer determines how long the DBS waits for DID digits, once CO
signaling has indicated that digits are to be transmitted (18 seconds by
default).
Programming
FF2 (1164)# 24#! (0115)#
+
f
Trunk Number
Timeout setting for Dialed DID Digits
Default: 4 (18 seconds)
(see table below)
Table 2-4. DID Dialed Digit Timer values
Setting
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
DBS-70-400
Value
No timeout
15 seconds
16 seconds
17 seconds
18 seconds
19 seconds
20 seconds
21 seconds
22 seconds
23 seconds
24 seconds
25 seconds
26 seconds
27 seconds
28 seconds
29 seconds
DBS Manual - Issued 8/l/95
Technical Manuals Online! - http://www.tech-man.com
Page 2-23
Chapter 2. Trunk Programming (FF2)
Section 400-Programming
DID Interdigit Timeout
Sofbvare Version: CPC-B Version 2.0 or higher
Address: FF2 (Trunk)# 25# (O-15)#
Description
Once the CO begins to outpulse DID digits, this timer determines how much
time is allowed between each digit (80 ms by default). If the timer is
exceeded, the DBS returns the DID trunk to the idle state.
Programming
FF2 (1164)# 25# (O-l 5)#
+
f
Trunk Number
DID Interdigit Timer setting
Default: 5 (80 ms)
(see table below)
Table 2-5. DID Inttydigit Timer values
Page 2-24
DBS Manual - Issued 8/l/95
Technical Manuals Online! - http://www.tech-man.com
DBS-70-400
Trunk Port Class
Software Version: CPC-B Version 4.0 or higher
Address: FF2 (Trunk)# 26# (418)#
Description
This parameter is provided in case a specific trunk or group of trunks needs a
unique pad level. This will only work if the Sync unit (VB-43563) is installed
piggyback on the CPC-B card.
By default, DBS trunks are assigned a circuit type, based on whether they are
analog or Tl. This circuit type is used in the Digital Pad Settings address
(FFl 8# 4# 3#) to determine the loss/gain settings for connections to the Tl.
For example, a Tl in a slave cabinet is assigned by default as circuit type “6”
(see table below). However, if a specific Tl trunk in the slave has inadequate
volume levels, the circuit type for the Tl trunk port could be changed to “8”.
Once the trunk port’s circuit type is changed, you can change the pad levels
for circuit type 8 (in Digital Pad Settings) to provide the correct volume
setting.
Programming
I
FF2 (l-64)# 26# (418)#
1(
Trunk Number
+
Trunk Circuit Type
(see table below)
NOTE: This address will allow you to assign
circuit types 1-12 to a trunk; however, types 4-8
are the only ones that should be used with trunks.
Table 2-6. Trunk Port Class - circuit types
Setting
4
5
’ Value
Analog CO trunk
Tl trunk in the master cabinet
Circuit types 7-8 are used for assigning unique pad levels to
circuits that require special volume levels. For example, if a
specific analog trunk needs a higher volume level than other
analog trunks, the analog trunk could be defined as an
“Option 1” circuit type.
DBS-70-400
DBS Manual - Issued 8/l/95
Technical Manuals Online! - http://www.tech-man.com
Page 2-25
Chapter 2. Trunk Programming (FF2)
Section 400-Programming
Related Programming
Digital Pad Settings: FFl 8# 4# 3# (l-12)# (l-12)# (O-30)++
Station Port Class: FF3 (ExtPort)# 37# (l-2 or 7-8)#
Notes
Page 2-26
Extension Circuit Types. Circuit types can also be assigned to extension
ports. See the Station Port Class address for more information.
DBS Manual - Issued 8/l/95
Technical Manuals Online! - http://www.tech-man.com
DBS-70-400
3. Extension Programming (FF3)
Use the F’F3 programming addresses in this chapter to set parameters for
extensions.
All FF3 addresses require an extension port entry. The acceptable range for
extension ports depends on your DBS system’s configuration. In this chapter,
the range shown for extension ports is (l-144), which is the maximum
available number of extension ports in a DBS 96 + DBS 96 system with a
CPC-B card. With a CPC-AII card, the maximum range is (l-72) extension
. ports. For more information, see Section 300~hstdlation.
This chapter covers the following addresses:
FF3 Address
Topic
FF3 (ExtPort)# l# (ExtNo.)#
Extension Numbers
3-3
Terminal Type
3-5
EM/24 Port Assignment
3-7
Forced Least Cost Routing
3-8
Forced Account Codes
3-9
Extension Lockout Code
3-10
3-11
Offhook Signal (CO)
Call WaitingJOHVA
3-12
Busy Override Send
3-13
Busy Override Receive
3-14
Prime Line Pickup
3-15
Auto Pickup (Ringing Line)
3-16
3-17
Unsupervised Conference
3-18
Station Message Detail Recorder (SMDR) Report
3-19
Offhook Signal Volume
3-20
Offhook Signal Pattern
PSD Name Display on Large-Sized LCD Phones
3-21
3-22
Page Group Extensions
3-23
Display When Idle
Disnlav During Intercom Dial Tone
3-25
3-27
Display When Calling an Extension
3-29
Display When Accessing CO Dial Tone
3-3 1
Display When Conversing on a CO Trunk
3-33
DisDlav When Receiving a Page
3-35
Display A’fter Receiving a Call Waiting Tone
3-37
Display When Dialing a Busy Extension
Extension Directory Display (CPC-AII/B 2.0 or higher) 3 - 3 9
(see page 3-56)
VAU Port Assignment (CPC-A)
FF3 (ExtPort)# 2# (IJ~R)#
FF3 (ExtPort)# 3# (ExtPorty
FF3 (ExtPort)# 4## (0 or l)#
FF3 (ExtPort)# 5# (0 or l)#
IT3 (ExtPort)# 6# (Code)#
FF3 (ExtPort)# 7# (0 or l)#
FF3 (ExtPort)# 8# (0 or l)#
FF3 (ExtPort)# 9# (0 or l)#
FM (ExtPort)# lO# (0 or l)#
FF3 (ExtPort)## ll# (0 or l)#
FM (ExtPort)# 12# (0 or l>#
FF3 (ExtPort)# 13# (0 or l)#
FF3 (ExtPort)# 14# (0 or l)#
FF3 (ExtPolt)# 15# (O-4)#
FM (ExtPort)# 16# (0 or l)#
FF3 (ExtPort)# 17# (0 or l>#
FF3 (ExtPort)# 18# thru 25# (0 or l)#
IT3 (ExtPolt)# 26# (O-39)#
F’F3 (ExtPort)# 27# (O-39)++
FF3 (ExtPort)# 28# (0-39)#
lT3 (ExtPort)# 29# (0-39)#
FF3 (ExtPort)# 30# (0-39)#
lT3 (ExtPort)# 3 l# (O-39)#
FF3 (ExtPort)# 32# (0-39)#
IF3 (ExtPort)# 33# (O-39)#
FF3 (ExtPort)# 34# (0 or l)#
FF3 (ExtPort)# 34# (0 or l)#
DBS-70-400
DBS Manual - Issued 8/l/95
Technical Manuals Online! - http://www.tech-man.com
Page
Page 3-l
,
FF3 (ExtPort)# 3% (0-8)##
Extension class of Service Assignment
(CPC-AWE 3.1 or higher)
Inbound DID Dial Numbers (CPC-8 2.0 only)
AEC Disconnect (CPC-A 3.3 or higher)
Ringback Tone From ML Keys
FF3 (ExtPon)# 3% (OOOO-9999)#
FF3 (ExtPoIt)# 3% (0 or 1)#
FF3 (ExtF’ort)# 36# (0-2)#
3-40
341
3-41
3-42
(CPC-AII/B 2.0 or higher)
Station Port Class (CPC-B 4.0 or higher)
SLT Hookflash (CPC-B 3.1 or higher)
FF3 (Extl’ott)# 37# (1-2 or 7-8)#
FF3 (ExtPort)# 38# (0 or l)#
FF3 (ExtPort)# 39# (O-9)++
3-43
3-45
3-46
Extension Ring Pattern
(CPC-AII 7.0 or higher; CPC-B 3.1 or higher)
Digital SLT Receiving Volume
FF3 (ExtPort)# 40# (0 or l)#
I
FF3 (ExtPort)# 41# (OOOl-9999)#
FF3 (ExtPort)# 42# (0-3)#
3-48
I
ICPC-AIIIB 3.1 or hipher)
Auto Set Relocation Code (CPC-AU/B 3.1 or higher)
Permanent Call Forward Type
I
3-49
3-51
(CPC-AU/B 3.1 or higher)
FF3 (ExtPort)# 43# (ExtNo.)#
Permanent Call Forward Extension
3-52
(CPC-AU/B 3.1 or higher)
FF3 (ExtPorW 44# (0 or l)#
FF3 (ExtFort)# 45# (0 or l)#
FF3 (ExtPort)# 46# (0 or l)#
1 FF3 (ExtPort)# 47# (0 or l)#
FF3 (ExtPort)## 48# (0 or l)#
FF3 (ExtPort)# 49# (0 or l)#
Page 3-2
ML/MC0 Separation (CPC-AIUB 4.0 or higher)
3-53
VAU Hunting Priority WC-AIUB 5.0 or higher)
3-54
AEC Disconnect (CPC-AU/B 5.0 or higher)
3-55
1 VAU Port Assignment (CPC-AD/B 5.0 or higher)
1 3-56 1
Hot Dial Pad ([email protected] 7.0 or higher)
3-57
Auto-RediaI on Extensions (CPC-AWB 7.0 or higher) 3-58
DBS Manual - Issued 8/l/95
Technical Manuals Online! - http://www.tech-man.com
DBS-70-400
Chapter 3. Extension Programming (FF3)
Section 400~Programming
Extension Numbers
Software Version: All Versions
Address: FF3 (ExtPort)# 1# (lo-69 or lOO-699)#
Description
This program assigns an extension number to an extension port.
l
l
An extension number is the 2-digit or 3-digit number that is dialed to reach
the extension phone. Extension numbers are programmable and can be
changed.
An extension port is the physical location (RJ2lx on the DBS connector)
into which the phone is plugged. Extension ports have fixed numbers
which can’t be changed (you can’t assign a different port number to the
same port).
Programming
To assign an Extension Number . . .
FF3 (l-144)# 1# (IO-69 or 100-699)#
+
+
Extension Port
Extension Number
Defaults: Port l=lO or 100
Port 2=11 or 101
Port 3=12 or 102 . . . etc.
To clear an Extension Number . . .
I
FF3 ‘(l-144)# I# CONF
I
NOTE: After clearing an extension number, the port is inoperative
until an extension number is reassigned to it, and the phone is
unplugged from the system and then plugged back in.
Related Programming
Extension Number Digits: FFl 2# l# 12# (0 or l)#f#
Second Attendant Position: FFl 2# l# 24# (11-69 or lOl-699)#
Third Attendant Position: FFl 2# l# 2% (11-69 or 101~699)#
Fourth Attendant Position: FFl 2# l# 2# (11-69 or lOl-699)#
Extension Names: FF6 l# (ExtPort)# CONF (Name)#
DBS-70-400
DBS Manual - Issued 8/l/95
Technical Manuals Online! - http://www.tech-man.com
Page 3-3
Chapter 3. Extension Programming (FF3)
Notes
Section 400-Programming
Primary Attendant Extension. The default extension number for the
Primary Attendant is 10 or 100, assigned to port 1. It is not possible to
change the Primary Attendant’s extension number or port. The Primary
Attendant phone must be a key telephone with an LCD display.
Second Attendant Extension. If a Second Attendant is assigned, its default
extension number is 11 or 101, assigned to port 2. Although the Second
Attendant assignment can be changed, it is recommended that you leave its
extension number at the default 11 or 101 so that a DSS/BLF console can be
used with it. (The Third and Fourth Attendants cannot use a DSS/BLF
phone.) If extension 101 or 11 is cleared, the Alternate Attendant feature is
canceled.
Clearing An Extension Number. Clearing an extension port of its extension
number does not return the number to a default value. Instead, the port is
inoperative until an extension number is reassigned to it and the phone is
unplugged from the system, then plugged back in.
Re-Assigning An Extension Number. An extension number can be changed
without clearing the old one first -- simply overwrite the old extension
number using this program address. (The system will recognize the new
extension number without requiring the phone to be unplugged and then
plugged back in afterwards.)
Assigning An Extension Number Already In Use. If an extension number is
already assigned to a port, and you assign the same number to another port,
the system will automatically clear the fust port of the extension number. The
first port would then have to be re-assigned a new extension number, and the
phone unplugged and then plugged back in again.
Changing The Extension’Name. The assignment or re-assignment of
extension numbers does not change the extension name. To change the
extension name, use program address FF6 l# (ExtPort)# CONF (Name)#.
Finding Out the Port Number of an Extension. If an extension phone has
an LCD display, you can display its port number by pressing ON/OFF
CONF #5* on that phone. Or, from another extension with an LCD, press
ON/OFF CONF [ExtNo.] (the dialed extension’s port number will
display).
Page 3-4
DES Manual - Issued 8/l/95
Technical Manuals Online! - http://www.tech-man.com
DBS-70-400
Chapter 3. Extension Programming (FF3)
Section 400~Programming
Terminal Type
Software Version: All Versions
Address: FF3 (ExtPort)# 2# (ExtType)#
Description
Some DBS extensions are automatically configured when installed on an
extension port. This address allows you to change default terminal
assignments, or assign special equipment to extension ports.
Programming
FF3 (lj144)# 2# (ly)#
I
Extension Port
Terminal Type (see table below)
Table 3-1. Terminal Types
a
Note: If the configuration is “Auto”, the system defaults to the phone type plugged
into that port. If no phone is plugged in, the port defaults to “4” (34-button
Key Phone).
21-28
29-30
DBS-70-400
Integrated ACD channels
(not used)
DBS Manual - issued 8/l/95
Technical Manuals Online! - http://www.tech-man.com
Auto
N/A
Page 3-5
Chapter 3. Extension Programming (FF3)
31-38
39-40
41-48
Section 400-Programming
Integrated Auto Attendant channels
(not used)
Integrated DBS Voice Mail channels
Auto
N/A
Auto
Related Programming
APVAEC Slot Assignment: FFl 2# l# 20# (2-9 or
Notes
Terminal Type 6 (DSLT). This terminal type is not available in CPC-A/B
versions prior to 3.1.
Terminal Type IO (Third-Party Voice Mail). Beginning with CPC-A
Version 3.28 and CPC-B Version 4.07, when an analog port hookflashes to
return to a held trunk, the DBS returns busy tone to Voice Mail if the trunk is
abandoned. When Voice Mail receives the busy tone, it recognizes that the
trunk has been abandoned, and consequently releases the called extension.
(In previous versions, the DBS returned ringback tone, causing the extension
to continue ringing.)
Terminal Types ll-I4 (DSSl72) and 16-19 (Attendant Consoles). After
manually setting any of these terminal types, disconnect the modular jacks
from the devices, then reconnect them.
Terminal Types 16-19 (Attendant Consoles). This option requires the
Attendant Feature Package, which is available only with CPC-B Version 2.0
to 4.0.
Terminal Types 30-48. These options are available with CPC-AII/B Version
3.1 or higher.
VAU Port Assignments. For later CPC versions, VAU ports are assigned in
other addresses:
CPC-A 3.3 or higher: FF3 (l-72)## 34# (0 or l)#
CPC-AII (all versions): FF3 (l-144)# 47# (0 or I)#
CPC-B 5.0 or higher: FF3 (l-144)# 47# (Oor l)#
Call Forward ID Digits. Call Forward ID digits will only emit if the port is
set for Terminal Type 10-15. Terminal Type 10 is the recommended setting
for each Third-Party Voice Mail.
Console Port Assignments. For all CPC versions, a DSS/72 console is
assigned by setting the Terminal Type to 11-14. However, EM/24 ports are
assigned in the next address, FF3 (ExtPort)# 3# (ExtPort)#.
Page 3-6
DBS Manual - Issued 8/l/95
Technical Manuals Online! - http://www.tech-man.com
DBS-70-400
Section 400~Programming
Chapter 3. Extension Programming (FF3)
EM/24 Port Assignment
Software Version: All Versions
Address: FF3 (ExtPort)# 3# (ExtPort)#
Description
This program assigns an EM/24 terminal to a key phone by associating the
extension ports.
EM/24 terminals provide additional FF keys to a key phone. An EM/24
terminal needs its own extension port. This address therefore requires two
port number entries -- one for the EM/24 terminal, and one for the key phone.
After the EM/24 is assigned to the key phone, the key phone’s extension port
should be used in other program addresses (for example, when including the
phone in a hunt group or call coverage group).
Programming
To assign an EM/24 to a key phone . . .
FF3 (l-144)# 3# (l-144)#
+
EM/24 Port
f
Key Phone Port
To clear an EM/24 assignment . . .
FF3 &144)# 3# CONF ON/OFF
f
EM/24 Port
Notes
Reconnection Requirement. After manually reprogramming the EM/24
terminal, disconnect its module jack, then reconnect it.
Changing Default Key Assignments in CPC-B Versions 2.01 to 2.04. When
you change default EM/24 key assignments in these versions, reprogram as
follows:
1. Assign the EM/24 to a port.
2. Reset the EM/24 by unplugging then reconnecting it.
3. Program the keys using FF5 (ExtPort)# (FFkey’)#.
DBS-70-400
DBS Manual - Issued 8/l/95
Technical Manuals Online! - http://www.tech-man.com
Page 3-7
Section 400-Programming
Chapter 3. Extension Programming (FF3)
Forced Least Cost Routing
Software Version: All Versions
Address: FF3 (ExtPort)# 4# (0 or l)#
Description
Use this address to set individual extension(s) for forced Least Cost Routing
(LCR).
If an extension is set for forced LCR:
every pooled key “9” is now an LCR key.
stations cannot dial 8 l-86 to place an outside call.
the caller will hear a dial tone generated by the DBS -- but the system will
not access an outside line until the caller dials an area code and/or office
code, after which the system selects the least expensive trunk based on
time of day, carrier, and/or dialed number.
l
l
l
Programming
.
FF3 (11144)# 4# (0 or l)#
f
Extension Port
$
O=Disabled (no forced LCR).
l=Enabled (forced LCR).
Related Programming
LCR Access: FFl 2# l# 3# (0 or l)#
Least Cost Routing: All FF8 programs
Notes
Page 3-8
Interaction With Call Forward-Outside. If Forced LCR is enabled, the
“Call Forward-Outside” feature cannot be used.
DBS Manual - Issued 8/l/95
Technical Manuals Online! - http://www.tech-man.com
DBS-70-400
Lhapter 3. txtenston rrogrammlng (FF3)
Section 4OO+rogramming
Forced Account Codes
Software Version: All Versions
Address: FF3 (ExtPort)# 5# (012)#
Description
Use this address to force extension users to enter an account code before
making an outside call.
l
l
Beginning with CPC-AII/B Version 3.1, forced account codes will be
verified by the DBS system before allowing the call.
Beginning with CPC-AB/B Version 6.0, forced account codes can be either
“verified” or “unverified” by the system.
Programming
FF3 l-1 44)# 5# (012)#
Extension Port
+
O=Account code usage is voluntary.
l=Account codes (4-digit) are forced and verified,
2=Account codes (l- 10 digits) are forced but
unverified.
Related Programming
Verified Forced Account Codes: FFl 2# 6# (l-lOO)# l# (0000-9999)#
Toll Restriction for Verified Forced Account Codes: FFl 2# 6# (l-100)++
2# (O-7)#
TRS Types Assigned to Trunks or Extensions: FF7 addresses
Notes
Extensions Set to 0 PAAccount code usage is voluntary”‘). The extension
user can place outside calls without entering an account code. If the caller
does enter an account code, the DBS will include it in the SMDR record for
the call, but will not verify it.
Extensions Set to 1 rAecount codes are forced and verified”‘) (the
“verified” part of this option available in CPC-AIIIB Version 3. I or
higher). The extension user cannot place an outside call without first
entering a valid account code. The DBS will verify it (in CPC-AH/B Version
3.1 or higher) and apply the account code’s assigned TRS type to allow or
disallow the call.
Extensions Set to 2 (“Account codes are forced but unverified”) (this
option is available in CPC-krIlB Version 6.0 or higher). The extension user
cannot place an outside call without first entering an account code. The DBS
will include the account code in the SMDR record but will not verify it.
DBS-70-400
DBS Manual - Issued 8/l/95
Technical Manuals Online! - http://www.tech-man.com
Page 3-9
Extension Lockout Code
Software Version: All Versions
Address: FF3 (ExtPort)# 6# (0000-9999)#
Description
Use this address to assign a 4-digit Station Lockout code to an extension.
This allows an extension user to “lock” the phone, preventing others from
being able to place or receive outside calls on the phone while the extension
user is away. However, the locked extension can be used for intercom calls.
NOTE: Assigning Station Lockout codes must be performed on an Attendant
or key phone.
Programming
To assign a Station Lockout Code to an extension . . .
(must be performed on-an Attendant or key phone)
FF3 (I-144)# 6## (0000- 999)#
f
Extension Port
3
Extension Lockout Code
To clear a Station Lockout Code assignment . . .
FF3 (11144)# 6# CONF ON/OFF
/(Extension Port-
Notes
CAUTION: Before clearing a lockout code,
make sure the extension is currently “unlocked” -otherwise, the extension will remain locked until
another lockout code is assigned to it, and then
the new code is used to unlock the extension.
Lucking An Extension. To lock an extension, dial “74” plus the Station
Lockout Code. Repeat to unlock it.
Using the Stution Lockout Code. If an extension is “locked” with the
Station Lockout Code, the extension phone will not allow incoming or
outgoing trunk calls, including transferred trunk calls.
Page 3-l 0
DBS Manual - Issued 8/l/95
Technical Manuals Online! - http://www.tech-man.com
DBS-70-400
ulaprer Y. c~kulsion rrogrammmg (t-w)
3ectIon 4w~rogrammlng
Offhook Signal (CO)
Software Version: All Versions
Address: FF3 (ExtPort)# 7# (0 or l)#
Description
Programming
.
This program determines if the DBS sends a tone signal to busy extensions
when an additional trunk call arrives.
To activate the Offhook Signal . . .
FF3 (l-144)# 7# (0 or l)#
t
Extension Port
t
O=Disable Off’hook Signaling.
l-Enable Offhook Signaling.
Note: Default for the Primary
Attendant is 1 (“Enable”).
To reset the Offhook Signal to the default value . . .
I
FF3 (I-144)# 7# CONF ON/OFF
I
Related Programming
Offhook Signal Volume: FF3 (ExtPort)# 15# (0-4)#
Offhook Signal Pattern: FF3 (ExtPort)# 16# (0 or l)#
Notes
Conditions Under Which the Signal Is Not Sent. The system will not send
the Offhook Signal (even if enabled) during a conference call, while the
called extension is on hold, or during a call on a trunk that does not have a
dedicated line key on the phone.
Station Hunting Interaction. If an extension is enabled for Offhook
Signaling, the extension will, be excluded from any hunt group setting that
may be enabled for it.
VAU Interaction. If a Voice Announce Unit (VAU) is connected to the DEjS,
disable Offhook Signaling (CO) to prevent VAU calls from being interrupted
by incoming trunk calls.
DBS-70-400
DBS Manual - Issued 8/l/95
Technical Manuals Online! - http://www.tech-man.com
Page 3-l 1
ac?wiuI 8 wu-r I uyl a I II I III iy
Call Waiting/OHVA
Software Version: All Versions
Address: FF3 (ExtPort)# 8# (0 or l)#
Description
This setting determines if an extension can receive Call Waiting and Offhook
Voice Announcement (OHVA).
Programming
FF3 (I-144)# 8# (0 or l)#
I
Notes
Extension Port
O=Disable Call Waiting/OHVA.
kEnable Call Waiting/OHVA.
Conditions Under Which the Tone Is Not Sent. The Call Waiting
notification tone cannot be sent to an extension that has an absence message,
a call on hold, or is engaged in a conference call.
VA U Interaction. If a VAU (Voice Announce Unit) is used, disable Call
WaitingjOHVA to prevent other extensions from breaking in on calls to the
VAU.
Page 3-I 2
DBS Manual - Issued 8/l/95
Technical Manuals Online! - http://www.tech-man.com
DBS-70-400
Chapter 3. Extension Programming (FF3)
Section 400-Programming
Busy Override Send
Software Version: All Versions
Address: FF3 (ExtPort)# 9# (0 or l)#
Description
Use this address to enable an extension to “barge into” calls that are in
progress on other extensions. If the extension is enabled, the extension caller
can join in on another extension’s call -- all three parties will be able to hear
each other.
Programming
FF3 (1.144)# 9# (0 or l)#
i(
Extension Port
f
O=Disable “Barge In” capability.
l=Enable “Barge In” capability.
Related Programming
Alert Tone for Busy Override & OHVA: FFl 2# I# 17# (0 or l)#
Busy Override Receive: FF3 (ExtPort)# lO# (0 or l)#
Page Group Extensions: FF3 (ExtPort)# (18-25)# (0 or l)#
Notes
Conditions That Restrict “‘Barge In.” Extensions can be set to block barge-
in calls with the next address (Busy Override Receive, FF3 ExtPort# lO# O#).
Also, a barge-in attempt will not work when the called extension is
participating in a conference call.
Page Group Interaction. Extensions enabled for Busy Override Send can
only barge into calls on extensions within their own page group. For
example, an extension in page group 1 cannot interrupt a call in page group
2. Page group 0 does not allow Busy Override.
Permanent Setting for Attendants in CPC-A and CPC-B Version 1.0. Busy
Override Send cannot be disabled on Attendant phones in these versions.
DBS-70-400
DBS Manual - Issued 8/l/95
Technical Manuals Online! - http://www.tech-man.com
Page 3-l 3
Busy Override Receive
Software Version: All Versions
Address: FF3 (ExtPort)# lO# (0 or l)#
Description
This address determines whether other extensions can “barge into” an
extension while it is engaged in a call. By default, barge-ins from other
extensions are allowed.
Programming *
I
FF3 (l-144)# lO# (0 or l)#
Extension Port
+
O=Disable (other extensions cannot
barge-in).
l=Enable (other extensions can
barge-in).
Related Programming
Alert Tone for Busy Override & OHVA: FFl 2# l# 17# (0 or l)#
Busy Override Send: FF3 (ExtPort)# 9# (0 or l)#
Page Group Extensions: FF3 (ExtPort)# (1%25)# (0 or l)#
Page 3-14
DBS Manual - Issued 8/l/95
Technical Manuals Online! - http://www.tech-man.com
DBS-70-400
Prime Line Pickup
Software Version: All Versions
Address: FF3 (ExtPort)# 11# (0 or l)#
Description
Use this address to enable or disable the Prime Line Pickup feature, which
allows the user to automatically pick up a trunk assigned to the FFl key by
simply picking up the receiver.
If the FFl key is a pooled trunk key, an available trunk is accessed in
numerical order, from the highest trunk number assigned to the key to the
lowest.
Programming
I
1
FF3 (l-144)# ll# (0 or l)#
t
Extension Port
f
O=Disable Prime Line Pickup.
1 =Enable Prime Line Pickup.
Notes
Providing for Intercom Calling. If Prime Line Pickup is enabled, intercom
calls cannot be made from the extension unless an intercom call key is
assigned to another FF key.
DBS-70-400
, DBS Manual - Issued 8/l/95
Technical Manuals Online! - http://www.tech-man.com
Page 3-l 5
I
Auto Pickup (Ringing Line)
Software Version: All Versions
Address: FF3 (ExtPort)# 12# (0 or l)#
Description
Use this program to enable Auto Pickup -- connecting with an incoming trunk
call, a hold recall, or a transferred call simply by picking up the ringing
extension’s handset.
If Auto Pickup is disabled, you must pick up the handset and press the
appropriate FF key to connect to the call.
Programming
FF3 (l-144)# 12# (0 or l)#
f
Extension Port
Notes
Page 3-16
t
O=Disable Auto Pickup.
l=Enable Auto Pickup.
VAU Interaction. If a VAU (Voice Announce Unit) is used, enable Auto
Pickup to allow the VAU to pick up CO calls.
DBS Manual - Issued 8/l/95
Technical Manuals Online! - http://www.tech-man.com
DBS-70-400
Section 400-Programming
Chapter 3. Extension Programming (FF3)
Unsupervised Conference
Software Version: All Versions
Address: F-3 (ExtPort)# 13# (0 or I)#
Description
Use this address to enable or disable the Unsupervised Conference feature on
an extension. If enabled, the extension user can initiate a three-party
conference between two trunks and the extension, then drop out of the call by
pressing either of the trunk keys used to call the other parties.
Programming
I
FF3 (I-144)# 13# (0 or I)#
Extension Port’
,
O=The extension cannot initiate
a three-party conference.
l=The extension can initiate
a three-party conference.
Related Programming
Unsupervised Conference Timer: FF 1 3# 9# (0- 15)#
Unsupervised Trunk Conference: FF2 (Tnmk)# 16#
Notes
Re-entering a Three-Party Conference. The user can re-enter the
conference by pressing either of the two CO trunk keys used to initiate the
conference.
Auto-Pam& Interaction. If the DBS is behind a PBX, and an extension is
enabled for Unsupervised Conference, the Automatic Pause for PBX Line
address (FF2# Trunk# 13#) cannot be used.
DBS-70-400
DBS Manual - Issued 8/l/95
Technical Manuals Online! - http://www.tech-man.com
Page 3-17
Section 400-Programming
Chapter 3. Extension Programming (FF3)
Station Message Detail Recorder (SMDR) Report
Software Version: All Versions
Address: FF3 (ExtPort)# 14# (0 or I)#
Description
Any extension can be removed hm the SMDR report, so that its call activity
will not be recorded.
Programming
FF3 (I-144)## 14# (0 or I)#
Extension Port
f
t
O=The extension is not included in the
SMDR report.
l=The extension is included in the
SMDR report.
Related Programming
SMDR Display Start Tier for CO Calls: FFl 2# I# 2# (0 or l)#
Notes
Checking Communication Parameters. When you set this option, also
check the communications parameters in programs FF12# 2# l# through 9#.
DBS Manual - Issued 8/l/95
Page 3-18
Technical Manuals Online! - http://www.tech-man.com
DBS-70-400
Chapter 3. Extension Programming (FF3)
Section 400-Programming
Offhook Signal Volume
Software Vewion: All Versions
Address: FK? (ExtPort)# 15# (04)#
Description
The volume for ofIhook signaling can be set to one of five different levels.
OfIhook signaling is a “beep-beep” tone heard every 6 seconds in the receiver
of an ofRook extension (already engaged in a call), indicating another trunk
call is coming in.
The next address (“Offhook Signal Pattern”) allows you to set the tone
signal to be sent repeatedly, or only once, to an of3thook extension user.
l
Programming
I
FF3 (I-144)## 15# (04)#
t
t
Extension Port
Volume Level
O=lowest level (quietest)
l=next lowest level
2=mid-level
3=next highest level
4=highest level (loudest)
1 Related Programming
Alert Tone for Busy Override & OHVA:
Of&ookSignal:
FF3 (ExtPort)# 7# (0 or l)#
Offhook Signal Pattern:
Notes
FF 1 2# l# 17# (0 or l)#
FF3 (ExtPort)# 16# (0 or l)#
Reset Requirement. If you change the volume level in this address, the
extension phone must be unplugged, then plugged back in so that the change
will take effect.
DBS Manual - Issued 8/l/95
DBS-70-400
Technical Manuals Online! - http://www.tech-man.com
Page 3-19
Section 400-Programming
Chapter 3. Extension Programming (FF3)
Offhoek Signal Pattern
Software Version: All Versions
Address: FF3 (ExtPort)# 1611 (0 or 1)#
Description
The ofIhook signaling tone can be sent repeatedly or only once.
OfThook signaling is a “beep-beep” tone heard every 6 seconds in the receiver
of an oflhook extension (already engaged in a call), indicating another trunk
call is coming in.
The previous address (“Offhook Signal Volume”) allows you to set the
volume level of the tone signal.
Programming
FF3 (I-144)# 16# (Oor l)#
f
Extension Port
t
O=Repeated tone burst
(approx. every 6 seconds).
l=Single tone burst.
Related Programming
Of&ook Signal: FF3 (ExtPort)# 7# (0 or I)#
OfThook Signal Volume: FF3 (ExtPort)# 15# (0 or l)#
Page 3-20
DBS Manual - issued 8/l/95
Technical Manuals Online! - http://www.tech-man.com
DES-70-400
PSD Name Display on Large-Sized LCD Phones
Software Version: All Versions
Address: FF3 (ExtPort)# 17# (0 or l)#
Description
The large-screen phone can show either 5 or 10 personal speed dial names,
depending on this setting.
Programming
FF3 (I-144)# 17# (0 or l)#
f
Extension Port
t
0~5 PSD names display.
l=lO PSD names display.
Related Programming
Personal Speed Dial Names: FF6 3# (ExtPort)## (PSD)#
Personal Speed Dial Numbers: IFlO 2# (ExtPort)# (PSD)#
Notes
DBS-70-400
Maximum Name Lengths. When the “10 PSD names display” option is
chosen, the maximum length of the names is 7 characters. With the “5 PSD
names display” option, the names can be 16 characters long.
DBS Manual - Issued 8/l/95
Technical Manuals Online! - http://www.tech-man.com
Page 3-21
Page Group Extensions
Software Version: All Versions
Address: FF3 (ExtPort)# (l8-25)##
Description
(0
or l)#
Use this address to include an extension in one or more of the eight page
groups. If an extension is included in a page group, pages to that group will
be heard on the extension phone’s loudspeaker. Also, the extension will be
able to pick up calls to other extensions in the page group using the Group
Call Pickup feature.
Programming
FFy44)# (18fZ5)#/ (0 y,r l)#
Extension Port
Notes
18=Page group 0
19=Page group 1
20=Page group 2
2 l=Page group 3
22=Page group 4
23=Page group 5
24=Page group 6
25=Page group 7
O=Exclude from groupI.
l=Include in group.
Interaction with Group Call Pitkup. Page groups determine which
extensions can use the Group Call Pickup (70) feature.
Interaction with Busy Override. Page group 0 does not allow Busy
Override. In other words, if an extension is a member of page group 0, it
cannot be overridden. Also, a Busy-Override-Send enabled extension can
only override calls at extensions within its own page group. For example, an
extension in page group 1 cannot override calls in page group 2.
Page 3-22
DBS Manual - issued 8/l/95
Technical Manuals Online! - http://www.tech-man.com
DBS-70-400
Chapter 3. tXtenSion Programming (FF3)
Section 400~wogramming
Display When Idle
Software Version: All Versions
Address: FF3 (ExtPort)# 26# (O-24 or 039)#
Description
Select a soft-key menu to be displayed during “idle” mode on a large-display
phone. While the menu is displayed, pressing a soft key will perform the
assigned feature.
Programming ,
FF3 (I-l 44)# 26# (O-24 or O-39)#
+
Extension Port
$
Soft Key Menu (see table below)
Default: 0 (previous menu
displays)
Available Ranges: O-24=CPC-A (all versions) and
CPC-B prior to 6.0
0-39=CPC-AII and CPC-B
Version 6.0 or higher
Table 3-2. Soft key menus during tie mode
10
11
12
13
14
15
DBS-70-400
Attendant Menu 2
Attendant Menu 3
Function Screen 1
Function Screen 2
Function Screen 3
Function Screen 4
Function Screen 5
(fixed)
(fixed)
(fixed)
(fixed)
(fixed)
DBS Manual - Issued 8/l/95
Technical Manuals Online! - http://www.tech-man.com
Page 3-23
I
1 Function Screen 6 (fixed)
1 Function Screen 7 (fixed)
1 Function Screen 8 (fixed)
Function Screen 9 (fixed)
Function Screen 10 (fixed)
Function Screen 11 (fixed)
Function Screen 12 (fixed)
Function Screen 13 (fixed)
Function Screen 14 (fixed)
Flexible Function Screen 1 (user-programmable)
Flexible Function Screen 2 (user-programmable)
Flexible Function Screen 3 (user-programmable)
Flexible Function Screen 4 (user-programmable)
Flexible Function Screen 5 (user-programmable)
Flexible Function Screen 6 (user-programmable)
Flexible Function Screen 7 (user-programmable)
Flexible Function Screen 8 (user-programmable)
’ Flexible Function Screen 9 (user-programmable)
Flexible Function Screen 10 (user-programmable)
Flexible Function Screen 11 (user-programmable)
Flexible Function Screen 12 (user-programmable)
Flexible Function Screen 13 (user-programmable)
Flexible Function Screen 14 (user-programmable)
Flexible Function Screen 15 (user-programmable)
16
I
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
Related Programming
Flexible Function Screen addresses: FFl 2# 7# l# thru 4#
Notes
Initial Default. After a system initialization, the Main Menu will display
during “idle” mode.
Page 3-24
DBS Manual - issued 8/l/95
Technical Manuals Online! - http://www.tech-man.com
DBS-70-400
Display During Intercom Dial Tone
Software Version: All Versions
Address: FF3 (ExtPort)# 27# (O-24 or 0-39)#
Description
Select a soft-key menu to be displayed during intercom dial tone on a largedisplay phone. While the menu is displayed, pressing a soft key will perform
the assigned feature.
Programming
FF3 (l-1 44)# 27# (O-24 or O-39)#
f
f
Soft Key Menu (see table below)
Extension Port
Default: 0 (previous menu
displays)
Available Ranges: O-24=CPC-A (all versions) and
CPC-B prior to 6.0
0-39=CPC-ALT and CPC-B
Version 6.0 or higher
Table 3-3. Sojl key menus during intercom diul tone
Setting
0
1
2
3
5
I
DBS-70-400
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
Value (menu) (see Appendix A for menu illustrations)
No change (previous menu retained)
1 Main Menu
] Personal Speed Dial
1 System Speed Dial
11 Extension Index
Help Menu 1
Help Menu 2
Help Menu 3
Attendant Menu 1
Attendant Menu 2
Attendant Menu 3
Function Screen 1 (fixed)
Function Screen 2 (fixed)
Function Screen 3 (fixed)
Function Screen 4 (fixed)
1 Function Screen 5 (fixed)
DBS Manual - Issued 8/l/95
Technical Manuals Online! - http://www.tech-man.com
,
-I
Page 3-25
I
.
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
1 Function Screen 6 (fixed)
[%nction
Screen 7 (fixed)
,
1 Function Screen 8 (fixed)
[Function Screen 9 (fixed)
1 Function Screen 10 (fixed)
Function Screen 11 (fixed)
Function Screen 12 (fixed)
Function Screen 13 (fixed)
Function Screen 14 (fixed)
Flexible Function Screen 1 (user-programmable)
Flexible Function Screen 2 (user-programmable)
Flexible Function Screen 3 (user-programmable)
Flexible Function Screen 4 (user-programmable)
Flexible Function Screen 5 (user-programmable)
Flexible Function Screen 6 (user-programmable)
Flexible Function Screen 7 (user-programmable)
Flexible Function Screen 8 (user-programmable)
Flexible Function Screen 9 (user-programmable)
Flexible Function Screen 10 (user-programmable)
Flexible Function Screen 11 (user-programmable)
Flexible Function Screen 12 (user-programmable)
Flexible Function Screen 13 (user-programmable)
Flexible Function Screen 14 (user-programmable)
Flexible Function Screen 15 (user-programmable)
1
Related Programming
Flexible Function Screen addresses: FFl 2# 7# l# thru 4#
Page 3-26
DBS Manual - Issued 8/l/95
Technical Manuals Online! - http://www.tech-man.com
DBS-70-400
Chapter 3. Extension Programming (FF3)
secnon 400-Programming
Display When Calling an Extension
Software Version: All Versions
Address: FF3 (ExtPort)# 2# (O-24 or 0139)#
Description
Select a soft-key menu to be displayed while calling another extension on a
large-display phone. While the menu is displayed, pressing a soft key will
perform the assigned feature.
Programming
FF3 (I-1 44)# 28# (O-24 or 0-39)#
$.
$
Soft Key Menu (see table below)
Default: 0 (previous menu
displays)
AvailableRanges: O-24=CPC-A (all versions) and
CPC-B prior to 6.0
0-39=CPC-AII and CPC-B
Version 6.0 or higher
Extension Port
a
Table 3-4.
SofL key menus when calling an extension
Setting
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
D&-70-400
Value (menu) (see Appendix A for menu illustrations)
No change (previous menu retained)
Main Menu
Personal Speed Dial
System Speed Dial
Extension Index
Help Menu 1
Help Menu 2
Help Menu 3
Attendant Menu 1
Attendant Menu 2
Attendant Menu 3
Function Screen 1 (fixed)
1 Function Screen 2 (fixed)
Function Screen 3 (fixed)
Function Screen 4 (fixed)
Function Screen 5 (fixed)
DBS Manual - Issued 8/l/95
Technical Manuals Online! - http://www.tech-man.com
Page 3-27
--I- --.
--
-_._-..-
~. - . . . . . . . . il \
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
.
,
-- --.- -. .__ . .-=. - . . . . . . . . . J
Function Screen 6 (fixed)
Function Screen 7 (fixed)
Function Screen 8 (fixed)
Function Screen 9 (fixed)
Function Screen 10 (fixed)
Function Screen 11 (fixed)
Function Screen 12 (fixed)
Function Screen 13 (fixed)
Function Screen 14 (fixed)
Flexible Function Screen 1 (user-programmable)
Flexible Function Screen 2 (user-programmable)
Flexible Function Screen 3 (user-programmable)
Flexible Function Screen 4 (user-programmable)
Flexible Function Screen 5 (user-programmable)
Flexible Function Screen 6 (user-programmable)
Flexible Function Screen 7 (user-programmable)
Flexible Function Screen 8 (user-programmable)
Flexible Function Screen 9 (user-programmable)
Flexible Function Screen 10 (user-programmable)
Flexible Function Screen 11 (ilser-programmable)
Flexible Function Screen 12 (user-programmable)
Flexible Function Screen 13 (user-programmable)
Flexible Function Screen 14 (user-programmable)
Flexible Function Screen 15 (user-programmable)
Related Programming
Flexible Function Screen addresses: FFl 2# 7# l# thru 4#
Page 3-28
DBS Manual - Issued 8/l/95
Technical Manuals Online! - http://www.tech-man.com
DBS-70-400
Display When Accessing CO Dial Tone
Software Version: All Versions
Address: FF3 (ExtPort)# 29# (O-24 or 0139)#
Description
Select a soft-key menu to be displayed while accessing a trunk on a largedisplay phone. While the menu is displayed, pressing a soft key will perform
the assigned feature.
Programming
FF3 (19144)# 29# (O-24 or O-39)#
41
Soft Key Menu (see table below)
Default: 0 (previous menu
displays)
Available Ranges: O-24=CPC-A (all versions) and
CPC-B prior to 6.0
0-39=CPC-AII and CPC-B
Version 6.0 or higher
t
Extension Port
T&le 3-5. Soj$ key menus when accessing CO dial tone
Setting
0
1
I
2
14
15
DBS-70-400
Value (menu) (see Appendix A for menu illustrations)
No change (previous menu retained)
Main Menu
Personal Speed Dial
System Speed Dial
Extension Index
Help Menu 1
Help Menu 2
Help Menu 3
Attendant Menu 1
Attendant Menu 2
Attendant Menu 3
Function Screen 1 (fixed)
Function Screen 2 (fixed)
1 Function Screen 3 (fixed)
Function Screen 4 (fixed)
Function Screen 5 (fixed)
DBS Manual - Issued 8/l/95
Technical Manuals Online! - http://www.tech-man.com
Page 3-29
Section 400-Programming
Chapter 3. Extension Programming (FF3)
16
17
18
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
Function Screen 6 (fixed)
Function Screen 7 (fixed)
Function Screen 8 (fixed)
1 Function Screen 9 (fixed)
1 Function Screen 10 (fixed)
user-programma
Flexible Function Screen 8 (user-programmable)
Flexible Function Screen 9 (user-programmable)
Flexible Function Screen 10 (user-programmable)
Flexible Function Screen 11 (user-programmable)
Flexible Function Screen 12 (user-programmable)
Flexible Function Screen 13 (user-programmable)
Flexible Function Screen 14 (user-programmable)
Flexible Function Screen 15 (user-programmable)
Related Programming
Flexible Function Screen addresses: FFl 2# 7# l# thru #
Page 3-30
DBS Manual - Issued 8/l/95
Technical Manuals Online! - http://www.tech-man.com
DBS-70-400
GI ktprer Y. exwwon rrogrammtng (t-F3)
secnon 4uwrrogrammlng
Display When Conversing on a CO Trunk
Software Version: All Versions
Address: FF3 (ExtPort)# 30# (O-24 or O-39)#
Description
Select a soft-key menu to be displayed while a trunk call is in progress on a
large-display phone. While the menu is displayed, pressing a soft key will
perform the assigned fearure.
Programming ,
FF3 (1-l 44)# 30# (O-24
t
Extension Port
Soft Key Menu (see table below)
Default: 0 (previous menu
displays)
Available Ranges: O-24=CPC-A (all versions) and
CPC-B prior to 6.0
O-39=CPC-AII and CPC-B
Version 6.0 or higher
Table 3-6. Soft key menus during a trunk call
Setting
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
9
10
14
15
DBS-70-400
Value (menu) (see Appendix A for menu illustrations)
No change (previous menu retained)
1 Main Menu
Personal Speed Dial
i System Speed Diai
Extension Index
Help Menu 1
Help Menu 2
Help Menu 3
1 Attendant Menu 1
Attendant Menu 2
Attendant Menu 3
) Function Screen 1 (fixed)
1 Function Screen 2 (fixed)
1 Function Screen 3 (fixed)
Function Screen 4 (fixed)
Function Screen 5 (fixed)
DBS Manual - Issued 8/l/95
Technical Manuals Online! - http://www.tech-man.com
I
Page 3-31
r>ebuui I *vu-r 1 uyi ai I II I III iy
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
Function Screen 6 (fixed)
Function Screen 7 (fixed)
Function Screen 8 (fixed)
Function Screen 9 (fixed)
Function Screen 10 (fixed)
Function Screen 11 (fixed)
Function Screen 12 (fixed)
Function Screen 13 (fixed)
Function Screen 14 (fixed)
Flexible Function Screen 1 (user-programmable)
Flexible Function Screen 2 (user-programmable)
Flexible Function Screen 3 (user-programmable)
Flexible Function Screen 4 (user-programmable)
1 Flexible Function Screen 5 (user-programmable)
Flexible Function Screen 6 (user-programmable)
Flexible Function Screen 7 (user-programmable)
Flexible Function Screen 8 (user-programmable)
Flexible Function Screen 9 (user-programmable)
Flexible Function Screen 10 (user-programmable)
Flexible Function Screen 11 (user-programmable)
Flexible Function Screen 12 (user-programmable)
Flexible Function Screen 13 (user-programmable)
I Flexible Function Screen 14 (user-programmable)
Flexible Function Screen 15 (user-programmable)
Related Programming
Flexible Function Screen addresses: FFl 2# 7# l# thru #
Page 3-32
DBS Manual - Issued 8/l/95
Technical Manuals Online! - http://www.tech-man.com
DBS-70-400
tin ktprer J. c~iension rrogrammlng (w9)
3ecnon 4uu-rrogramrwly
Display When Receiving a Page
Software Version: Ail Versions
Address:
FF3 (ExtPort)# 31# (O-24 or 0139)#
Description
Select a soft-key menu to be displayed while receiving a page on a largedisplay phone. While the menu is displayed, pressing a soft key will perform
the assigned feature.
Programming
FF3 (1-l 44)# 31# (O-24 or 0-39)#
f
$
Soft Key Menu (see table below)
Default: 0 (previous menu
displays)
Available Ranges: O-24=CPC-A (all versions) and
CPC-B prior to 6.0
0-39=CPC-AII and CPC-B
Version 6.0 or higher
Extension Port
Table 3-7. Soft key menus when receiving a page
Setting
0
2
3
5
6
7
t
9
11
12
13
14
15
DBS-70-400
Value (menu) (see Appendix A for menu illustrations)
No change (previous menu retained)
1 Main Menu
Personal Speed Dial
System Speed Dial
1 Extension Index
Help Menu 1
Help Menu 2
Help Menu 3
1 Attendant Menu 1
1 Attendant Menu 2
I Attendant Menu 3
Function Screen 1 (fixed)
Function Screen 2 (fixed)
Function Screen 3 (fixed)
Function Screen 4 (fixed)
1 Function Screen 5 (fixed)
DBS Manual - Issued 8/l/95
Technical Manuals Online! - http://www.tech-man.com
J
t
Page 3-33
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
Function Screen 6 (fixed)
Function Screen 7 (fixed)
Function Screen 8 (fixed)
Function Screen 9 (fixed)
Function Screen 10 (fixed)
Function Screen 11 (fixed)
Function Screen 12 (fixed)
Function Screen 13 (fixed)
Function Screen 14 (fixed)
Flexible Function Screen 1’ (user-programmable)
Flexible Function Screen 2 (user-programmable)
Flexible Function Screen 3 (user-programmable)
Flexible Function Screen 4 (user-programmable)
Flexible Function Screen 5 (user-programmable)
Flexible Function Screen 6 (user-programmable)
Flexible Function Screen 7 (user-programmable)
Flexible Function Screen 8 (user-programmable)
Flexible Function Screen 9 (user-programmabie)
Flexible Function Screen 10 (user-programmable)
Flexible Function Screen 11 (user-programmable)
Flexible Function Screen 12 (user-programmable)
Flexible Function Screen 13 (user-programmable)
Flexible Function Screen 14 (user-programmable)
1 Flexible Function Screen 15 (user-programmable)
I
Related Programming
Flexible Function Screen addresses: FFl 2# 7# 1# thru 4##
Page 3-34
DBS Manual - Issued 8/l/95
Technical Manuals Online! - http://www.tech-man.com
DBS-70-400
Section 400-Programming
Chapter 3. Extension Programming (FF3)
Display After Receiving a Call Waiting Tone
Software Version: All Versions
Address: FF3 (ExtPort)# 32# (O-24 or 0139)#
Description
Select a soft-key menu to be displayed after receiving a call-waiting tone on a
large-display phone. While the menu is displayed, pressing a soft key will
perform the assigned feature.
Programming I
FF3 (l-1 44)# 32# (O-24 or O-39)#
lr
$
Soft Key Menu (see table below)
Default: 0 (previous menu
displays)
Available Ranges: O-24=CPC-A (all versions) and
CPC-B prior to 6.0
0-39=CPC-AII and CPC-B
Version 6.0 or higher
Extension Port
Table 3-8. Soft key menus after receiving a call waiting tone
Setting
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
DBS-70-400
Value (menu) (see Appendix A for menu illustrations)
No change (previous menu retained)
Main Menu
Personal Speed Dial
System Speed Dial
Extension Index
Help Menu 1
Help Menu 2
Help Menu 3
Attendant Menu 1
Attendant Menu 2
Attendant Menu 3
Function Screen 1 (fixed)
Function Screen 2 (fixed)
Function Screen 3 (fixed)
Function Screen 4 (fixed)
Function Screen 5 (fixed)
DBS Manual - Issued 8/l/95
Technical Manuals Online! - http://www.tech-man.com
Page 3-35
Chapter 3. Extension Programming (FF3)
I
.
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
35
39
Section 400-Programming
1 Function Screen 6 (fixed)
1I Function Screen 7 (fixed)
/ Function Screen 8 !fixedj
Function Screen 9 (fixed)
1 Function Screen 10 (fixed)
Function Screen 11 (fixed)
Function Screen 12 (fixed)
i Function Screen 13 (fixed)
Function Screen 14 (fixed)
Flexible Function Screen 1 (user-programmable)
Flexible Function Screen 2 (user-programmable)
Flexible Function Screen 3 (user-programmable)
Flexible Function Screen 4 (user-programmable)
i Flexible Function Screen 5 (user-programmable)
Flexible Function Screen 6 (user-programmable)
Flexible Function Screen 7 (user-programmable)
Flexible Function Screen 8 (user-programmable)
Flexible Function Screen 9 (user-programmable)
Flexible Function Screen 10 (user-programmable)
Flexible Function Screen 11 (user-programmable)
Flexible Function Screen 12 her-programmable)
Flexible Function Screen 13 (user-programmable)
Flexible Function Screen 14 (user-programmable)
Flexible Function Screen 15 (user-programmable)
1
Related Programming
Flexible Function Screen addresses: FFI 2# 7# 1# thru 4#
Page 3-36
DBS Manual - Issued 811195
Technical Manuals Online! - http://www.tech-man.com
DBS-70-400
Section 400-Programming
Chapter 3. Extension Programming (FF3)
Display When Dialing a Busy Extension
Software Version: All Versions
Address:
FF3 (ExtPort)# 33## (O-24 or 0139)#
Description
Select a soft-key menu to be displayed while dialing a busy extension on a
large-display phone. While the menu is displayed, pressing a soft key will
perform the assigned feature.
Programming FF3 (1-l 44)# 33#! (O-24 or 0-39)#
f
Extension Port
Available Ranges:
f
Soft Key Menu (see table below)
Default: 0 (previous menu
displays)
O-24=CPC-A (all versions) and
CPC-B prior to 6.0
0-39=CPC-AII and CPC-B
Version 6.0 or higher
Table 3-9. Soft key menus when dialing a busy extension
Setting
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
DBS-70-400
Value (menu) (see Appendix A for menu illustrations)
No change (previous menu retained)
Main Menu
Personal Speed Dial
System Speed Dial
Extension Index
Help Menu 1
Help Menu 2
Help Menu 3
Attendant Menu 1
Attendant Menu 2
Attendant Menu 3
Function Screen 1 (fixed)
Function Screen 2 (fixed)
Function Screen 3 (fixed)
Function Screen 4 (fixed)
Function Screen 5 (fixed)
DBS Manual - Issued 8/l/95
Technical Manuals Online! - http://www.tech-man.com
Page 3-37
I
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
1 Function Screen 6 (fixed)
Function Screen 7 (fixed)
Function Screen 8 (fixed)
Function Screen 9 (fixed)
Function Screen 10 (fixed)
Function Screen 11 (fixed)
Function Screen 12 (fixed)
Function Screen 13 (fixed)
Function Screen 14 (fixed)
Flexible Function Screen 1 (user-programmable)
Flexible Function Screen 2 (user-programmable)
Flexible Function Screen 3 (user-programmable)
Flexible Function Screen 4 (user-programmable)
Flexible Function Screen 5 (user-programmable)
Flexible Function Screen 6 (user-programmable)
Flexible Function Screen 7 (user-programmable)
Flexible Function Screen 8 (user-programmable)
Flexible Function Screen 9 (user-programmable)
Flexible Function Screen 10 (user-programmable)
Flexible Function Screen 11 (user-programmable)
Flexible Function Screen 12 (user-programmable)
Flexible Function Screen 13 (user-programmable)
Flexible Function Screen 14 (user-programmable)
Flexible Function Screen 15 (user-programmable)
I
Related Programming
Flexible Function Screen addresses: FFl 2# 7# l# thtu 4##
Page 3-38
DBS Manual - Issued 8/l/95
Technical Manuals Online! - http://www.tech-man.com
DBS-70400
Section 400~Programming
Chapter 3. Extension Programming (FF3)
Extension Directory Display
Software Version: CPC-All (all versions); CPC-B Version 2.0 or higher
Address: FF3 (ExtPort)# 34# (0 or l)#
Description
The large-display telephone can be set to display 5 or 10 extension names on
the Extension Directory menu.
Programming
1
I
FF3 (l-144)# 34## (0 or l)#
t
Extension Port
t
0=5 names display.
l=lO names display.
Notes
Showing Extension Status in IO-Name Directory Display. When this
address is set to “1” (10 names display), the directory will display a symbol
next to the extension number if it has a special status as follows:
n = Busy/Offhook
* = DND or Absence Message
However, if an extension enters a Busy or DND status after the directory
displays, the directory is not updated automatically (the directory must be
redisplayed before it will show the status).
*
Address in CPC-A Versions. In CPC-A Version 3.3 or higher, this address
controls VAU Port Assignment, not Extension Directory Display. See FF3
(ExtPort)# 47# for instructions on assigning VAU ports for CPC-A versions.
DBS-70-400
DBS Manual - Issued 8/l/95
Technical Manuals Online! - http://www.tech-man.com
Page 3-39
Section 400-Programming
Chapter 3. Extension Programming (FF3)
Extension Class of Service Assignment
Software Version: CPC-All (all versions); CPC-B Version 3.1 or higher
Address: FF3 (ExtPort)# 35# (0-8)#
Description
Use this feature to assign a Class of Service to an extension.
Each Class of Service contains a unique combination of extension features,
which can be selectively enabled for the Class of Service (see FFl 2# 5#).
When you assign a Class of Service to an extension, you are assigning the
enabled features to the extension.
By default, all extensions are assigned Class of Service “0,” which has all
features enabled.
Programming
I
FF3 (l-l 44)# 35# (008)#
Extension Port
f
f
Extension Class of Service O-8
Default: 0 (all features allowed)
Related Programming
\
Extension Class of Service: FFl 2# 5# (l-8)# (l-2 l)# (0 or l)#
Notes
Caution When Changing a Class of Service Assignment. If you change an
extension’s Class of Service, make sure none of the features are currently
activated on the extension -- or the extension user may not be able to turn off
the feature.
For example, if an extension user has Background Music on when you
reassign the extension to another Class of Service that has Background Music
disabled, the user will not be able to turn it off. (If this occurs, reassign the
original Class of Service to the extension, then turn Background Music off at
the extension, then assign the new Class of Service to the extension.)
Page 3-40
DBS Manual - Issued 8/l/95
Technical Manuals Online! - http://www.tech-man.com
DBS-70-400
Inbound DID Dial Numbers
Software Version: CPC-6 Version 2.0 only
Address: FF3 (ExtPort)# 35# (OOOO-9999)#
Description
DID (Direct Inward Dialing) numbers must be assigned to extension ports so
they will ring on the appropriate extensions.
In CPC-B versions prior to 3.1, DID numbers can be set to ring on only one
extension port. Beginning with CPC-B Version 3.1, DID numbers can be set
to ring on multiple extensions (see address FFl 8# 3# for more information).
Programming
F F 3 (l-1 44)# 35# (0000-9999)#
+
DID Number
f
Extension Port
AEC Disconnect
So-are Version: CPC-A Version 3.3 or higher
Address: FF3 (ExtPort)# 3W (0 or I)#
Description
The VB-43621A version of the AEC card can be set to provide a positive
disconnect signal. Use this address to enable or disable the AEC disconnect
signal on individual extensions.
If this option is enabled, analog extension ports will send a disconnect signal
(open loop) upon hangup. Sending this signal allows quick disconnection
from third-party voice mail systems.
This feature requires CPC-A 3.3 or higher, or CPC-AII/B 5.0 or higher (the
address for CPC-AII/B is FF3 ExtPort# 46# 0-l#).
Programming
FF3 (l-72)# 35# (0 or l)#
f
Extension Port
+
O=Disable AEC disconnect signal.
l=Enable AEC disconnect signal.
Related Programming
AEC Disconnect Signal Duration (for CPC-A 3.3 or higher): FFl 2# l#
23# (0-15)#
DBS-70-400
DBS Manual - Issued 8/l/95
Technical Manuals Online! - http://www.tech-man.com
Page 3-41
I---. --
-
.-a---
a \’ . -,
- -----.. .__ . .-=- - .........J
Ringback Tone From ML Keys
Software Version: CPC-All (all versions); CPC-B Version 2.0 or higher
Address: FF3 (ExtPort)# 36# (002)#
Description
This address determines which tone an extension user will hear when dialing
another extension that has a busy ML key.
The tone selected in this address will be heard only if the called party has
more than one ML key and one of the ML keys is busy.
Programming
r
FF3 (1-l 44)# 36# (O-2)#
f
4
Extension Port
O=Kingback tdne followed by busy tone<
1 =Busy tone.
2=Ringback tone.
NOTE: Enter the extension port that will hear the tone (the calling
party) -- not the extension with the ML keys (the called party).
Related Programming
ML/MC0 Separation: F’F3 (ExtPort)# 44 (0 or l)##
Page 3-42
DBS Manual - Issued 8/l/95
Technical Manuals Online! - http://www.tech-man.com
DBS-70-400
Station Port Class
Software Version: CPC-B Version 4.0 or higher
Address: FF3 (ExtPort)# 37# (l-2 or 7-8)#
Description
This parameter is provided in case a specific phone or group of phones needs
a unique pad level.
By default, DBS extensions are assigned a circuit type based on whether they
are key phones or SLTs. The circuit type is used in the Digital Pad Settings
* address (FFl 8# 4# 3#) to determine the loss/gain settings for connections to
the Tl interface.
For example, an SLT is assigned by default as circuit type “2” (see table
below). However, if an SLT in a remote warehouse has inadequate volume
levels, the circuit type for the SLT could be changed to “7”. Once the SLT’s
circuit type is changed, you can change the pad levels for circuit type “7” to
provide the correct volume setting.
Programming
I
I
FF3 (1. 44)# 37# (l-2 or 718)#
4
Extension Port
t
Extension Circuit Type
(see table below)
NOTE: This address will allow you to assign circuit types l-12 to an
extension; however, types l-2 or 7-8 are the only types that should be
used with extensions.
Table 3-10. St&ion Port Class - circuit types
Setting
1
Value
Key Telephone
2
SLT (2500 set)
7
Option 1 (see “Note” below)
8
Option 2 (see “Note” below)
NOTE:
Circuit types 7-8 are used for assigning unique pad levels to
circuits that require special volume levels. For example, if a
specific analog trunk needs a higher volume level than other
analog trunks, the analog trunk could be defined as an
“Option 1” circuit type.
DBS-70-400
DBS Manual - Issued 8/l/95
Technical Manuals Online! - http://www.tech-man.com
Page 3-43
b1 ~apwr
J.
txIenswl I rrogrammlng trr3)
.
3wauri 4uu-rrogr
ai
I II I III
lg
Related Programming
Digital Pad Settings: FFl 8# 4## 3# (l-12)# (l-12)+7 (0-30)#
Trunk Port Class: FF2 (Trunk)# 26# (4-8)#
Notes
Trunk Circuit Types. Circuit types can also be assigned to trunk ports. See
the Trunk Port Class address (FF2 ExtPort# 26#) for more information.
Page 3-44
DBS Manual - Issued 8/l/95
Technical Manuals Online! - http://www.tech-man.com
DBS-70-400
bnaptef 9. txension rrogrammtng (t-F31
Section 400~rrogrammlng
SLT Hookflash
Software Version: CPC-8 Version 3.1 or higher
Address: FF3 (ExtPort)# 38## (0 or l)#
Description
This setting determines what happens when a single-line telephone (SLT)
user hookf’lashes when the SLT has one active call and one held call.
Programming
I
I
FF3 (I-144)# 38# (0 or I)#
t
f
Extension Port
D BS-70-400
O=Brokers Hold (hookflash toggles
between the two parties).
l=Hookflash creates a three-party
conference.
I
DBS Manual - Issued 8/l/95
Technical Manuals Online! - http://www.tech-man.com
Page 3-45
Extension Ring Pattern
Software Version: Cl%AII Version 7.0 or higher; CPC-B Version 3.1 or higher
Address: FF3 (ExtPort)# 39# (Pattern)#
Description
Use this address to assign a distinctive ringing pattern for incoming trunk
calls on digital phones (DSLTs or key phones). There are 9 different patterns
to choose from (see table below).
Begjnning with CPC-AIVB Version 7.0, this address also sets the ring pattern
for phones connected to an SLT-A (4-port Adapter).
Programming
I
FF3 (11144)# 39# (009)#
t
Extension Port
f
Ring Pattern
Default: 0 (see table below)
Table 3-11. Extension ring pat&m
Ring Pattern (number of seconds on/off’)
Digital (DSLTs/Key Phones) Phones Connected to SLT-A
Address
Number
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
I
7
I
8
9
(CPC-B Version 3.1 or higher)
(CPC-AWB Version 7.0 or higher)
Determined by CO
determined by Analog Transfer Ring Pattern address
.25 on/.25 off/.25 on/3.25 off
.25 on/3.75 off
1 on/3 off
.5 on/3.5 off
.5 on/7 off
.5 on/7 off
.25 on/.25 off/.25 on17 off
3 on/l off
2 on/2 off
1 on/l off
1 on/2 off
1 on/3 off
.5 on/.5 off
.5 on/ 5 off/.5 on/ .5 off/.5 on/
3.5 off
.5 onj3.5 off
loW7off
I
.25 on/7 off
1 on/3 off
.
Related Programming
Analog Transfer Ring Pattern: FFl 2# l# 31# (0-6)#
Inbound Ring Pattern: FF2 (Trunk)+! 17# (0-9)#
Terminal Type: FF3 (ExtPort)# 2#
Page 3-46
DBS Manual - issued 8/l/95
Technical Manuals Online! - http://www.tech-man.com
DBS-70-400
Notes
DBS-70-400
Hardware Requirement For Distinctive Ringing. The SCC-B card is
required in CPC-B configurations to support distinctive ringing on digital
phones (in which the ring pattern is programmed into the phone itself).
CPC-A and CPC-AI1 do not support distinctive ringing on digital phones.
However, with an AEC card, OPX Adapter, or SLT Adapter (these devices
determine the ring pattern), distinctive ringing can be supported for analog
SLT phones in any CPC co&Figuration.
DBS Manual - Issued 8/l/95
Technical Manuals Online! - http://www.tech-man.com
Page 3-47
Digital SLT Receiving Volume
Software Version: CPC-AlI (all versions); CPC-6 Version 3.1 or higher
Address: FF3 (ExtPott)# 40# (0 or l)#
Description
The receiver (hearing) volume of the handset on a digital single-line
telephone (DSLT) can be set to “normal” or “loud.”
The “loud” setting gives a +6 dB gain over the “normal” setting
(approximately twice as loud).
Programming
FF3 (1,144)# 40# (0 or l)#
f
Extension Port
Page 3-48
DBS Manual - Issued 8/l/95
Technical Manuals Online! - http://www.tech-man.com
$
O=Normal
1=Loud
DBS-70-400
Gnapter 3. txtenslon Programming (FF3)
secnon 400~Programming
Auto Set Relocation Code
Software Version: CPC-All (all versions); CPC-B Version 3.1 or higher
Address: FF3 (ExtPort)# 41# (OOOl-9999)#
Description
You can relocate (or swap) the program settings of one phone to another. The
Auto Set Relocation Code enables you to perform the relocation.
For example, if the phone from ext.102 is unplugged and moved to an office
with a wall jack (port) that is assigned to ext.103, this feature can be used to
relocate 102’s programming to 103. In order to move the programming, an
Auto Set Relocation Code must be assigned to ext. 103.
Programming
To assign an Auto Set Relocation Code . . .
FF3 (l-l 44)# 41# (OOOl-9999)#
f
Extension Port
(Destination)
t
Auto Set Relocation Code
(000 l-9999)
To clear an Auto Set Relocation Code . . .
I
Notes
FF3 .(l-144)# 41# CONF ON/OFF
I
Moving An Extension. The following procedure explains how to move the
program settings from extension 102 to extension 103.
1.
At extension 102, pick up the handset.
2. Press ‘WO.”
DBS-70-400
3.
Dial extension number 103.
4.
Enter the four-digit Auto Set Relocation Code assigned to extension
103.
5.
Replace the handset. All programmed extension features, TRS, and
LCR settings from 102 will be transferred to 103. Extension 103 will
be placed out of service.
DBS Manual - Issued 8/l/95
Technical Manuals Online! - http://www.tech-man.com
Page 3-49
wapter 3. txtenslon rrogrammlng (w3)
6.
bectlon 400~Programming
To return extension 103 to service, disconnect then reconnect the
extension cable. When extension 103 is retuned to service, it will
have the program settings of extension 102.
Restrictior~. Phone settings cannot be exchanged between digital and
analog (SLT) ports.
Page 3-50
DBS Manual - Issued 8/l/95
Technical Manuals Online! - http://www.tech-man.com
DBS-70-400
Permanent Call Forward Type
Software Version: CPC-All (all versions)j CPC-8 Version 3.1 or higher
Address: FF3 (ExtPort)# 42# (0-3)#
Description
Use this address to enable an extension for Permanent Call Forwarding, so
that calls to that extension (if the extension is busy and/or not answered) will
be forwarded to another location. This feature is often used for sending calls
to Voice Mail, or forwarding peripheral equipment to a single extension port.
Programming
F F 3 (I-144)# 42# (093)#
Extension Port-
t
O=Permanent Call Forwarding is off
(displayed as * ).
l=Permanent Call Forwarding--Busy/No Answer.
2=Permanent Call Forwarding--Busy.
3=Permanent Call Forwarding--No Answer.
Related Programming
Permanent Call Forward Extension: FF3 (ExtPort)# 42# (lo-69 or lOO699)#
Notes
Interaction With User-Assigned Call Forwarding. Permanent Cal 1
Forwarding is assigned through system programming, rather than by the user.
Permanent Call Forwarding is normally used to forward calls to a voice mail
system.
An extension user can invoke other forms of call forwarding (no answer,
busy, all calls) to temporarily override the Permanent Call Forwarding
destination.
Resetting To Default (O#J Condition. Entering 0 or pressing CONF will
return this program address to its default condition “*“, and will also return
the Permanent Call Forward Extension address to default “****” (no
extension assigned).
DBS-70-400
DBS Manual - Issued 8/l/95
Technical Manuals Online! - http://www.tech-man.com
Page 3-51
~~L~IUI
I
rcuu-r
I
uyl a
I II I III
iy
Permanent Call Forward Extension
Software Version: CPC-All (all versions); CPC-B Version 3.1 or higher
Address: FF3 (ExtPort)# 43# (IO-69 or lOO=699)#
Description
If an extension is enabled for Permanent Call Forwarding (in address FF3
ExtPort# 41#), use this address to set another extension number as the target
or “permanent call forwarding point” for the forwarded calls.
In addition to regular extension numbers, the permanent call forwarding point
can also be a System Speed Dial number (SSD), a Personal Speed Dial
number (PSD), a hunt group pilot number, or an Attendant extension number.
Programming
To assign a Permanent Call Forwarding Point . . .
FF3 (11144)# 43# (lo-69 or 1001699)#
f
f
Extension Port
Permanent Call Forwarding Point
(Default=****; no extension assigned)
lo-69 or l OO-699=Extension numbers,
including attendants
and hunt group pilot
numbers.
AUTO.90-99 or 900-909=PSD numbers.
AUTO 00-89 or 000- 199=SSD numbers.
To clear a Permanent Call Forwarding Point . . .
FF3 (l-144)# 43# CONF ON/OFF
+
Related Programming
Permanent Call Forward Type: FF3 (ExtPort)# 42# (0-3)#
Hunt Group Pilot Numbers: FF4 3# (l-4)# l# (11-69 or 101-699)#
System Speed Dial Numbers: FFlO l# (SSD)# (PhoneNo.)#
Personal Speed Dial Numbers: FFlO 2# (ExtPort)# (PSD)# (PhoneNo.)#
Page 3-52
DBS Manual - issued 8/l/95
Technical Manuals Online! - http://www.tech-man.com
DES-70-400
briaprer 3. txrerlslori rrogramrrimg [t-w)
wcnon 4uwrruyrammlng
ML/MC0 Separation
Software Version: CPC-All (all versions); CPC-8 Version 4.0 or higher
Address: FF3 (ExtPort)# 44## (0 or l)#
Description
Use this address to enabie an extension for MC0 or ML key usage.
The difference between ML (Multi-Line) and MC0 (Multi-Central Office)
has to do with incoming calls. MC0 means multiple trunks can be received at
the extension -- if you press a flashing FF key, you will get an incoming trunk
. call. Calls from another extension will flash on the “EXT” LED (not through
the FF key).
ML, on the other hand, means you can receive either a trunk call or an
extension call on an FF key, which will flash for either type of call.
If this address is set to ML, each FF key must be individually enabled for ML/
MC0 using program address FF5 (ExtPort)# (Key)++ (FeatureCode)#.
Programming
FF3 (l-144)# 44## (0 or I)#
Extension Par<
b=MCO keys *
l=ML keys **
Note: The default for the Primary
Attendant is “1” (ML keys).
* MC0 is not available in CPC-B Version 2.0 to 3.1.
** ML is not available in CPC-A versions, or in CPC-B Version 1.0.
Related Programming
FF Key Assignments for Extensions: FF5 (ExtPort)## (Key)# (Feature)#
DBS-70-400
DBS Manual - Issued 8/t/95
Technical Manuals Online! - http://www.tech-man.com
Page 3-53
VAU Hunting Priority
Software Version: CPC-All (all versions); CPC-B Version 5.0 or higher
Address: FF3 (ExtPort)# 45# (0 or l)#
Description
Use this address to assign hunting priority to calls that ovefflow from a hunt
group to the VAU.
If hunting priority is assigned, a caller who hears the VAU message and then
decides to dial back into the hunt group, will be placed before other calls that
have just entered the hunt group queue.
Without hunting priority, the caller loses his or her place in the queue and is
placed in the last queue position upon re-entry intd the hunt group.
Programming I
FF3 (1-l 44)# 45# (0 or l)#
f
VAU Port Number
t
O=Calls transferred from the VAU
do not receive priority treatment.
l=VAU transfer ~rioritv.
Related Programming
VAU Port Assignment: FF3 (ExtPort)# 47# (0 or l)#
Page 3-54
DBS Manual - Issued 8/l/95
Technical Manuals Online! - http://www.tech-man.com
DBS-70-400
Chapter 3. Extension Programming (FF3)
Section 400-Programming
AEC Disconnect
Software Version: CPC-All (all versions); CPC-6 Version 5.0 or higher
Address: FF3 (ExtPort)# 46# (0 or I)#
Description
The VB-43621A version of the AEC card can be set to provide a positive
disconnect signal. Use this address to enable or disable the AEC disconnect
signal on individual extension(s).
If this option is enabled, analog extension ports will send a disconnect signal
(open loop) upon hangup. Sending this signal allows quick disconnection
f?om third-party voice mail systems.
NOTE: This feature requires CPC-A 3.3 or higher, CPC-AII (all versions),
or CPC-B 5.0 or higher. The address for CPC-A is FF3 (ExtPort)# 35#.
Programming L
FF3 (I-144)# 46# (0 or I)##
Extension Port
t
f
O=Disa bled
l=Enabled
Related Programming
SLT Disconnect Signal Duration:
FFl 2# I# 3% (0-15)##
DBS-70-400
DBS Manual - Issued 8/l/95
Technical Manuals Online! - http://www.tech-man.com
Page 3-55
Section 400-Programming
Chapter 3. Extension Programming (FF3)
VAU Port Assignment
Software Version: CPC-All (ail versions); CPC-B Version 5.0 or higher
bddress: FF3 (ExtPort)# 47# (0 or I)#
I’
Description
This program assigns a digital port as a VAU (Voice Announce Unit). Once a
port is assigned as a VAU, the system treats that port as ifthe following
changes have been made:
l
Offhook Signal (CO) is disabled - FF3 (ExtPort)# 7# O#.
l
Call Waiting/OHVA is disabled -- FF3 (ExtPort)# 8# O#.
l
Auto Pickup is enabled - FF3 (ExtPort)# 12# l#.
l
All FF keys for the extension port are cleared - FF5 (ExtPort)# FFkey#
CONF.
Programming
FF3 (I-144)# 47# (Oorl)#
f
VAU Port Number
Notes
f
o=off
l=On (defines the port as a VAU)
Applicablk Call Types. When VAU is enabled for a port, the following call
types will be routed to the first VAU message:
@Trunk calls
@Transferred trunk calls
@Intercom calls
*Transferred intercom calls.
AU recalls will be routed to the second VAU message.
VAU Port Assignment in CPC-A Versions. The address for VAU Port
Assignment in CPC-A Version 3.3 or higher is FF3 (ExtPort)## 34# (0 or l)#.
Page 3-56
DES Manual - Issued 6/l/95
Technical Manuals Online! - http://www.tech-man.com
DBS-70-400
Chapter 3. Extension Programming (FF3)
Section 400-Programming
Hot Dial Pad
Software Version: CPC-All and CPC-B, Version 7.0 or higher
Address:
FF3 (ExtPort)# 48# (0 or I)#
Description
The dial pad on digital key phones can be designated as “hot” on an
extension-by-extension basis. This feature allows the user to initiate a call
without going ofIhook, by pressing any of the numeric keys O-9 (the “*” and
“#I” keys are not “hot”).
The extension’s dial pad can be “hot” under these conditions:
when the extension is idle.
when the extension is holding a call.
when the extension is holding a page.
l
l
l
The extension’s dial pad cannot be “hot” under these conditions:
when an intercom or trunk call is ringing at the extension.
when the extension is on a call.
l
l
Programming
FF3 (I-144)# 48# (0 or I)#
Extension Port
f
t
O=Eot Dial Pad is disabled.
l=Hot Dial Pad is enabled.
Notes
Paging. The Hot Dial Pad feature cannot be used to initiate a page.
Restriction. The Hot Dial Pad feature does not work on SLT phones.
DES-70-400
DBS Manual - Issued 8/l/95
Technical Manuals Online! - http://www.tech-man.com
Page 3-57
Section 400-Programming
t .Chapter 3. Extension Programming (FF3)
Auto-Redial on Extensions
Software Version: CPC-All and CPC-6, Version 7.0 or higher
Address: FF3 (ExtPort)# 49# (0 or I)#
Description
Use this address to enable or disable the Auto-Redial feature on individual
DBS extensions (DSLT or K-Tel only). Auto-Redial allows a telephone in the
on-hook (idle) state to redial an internaI extension or an outgoing trunk call
without going off-hook first. By default, Auto-Redial is enabled on all DSLT
and K-Tel extensions.
Auto-Redial is performed by pressing REDIAL when the phone is either onhook (idle) or off-hook (dial tone). The DBS will automatically redial the last
number dialed on that extension.
Programming
I
FF3 (I-144)# 49#! (0 or I)#
t
Extension Port
Notes
t
O=Auto-Redial is disabled.
l=Auto-Redial is enabled.
Restrictions. Auto-Redial wilI not work with the following:
.
.
.
.
.
SLTs
OPX
API
Voice Mail
Door Phones.
Aato-Rediaf Afler a System Res& If Auto-Redial is attempted after a
system reset, and neither a CO calI nor an extension calI has been made since
the reset, the caller will hear intercom busy tone.
Page 3-58
DBS Manual - Issued 811195
Technical Manuals Online! - http://www.tech-man.com
DBS-70-400
4. Ringing and Hunt Groups (FF4)
Use the FF4 program addresses in this chapter to set up trunk-to-extension
ringing, hunt groups and call coverage groups.
l
l
l
The DBS supports up to 8 hunt groups and 16 call coverage groups (all
versions).
Each hunt group can have up to 8 extensions (all CPC-A versions; CPCAll/B prior to 6.0) or 16 extensions (CPC-AII/B 6.0 or higher).
Each call coverage group can have up to 8 extensions (all versions).
This chapter covers the following addresses:
Topic
CO Day Ring Assignments
FF4 l# (ExtPort)# (Trk)# (O/l)#
FF4 I# (HuntGrp)# (Trk)# (O/l)#
CO Day Ring Assignments for Hunt Groups
FF4 2# (ExtPort)# (Trk)# (O/M
CO Night Ring Assignments
IFF4 2# (HuntGrp)# (Trk)# (O/l)#
CO Night Ring Assignments for Hunt Groups
FF4 3# (HuntGrp)# l# (ExtNo.)#
Hunt Group Pilot Numbers (CPC-AII; CPC-B 2.0 or higher)
FF4 3# (HuntGrp)# l# (O/l)#
%%nal/CircuIarHuntGroups (CPC-A; CPCB prior to 2.0)
Hunt ‘Group Type (CPC-AII; CPC-B 2.0 or higher)
FF4 3# (Hunffirp)# 2# (O-2)#
FF4 3# (HuntGrp)# 2# (HuntGrp)#
Call Next Hunt Group (CFC-A; CPC-B prior to 2.0)
FF4 3# (Hunffirp)# (3-lO)# (ExtNo.)# Hunt Group Members (CPC-A; CPC-B prior to 2.0)
Transfer Extension (CPC-AII; CPC-B 2.0 or higher)
Hunt Group Transfer Timer (CPC-AII; CPC-B 2.0 or higher)
IFF4 3# (Hu~Q)# (520)# (ExtNo.)# Hunt Group Members (CFC-AII; CPC-B 2.0 or higher)
FF4 4# (COVGQ)# (I-8)# (ExtNo.)# Call Coverage Group Members
FF4 5# (ExtPort)# (Trk)# (O/I)#
CO Delayed Day Ring Assignments (CPC-AII; CPC-B 1.07
FF4 Address
-
I
I
I
Page
4-3
4-4
4-S
14-6
I
4-7
4-9
4-11
4-13
4-14
4-15
I4- 16
14-17
14-18
4-20
or higher)
FF4 5# (HuntGrp)# (Trk)# (O/l)#
CO Delayed Day Ring Assignments for Hunt Groups
4-21
(CPC-Au; CPC-B 2.0 or higha)
FF4 6# (ExtPort)# (Trk)N (O/l)#
CO Delayed Night Ring Assignments
(CPC-AII; CPC-B 2.0
4-22
or higher)
FF4 6# (HuntGrp)# (Trk)# (O/l)#
CO Delayed Night Ring Assignments for Hunt Groups
4-23
(CPC-AII; CPC-B 2.0 or higher)
Extension Ring Table (CPC-AU; WC-B 2.0 or higher)
FF4 7# (ExtFoW (ExtFoW (Wl)#
4-25
FF4 8# (ExtForW (ExtPorW (o/l)# Extension Delayed Ring Table (CPC-AII; CPC-B 2.0 or higher) 4-26
FF4 9# I# (ExtForW (TW WY CO Night 2 Ring Assignments (CPC-AIM3 7.0 or higher)
4-27
(CPC-AIlf
4-28
FF4 9# I# (HuntGQ)# (Trk)d (O/W CO Night 2 Ring Assignments for Hunt Groups
B 7.0 or higher)
I
FF4 9# 2# (ExtPort)# (Trk)# (OA)#
I FF4 9# 2# (HuntGrp)# (Trk)# (O/l)#
DBS-70-400
CO Delayed Night 2 Ring Assignments (CPC-AWB 7.0 or
4-29
higher)
CO Delayed Night 2 Ring Assignments for Hunt Groups
4-30
ICPC-AWB 7.0 or hisher
DBS Manual - Issued W/95
Technical Manuals Online! - http://www.tech-man.com
Page 4-l
Page 4-2
DBS Manual - Issued 8/l/95
Technical Manuals Online! - http://www.tech-man.com
DBS-70-400
Chapter 4. Ringing and Hunt Groups (FF4)
Section 400-Programming
CO Day Ring Assignments
Software Version: All Versions
Address: FF4 I# (ExtPort)# (Trunk)# (0 or I)#
Description
This program determines which extension(s) will receive incoming calls on a
particular trunk when the DBS system is in “Day” mode.
Programming
I
FF4 I# (I-73 or l-14!5)# (1-64)# (0 or I)#
f
Extension Port
f
Trunk Number
t
O=Thnk does not ring.
l=Trunk rings.
NOTE: Use port 73 (in single-cabinet systems) or port 145 (in doublecabinet systems) to assign ringing to an external paging or Universal
Night Answer (UNA) device.
Notes
Default Ring [email protected] to Attendznt Phone. All trunks are set by default
to ring on ports 1 and 2 (the Primary and Second Attendants).
Routing of Trunks Wh No Ring Assignments. If a trunk is not assigned to
ring a specific extension, it will still ring the Attendant phone.
DES-70-400
DBS Manual - Issued 8/l/95
Technical Manuals Online! - http://www.tech-man.com
Page 4-3
Section 400-Programming
Chapter 4. Ringing and Hunt Groups (FF4)
_’
CO Day Ring Assignments for Hunt Groups
Software Version: CPC-All (all versions); CPC-B Version 2.0 or higher
Address: FF4 I# (HuntGrp)# (Trunk)# (0 or I)#
Description
determines which hunt group will receive incoming calls on a
particular trunk when the DBS system is in “Day” mode.
This program
Programming
I
FF4 I# (79-86 or 151~158)# (1-64)# (0 or I)#
f
Hunt Groups 1 thru 8:
f
Trunk No.
CPC-AI1 or CPC-B
79
80
81
82
83
84
85
86
-or-or-or-or-or-or-or-or-
15 1
152
153
154
155
156
157
158
t
O=Trunk does not ring.
l=Trunk rings.
for Hunt Group 1
for Hunt Group 2
for Hunt Group 3
for Hunt Group 4
for Hunt Group 5
for Hunt Group 6
for Hunt Group 7
for Hunt Groun 8
Related Programming
Hunt Group No Answer Timer: FFl 3# 28# (O-l 5)#
Hunt Group Pilot Numbers: FF4 3# (l-8)# l# (1 l-69 or lOl-699)#
Hunt Group Type: FF4 3# (l-8)## 2# (0-2)#
Transfer Extension: FF4 3# (l-8)# 3# (lo-69 or lOO-699)#
Hunt Group Transfer Timer: FF4 3# (l-8)# 4## (0-32)#
Hunt Group Members: FF4 3# (l-8)# (5-12/20)# (100-699)##
DBS Manual - Issued 8/l/95
Page 4-4 :Technical Manuals Online! - http://www.tech-man.com
DBS-70-400
.
Chapter 4. Ringing and Hunt Groups (FF4)
Section 400-Programming
CO Night Ring Assignments
Software Version: All Versions
Address: FF4 2# (ExtPort)# (Trunk)# (0 or l)#
Description
This program determines which extension(s) will receive incoming calls on a
particular trunk when the DBS system is in “Night” mode.
Programming
FF4 2# (l-73 or l-145)# (l-64)# (0 or l)#
Extension Port
7
f
Trunk Number
+
O=Trunk does not ring.
l=Trunk rings.
Note: Use port 73 (for single-cabinet systems) or 145 (for doublecabinet systems) to assign ringing to an external paging or Universal
Night Answer (UNA) device.
Notes
Default Attendant Ring Assignments. All trunks are set to ring on ports 1
and 2 (the Primary and Second Attendants) by default.
Routing of Tninks With No Ring Assignments. If a trunk is not assigned to
ring a specific extension, it will still ring the -4ttendant phone.
Night Mode. Beginning with CPC-AH/B Version 7.0, there are two separate
Night modes -- “Night” and “Night 2”. This address controls “Night” ring
assignments (see FF4 9# l# for “Night 2” ring assignments).
DBS-70-400
DBS Manual - Issued 8/l/95
Technical Manuals Online! - http://www.tech-man.com
Page 4-5
Chapter 4. Ringing and Hunt tiroups (FF4)
Section 400-Programming
CO Night Ring Assignments for Hunt Groups
SoftwareVersion: CPC-AII (all versions); CPC-8 Version 2.0 or higher
Address: FF4 2# (HuntGrp)# (Trunk)# (0 or l)#
Description
Program.ming
This program determines which hunt group will receive incoming calls on a
particular trunk when the DBS system is in “Night” mode.
I
FF4 2# (79-86 or 151~158)# (l-64)# (0 or I)#
f
f
f
Trunk No.
&Trunk does not ring.
l=Trunk rings.
for Hunt Group 1
for Hunt Group 2
for Hunt Group 3
for Hunt Group 4
for Hunt Group 5
for Hunt Group 6
for Hunt Group 7
for Hunt Groun 8
Hunt Groups 1 thru 8:
CIPC-ATTorCPC3-B
79
80
81
82
83
84
85
86
-or-or-or-or-or-or-or-or-
151
152
153
154
155
156
157
158
Related Programming
Hunt Group No Answer Timer: FF 1 3# 28# (0- 15)#
Hunt Group Pilot Numbers: FF4 3# (l-8)# l# (ll-690r lOl-699)##
Hunt Group Type: FF4’3# (l-8)# 2# (0-2)#
Transfer Extension: FF4 3# (l-8)++ 3# (lo-69 or lOO-699)#
Hunt Group Transfer Timer: FF4 3# (l-8)# 4# (0-32)##
Hunt Group Members: FF4 3# (l-8)# (5-12/20)# (lo-69 or lOO-699)#
Notes
Night Mode. In CPC-AII/B Version 7.0 and higher, two separate Night
modes are available -- “Night” and “Night 2”. This address controls Night
ring assignments (see FF4 9# l# for “Night 2” ring assignments).
Page 4-6
DBS Manual - Issued 8/l/95
Technical Manuals Online! - http://www.tech-man.com
DBS-70-400
Chapter 4. Ringing and Hunt Groups (FF4)
Section 400-Programming
Hunt Group Pilot Numbers
Software Version: CPC-All (all versions); CPC-B Version 2.0 or higher
Address: FF4 3# (HuntGrp)# 1# (11-69 or lOl-699)#
Description
Use this program to assign a “pilot” extension number to a hunt group. This
“pilot” number can be dialed from any intercom phone to reach the hunt
group. An example is dialing “500” to reach a Voice Mail hunt group.
Each hunt group must have a pilot number assigned to it in order for the
hunt group application to work -- including ring assignments to hunt groups,
call transfers to hunt groups, etc.
Note: This address requires an extension numbed entry, rather than an
extension port entry. In fact, the hunt group pilot number cannot also be
assigned to an extension port (double-check the Extension Numbers address
F’F3 ExtPort# l# ExtNumber#).
Programming
To assign a Hunt Group Pilot Number . . .
FF4 3# (198)# I# (11-69 or 10%699)#
$
Hunt Group No.
+
Pilot Extension Number
(can’t be Primary Attendant
extension number 10 or 100)
To clear a Pilot Number . . .
FF4 3# (l-8)# l# CONF ON/OFF
+
Hunt Group No.
Related Programming
Hunt Group No Answer Timer: FFl 3# 28# (0-15)#
Extension Numbers: FF3 (ExtRort)# l# (ExtNo.)#
CO Day Ring Assignments For Hunt Groups: FF4 l# (HuntGrp)#
(Trunk)# (0 or l)#
CO Night Ring Assignments For Hunt Groups: FF4 2# (HuntGrp)#
(Trunk)# (0 or l)#
DBS-70-400
DBS Manual - Issued 8/?/95
Technical Manuals Online! - http://www.tech-man.com
Page 4-7
Chapter 4. Ringing and Hunt Groups (FF4)
Section 400-Programming
Hunt Group Type: FF4 3# (HuntGrp)# 2# (0-2)#
Transfer Extension: FF4 3# (HuntGrp)# 3#. (ExtNo.)#
Hunt Group Members: FF4 3# (HuntGrp)# (Position)# (ExtNo.)##
CO Delayed Day Ring Assignments For Hunt Groups: FF4 5# (HuntGrp)#
(Trunk)# (0 or l)#
CO Delayed Night Ring Assignments For Hunt Groups: FF4 6#
(HuntGrp)# (Trunk)# (0 or l)#
CO Night 2 Ring Assignments For Hunt Groups: FF4 9# l# (HuntGrp)#
(Trunk)# (0 or l>#
CO Delayed Night 2 Ring Assignments For Hunt Groups: FF4 9# 2#
(HuntGrp)# (Trunk)++ (0 or l)#
Page 4-8
DBS Manual - Issued 8/l/95
Technical Manuals Online! - http://www.tech-man.com
DBS-70-400
Chapter 4. Ringing and Hunt Groups (FF4)
Section 400-Programming
Terminal/Circular Hunt Groups
Software Version: CPC-A; CPC-B Versions prior to 2.0
Address: FF4 3## (HuntGrp)# 1# (0 or l)#
Description
A maximum of 8 extensions can be put in each of 8 hunt groups. Each hunt
group can be designated as a “terminal type” or “circular type”.
Terminal Hunt Group Operation
The call must be transferred or a trunk set to ring at the first extension in the
group in order for the Terminal Hunt feature to work.
If the first extension in the hunt group is busy, an incoming call will
automatically access the next extension of the group. If all the extensions in
the group are busy, an internal caller (from another extension -- either
intercom or transferred trunk call) will hear busy tone. A direct (nontransferred) trunk caller will hear ring tone. If additional feature options are
chosen, the search will continue with an additional hunt group(s).
To use the first extension position (analog) as a pilot position, place a 2-watt,
450-Ohm resistor across Tip and Ring. This will make the port busy, and ’
allow it to be used as a pilot number for the remaining extensions in the
group. However, direct calls to other members in the hunt group (if busy)
will not hunt within the group; instead, the caller will hear a busy signal.
Circular Hunt Group Operation
Circular Hunting is performed when a called extension in the group is busy.
(Unanswered calls will not hunt, but will instead ring the extension until the
Call Forward-No Answer Timer expires. The call will then revert to the
Attendant phone.) The call can be either direct or transferred. No pilot
number is provided for this type of hunting.
The hunting will follow the next available (idle) member in the hunt group,
skipping over busy extensions, until the last member of the hunt group is
reached. The call will then go to the first member, then to the first extension
position that was busy in the first go-around. This circular hunting will
continue until the call has been presented at all extensions in the hunt group.
If the call still hasn’t been answered, it will overflow into the next assigned
hunt group (or the caller will get a busy signal, if no Transfer Extension is
assigned to the hunt group).
During Circular Hunting in a hunt group, if all the member extensions are
busy, an internal caller (from another extension -- either intercom or
transferred trunk call) will hear busy tone. A direct (non-transferred) trunk
caller will hear ring tone. If additional feature options are chosen, the search
will continue with an additional hunt group(s).
DES-70-400
DBS Manual - Issued 8/l/95 .
Technical Manuals Online! - http://www.tech-man.com
Page 4-9
Section 400-Programming
Chapter 4. Ringing and Hunt Groups (FF4)
Programming
I
FF4 3# (198)# I# (0 or l)#
+
Hunt Group No.
+
O=Terminal Hunting
l=Circular Hunting
Related Programming
Offhook Signal: FF3 (ExtPort)## 7# (0 or l)#
Notes
Setting Hunt Group Types in Later CPC Versions. Set hunt group types for
CPC-AIT versions, and for CPC-B Version 2.0 or higher, in FF4 3#
(HuntGrp)# 2# (0-2)#.
Hunt Group Membership Restriction. An extension can be a member of
only one hunt group. Hunt group extensions cannot also belong to call
coverage groups.
Absence Message, Call Forwarding, and DND Interaction. If a call enters
a hunt group in which all extensionsare busy, the hunt feature will wait for
the first available extension. If an extension within the hunt group (except for
the first extension) is set for Call Forwarding, Absence Message, or DND, the
hunt feature will skip that extension and proceed to the next position in the
hunt group. If the first extension is set for Call Forwarding, Absence
LMessage or DND, the hunting feature will not work.
Call Routing When All Hunt Groups Are Busy. If all members of all
searched hunt groups are busy, the call will be parked for only the first group
searched.
SLT Call Hold Restriction. If an SLT hunt group member takes a trunk call,
puts it on hold, and replaces the handset, additional trunk calls will not hunt to
idle extensions.
Offook Signal Setting for Hunt Group Members. Offhook signaling
should be disabled on extensions that are hunt group members.
Page 4-l 0
DBS Manual - issued 8/l/95
Technical Manuals Online! - http://www.tech-man.com
DBS-70-400
.
Section 400-Programming
Chapter 4. Ringing and Hunt Groups (FF4)
Hunt Group Type
Software Version: CPC-All (all versions); CPC-B Version 2.0 or higher
Address: FF4 3# (HuntGrp)# 2# (O-2)#
Description
Use this address to assign one of the following hunting types to a hunt group:
Terminal Hunt Group Operation
This type is most often used with Voice Mail. With Terminal Hunting, the
hunt begins with the pilot number, and moves sequentially through the
extensions in the hunt group. If alI extensions are busy, the call camps onto
the hunt group and waits for an extension to become idle.
Distributed Hunt Group Operation
With Distributed Hunting, the hunt begins at the extension after the last one to
pick up a call, and continues in a circular manner for successive calls,
Longest Idle Hunt Group Operation
With Longest Idle Hunting, the hunt begins at the extension in the group that
has been idle for the longest period of time, and progresses through the other
extensions in the same manner.
Programming
FF4 3# (I-8)# 2# (012)#
+
Hunt Group No.
+
O=Terminal Hunting
l=Distributed Hunting
2=Longest Idle Hunting
Related Programming
Hunt Group Members: FF4 3# (HuntGrp)# (Position)# (ExtNo.)##
Notes
Hunt Group Membership Restriction. An extension can be a member of
only one hunt group. Hunt group extensions cannot also belong to call
coverage groups.
Absence Message, Call Forwarding, and DND Interaction. If a call enters
a hunt group in which all extensions are busy, the hunt feature will wait for
the first available extension. If an extension within the hunt group (except for
the first extension) is set for Call Forwarding, Absence Message or DND, the
hunt feature will skip that extension and proceed to the next position in the
hunt group. If the first extension is set for Call Forwarding, Absence
Message or DND, the hunting feature will not work.
D BS-70-400
DBS Manual - Issued 8/l/95
Technical Manuals Online! - http://www.tech-man.com
Page 4-l 1
Chapter 4. Ringing and Hunt Groups (FF4)
Section 400-Programming
Cult Routing When AU Hunt Groups Are Busy. If all members of all
searched hunt groups are busy, the call will be parked for only the first group
searched.
SLT Call Hold Restri&ion. If an SLT hunt group member takes a trunk call,
puts it on hold, and replaces the handset, additional trunk calls will not hunt to
idle extensions.
Of_Fook Signal Setting for Hunt Group Members. Offhook signaling
should be disabled on extensions that are hunt group members.
Page 4-l 2
DBS Manual - Issued 8/l/95
Technical Manuals Online! - http://www.tech-man.com
DBS-70-400
Section 400-Programming
Chapter 4. Ringing and Hunt Groups (FF4)
Call Next Hunt Group
Software Version: CPC-A; CPC-B Versions prior to 2.0
Address: FF4 3## (HuntGrp)# 2## (HuntGrp)#
Description
If all the extensions in a particular hunt group are busy, calls can be
automatically transferred to another hunt group. If all extensions in the
overflow hunt group are also busy, the call will revert back to the original
hunt group, and continue to search extensions until one becomes available.
Programming
To assign an overflow Hunt Group . . .
FF4 3# (l-8)# 2# (I-8)#
f
Hunt Group No.
k
Overflow Hunt Group No.
To clear an overflow Hunt Group . . .
FF4 3# (l-8)# 2# CONF ON/OFF
k
Hunt Group No.
Notes
Assigning Overflow Hunt Groups in Later CPC Versions. For CPC-AII
versions, and CPC-B Version 2.0 or higher, use the Transfer Extension
address (FF4 3# HuntGrp# 3# ExtNo.#) to send overflow calls to other hunt
groups via a hunt group “pilot” number; or to another extension.
DBS-70-400
DBS Manual - Issued 8/l/95
Technical Manuals Online! - http://www.tech-man.com
Page 4-l 3
3ecuon 4uu-rrogramming
wapter 4. ntngtng ana nunr woups (rr4)
Hunt Group Members
Software Version: CPC-A; CPC-B Versions prior to 2.0
Address: FF4 3# (HuntGrp)# (3-lO)# (ExtNo.)#
Description
Use this option to place an extension at a specific position within a hunt
group. Hunt groups can contain a maximum of 8 extension positions.
Programving
To assign an extension to a position within a hunt group . . .
FF4 3# (118)# (31lO)# (10-69 or 1001699)#
P
Hunt Group No.
+
Position:
3=Posi tion 1
4=Position 2
5=Position 3
6=Position 4
7=Posi tion 5
8=Position 6
9=Position 7
lO=Position 8
$
Extension Number
To clear an extension from a hunt group position . . .
FF4 3# (l-8)# (3-l O)# CONF ON/OFF
f
Hunt Group No.
t
Hunt Group Positions l-8
(using address numbers 3-10)
Related Programming
Gffhook Signal: FF3 (ExtPort)# 7# (0 or l)#
Notes
Assigning Extensions to Hunt Groups in Later CPC Versions. For CPC-
AII versions, and CPC-B Version 2.0 or higher, use FF4 3# HuntGrp# (520)#
(ExtNo.#) to assign extensions to hunt groups.
Hunt Group Membership Restriction. An extension can be a member of
only one hunt group. Hunt gr.oup extensions cannot belong to call coverage
groups.
Offlook Signaling for Hunt Group Members. Gffhook signaling should be
disabled on extensions that are assigned as hunt group members.
Page 4-l 4
DBS Manual - Issued 8/l/95
Technical Manuals Online! - http://www.tech-man.com
DBS-70-400
Transfer Extension
Software Version: CPC-All (all versions); CPC-B Version 2.0 or higher
Address: FF4 3## (HuntGrp)# 3# (ExtNo.)#
Description
This program sets the extension number to which overflow calls will be
transferred.
Once all extensions in a hunt group have been searched, or after the Hunt
Group Transfer Timer has elapsed, the caller can be transferred to an
individual extension, an extension in a different hunt group, the Attendant, or
an SLT device.
Note: This address requires an extension ltumber entxy, rather than an
extension port entry.
Programming
To assign an overflow extension . . .
FF4 3## (118)# 3## (lo-69 or 1001699)#
r
Hunt Group No.
+
Overflow Extension Number
Def au1 t: 000
To clear an overflow extension . . .
FF4 3# (I-8)# 3# CONF ON/OFF
f
Hunt Group No.
Related Programming
Hunt Group Transfer Timer: FF4 3# (HuntGrp)# 4## (0-32)#
Notes
Overflow Extension Number Reskiction. The overfiow extension number
cannot be a hunt group pilot number.
Transfer Extension in Earlier CPC Versions. This address replaces the Call
Next Hunt Group address (FF4 3# Hunffirp# 2# HuntGrp#) used in earlier
CPC versions.
DBS-70-400
DBS Manual - Issued 8/t/95
Technical Manuals Online! - http://www.tech-man.com
Page 4-l 5
Hunt Group Transfer Timer
Software Version: CPC-All (all versions); CPC-B Version 2.0 or higher
Address: FF4 3## (HuntGrp)# 4## (O-32)#
Description
Use this program to set the maximum amount of time that passes before a call
(after being routed through a busy/unanswered hunt group) overflows to an
extension or additional hunt group.
The call will flash on the last extension’s LED -- but will not ring -- for this
amount of time (2 seconds by default), giving the hunt group a “last chance”
to pick up the call before it is transferred out of the hunt group.
Programming
FF4 3# (l -8)# 4# (0132)#
f
Hunt Group No.
t
Transfer Timer
0 = No transfer (call will remain
in same hunt group)
l-32 = Number of seconds
Default: 2 seconds
. Related Programming
Transfer Extension: FF4 3# (HuntGrp)# 3# (ExtNo.)#
i
Page 4-l 6
DBS Manual - Issued 8/l/95
Technical Manuals Online! - http://www.tech-man.com
DES-70400
Lnapter 4. ntnglng ana nunt woups (t-i-4)
5ec11on 4uo-rrogrammrng
Hunt Group Members
Sofhnrare Version: CPC-All (all versions); CPC-B Version 2.0 or higher
Address: FF4 3# (HuntGrp)# (5-12 or 5-20)# (EtiNo.)#
Description
Use this program to assign an extension to a hunt group, and determine its
sequential position within the hunt group.
Programming
To assign an extension number to a position in a hunt group . . .
FF4 3# (l-8)# (5-12 or 5-20)# (lo-69 or lOO=699)#
?
Hunt Group No.
+
PQf&im
5=Position 1
6=Position 2
7=Position 3
8=Position 4
9=Position 5
lO=Position 6
1 l=Position 7
12=Position 8
3
’ Extension Number
13zPosition 9
14=Position 10
15=Position 11 NOTE: Positions 9
16=Position 12 thru 16 (address nos.
17=Position 13 13-20) are available
18=Position 14 only with CPC-AIIjB
19=Position 15 Version 6.0 or higher.1
20=Position 16
To clear an extension from a hunt group position . . .
FF4 3# (118)# (520)# CONF ON/OFF
4
Hunt Group No.
\
Positions 1-16 in Hunt Group
(using address numbers 5-20)
NOTE: The extension must be idle while you are clearing it from the
hunt group position; otherwise, it will not be cleared.
Notes
Hunt Group Positions. With CPC-B versions between 2.0 and 5.x. there are 8
available positions in each hunt group. Beginning with CPC-B Version 6.0 and
CPC-AII, up to 16 positions are available.
The extension numbers entered in this address must already be
assigned to extension ports in address FF3 (ExtPort)## l# (lo-69 or lOO-699)#. An
extension cannot belong to more than one hunt group.
Extensions.
Hunt Group Pilot Number. A pilot number must be assigned to the hunt group in
address PF4 3# (HuntGrp)# l# (11-69 or lOl-699)#, in order for the hunt group
feature to work. However, do not include the pilot number here in Hunt Group
Members.
DBS-70-400
DBS Manual - Issued 8/l/95
Technical Manuals Online! - http://www.tech-man.com
Page 4-l 7
WqJlGl
+. nlllyllly
dlllJ
nullruluUp3
\I r-w)
Call Coverage Group Members
Software Version: .AIl Versions
Address: FF4 4# (CovGrp)# (Position)# (ExtNo.)#
Description
A Call Coverage Group allows up to two extensions (one at a time) to serve
as backup answering positions for as many as six other extensions.
For example, if extensions 201-206 want their unanswered calls to be picked
up by extensions 207 or 208:
l
l
Assign extensions 207 and 208 to Call Coverage Group positions 1 and 2.
Assign extensions 201-206 to Call Coverage Group positions 3-8.
All incoming calls to the members will ring once on position l’s phone (if
idle); the member’s extension number will display on position l’s phone
(even if not idle). To pick up the call, position 1 presses the appropriate DSS/
BLF key assigned to the extension (or use Direct Call Pickup to take the call).
Member calls will not ring or display on position 2’s phone unless position 1
is set for Call Forwarding, Absence Message, DND, or is busy on all MCO/
ML keys.
Programming
To assign an extension to a Call Coverage Group . . .
FF4 4## (l-16)# (118)# (IO-69 or IOO-699)#
f?
2
Extension Number
Position in Group
Call Coverage Group
Note: Positions 1 and 2 are secretary positions: 3-8 are member positions.
To clear an extension from the Call Coverage Group . . .
FF4 4## (l-16)# (198)# CONF ON/OFF
f
Call Coverage GrouD
f
Position in Grout
Related Programming
Extension Number Digits: FFl 2# l# 12# (0 or l)##
FF Key Programming: FF5 addresses
Page 4-l 8
DBS Manual - Issued 8/l/95
Technical Manuals Online! - http://www.tech-man.com
DBS-70-400
LI q,llt!l 4. nil IYII iy al IU nur II uroups
Notes
(rt4)
Call Coverage Group Member Rest&ions. An extension assigned as a call
coverage group member cannot also be a member of a hunt group. An
extension cannot be a member of more than one call coverage group at a time.
DSS Requirement For Positions I and 2. Call Coverage Group positions 1
and 2 need to have their phones’ DSS/BLF keys assigned to call coverage
group members, so they can see the call flashing on the LED. (The call will
ring only once at position 1 or 2’s phone.)
DBS-70-400
DBS Manual - Issued 8/t/95
Technical Manuals Online! - http://www.tech-man.com
Page 4-l 9
CO Delayed Day Ring Assignments
Software Version: CPC-Ail (all versions); CPGB Version 1.07 or higher
Address: FF4 5## (ExtPort)# (Trunk)# (0 or l)#
Description
This program assigns delayed ringing to extensions for unanswered calls on
specific trunks during “Day” mode. Delayed ringing is when an unanswered
incoming call starts ringing at another extension after a certain period of time
(the first extension will stop ringing).
Programming
I
I
FF4 5# (I-73 or I-145)# (I-64)# (0 or I)#
f
Extension Port
f
Trunk Number
+
O=Trunk does not ring.
l=Trunk rings.
NOTE: Use port 73 (for singlecabinet systems) or port 145 (for double-cabinet systems) to assign
ringing to an external paging or Universal Night Answer (UNA) device.
Related Programming
Delayed Ring: FFl 2# l# 23# (d or l)#
CO Delayed Ring Timer: FFl 3# 26# (0-15)#
CO Day Ring Assignments:
Notes
FF4 l# (ExtPort)# (Trunk)# (0 or l)#
Attendant Interactions. If the Primary Attendant is assigned delayed
ringing, the Attendant Overflow feature will be disabled. Also, if the Delayed
Ring function is enabled and no extensions are assigned or capable of ringing
(DND, unplugged, etc.), the ringing line will automatically ring the
Attendant.
Timing For Delayed Ringing. Delayed ring timing -- the period of time that
passes before the system transfers the unanswered call -- depends on the CPC
version:
l
l
Page 4-20
CPC-AI1 (all versions); CPC-B Version 3.1 or higher: CO Delayed Ring
Timer (FF13# 26#).
CPC-B Versions prior to 3.1: Call Forward-No Answer Timer (FF13#
19# 0-M).
DBS Manual - Issued 8/l/95
Technical Manuals Online! - http://www.tech-man.com
DBS-70-400
Section 400-Programming
Chapter 4. Ringing and Hunt Groups (FF4)
CO Delayed Day Ring Assignments for Hunt Groups
Software Version: CPC-All (all versions); CPC-6 Version 2.0 or higher
Address: FF4 5# (HuntGrp)# (Trunk)# (0 or l)#
Description
This program assigns delayed ringing to hunt groups for unanswered calls on
specific trunks during “Day” mode. Delayed ringing is when an unanswered
incoming call starts ringing at another extension after a certain period of time
(the first extension will stop ringing).
Programming
I
FF4 5# (79-86 or 15%158)# (I-64)# (0 or l)#
f
f
f
Trunk No.
O=Trunk.does not ring.
l=Trunk rings.
for Hunt Group 1
for Hunt Group 2
for Hunt Group 3
for Hunt Group 4
for Hunt Group 5
for Hunt Group 6
for Hunt Group 7
for Hunt Groun 8
Hunt Groups 1 thru 8:
I2ICAIIorCPC-B
79
80
81
82
83
84
85
86
-or-or-or-or-or-or-or-or-
151
152
153
154
155
156
157
158
Related Programming
Delayed Ring: FFl 2# l# 23#
CO Delayed Ring Timer: FFl
CO Day Ring for Hunt Groups:
Hunt Group Members: PF4 3#
Notes
(0 or l)#
3# 26# (0-15)#
_
FF4 l# (HuntGrp)# (Tiunk)# (0 or l)#
(l-8)# (5-12/20)# (lo-69 or lOO-699)#
Attendant Interactions. If the Primary Attendant is assigned delayed
ringing, the Attendant Overflow feature will be disabled. Also, if the Delayed
Ring function is enabled and no extensions are assigned or capable of ringing
(DND, unplugged, etc.), the ringing line will automatically ring the
Attendant.
Timing For Delayed Ringing. Delayed ring timing -- the period of time that
passes before the system transfers the unanswered call -- depends on the CPC
version:
CPC-AI1 (all versions); CPC-B Version 3.1 or higher: CO Delayed
Ring Timer -- FF13# 26# (0-15)#
CPC-B Versions prior to 3.1: Call Forward-No Answer Timer -- FFl 3#
19# (O-15)#
l
l
DBS-70-400
DBS Manual - Issued 8/l/95
Technical Manuals Online! - http://www.tech-man.com
Page 4-21
CO Delayed Night Ring Assignments
Software Version: CPC-Ail (all versions); CPC-8 Version 2.0 or higher
Address: FF4 6# (ExtPort)# (Trunk)# (0 or l)#
Description
This program assigns delayed ringing to extensions for unanswered calls on
specific trunks during “Night” mode. Delayed ringing is when an
unanswered incoming call starts ringing at another extension after a certain
period of time (the fist extension will stop ringing).
Programming
FF4 6# (l-73 or l-145)# (l-64)# (0 or I)#
f
Extension Port
f
Trunk Number
+
O=Trunk does not ring.
l=Trunk rings.
NOTE: Use port 73 (for single-cabinet systems)
or port 145 (for double-cabinet systems) to assign ringing
to an external paging or Universal Night Answer (UNA) device.
Related Programming
Delayed Ring: FFl 2# l# 23# (0 or l)#
CO Delayed Ring Timer: FFl 3# 26# (0-15)#
CO Night Ring Assignments: ’ FF4 2# (ExtPort)# (Trunk)# (0 or l)#
Notes
Attendant Interactions. If the Primary Attendant is assigned delayed
ringing, the Attendant Overflow feature will be disabled. Also, if the Delayed
Ring function is enabled and no extensions are assigned or capable of ringing
(DND, unplugged, etc.), the ringing line will automatically ring the
Attendant.
Night Mode. Beginning with CPC-AIVB Version 7.0, there are two separate
Night modes -- “Night” and “Night 2”. This address controls “Night”
delayed ring assignments (see FF4 9# 2# for “Night 2” delayed ringing).
Timing For Delayed Ringing. Delayed ring timing -- the period of time that
passes before the system transfers the unanswered call -- depends on the CPC
version:
CPC-AI1 (all versions); CPC-B Version 3.1 or higher: CO Delayed
Ring Timer -- FFl 3# 26# (0- 15)#
CPC-B Versions prior to 3.1: Call Forward-No Answer Timer -- FFl 3#
19# (O-15)#
l
l
Page 4-22
DBS Manual - Issued 8/l/95
Technical Manuals Online! - http://www.tech-man.com
DBS-70-400
wiapref 4. nmgrrlg ana nurit woups (i-i-4)
CO Delayed Night Ring Assignments for Hunt Groups
Software Version: CPC-All (all versions); CPC-B Version 2.0 or higher
Address: FF4 6## (HuntGrp)# (Trunk)#b (0 or l)#
Description
-
This program assigns delayed ringing to hunt groups for unanswered calls on
specific trunks during “Night” mode. Delayed ringing is when an
unanswered incoming call starts ringing at another extension after a certain
period of time (the first extension will stop ringing).
Programming
I
FF4 W (79-86 or 151-158)# (1164)# (0 or l)#
f
f
f
Trunk No.
O=Trunk does not ring.
l=Trunk rings.
for Hunt Group 1
for Hunt Group 2
for Hunt Group 3
for Hunt Group 4
for Hunt Group 5
for Hunt Group 6
for Hunt Group 7
for Hunt Groun 8
Hunt Groups 1 thru 8:
CPC.-ATTorCPCI-B
79
80
81
82
83
84
85
86
-or-or-or-or-or-or-or-or-
15 1
152
153
154
155
156
157
158
Related Programming
Delayed Ring: FFl 2# l# 23# (0 or l)#
CO Delayed Ring Timer: FFl 3# 26# (0-15)#
CO Night Ring Assignments for Hunt Groups: FP4 2# (HuntGrp)#
(Trunk)#’ (0 or l)#
Hunt Group Members: FF4 3# (l-8)# (5-12/20)# (loo-699)#
Notes
Attendant Interactions. If the Primary Attendant is assigned delayed
ringing, the Attendant Overflow feature will be disabled. Also, if the Delayed
Ring function is enabled and no extensions are assigned or capable of ringing
@ND, unplugged, etc.), the ringing line will automatically ring the
Attendant.
Night Mode. Beginning with CPC-AIUB Version 7.0, there are two separate
Night modes -- “Night” and “Night 2”. This address controls “Night”
delayed ring assignments (see FF4 9# 2# for “Night 2” delayed ringing).
DBS-70-400
DBS Manual - issued 8/t/95
Technical Manuals Online! - http://www.tech-man.com
Page 4-23
Timing For Delayed Ringing. Delayed ring timing -- the period of time that
passes before the system transfers the unanswered call -- depends on the CPC
version:
l
l
Page 4-24
CPC-AI1 (all versions); CPC-B Version 3.1 or higher: CO Delayed
Ring Timer -- FFl 3# 26## (0-15)#
CPC-B Versions prior to 3.1: Call Forward-No Answer Timer -- FFl 3#
19# (O-15)#
DBS Manual - Issued 8/l/95
Technical Manuals Online! - http://www.tech-man.com
DBS-70-400
Chapter 4. Ringing and Hunt Groups (FF4)
Section 400-Programming
Extension Ring Table
Software Version: CPC-All (all versions); CPC-B Version 2.0 or higher
Address: FF4 7# (TargetExtPort)# (SourceExtPort)# (0 or l)#
Description
DSS/BLF keys can be programmed (in FF5) to flash whenever other
extensions receive incoming calls. Use this address to program the DSS/BLF
phone to also ring for these incoming calls.
The DSS/BLF phone user can answer the call by pressing the flashing DSS/
BLF key.
Programming
FF4 7# (l-144)# (l-144)# (0 or l)#
/
Extension Port with
DSS/BLF Keys
t
f
&Do not ring
Extension Port
the DSS/BLF
receiving calls
phone.
(unanswered extension)
l=Ring the DSS/
BLF phone.
Related Programming
DSS/BLF Key Programming: FF5 (l-144)# (l-24)# CONF PROG (lo-69
or l OO-699)#
DBS-70-400
DBS Manual - Issued 8/l/95
Technical Manuals Online! - http://www.tech-man.com
Page 4-25
Chapter 4. Ringing and Hunt Groups (FF4)
Section 400-Programming
Extension Delayed Ring Table
Software Version: CPC-All (all versions); CPC-B Version 2.0 or higher
Address: FF4 8## (TargetExtPort)# (SourceExtPort)# (0 or l)#
Description
DSS/BLF keys can be programmed (in FF5) to flash whenever other
extensions receive incoming calls. Use this address to program the DSVBLF
phone to also ring for these incoming calls on a delayed basis.
If the incoming call is unanswered at the ringing extension, the DSS/BLF
phone will begin ringing (and the first extension will stop ringing) after a
certain period of time.
The DSS/BLF phone user can answer the call by pressing the flashing DSSI
BLF key.
Programming
I
FF4 8# (I-144)# (I-144)# (0 or l)#
h
+
f
Extension Port with
Extension Port O=Do not delay-ring
the DSWBLF phone.
receiving calls
DSS/BLF Keys
(unanswered extension) l=Delay-ring the
DSWBLF phone.
Related Programming
Extension (BLF) Delayed Ring: FFl 2# l# 30# (0 or l)#
Extension (DSS/BLF) Delayed Ring Tier: FFl 3# 27# (0-15)#
DSS/BLF Key Programming: FF5 (l-144)# (l-24)# CONF PROG (lo-69
or l OO-699)#
Notes
Timing For Extension Delayed Ringing. The period of time that passes
before the system begins ringing the unanswered call on the DSS/BLF
extension, depends on the CPC version:
CPC-AI1 (all versions); CPC-B Version 3.1 or higher: Extension
Delayed Ring Timer -- FFl 3# 27# (0-15)#
CPC-B Versions prior to 3.1: Call Forward-No Answer Timer -- FFl 3#
19# (O-15)#
l
l
Page 4-26
DBS Manual - Issued 8/i/95
Technical Manuals Online! - http://www.tech-man.com
DBS-70-400
UIaptef 4. Hlnging and Hunt Groups (FF4)
Section 400~Programming
CO Night 2 Ring Assignments
Software Version: CPC-All and CPC-6, Version 7.0 or higher
Address: FF4 9# l# (ExtPort)## (Trunk)# (0 or l)#
Description
This program determines which extension(s) will receive incoming calls from
a particular trunk when the DBS is in “Night 2” mode.
Programming I
FF4 9# l# (l-73 or l-145)# (l-64)# (0 or l)#
/’
Extension Port-
/.
Trunk Number
+
O=Trunk does not ring.
l=Trunk rings.
Note: Use port 73 (for single-cabinet systems) or 145 (for doublecabinet systems) to assign ringing to an external paging or Universal
Night Answer (UNA) device.
Notes
DBS-70-400
Default Attendant Ring Assignments. All trunks are set to ring on ports 1
and 2 (the Primary and Second Attendants) by default. If a trunk is not
assigned to ring at a specific extension, it will still ring the Attendant.
DBS Manual - Issued 8/?/95
Technical Manuals Online! - http://www.tech-man.com
Page 4-27
CO Night 2 Ring Assignments for Hunt Groups
Software Version: CPC-All and CPC-8, Version 7.0 or higher
Address: FF4 9# l# (HuntGrp)# (Trunk)# (0 or l)#
Description
This program determines which hunt group will receive incoming calls from
a particular trunk when the DBS is in “Night 2” mode.
Programming
I
FF4 9# 1# (79-86 or Ml-158)## (I-64)# (0 or l)#
/(
Hunt Groups 1 thru 8:
f
Trunk No.
CPC-ATT0rCIPC-B
79
80
81
82
83
84
85
86
-or-or-or-or-or-or-or-or-
15 1
152
153
154
155
156
157
158
for Hunt Group
for Hunt Group
for Hunt Group
for Hunt Group
for Hunt Group
for Hunt Group
for Hunt Group
for Hunt Group
f
O=Trunk does not ring.
l=Trunk rings.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
Related ,Programming
Hunt Group No Answer Timer: FFl 3# 28# (0-15)#
Hunt Group Pilot Numbers: FF4 3# (HuntGrp)## l# (11-69 or lOl-699)#
Hunt Group Type: FF4 3# (HuntGrp)## 2# (0-2)##
Transfer Extension: F’F4 3# (HuntGrp)## 3# (lo-69 or lOO-699)##
Hunt Group Transfer Timer: FF4 3# (HuntGrp)# 4# (0-32)#
Hunt Group Members: FF4 3# (HuntGrp)# (5- 12/20)# (lo-69 or lOO-699)#
Page 4-28
DBS Manual - Issued 8/i/95
Technical Manuals Online! - http://www.tech-man.com
DBS-70-400
Chapter 4. Ringing and Hunt Groups (FF4)
Section 400-Programming
CO Delayed Night 2 Ring Assignments
Software Version: CPC-All and CPC-6, Version 7.0 or higher
Address: FF4 9# 2# (ExtPort)# (Trunk)# (0 or l)#
Description
This program assigns delayed ringing to extensions for unanswered calls on
specific trunks during “Night 2” mode. Delayed ringing is when an
unanswered incoming call starts ringing at another extension after a certain
period of time (the first extension will stop ringing).
Programming
FF4 9# 2# (I-73 or I-145)# (l-64)# (0 or I)#
f
Extension Port
f
Trunk Number
+
O=Trunk does not ring.
1 =Trunk rings.
NOTE: Use port 73 (for single-cabinet systems)
or port 145 (for double-cabinet systems) to assign ringing
to an external paging or Universal Night Answer (UNA) device.
Related Programming
Delayed Ring: FFl 2# lif 23# (0 or l)#
CO Delayed Ring Timer: FFl 3# 26# (0-15)#
CO Night 2 Ring Assignments: FF4 9# l# (ExtPort)# (Trunk)# (0 or l)#
Notes
Attendant Interactions. If the Primary Attendant is assigned delayed
ringing, the Attendant Overflow feature will be disabled. Also, if the Delayed
Ring function is enabled and no extensions are assigned or capable of ringing
(DND, unplugged, etc.), the ringing line will automatically ring the
Attendant.
Timing For Delayed Ringing. Delayed ring timing -- the period of time that
passes before the system transfers the unanswered call -- is controlled by the
CO Delayed Ring Timer (FFl 3# 26#).
DBS-70-400
DBS Manual - Issued 8/l/95
Technical Manuals Online! - http://www.tech-man.com
Page 4-29
CO Delayed Night 2 Ring Assignments for Hunt
Groups
Software Version: CPC-All and CPC-6, Version 7.0 or higher
Address: FF4 9# 2# (HuntGrp)# (Trunk)# (0 or I)#
Description
This program assigns delayed ringing to hunt groups for unanswered calls on
specific trunks during “Night 2” mode. Delayed ringing is when an
unanswered incoming call-starts ringing at another extension after a certain
period of time (the first extension will stop ringing).
Programming
FF4 9# 2# (79-86 or IN-158)# (1964)# (0 or l)#
f
f
Trunk No.
O=Trunk does not ring.
l=Trunk rings.
for Hunt Group 1
for Hunt Group 2
for Hunt Group 3
for Hunt Group 4
for Hunt Group 5
for Hunt Group 6
for Hunt Group 7
for Hunt Group 8
Hunt Groups 1 thru 81
CPC-ATT0rCPC-B
79
80
81
82
83
84
85
86
-or-or-or-or-or-or-or-or-
151
152
153
154
155
156
157
158
Related Programming
Delayed Ring: FFl 2# l# 23# (0 or l)#
CO Delayed Ring Timer: FFl 3# 26# (0-15)#
CO Night 2 Ring Assignments for Hunt Groups: FF4 9# l# (HuntGrp)#
(Trunk)# (0 or l)#
Hunt Group Members: FF4 3# (l-8)# (5-12/20)# (lo-69 or lOO-699)#
Attendant Interactions. If the primary Attendant is assigned delayed
ringing, the Attendant Overflow feature will be disabled. Also, if the Delayed
Ring function is enabled and no extensions are assigned or capable of ringing
(DND, unplugged, etc.), the ringing line will automatically ring the
Attendant.
Timing For Delayed Ringing. Delayed ring timing -- the period of time that
passes before the system transfers the unanswered call -- is controlled by the
CO Delayed Ring Timer (FFl 3# 26#).
Page 4-30
DBS Manual - Issued 8/l/95
Technical Manuals Online! - http://www.tech-man.com
DBS-70-400
5. FF Key Programming (FF5)
Use the FF5 addresses in this chapter to assign special features to the Flexible
Function (FF) keys on DBS phones.
FF keys can be programmed to activate features which normally require
several keystrokes -- such as initiating system features, assigning specific
extension numbers, or storing digits that are frequently dialed. Section 700Feature Operation explains in detail how each of these features works.
FF keys are the buttons with LEDs. (The buttons without LEDs -- called
“one-touch keys” -- are used for call-handling features such as speed dialing,
and cannot be set via FF5 programming.)
FF keys can also be programmed from extensions without entering the
programming mode (see the phone model’s Station User Guide for
instructions). However, if a trunk is already assigned to an FF key, it must be
cleared using FF5 programming before a feature code can be reassigned to it.
This chapter covers the following addresses:
Topic
FF5 (ExtPort)# ( l -24)# (Code)#
FF Key Assignments for Extensions
FF5 (DSS)# (l-72)# (Code)*
FF Key Assignments for DSS Consoles
133 (AuendarW (l-XV (CcW# Attendant Feature Package Key Assignments
FF5 Address
Page
5-3
5-8
540
(CPC-B Versions 2.0 to 4.0)
DBS-70-400
DBS Manual - Issued 8/t/95
Technical Manuals Online! - http://www.tech-man.com
Page 5-I
Page 5-2
DBS Manual - Issued 8/l/95
Technical Manuals Online! - http://www.tech-man.com
DBS-70-400
FF Key Assignments for Extensions
Software Version: All Versions
Address: FF5 (ExtPort)# (Key)# (Feature)#
Description
Each Flexible Function (FF) key on DBS phones and EM/24 consoles can be
programmed with a feature code. During normal phone operation (not in
programming mode), pressing the FF key performs the feature associated
with the code.
Figures 5 1 and 5-2 (next page) illustrate FF key numbering on a 32-button
phone and on an EM/24 console. A key telephone’s FF keys are numbered
left-to-right, starting on the bottom row. An EM/24’s F’F keys are numbered
bottom-to-top, starting at the left column.
To program FF keys on a DSS console, see the next address.
Programming
To assign a feature to an FF key . . .
FF5 (l-144)# (1124)# CONF (Code)#
7
Extension Port.
or EM/24 Port
f
Key Number
(see figures,
next page).
t
2
Clears any existing
feature code before
assigning a new one
Feature Code
(see table on
page S-5)
Note: Not all DBS phones have 24 FF keys available for programming.
For example, a 34button phone has 24 FF keys and 10 PSD keys:
however, a 22-button phone has only 12 FF keys and 10 PSD keys.
To clear a feature assignment from an FF key . . .
FF5 (19144)# (l-24)# CONF ON/OFF
f
Extension Port
t
Key Number
To see an FF key’s existing feature assignment, press . . .
ON/OFF CONF [press the FF key]
DBS-70-400
DBS Manual - issued 8/l/95
Technical Manuals Online! - http://www.tech-man.com
4
Page 5-3
Figure 5-I. FF key layout on a 34-button phone
MUTE
CONF
AUTO
VOlV
VOLA
.
I
-
-
PSD
Keys
FF
Keys
Figure 5-2. FF key layout on an EM124 unit
ll-----Il
18
1116
14
1112
3
3
12
3
Page 5-4
1
I10
1124
3
1120
3
3
1
118
DBS Manual - issued 8/l/95
Technical Manuals Online! - http://www.tech-man.com
3
3
3
1
]
]
DBS-70-400
Table 5-l. Feature codes for FF key assignment
Code to be assigned to FF key
(FFll enters an asterisk +)
(FF12 enters a pound sign #)
Feature
Absence Message
Account Code
Alarm
71
AUTO FF12
FF12 4
(CPC-B Version 2.0 to 4.0 with AFP)
Answer Key
Any Key
FFll 1
PROG PROG XXXXXX
Note: The “Any Key” feature allows you to store
digits other than extension numbers, CO trunks, or
feature codes. For example, Any Key can be used to
store an account code or a Voice Mail password.
Attendant Park Hold
BGM (Background Music) On/Off
Busy Override
Call Forward--Outside
75 (00-09)
FF12 53
PROG PROG 4
723
(CPC-AII/B versions prior to 7.0)
Call Forward
Call Forward--All Calls
Call Forward--Busy/No Answer
Call Forward--Busy
Call Forward--No Answer
72
720
Call Park
call Pickup
Call Waiting
Caller ID Log
Day Mode
Day/Night/Night2 Mode Toggle
75
(CPC-AWB Version 7.0 or higher)
Dial Tone Off
DND (Do Not Disturb)
DP to DTMF Signal Conversion
DSS/BLF Key
(flash for extension calls)
DBS-70-400
721
722
724
Note: Beginning with CPC-AII/B Version
7.0, you can call-forward to an outside
phone number. Use an existing PSD or SSD
code as the destination phone number, with a
“CX-PhoneNo.” format (where C is the
CONF key, and X is 1-6 or 9 for trunk group
81-86 or 89).
79
PROG PROG 3
FFll 6
FF12 521
FF12 5 2 0
Note: The FF key LED will be off during Day
mode; red during Night mode; and green during
Night 2 mode.
FF12 50
73
PROG PROG FFll -or- PROG PROG FF12
PROG (lo-69 or 100-699)
DBS Manual - Issued 8/l/95
Technical Manuals Online! - http://www.tech-man.com
Page 5-5
Code to be assigned to FF key
(FFll enters an asterisk *)
WF12 enters a pound sign #)
Feature
Extension Directory
Extension Lockout
Group Call Pickup
Headset
Intercom Key
Internal Dial Tone
MC0 or ML Keys
900002
74
70
FF12 51
FF12 8
FF12 50
(81-86 or 89)
Note: See “ML/MC0 Separation” (FF3 ExtPort#
4#) to determine which type of key is available with
your software.
77
AUTO REDIAL
FFll FF12
FF12 52 (CPC-AH/B versions prior to 7.0)
FF 12 522 (WC-AH/B Version 7.0 or higher)
FF12 -523
Meet-Me Answer
Message Waiting Answer
Mute
Night Mode
Night 2 mode
(CPC-AII/B Version 7.0 or higher)
Gffhook Voice Announce
Gffhook Voice Announce Answer
Page
Park Hold
PSD (Personal Speed Dial) Directory
PSD (Personal Speed Dial) Number
Release
Reminder
Save Number Redial Access
Save Number Redial Set
SSD (System Speed Dial) Directory
SSD (System Speed Dial) Number
Tl Alarms -Frame Loss
Red Alarm
Signal Loss
Slips
Sync Loss
Ye1 low Alarm
Page 5-6
PROG PROG 5
FFll 3
FF12 (00-07)
75
900000
AUTO (90-99 or 900-909)
FFll 2
FF12 4
AUTO FFll
AUTO AUTO FFll
900001
AUTO (00-89 or 000- 199)
(Worti)
(101 or 121) FF12
(103 or 123) FF12
(104 or 124) FF12
(102 or 122) FF12
(105 or 125) FF12
(107 or 127) FF12
DBS Manual - Issued 8/l/95
Technical Manuals Online! - http://www.tech-man.com
DBS-70-400
Section 400-Programming
Chapter 5. FF Key Programming (FF5)
Code to be assigned to FF key
Feature
Talkback
Tone/Voice Calling
Transfer
Trunk Group Selection
(same as “MC0 or ML Keys”)
Trunk Queuing
Trunk Selection
UNA Pickup
Voice Mail One-Touch Access
(FFll enters an &risk *)
(FF12 enters a pound sign #)
FFll 3
PROG PROG 1
PROG PROG PROG
(81-86 or 89)
PROG PROG 2
(01-64)
78
PROG AUTO NNN (XXXor AUTO SSD/PSD)#
(CPC-B Version 5.0 or higher)
f
f
VM Pilot Numbe;
Press the # Ikey to
register the string.
Note: The password (if used) can be 1 to 3 digits long. If the
password is over 3 digits. it must be assigned as a speed-dial
code (be sure to include an ending pound # sign after the password when creating the speeddial code).
Voice Mail Transfer
Password (optional)
PROG AUTO AUTO NNN
(NNN=VM Pilot Number)
Related Programming
BLF Port Assignment: FF3 (ExtPort)# 3# (ExtPort)#
ML/MC0Separation: FF3 (ExtPort)# 4# (0 or l)#
FF Key Copy: FF9 3# (ExtPort)# (ExtPort)##
Notes
DBS-70-400
FFll and FF12 in the Feature Codes. The * and # phone keys are used as
movement keys (for scrolling through addresses) while in programming
mode. Therefore, when programming feature codes for FF keys, FFl 1 and
FF12 are used instead to represent * and # (FFll enters *; FF12 enters #).
The phone will not display the symbol when you press FFll or FF12, but it
will register * or # as part of the feature code.
DBS Manual - Issued 8/l/95
Technical Manuals Online! - http://www.tech-man.com
Page 5-7
Chapter 5. FF Key Programming (FF5)
Section 400-Programming
FF Key Assignments for DSS Consoles
Software Version: All Versions
Address: FF5 (DSSPort)# (Key)# (Feature)#
Description
Use this address to assign features to FF keys on a DSS console. During
normal phone operation, pressing the FF key will perform the assigned
feature.
Figure 5-3 (next page) shows the key layout of a DSS/72 console. For a list
of feature codes, use the same table as the “Extensions” address (previous
page).
Programming
To assign a feature to a DSS FF key . . .
FF5 (73-76 or 145148)# CONF (l-72)# (Code)#
3
f
DSS Location
Cl-AI&J Cpc1-E
73=DSS 1
73=DSS 2
75=DSS 3
74=DSS 4
Clears any
existing FF key
145=DSS 1 assignment
146=DSS 2 before a new
.147=DSS 3 one is assigned
148=DSS 4
f
2
FF Key
(see illustration,
previous page)
Feature Code
(see table on
page 5-5)
To reset a DSSi72 FF key to its default value . . .
FF5 (73-76 or 145148)# (l-72)# CONF ON/OFF
c
DSS Location
f
FF Key
To see an FF key’s existing feature assignment, press . . .
CONF ON/OFF [press the FF key]
I
Related Programming
BLF Port Assignment: FF3 (ExtPort)# 3# (ExtPort)#
ML/MC0 Separation: FF3 (ExtPort)# 4## (0 or l)#
FF Key Copy: FF9 3# (ExtPott)# (ExtPort)##
Page 5-8
DBS Manual - Issued 8/l/95
Technical Manuals Online! - http://www.tech-man.com
DBS-70-400
~BGUUII 4uu-rroyrarwwly
Notes
br~aprer 3 . r r n e y r r o g r a m m t n g (i-r3j
Default Key Assignments. The F’F keys on DSS consoles 1 and 3 are
assigned by default as DSVBLF, Page, Park, and Night keys. DSS consoles 2
and 4 do not have default key assignments.
Restriction on Trunk LED Indications. Only the first 24 FF keys will light
for trunks that are assigned to them. Trunks can be assigned to the remaining
keys from the phone (rather than through programming mode), but the LEDs
will not light.
FFll and FF12 in the Feature Codes. The * and # phone keys are used as
movement keys for scrolling through addresses while in programming mode.
Therefore, when programming feature codes for FF keys, FFl 1 and FF 12 are
used instead to represent * and # (FFll enters *; FF12 enters #I). The phone’
will not display the symbol when you press FFll or FF12, but it will register
* or # as part of the feature code.
Figure 5-3. FF key layout on a DSSl72 console
DBS-70400
DBS Manual - Issued 8/l/95.
Technical Manuals Online! - http://www.tech-man.com
Page 5-9
Section 400-Programming
Chapter 5. FF Key Programming (FF5)
Attendant Feature Package Key Assignments
Software Version: CPC-8 Versions 2.0 to 4.0
Address: FF5 (Attendant)# (Key)# (Feature)#
Description
In DBS systems with the Attendant Feature Package (AFP), each FF key on
an Attendant console can be programmed with a feature code. During normal
phone operation (not in programming mode), pressing the FF key performs
the feature associated with the code.
For a list of feature codes, use the same table as the “Extensions” address
(page 5-5).
Note: The AFP was discontinued in CPC-B Version 5.0.
Programming
To assign an Attendant console FF key . . .
FF5 (1491152)# (I-32)# CONF (Code)#
f
Attendant Console:
149=Attendant Console 1
UO=Attendant
Console
15 l=Attendant Console 3
153=Attendant Console 4
+
FF Key
2
.
t
\\
Cl&s any
Feature Code
existing feature
(see table on
code before a
page 5-5)
new one is
assigned
To reset an Attendant Console FF key to its default value . . .
FF5 (149~152)# (I- 2)# CONF ON/OFF
f
Attendant Console
1
FF Key
Related Programming
BLF Port Assignment: FF3 (ExtPort)# 3# (ExtPort)#
ML/MC0 Separation: FF3 (ExtPort)# 44# (0 or l)#
FF Key Copy: FF9 3# (ExtPort)# (ExtPort)#H
Page 5-l 0
DBS Manual - issued 8/l/95
Technical Manuals Online! - http://www.tech-man.com
DBS-70-400
Section 400-Programming
Notes
Chapter 5. FF Key Programming (FF5)
Default Key Assignments. The FF keys on Attendant consoles 1 and 2 are
assigned by default as MC0 keys. Attendant consoles 3 and 4 do not have
default key assignments.
Restriction on Trunk LED Indications. Only the first 24 FF keys will light
for trunks that are assigned to them. Trunks can be assigned to the remaining
keys from the phone (rather than through programming mode), but the LEDs
will not light.
FFll and FF12 in the Feature Codes. The * and # phone keys are used as
movement keys (for scrolling through addresses) while in programming
mode. Therefore, when programming feature codes for FF keys, FFl 1 and
FF12 are used instead to represent * and # (FFll enters *; FF12 enters #).
The phone will not display the symbol when you press FFll or FF12, but it
will register * or # as part of the feature code.
DBS-70-400
DBS Manual - Issued 8/l/95
Technical Manuals Online! - http://www.tech-man.com
Page 5-l 1
6. Name and Message Assignments (FF6)
Use the FF6 program addresses in this chapter to create text names and
messages that will appear on the LCD displays of DBS phones.
IMPORTANT: A DSS/BLF phone is required for FF6 programming.
See ‘General Notes” (next page) for instructions on using DSS/BLF keys to
make text assignments in FF6 programming.
This chapter covers the following addresses:
Topic
General Notes
1 FF6 l# (ExtPort)# CONF (lOchar.)#
1 Extension Name
JTF6 2# (SSD)# COIW (16char.W
System Speed Dial Names
FF6 3# (Extport)# (PSD)# CONF (16ch&# Personal Speed Dial Names
1 FF6 44# 69)# CONF (15char.M
Absence Messages
FF6 5# (Trunk)# CONF (6char.W
Trunk Name Assignment
FF6 Address
all FF6 addresses
I
Page
6-2
16-3
6-4
6-5
1
16-6
1
6-8
(CPC-AIUB 2.0 or higher)
FF6 6# (HuntGrp)# CONF (1lchar.M
Hunt Group Name Assignment
6-9
(CPC-AII/EI 2.0 or higher)
FF6 7# (l-5)# CON-F (15char.M
Call WaitingJOHVA Text Reply
(CPC-AII/B 2.0 or higher)
FF6 (8/W (1-200)# (1/2)# (DID/DNISNo.j# DID/DNIS Text Name Assignment
(6char.)#
DBS-70-400
6-11
(CPC-B 5.0 or higher)
DBS Manual - Issued 8/l/95
Technical Manuals Online! - http://www.tech-man.com
Page 6-1
General Notes
Assigning text names via FF6 programming requires the use of a DSS/BLF
phone. Figure 6-l below shows the key layout of a DSSI72 console that can
be used for assigning text names. The left- and right-arrow keys, located on
the bottom row of the expansion unit (on the right), can be used to move the
cursor backward and forward through the letters of a name entry.
Some text names can also be assigned without entering the programming
mode (see Section 700-Feature Operation for instructions), while others
require FF6 programming.
Text Names that can be assigned without entering programming
mode . . .
Extension Names
System Speed Dial Names
Personal Speed Dial Names
Call Waiting/OHVA Text Reply
Text Names that can only be assigned using FF6 programming . . .
Absence Messages
Trunk Names
Hunt Group Names
DIDIDNIS Names
Figure 6-l. Key layout of a DSSl72 console for text name assignment
.
Page 6-2
DBS Manual -
Issued 8/l/95
Technical Manuals Online! - http://www.tech-man.com
D BS-70-400
Section 400-Programming
Chapter 6. Name and Message Assignments (FF6)
Extension Name
Software Version: All Versions
Address: FF6 l# (ExtPort)# CONF (Name)#
Description
Names of up to 10 characters can be assigned to each extension number. An
extension’s name appears on the second line of its display. The name of an
extension being called appears on the top line of the display.
Extension names can also be assigned without entering the programming
mode, using the Attendant Feature option (see Section 700-Feature Operation
for instructions).
Programming
To assign an extension name . . .
FF6 I# (l-144)# CONF (NNNNNNNNNN)#
t
Extension Port
t
Text Name
(up to 10 characters)
To clear an extension name . . .
FF6 1# (l-144)# CONF ON/OFF
A
I
Extension Port
Notes
DBS-70-400
Using a DSS Console With AFl? If the Attendant Feature Package (AFP) is
used (available only with CPC-B Version 2.0 to 4.0), the DSS console must
be initially set as type “11” in the Terminal Type address (FF3 ExtPort## 2#),
to enable the keys to perform programming functions.
DBS Manual - Issued 8/l/95
Technical Manuals Online! - http://www.tech-man.com
Page 6-3
Chapter 6. Name and Message Assignments (FF6)
Section 400-Programming
System Speed Dial Names
SoWare Ver$ion: All Versions
Address: FF6 2# (SSD)# CONF (Name)#
Description
Names of up to 16 characters can be assigned to System Speed Dial (SSD)
numbers. The names are displayed alphabetically on large-display telephones
to confirm the name of the person being called using an SSD code.
SSD names can also be assigned without entering the programming mode,
using the Attendant Feature option (see Section 700-Feature Operation for
instructions).
Programming
To assign SSD names . . .
I
I
FF6 2# (00-89 or 000-199)# CONF (NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN)#
f
f
Text Name
SSD Number:
(up to 16 characters)
OO-89=CPC-A (all versions); CPC-AI1 and
CPC-B versions prior to 7.0
OOO-199=CPC-AI1 and CPC-B, Version 7.0 or higher
To clear SSD names . . .
I
I
FF6 2# (00-89 or 000-199)# CONF ON/OFF
f
SSD Number
Related Programming
Override Toll Restriction With SSD Numbers: FFl 2# l# 4# (SSD)#
SSD Display Restriction: FFl 2# l# 5# (0 or l)#
System Speed Dial Numbers: FFlO l# (SSD)# (PhoneNo.)##
Notes
Page 6-4
Using a DSS Console With AFI? If the Attendant Feature Package (AFP) is
used (available only with CPC-B Version 2.0 to 4.0), the DSS console must
be initially set as type “11” in the Terminal Type address (FF3 ExtPort# 2#),
to enable the keys to perform programming functions.
DBS Manual - Issued 8/l/95
Technical Manuals Online! - http://www.tech-man.com
DBS-70-400
Chapter 6. Name and Message Assignments (FF6)
Section 400-Programming
Personal Speed Dial Names
Software Version: All Versions
Address: FF6 3## (ExtPort)# (PSD)# CONF (Name)#
Description
Names of up to 16 characters can be assigned to Personal Speed Dial (PSD)
numbers. The names are displayed alphabetically on large-display telephones
to confirm the name of the person being called using a PSD code.
Display-phone users can also assign their own PSD names without entering
the programming mode (see Section 700-Feature Operation for instructions).
Programming
To assign PSD names . . .
FF6 3# (l-144)# (90-99 or 900-909)# CONF (NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN)#
f
I’.
Extension Port
t
Text Name
PSD Number:
90-99=CPC-A (all versions); CPC-AII and
(up to 16 characters)
CPC-B versions prior to 7.0
900-909=CPC-AII and CPC-B, Version 7.0 or higher
To clear PSD names . . .
FF6 3# (l-144)# (90-99 or 900-909)# CONF ON/OFF
t
Extension Port
t
PSD Number
Related Programming
Personal Speed Dial Numbers: FFlO 2# (ExtPort)# (PSD)# (PhoneNo.)#
Notes
DBS-70-400
Using a DSS Console With AFl? If the Attendant Feature Package (AFP) is
used (available only with CPC-B Version 2.0 to 4.0), the DSS console must
be initially set as type “11” in the Terminal Type address (FF3 ExtPort# 2#),.
to enable the keys to perform programming functions.
DBS Manual - Issued 8/t/95
Technical Manuals Online! - http://www.tech-man.com
Page 6-5
Chapter 6. Name and Message Assignments (FF6)
Section 400-Programming
Absence Messages
Software Version: All Versions
Address: FF6 4# (59)# CONF (Message)#
Description
Use this program to create up to 5 custom absence messages for DBS phone
users. Absence messages can only be assigned via FF6 programming.
DBS phone users can set their extensions to send a message to calling parties,
indicating they cannot answer the phone. The absence message is
automatically displayed on the calling extension’s LCD (if it has one).
When users set their phones to send absence messages, they can select which
message will be displayed on the calling extension’s phone. The DBS system
supports up to 10 different absence messages; 5 of these are preset (see Table
6-l below), and 5 can be created using this FF6 address on a DSS/BLF phone.
Table 6-l. Preset Absence Messages O-4
Absence
Message
No.
0
1
2.
3
4
Message Text
In Meeting
At Lunch
Out of Office
Vacation
Another Office
Programming
To create a cu$tom absence message . . .
FF6 4# (59)# CONF (NNNNNNNNNNNNNNN)#
f
Custom Absence Message
Number (5-9)
f
Custom Absence Message
Text (up to 15 characters)
To clear a custom absence message . . .
FF6 4# (59)# CONF ON/OFF
+
Custom Absence Message No.
Page 6-6
DBS Manual - Issued 8/l/95
Technical Manuals Online! - http://www.tech-man.com
DBS-70-400
Section 400-Programming
Notes
DBS-70-400
Chapter 6. Name and Message Assignments (FF6)
Using a DSS Console With AFf! If the Attendant Feature Package (AFP) is
used (available only with CPC-B Version 2.0 to 4.0), the DSS console must
be initially set as type “11” in the Terminal Type address (FF3 ExtPort# 2#),
to enable the keys to perform programming functions.
DBS Manual - Issued 8/l/95 .
Technical Manuals Online! - http://www.tech-man.com
Page 6-7
Chapter 6. Name and Message Assignments (FF6)
Section 400~Programming
Trunk Naine Assignment
Software Version: CPC-All (all versions); CPC-B Version 2.0 or higher
Address: FF6 5## (Trunk)# CONF (NNNNNN)#
Description
Trunks can be given names of up to 6 characters to help identify the source of
calls. When an inbound call rings at an extension, the trunk name appears on
the top line of the extension’s display.
Trunk names can only be assigned via FF6 programming.
Programming
To assign a trunk name . . .
FF6 5# (l-64)# CONF (NNNNNN)#
+
Trunk Number
f
Trunk Text
(up to 6 characters)
To clear a trunk name . . .
FF6 5# (1164)# CONF ON/OFF
A
TrunkI4umber
Notes
-.
Page 6-8
Using a DSS Console With AFl? If the Attendant Feature Package (AFP) is
used (available only with CPC-B Version 2.0 to 4.0), the DSS console must
be initially set as type “11” in the Terminal Type address (FF3 ExtPort# 2#),
to enable the keys to perform programming functions.
DBS Manual - Issued 8/l/95
“k
Technical Manuals Online! - http://www.tech-man.com
DBSr70-400
Section 400~Programming
Chapter 6. Name and Message Assignments (FF6)
Hunt Group Name Assignment
Software Version: CPC-All (all versions); CPC-B Version 2.0 or higher
Address: FF6 6# (HuntGrp)# CONF (NNNNNNNNNNN)#
Description
Hunt groups can be given names of up to 10 characters to help identify the
source of trunk calls transferred from the hunt group.
\
Hunt group names can only be assigned via FF6 programming.
Programming
To assign hunt group names . . .
FF6 6# (I-8)# CONF (NNNNNNNNNN)#
t
t
Hunt Group Number
Hunt Group Text
(up to 10 characters)
To clear’hunt group names . . .
FF6 6# (118)# CONF ON/OFF
t
Hunt Group Number
Notes
DBS-70-400
Using a ‘DSS Console With AFP If the Attendant Feature Package (AFP) is
used (available only with CPC-B Version 2.0 to 4.0), the DSS console must
be initially set as type “11” in the Terminal Type address (FF3 ExtPort# 2#),
to enable the keys to perform programming functions.
DBS Manual - Issued 8/l/95
Technical Manuals Online! - http://www.tech-man.com
Page 6-9
Section 400-Programming
Chapter 6. Name and Message Assicjnments (FFG)
Call Waiting/OHVA Text Reply
Software Version: CPC-All (all versions); CPC-6 Version 2.0 or higher
Address: FF6 7# (l-5)# CONF (NNNNNNNNNNNNNNN)#
Description
When a busy party receives an indication of an incoming intercom call, the
busy party can respond by sending a text message back to the caller.
The text message can be sent after a Call Waiting tone, an OfRook Voice
Announce, or a Call Waiting tone followed by Offhook Voice Announce.
This address allows you to change the default messages. The following table
shows the default messages:
Table 6-2. Default call waiiinglOHVA text reply messages
2
3
4
5
Please Hold
Will Call Back
Transfer
Unavailable
Call Waiting/OHVA text messages can also be assigned without entering the
programming mode, using the Attendant Feature option (see Section 700Feature Operation for [email protected]).
Programming
To assign call waiting/OHVA text reply messages . . .
FF6 7# ‘(l-5)# CONF (NNNNNNNNNNNNNNN)#
f
f
Message Number
Message Text
(up to 15 characters)
To clear call waiting/OHVA text reply messages . . .
FF6 7# (l-5)# CONF ON/OFF
+
Message Number
Page 6-10
DBS Manual - Issued 8/l/95
Technical Manuals Online! - http://www.tech-man.com
DBS-70-400
Section 400-Programming
Chapter 6. Name and Message Assignments (FF6)
DlDlDNlS Text Name Assignment
Software Version: CPC-B Version 5.0 or higher
Address: DID: FF6 8# (l-200)# (1 or 2)# (0000-9999)# (NNNNNN)#
DNIS: FF6 9# (l-200)# (1 or 2)# (000019999)# (NNNNNN)#
Description
Assign DID/DNIS names of up to 6 characters long for specific DID/DNTS
numbers.
DID/DNIS text names can only be assigned via FF6 programming. The DID/
DNIS number must already be assigned to an extension, before you can
assign a name to the number. (see FFl 8# 3# for DID numbers: FFl 8# 4# 7#
for DNIS numbers)
Programming
To assign a DID/DNIS text name . . .
FF6 (8 or 9)# (11200)# (1 or 2)# (OOOO-9999)# (NNNNNN)#
t
DID/DNIS Text
l=Assign a number DID/DNIS
8=DID
9=DNIS Assignment Table
to a name
Number
(only if “1”
2=Change a name
is selected)
t
Name Text
(up to 6 char.)
To clear a DlD/DNIS text name . . .
FF6 (8 or 9)# (l-200)# (1 or 2)# CONF ON/OFF
+
f
\
8=DID
l=Number and name
DID/DNIS Text
2=Name only
9=DNIS Assignment Table
Related Programming
Inbound DID Numbers: FFl 8# 3# (DIDNo.)# (ExtNo.)#
DAIS Number Setting: FFl 8# 4# 7# (DNISNo.)# (ExtNo.)#
Notes
DBS-70-400
Maximums. Up to 200 DID text names and 200 DlVIS text names can be
assigned.
DBS Manual - Issued 8/l/95
Technical Manuals Online! - http://www.tech-man.com
Page 6-11
7. Toll Restrictions (FF7)
Use the FF7 program addresses in this chapter to perform Toll Restriction
Service (TRS) programming.
This chapter covers the following addresses:
FF7 Address
aliFF7addresses
FF7 I# l# (0 or l)#
FF7 1#2#(0 or l)#
FF7 1#3#(1-15)#
FF7 1# 4# thru lOl# (0 or l>#
FF7 l# 12# th 16# (0 or l)#
FF7 l# 17# (0 or l)#
Topic
Page
7-2
t An Overview of Toll Restrictions
1 International Calling For TRS TvDes 3-6
DTMF Signaling During Incoming Calls For TRS 7-6
Types O-6
1 Maximum Dialed Digits For TRS Types 3-6
1 7-7
3-Digit Toll Restriction For TRS Types 2-6
7-8
7-Ditit Toll Restriction For TRS Twes 2-6
7-9
Dialing Plan Switch
7-10
7-5
(CPC-A 4.0 or higher. CPC-AID 6.0 or higher)
FF7 l# 18# (ExtPort)# (0 or l)#
Operator Access
7-11
(CPC-A 4.0 or higher. CPC-AU/B 6.0 or higher)
FF7 l# 19# (ExtPort)# (0 or l)#
Interhational Calling on Extensions
7-12
(CPC-A 4.0 or higher. CPC-AIUB 6.0 or higher)
FF7 l# 20# (l-lO)# (O-999)#
Country Code Table
7-13
(CPC-A 4.0 or higher; CPC-AH/B 6.0 or higher)
FF7 l# 21# (0 or l)#
Equal Access Code Format
(CPC-A 4.0 or higher; CPC-AIUB 6.0 or higher)
FF7 l# 22# (l-1O)t: (OOO-999)#
Office Code Restriction Table For TRS Types 2-6
(CPC-A 4.0 or higher. CPC-AWE 6.0 or hinherj
F'F7 2#(3-6)#(000-999)#(0 orI>#
FF7 3#(3-6)#(000-999)#(0 or l)#
FF7 4# (l+Y (000-999)#
FF7 5# (14)# (000-999)# (0 or l)#
FF7
6# (l-50)# @OOOO00-9999999)#
FF7 7#(ExtPon)#(Trunk)#(O-7)#
FF7 8# (ExtPort)# (Trunk)# (O-7)#
FF7 9# (1-4)# (0 or l)#
Area Code Table For TRS Trpes 3-6
Office Code Table For TRS Types 3-6
Special Area Code Table For TRS Types 3-6
Special Office Code Table For TRS Types 3-6
Special 7-Digit Table For TRS Types 2-6
Day TRS Types O-7 for Trunks
Night TRS Types O-7 for Trunks
Area Code Table For TRS Types 3-6 (Global
-I
7-14
7-15
i-16 1
1 7-17
7-18
7-19
--i
1 7-20
7-21
7-22
7-23
CODV)
FF7 9#(5-8)#(0 or l)#
FF7 9# (9-12)# (0 or l>#
FF7 9#(13-16)#(0 or l)#
DBS-70-400
Office Code Table For TRS Types 3-6 (Global
COPY)
Area & Office Code Table for TRS Types 3-6
(Global Copy)
Special Office Code Table For TRS Types 3-6
(Global CODV)
DBS Manual - Issued 8/l/95
Technical Manuals Online! - http://www.tech-man.com
I
7-24
7-25
7-26
Page 7-1
An Overview of Toll Restrictions
The DBS Toll Restriction Service (TRS) allows you to set restrictions on outgoing calls.
For example, TRS can prohibit long-distance calls and prevent after-hours calls. TRS
can also minimize non-business calls and reduce phone bills by permitting only longdistance calls over designated trunks.
The DBS system supports up to eight different TRS types (see table below). A TRS
type can be assigned to each trunk to activate toll restriction.
Table 7-L. ,Toll restriction types
TRS Type Characteristics
Full restriction of outbound dialing.
0
Inbound calls can be answered if trunk is assigned to ring an extension.
Intercom calls are allowed.
Group Call Pickup (intercom calls only).
9+911 calls are always restricted (except in WC-AD/B Version 6.00 only).
Full restriction of outbound dialing.
1
Inbound trunk calls to all phones can be answered and/or transferred.
Intercom calls are allowed.
Group Call Pickup (intercom calls only).
9+9 11 calls are always restricted (except in CPC-AIVB Version 6.00 only).
Local calls (office code dialing) are allowed.
2
l-800 calls are allowed.
911 calls are always allowed (Version 6.0 or higher).
Inbound trunk calls to all phones can be answered and/or transferred.
Full restriction of international calls.
Full restriction of operator calls (old dialing plan).
Selectable restriction of operator calls (new NANP dialing plan).
Selectable restriction of speed dial numbers.
Selectable restriction of Nil codes (211-811).
Restriction of up to 10 three-digit office codes (new NANP dialing plan).
Restriction of up to 50 seven-digit numbers.
Inter-digit timing is set to 6 seconds.
9 11 calls are always allowed (Version 6.0 or higher).
3
Full restriction of operator calls (old dialing plan).
Selectable restriction of operator calls (new NANP dialing plan).
Selectable restriction of international calls (defaulted to full restriction).
Selectable restriction of Nil codes (211-811).
Selectable restriction of speed dial numbers.
Restriction of up to 50 seven-digit numbers.
Trunk calls can be answered and transferred.
Defaulted to full restriction of area-code dialing.
Defaulted to full restriction of office-code dialing..
Inter-digit timing is set to 6 seconds.
Identical to TRS type 3, except all office codes are allowed by default.
4
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
Page 7-2
DBS
Manual - issued 8/l/95
Technical Manuals Online! - http://www.tech-man.com
DBS-70-400
Sectton 400~Programming
Utapter 7. Toll Restriction (FF7)
TRS Type Characteristics
Programmable TRS type; all area codes and office codes are allowed by
5
default.
Identical to TRS type 5.
6
l
l
7
Notes
l
Cannot restrict any dialing.
New NANP Vialing Plan. Beginning with CPC-AlID3 Version 6.0, changes
to the North American Numbering Plan (NANP) are supported. These
changes affect TRS parameters, which is explained in the affected program
addresses in this chapter.
Table 7-2. NANP changes
(Change
Old Numbering Plan
New NANP Plan
(Versions prior to 6.0)
(Version 6.0 or higher)
1Cey :
N = digits 2-9
P = digits O-l
X = digits O-9’
CC = Country Code digits 1 - 199
1Irea Code/Exchange Format NPX-NNX-XXXX
1YOU Calls w/in Same Area I-NNX-XXXX
CMe
Interexchange Carrier (IXC) lOXXX0
Iielection
Oll+CC+upto9digits
Intemational Calls
9‘11 Emergency Calls
CIperator Calls
L.ocal Calls
DBS-70-400
NXX-NXX-XXXX
I-NXX-NXX-XXXX
101xxxx0
011 +CC+upto 12digits
Always restricted (except in Version
Can be restricted
6.00 only) for TRS types 0 and 1.
Always allowed for TRS types 2-6.
Selectable restriction for TRS types Selectable restriction on individual
3-6; allowed by default if intemat’l extensions, as long as the extension
uses trunks with TRS types 2-6.
calls are allowed system-wide.
Always restricted for TRS types O-2. Always restricted for TRS types 0
and 1.
Always allowed for TRS type 7.
Always allowed for TRS type 7.
1) Check Office Code Table.
1) Check Office Code Table.
2)
Check new Offtce Code Restric2) Check 7-Digit Toll Restriction.
tion
Table
(up to 10 entries).
3) Check Add/Delete Digits.
3) Check 7-Digit Toll Restriction.’
4) Check Add/Delete Digits.
DBS Manual - issued 8/l/95
Technical Manuals Online! - http://www.tech-man.com
Page 7-3
Old Numbering Plan
New NANP Plan
Change
(Versions prior to 6.0)
(Version 6.0 or higher)
Long-Distance Calls
1) Check Special Area/Office Codes. 1) Check Special Area/Office Codes.
2) Check Area Code Table.
2) Check Area Code Table.
3) Check Add/Delete Digits.
3) Check new Off’ce Code Restriction Table (up to 10 entries).
4) Check Add/Delete Digits.
Allowed or restricted system-wide Selectable restriction on extensions
by TRS type assigned to trunk.
if using trunks with TRS types 3-6.
Selectable restriction on dialed numbers based on Country Code.
International Calls
Page 7-4
DBS Manual - Issued 8/l/95
Technical Manuals Online! - http://www.tech-man.com
DBS-70-400
Section 400-Programming
Chapter 7. Toll Restriction (FF7)
International Calling For TRS Types 3-6
Software Version: All Versions
Address: FR I# 1# (0 or l)#
Description
Use this address to allow or deny international calls on trunks that are
assigned TRS types 3-6.
If the DBS is set to use the new NANP dialing plan (available with CPC-A
Version 4.0 or higher, and CPC-AII/B Version 6.0 or higher), this address
determines whether the DBS will check the Country Code Table for any
restrictions on the dialed number.
Lf the DBS uses the old dialing plan, this address determines whether
international calling is allowed or denied, regardless of the country code.
In both cases, this address applies only to those trunks that are assigned TRS
types 3-6. (International calls are always restricted for TRS types 1 and 2 -and always allowed for TRS type 7.)
Programming
I
FF7 I# I# (0 or l)#
f
Old Dialing Plan:
(dl versions)
New NANP Dialing Plan:
(CPC-A 4.0 or higher:
CPC-AH/B 6.0 or higher)
O=Deny international calls.
l=Allow international calls.
O=Check Country Code Table
for restrictions.
l=Allow international calls.
Related Programming
Dialing Plan Switch: FF7 l# 17# (0 or l)#
Country Code Table: F’F7 l# 20# (Table)# (Code)#
Override Toll Restriction with SSD Numbers: FFl 2# l# 4# (SSD)#
System Installation Area Code: FFl 2# l# 18# (0 or l)#
Notes
Restkting International Calls On Individual Extensions. E the new
NANP dialing plan is used, individual extensions can be set to allow/restrict
international calls based on the Country Code Table (see FM l# 20#).
Including “011” in Office Code Tables for International Calling. Lf
international calls are permitted, “011” should be permitted in Office Code
Tables for TRS Types 3-6 (see FF7 3#).
DBS-70-400
DBS Manual - Issued 8/l/95
Technical Manuals Online! - http://www.tech-man.com
Page 7-5
Chapter 7. Toll Restriction (FF7)
Section 400~Programming
DTMF Signaling During Incoming Calls For TRS
Types O-6
Software Version: All Versions
Address: FFi’ l# 2# (0 or l)#
Description
This address determines if DTMF signaling can be sent to the CO after an
extension picks up an incoming trunk call.
If an extension receives a call on a trunk assigned to TRS type O-6, the
extension user may try to bypass ‘lRS restrictions by dialing an outgoing call
while still off-hook. (After the outside caller hangs up, sometimes the CO
sends dial tone to the called party if they remain off-hook.)
The DBS can block these bypasses by disabling DTMF signaling during
incoming calls. If this address is set to “0” (disable DTMF signaling), the
user will not be able to dial out while still off-hook from an incoming call -even if they transfer the call to another extension with no TRS restrictions.
This address also affects indirect pickup of trunk calls (press a DSS/BLF key
to pick up a call ringing on another extension). If this address is set to “O”,
the DSS/BLF phone user will also not be able to dial out.
Programming
FF7 l# 2# (0 or l)#
O=Disable DTMF signaling on extensions
during incoming calls.
kEnable DTMF signaling on extensions
during incoming calls.
Notes
No Interaction With TRS Type 7. This address does not affect trunks
assigned to TRS type 7, which allows all outbound dialing.
No DSSIBLF Interaction With TRS Type 0. DSS/BLF keys cannot be used
to pick up calls on trunks assigned TRS type 0. Because of this built-in
restriction, the DTMF Signaling setting does not apply.
No Interaction With FLASH Key. If an extension user attempts to dial out
by pressing the FLASH key during an incoming trunk call, the DBS will
check for TRS restrictions, regardless of the DTMF Signaling setting.
Page 7-6
DBS Manual - Issued 8/l/95
Technical Manuals Online! - http://www.tech-man.com
.
DBS-?O-400
Section 400-Programming
Chapter 7. Toll Restriction (FF7)
Maximum Dialed Digits For TRS Types 3-6
Software Version: Ail Versions
Address: FF7 I# 3# (l-15)#
Description
The maximum number of dialed digits on trunks assigned TRS types 3-6 can
be set from 15 to 29. By default, the maximum number is unlimited.
Programming
FF7 l# 3# (l-15)#
f
Maximum Number of Dialed Digits Allowed
Note: The default setting is ** (unlimited). To change
the setting to a limited number of digits, enter l- 15
(see table below for values). To revert tothe **
default, press FF7 l# 3# CONF.
Table 7-3. Maximum number of dialed digits for TRS types 3-6
DBS-70-400
DBS Manual - Issued 8/l/95
Technical Manuals Online! - http://www.tech-man.com
Page 7-7
Section 400-Programming
Chapter 7. Toll Restriction (FF7)
3-Digit Toll Restriction For TRS Types 2-6
Software Version: All Versions
Address: FR 1# (4-11)# (0 or l)#
Description
Use this address to to allow or deny the dialing of 211-911 numbers on trunks
that are assigned TRS types 2-6. By default, all of these numbers are allowed.
If the DBS is set to use the nm NANP dialing plan (available only with CPCAll/B Version 6.0 or higher), “911” is always allowed for T.RS types 2-6,
regardless of the setting here.
Programming
FF7 yll)” (0 7 I)#
. Special Numbers:
O=A.lhv dialing.
4=211
l=Deny dialing.
5=311
6=411
7=511
8=611
9=711
.lO=8 l’l
11=911
NOTE: Beginning with CPC-AIL/B
Version 6.03, 1 l# (“911”) is disabled if
the new NANP dialing plan is used, so
that 911 calls cannot be restricted.
Related Programming
Dialing Plan Switch: FF7 l# 17# (0 or l)#
Page 7-8
DBS Manual - Issued 8/l/95
\
Technical
Manuals Online! - http://www.tech-man.com
DES-70-400
secuon 4uu-rruyrarnrrw~y
7-Digit Toll Restriction For TRS Types 2-6
Software Version: All Versions
Address: FR It (12-l 6)# (0 or l)#
Description
Use this address to determine whether the DBS will check dialed 7-digit
numbers against the “Special ‘I-Digit Table” (see FF7 6#). By default, the
DBS will check the dialed number against the table; if it finds a match, the
call will be denied, regardless of the area code.
Programming
I
FF7 1# (12916)# (0 or l)#
‘IRS Types:
12=TRS type 2
13=TRS type 3
1GTRS type 4
15=TRS type 5
16=TRS tvDe 6
O=Does nbt check the 7-digit table.
l=Checks the 7-digit table.
Related Programming
Special 7-Digit Table For TRS Types 2-6: FF7 6# (l-50)# (7-digitNo.)#
Notes
An#ysis of Final Digits. 7-digit toll restriction considers the last 7 digits
dialed. This is so that area codes that are normally permitted, can be denied
when dialed with certain telephone numbers (such as 800-976-xXxX
numbers).
DES-70-400
DBS Manual - Issued 8/l/95
Technical Manuals Online! - http://www.tech-man.com
Page 7-9
Dialing Plan Switch
Sofhnrare Version: CPC-A Version 4.0 or higher; CPC-All/B Version 6.0 or higher
Address: FF7 l# 17# (0 or l)#
Description
This address allows you to choose between the new North American
Numbering Plan (NANP) and the old dialing plan. By default, the old dialing
plan is used.
Selecting the new NANP dialing plan, in addition to supporting public
network changes in dialing formats, also provides greater flexibility for
“exceptions to the rule” -- such as applying TRS restrictions to individual
extensions, area codes, office codes, and counay codes.
Specific differences between the old and new dialing plans are listed in the
table below. Some of the FF7 addresses in this chapter apply only to the new
NANP dialing plan; other FF7 addresses apply to both dialing plans, but the
value of their settings differs depending on the dialing plan selected. These
differences are noted in the explanation for each affected address.
Programming
FF7 1# 17# (0 or l)#
f
O=Old dialing plan
i=New NANP dialing plan
Table 7-4. Differences between old and new dialing plans
Subject
Office Codes (Exchanges)
Long-Distance Calls
Equal Access Code Format
International Numbers
Old Plan
NNX-XXXX
NO/lx-NNX-XXXX
10xXx
9 digits in length
(N=digits 2 thru 9
I
New (NANP) Plan
Nxx-XxXx
Nxx-Nxx-XxXx
1OlXXXX
12 digits in length
X=digits 0 thru 9)
Related Programming
All Toll Restriction Addresses (FF7)
Page 7-l 0
DBS Manual - Issued 8/l/95
Technical Manuals Online! - http://www.tech-man.com
DBS-70-400
Section 400-Programming
Chapter 7. Toll Restriction (FF7)
Operator Access
Software Version: CPC-A Version 4.0 or higher; CPC-All/B Version 6.0 or higher
Address: FR 1# 18# (ExtPort)# (0 or l)#
Description
This Operator Access switch works only if the DBS system is set to use the
new NAM dialing plan (FF7 l# 17# l#). Also, this switch applies only to
TRS types 2-6 (TRS types 0 and 1 do not allow outbound dialing; TRS type 7
allows all dialing).
Use this address to block extension(s) from being able to access a trunk and
dialing “O”, “OO”, “lOXXXO”, or “1OlXXXXO” to reach an operator. This
prevents a user from being able to make a restricted phone call by asking the
operator to place the call for him.
Programming
I
FF7 I# 18# (l-144)# (0 or l)#
Extension Port
O=Deny operator calls.
l=Allow operator calls.
Related Programming
Dialing Plan Switch: FF7 l# 17# (0 or l)#
Notes
Timeout for Operator Calls. If this switch is set to “Deny” (default) and an
extension user accesses a trunk and dials the operator, the system will wait 6
seconds before automatically disconnecting the call. However, if the user
dials additional digits within the 6 seconds, the DBS will check other
switches such as %ternational Calling On Extensions”, “7-Digit Toll
Restriction”, etc., to allow or deny the call.
DBS-70-400
DBS Manual - Issued 8/l/95
Technical Manuals Online! - http://www.tech-man.com
Page 7-l 1
Section 400-Programming
Chapter 7. Toll Restriction (FF7)
International Calling on Extensions
Software Version: CPC-A Version 4.0 or higher; CPC-All/B Version 6.0 or higher
Address: FF7 1# 19# (ExtPort)# (0 or l)#
Description
This address applies only to systems programmed to use the new NANP
dialing plan (FF7 l# 17# l#). Also, this switch applies only to TRS types 3-6
(TRS types O-2 do not allow international dialing; TRS type 7 allows all
dialing).
Use this address to allow or deny international calling on individual
extension(s) that are “exceptions to the rule”.
l
l
When an extension attempts an overseas call (trunk access + 01 or 011) on
a trunk assigned TRS type 3-6, the system checks the setting in this address
(default=deny call).
However, if this address is set to “l”, the system checks the “International
Calling For TRS Types 3-6” (FF7 l# l#) to see if the dialed country code
should be checked against the Country Code Table (FF7 l# 20#) before
allowing the call. If so, and if the dialed country code is included in the
table, the call is allowed.
Programming
I
FF7 1# 19# (1;;44)# (0 “i 1)s
Extension Port
I
O=Deny call.
l=Check the International
Calls Switch (FF7 l# l#)
Related Programming
International C&rig For TRS Types 3-6: FF7 l# l# (0 or l)#
Dialing Plan Switch: FF7 l# 17# (0 or l)#
Country Code Table: FF7 l# 20# (Table)# (Code)#
Page 7-12
DBS Manual - Issued 8/l/95
Technical Manuals Online! - http://www.tech-man.com
DBS-70-400
Chapter 7. Toll Restriction (FF7)
Section 400-Programming
Country Code Table
Software Version: CPC-A Version 4.0 or higher; CPC-All/B Version 6.0 or higher
Address: FF7 1# 20# (Table)# (Code)#
Description
This address applies only to systems programmed to use the new NANP
dialing plan (FF7 l# 17# l#). Also, this switch applies only to TRS types 3-6
(TRS types O-2 do not allow international dialing: TRS type 7 allows all
dialing).
In this address, the DBS provides a Country Code Table of up to 10 allowable
country code entries for placing international calls. Each entry can be 1 to 3
digits long.
Programming
FF7 l# 20# (l{O)# (0-y
Table Entry
Country Code Entry
Related Programming
International Calling For TRS Types 3-6: FF7 l# l# (0 or l)#
Dialing Plan Switch: FF7 l# 17# (0 or l)#
International Calling on Extensions: FF7 l# 19# (ExtPort)# (0 or l)#
Notes
Country Code Usage. Country codes are used as follows:
l
l
l
When a phone user accesses a trunk assigned TRS type 3-6 and then dials
01 or 0 11, the system first checks the international calling restriction set for
the extension (in FF7 l# 19#).
If the switch is enabled, the DBS then checks the international calling
restriction set for the system (in FF7 l# l#), which determines if the
Country Code Table is checked before an international call is processed.
If it is checked, the call will be allowed only if the dialed country code
appears in the Table.
Short Country Codes. When country codes of less than 3 digits are entered,
the system will allow any country code that begins with that number or
numbers. For example, an entry of “9” allows all two- and three-digit country
codes beginning with “9.” Likewise, an entry of “26” allows all three-digit
country codes beginning with “26.”
Digit Restriction. The system will not accept country codes that begin with
“1” (this is reserved for U.S. calls).
DBS-70-400
DBS Manual - Issued 8/l/95
Technical Manuals Online! - http://www.tech-man.com
Page 7-13
Lnaprer 1. I 011 nesrrlcnon (i-i- /I
becnon 4oo-rrogramming
Equal Access Code Format
Software Version: CPC-A Version 4.0 or higher; CPC-All/B Version 6.0 or higher
Address: FF7 1# 21# (0 or l)#
Description
This address determines whether the old CIC (Carrier Identification Code)
format can still be dialed to reach a preferred lXC (interexchange carrier).
l
l
Old dialing plan format is 10 XXX (where “XXX” is a 3-digit CIC).
New NANP (North American Numbering Plan) format is 101 XXXX
(where “XXXX” is a 4-digit UC).
In some areas, the public network is providing a transitional period during
which both formats are recognized, until the new NANP dialing plan takes
effect. This address accommodates the transitional period.
NOTE: This address is effective only if the new NANP Dialing Plan is
selected in FF7 l# 17#. lf the old dialing plan is selected, the new CIC format
(101 XXXX) will not be recognized by the DBS.
Programming
FF7 1# 21# (0 or l)#
$
O=Old format (10 XXX) can still be used.
l=New format only (101 XXXX).
.
Related Programming
Dialing Plan Switch: IT7 l# 17# (0 or l)#
Page 7-l 4
DBS Manual - Issued 8/l/95
Technical Manuals Online! - http://www.tech-man.com
DBS-70-400
Chapter 7. Toll Restriction (FF7)
Section 400-Programming
Office Code Restriction Table For TRS Types 2-6
Software Version: CPC-A Version 4.0 or higher; CPC-All/B Version 6.0 or higher
Address: FF7 l# 22# (l-lO)# (OOO-999)#
Description
This address applies only to DBS systems set for the new NANP dialing plan
(FF7 l# 17# l#).
The Office Code Restriction Table allows up to 10 office codes (“exchanges”)
to be restricted system-wide for all trunks assigned TRS types 2-6. The DBS
will check this table before checking the individual office codes assigned to
each TRS type in FF7 3#.
NOTE: These office codes are not tied to any area codes. Therefore,
whenever one of these office codes is dialed, it is restricted regardless of the
area code.
Applications for this feature include 555 and 976 calls.
Programming
1
I
FF7 l# 22# (1-l 0)# (OOO-999)#
t
Office Code Entry No.
f
Office Code To Be Restricted
Related Programming
Dialing Plan Switch: FF7 l# 17# (0 or l)#
DBS-70-400
DBS Manual - Issued 8/l/95 ,
Technical Manuals Online! - http://www.tech-man.com
Page 7-l 5
’
Section 400-Programming
Chapter 7. Toll Restriction (FF7)
Area Code Table For TRS Types 3-6
Software Version: All Versions
Address: FF7 2# (316)# (OOO-999)# (0 or I)#
Description
Use this address to set area code dialing restrictions based on the TRS type
assigned to a trunk. Callers accessing a trunk assigned to TRS types 3-6 are
allowed or denied access to specific area codes according to the settings in
this address.
Programming
F F 7 2# (316)# (OOO-999)# ( 0 o r l)#
TRS Type (3-6)
t
Area Code
f
O=Allowdialing.
l=Deny dialing.
Defaults -TRS Types 3 and 4: 1 (Deny)
TRS Types 5 and 6: 0 (Allow)
Related Programming
System Installation Area Code: FFl 2# l# 18# (0 or l)#
Day TRS Types O-7 for Trunks: FF7 7# (ExtPort)# (Trunk)# (0-7)#
Night TRS Types O-7 for Trunks: FM 8# (ExtPort)# (Trunk)# (0-7)#
Page 7-16
DBS Manual - Issued 8/l/95
Technical Manuals Online! - http://www.tech-man.com
DBS-70-400
Chapter 7. Toll Restriction (FF7)
Section 400-Programming
Office Code Table For TRS Types 3-6
Software Version: All Versions
Address: FF7 3## (3-6)# (OOO-999)# (0 or l)#
Description
Use this address to allow or deny individual office code(s) for local calls
based on the TRS type assigned to the trunk.
Programming
FF7 3# (316)# (0001999)# (0 or l)#
/(
TRS Type (3-6)
f
Office Code
t
O=Allow dialing.
1 =Deny dialing.
Defaults -TRS Type 3: 1 (Deny)
TRS Types 4,5 and 6: 0 (Allow)
Related Programming
System Installation Area Code: FFl 2# l# 18# (0 or l)#
Notes
Office Code Tables. While this address is used for local calls, the Office
Code Restriction Table address (FF7 l# 21#) is used for local and longdistance calls.
DBS-70-400
DBS Manual - issued 8/l/95
Technical Manuals Online! - http://www.tech-man.com
Page 7-17
Section 400-Programming
Chapter 7. Toll Restriction (FF7)
Special Area Code Table For TRS Types 3-6
Software Version: All Versions
Address: FF7 4# (l-4)# (OOO-999)#
Description
Use this address to enter up to four area codes that will be tied to ranges of
office codes in the next address (FF7 5#). This allows you to set up special
area/office code combinations that are “exceptions to the rule” -- for example,
restricting calls to (800)976-xxxx numbers, while allowing (800) 977-xXxX
numbers.
These special area/office code combinations will apply to TRS types 3-6.
Programming
To enter a special area code . . .
FF7 4## y-4), (OOOf399)#
Special Area Code Entry No.
Special Area Code
To clear a special area code . . .
FF7 4## (114)# (0001999)# CONF ON/OFF
I
f.
Special Area Code
Number (l-4)
f
Special Area Code
Related Programming
Special Office Code Table for TRS Types 3-6: F’F7 5# (l-4)# (000-999)#
(0 or l)#
Page 7-l 8
DBS Manual - Issued 8/l/95
Technical Manuals Online! - http://www.tech-man.com
DBS-70-400
Section 400-Programming
Chapter 7. Toll Restriction (FF7)
Special Office Code Table For TRS Types
3-6
- -
Sdftware Version: All Versions
Address: FF7 5## (l-4)# (000-999)# (0 or l)#
Description
Each of the four special area codes entered in the previous address (FF7 4##)
can be tied with one or more special offke codes using this address. Each
special area code can be matched to office codes (000-999). And. each office
code can be individually allowed or denied. Typically. “976”, “555” or other
office codes representing pay-for-call services are entered as special office
codes.
These special area/office code combinations will apply to TRS types 3-6.
NOTE: If at a later date you wish to reset all the special office codes
assigned to a special area code, use the Global Copy address (FF7 9# 13- 16#)
to do it all at once, instead of resetting each individual office code here.
Programming
I
FF7 5# (l-4)# (000-999)# (0 or l)#
A
f
t
I
Special Area Code
Entry No. (see
FF7 4## address)
Special Office Code
(an unlimited number
of office codes can be
,assigned to each
Special Area Code)
O=Allow dialing.
l=Deny dialing.
Defaults -Special Area Codes 1 and 2: 1 (Deny)
Special Area Codes 3 and 4: 0 (Allow)
Related Programming
Special Area Code Table for TRS Types 3-6: FF7 4# (1-4)# (000-999%
Special Office Code Table for TRS Types 3-6 (Global Copy): FF7 9#
(13-16)# (0 or l>#
DBS-70-400
DBS Manual - Issued 8/l/95
Technical Manuals Online! - http://www.tech-man.com
Page 7-19
Section 400-Programming
Chapter 7. Toll Restriction (FF7)
Special ‘T-Digit Table For TRS Types 2-6
Software Version: All Versions
Address: FF7 6# (l-50)# (0000000-9999999)#
Description
Use this program to set up a table of up to 50 restricted 7-digit numbers for
trunks assigned TRS types 2-6. These 7-digit numbers are restricted for all
area codes.
The “l-Digit Toll Restriction For TRS Types 2-6” address (FF7 l# 12-16#)
determines whether this table is checked or not.
Programming
To assign a special 7-digit number . . .
F F 7 6# (I-50)# (0000000-9999999)#
4
I
t
Entry No. of Special
7-Digit Number
7-D& Number
To clear a special 7-digit number . . .
F F 7 6# (MO)# ,CONF O N / O F F
f
Entry l\io. of Special 7-Digit Number
Related Programming
7-Digit Toll Restriction For TRS Types 2-6: FF7 l# (12-16)# (0 or l)#
Page 7-20
DBS Manual - Issued 8/l/95
Technical Manuals Online! - http://www.tech-man.com
DBS-70-400
Chapter 7. toll Restriction (FF7)
Section 400-Programming
Day TRS Types O-7 for Trunks
Software Version: All Versions
Address: FF7 7# (ExtPort)# (Trunk)# (017)#
Description
Use this program to assign TRS types to the trunks on an individual
extension. The assigned TRS type will apply to the trunk during “Day”
mode.
For a review of TRS types, see “An Overview of Toll Restrictions” on page
7-2.
Programming
I
FF7 7# (11144)# (l-33 or l-65)# (017)#
f
Extension Port
f
Trunk
t
TRS Type O-7
Default: 7 (all calls
allowed)
Note: Enter “65” (for CPC-AIL/B) or “33” (for CPC-A) to apply
all trunks to the TRS type.
Related Programming
Toll Restriction: all FF7 addresses
DBS-70-400
DBS Manual - Issued 8/l/95
Technical Manuals Online! - http://www.tech-man.com
Page 7-21
Night TRS Types O-7 for Trunks
So-are Version: All Versions
Address: FF7 8# (ExtPort)# (Trunk)# (O-7)#
Description
Use this program to assign TRS types to the trunks on an individual
extension. These TRS types will apply when the system is in “Night” and
“Night 2” mode.
For a review of TRS types, see “An Overview of Toll Restrictions” on page
7-2.
Programming
FF7 8# (I-144)# (l-33 or l-65)# (017)#
f
Extension Tort
f
Trunk
t
TRS Type O-7
Default: 7 (all calls
allowed)
Note: Enter “65” (for CPC-AII/B) or “33” (for CPC-A) to apply
all trunks to the TRS type.
Related Programming
Automatic Night Mode Start Time: FFl 3# l# HHMM#
Automatic Night 2 Mode Start Time: FFl 3# 30# HHMM#
Toll Restriction: all F’F7 addresses
Page 7-22
DBS Manual - issued 8/l/95
Technical Manuals Online! - http://www.tech-man.com
DBS-70-400
Section 400-Programming
Chapter 7. Toll Restriction (FF7)
Area Code Table For TRS Types 3-6 (Global Copy)
Software Version: All Versions
A d d r e s s : FR 9# (l-4)# ( 0 o r l)#
Description
Use this address to allow or deny all area codes for TRS types 3-h.
Programming
FF7 9# (l-4)# (0 or I)#
TRS Types:
l=Type 3
2=Type 4
3=Type 5
4=Type 6
I
4
O=Allow dialins.
1 =Deny dialing.
Defaults -TRS Types 3 and 4: 1 (Deny)
TRS Types 5 and 6: 0 (Allow)
Related Programming
Area Code Table for TRS Types 3-h: FF7 2# (3-6)# KKKJ-939)# (0 or li#
DBS-70-400
DBS Manuai - issued 8/l/95
Technical Manuals Online! - http://www.tech-man.com
Page 7-23
Section 400-Programming
Chapter 7. Toll Restriction (FF7)
Office Code Table For TRS Types 3-6 (Global Copy)
Software Version: All Versions
Address: FF7 9# (58)# (0 or l)#
Description
Programming
Use this address to allow or deny all office codes for TRS types 3-6.
1
1
FF7 9# (58)# (0 or l)#
f
TRS Types:
5=Type 3
6=Type 4
7=Type 5
8=Type 6
O=Aliow dialing.
l=Deny dialing.
Defaults -TRS Type 3: 1 (Deny)
TRS Types 4,5 and 6: 0 (Allow)
Related Programming
Office Code Table for TRS Types 3-6: FF7 3# (3-6)# (000-999)# (0 or l)#
Page 7-24
DBS Manual - Issued 8/l/95
Technical Manuals Online! - http://www.tech-man.com
DBS-70-400
Chapter 7. Toll Restriction (FF7)
Section 400-Programming
Area & Office Code Table for TRS Types 3-6 (Global
COPY)
Software Version: All Versions
Address: FR 9# (9~12)# (0 or l)##
Description
Use this address to allow or deny all area codes Ir[Ltd office codes for TRS
types 3-6.
Programming
FF7 9# (9~12)# (0 or I)#
TRS Types:
9=Type 3
lO=Type 4
ll=Type 5
12=Type 6
O=Allow dialing.
l=Deny dialing.
Defaults -TRS Type 3: 1 (Deny)
TRS Type 4: 1 (Deny) for A/C*
and 0 (Allow) for O/Cs
TRS Types 5 and 6: 0 (Allqw)
1
Related Programming
Area Code Table For TRS Types 3-6: FF7 2# (3-6)# (000-999)# (0 or l)#
Office Code Table For TRS Types 3-6: FF7 3# (3-6)# (000-999)# (0 or l)#
DBS-70-400
DBS Manual - Issued 8/l/95
Technical Manuals Online! - http://www.tech-man.com
Page 7-25
Section 400-Programming
Chapter 7. Toll Restriction (FF7)
Special Office Code Table For TRS Types 3-6 (Global
COPY)
Software Version: -AlI Versions
Address: FF7 9# (13016)# (0 or l)#
Description
Use this address to allow or deny the Special Area/Office Code combinations
set in FF7 4# and 5#.
Special Office Code Table (Global Copy) resets all office codes assigned to a
Special Area Code at the same time (instead of resetting the office codes
individually in FF7 5#).
Special area/office code combinations apply to TRS types 3-6.
Programming
FF7 9# (13.16)# (0 or l)#
Special Area Code Entry Nos:
13=Special Area Code 1
14=Special Area Code 2
15=Special Area Code 3
’ 16=Special Area Code 4
O=Allow
l=Deny
Defaults:
Special A/Cs 1 and 2: 1 (Deny)
Special A/Cs 3 and 4: 0 (Allow)
Related Programming
Special Area Code Table For TRS Types 3-6: FF7 4# (l-4)# (000-999)#
Special Office Code Table For TRS Types 3-6: FF7 5# (l-4)# (000-999)#
(0 or l)#
Page 7-26
DBS Manual - issued 8/i/95
Technical Manuals Online! - http://www.tech-man.com
DBS-70-400
8. Least Cost Routing (FF8)
Use the FF8 addresses in this chapter to set up Least Cost Routing (LCR).
This chapter covers the following addresses:
Topic
An Overview of Least Cost Routing
Before Programming LCR
I LCR Setup
Activating LCR
LCR Call Processing
Using LCR With a PBX System
1 FF8 I# (Tab1eNo.M (AreaCode)# (0 or l)#
1 LCR Area Codes
FF8 2# (TableNo.)# (OfficeCode)# (0 or l)#
I LCR Office Codes
FF8 3# (EntryNo.)# (AreaCodeF
( Special LCR Area Codes
FF8 4# (Ent.ryNo.)# (Tab1eNo.W (OfficeCodeM Special LCR Off ice Code Tables
(0 or I)#
FF8 Address
FF8 5# (TableNo.)# (Position)# (TrunkGroupW
Time Priority Route Tables
FF8 6# (TrunkGroup)# (Position)# (Trunk)#
LCR Trunk Groups
LCR Delete Tables
LCR Add Tables
FF8 7# (TrunkGroup)# (DigitshY
FF8 8# (TrunkGroup)# (Digits)#
DBS-70-400
DBS Manual - Issued 8/l/95
Technical Manuals Online! - http://www.tech-man.com
Page
8-2
8-2
8-4
8-4
8-5
18-6 I
18-7 1
18-8 1
8-9
8-10
8-12
8-13
8-14
Page 8-l
An Overview of Least Cost Routing
With the Least Cost Routing (LCR) feature, you can program the DBS system
to automatically route outgoing calls to the least expensive carrier.
Before Programming LCR
l
l
l
LCR SetUp
Verify the carrier for each CO trunk in the system, and which carriers
provide the best rates at different times of the day or weekend -- check the
site’s phone bills for call history.
Cut Strap S 1 on the CPC card. See Section 300-Installation for
instructions.
Enable LCR for the system in FFl 2# l# 3# (set to “1”).
Use FF8 addresses to set up LCR in the following logical order:
Step 1: Build LCR Trunk Groups
FF8 6# (TrunkGroup)# (Position)# (Trunk)#
Assign trunks to each group, prioritizing the trunks by assigning them to
positions within the group (trunk in position 1 will be tried first, then trunk in
position 2, etc.). To prevent glare, assign the trunks in descending order by
port number (from highest to lowest -- e.g., trunk port 7 in the first position,
trunk port 6 in the second position, etc.). Maximum 8 trunk groups.
Maximum 8 positions (trunks) per group.
’
Example: Create three trunk groups -- Trunk Group 1 for trunks that will be
used for local calls; Trunk Group 2 for long-distance trunks; and Trunk Group
3 for backup trunks.
Step 2: Build Time Priority Route Tables
FF8 5# (TableNo.)# (Position)# (TrunkGroup)#
Assign trunk groups to positions within each Time Priority Route Table,
which has six time-of-day periods (see Table 8-1, next page). These time
periods are fixed and can’t be changed. Each time period has eight different
positions for trunk groups. Maximum 15 Time Priority Route Tables.
Example: Create two Time Priority Route Tables -- Table 1 for longdistance calls; Table 2 for local calls.
l
l
Page 8-2
For Table 1 (long-distance), assign Trunk Group 2 to positions I,
9, 17,25,33 and 41, so that these trunks will be tried fist in all
time periods for long-distance calls. In positions 2, 10, 18,26,
34 and 42, assign Trunk Group 3 (backup).
For Table 2 (local), assign Trunk Group 1 to positions 1,9, 17,
25,33 and 41, so that these trunks will be tried first in all time
periods for local calls. In positions 2, 10, 18,26,34 and 42,
assign Trunk Group 3 (backup).
DBS Manual - Issued 8/l/95
Technical Manuals Online! - http://www.tech-man.com
DBS-7d-400
’
Chapter 8. Least Cost Routing (FF8)
Section 400-Programming
Table 8-1.
Time Priority Route Table format
Fixed Time Periods
LCR Trunk Group Position
Step 3: Set Up LCR for Long-Distance Dialing
FF8 1# (TableNo.)# (AreaCode)# (Add/Remove)#
Input all area codes into a Time Priority Route Table. Maximum 1,000 area
codes (000-999) per Table. All area codes you want routed by LCR must be
input into a Time priority Route Table. If you need to set up special area/
office code combinations as “exceptions to the rule”, use Step 5 below.
Example: Assign area codes you want LCR-routed to Table 1 (longdistance). If a dialed area code is not assigned to a Time Priority Route Table,
it will be routed to pooled trunk group “9”.
Step 4: Set Up LCR for Local Dialing
FF8 2# (TableNo.)# (OfficeCode)# (Add/Remove)#
Every office code (exchange) to follow LCR must be input, one at a time, to a
Time Priority Route Table. Maximum 1,000 office codes (000-999) per
Table.
Example: Assign all office codes in the site’s local area to Table 2 (local). If
a local office code is not included in Table 2, it will be routed to trunk group
“9” when dialed.
Step 5: Set Up “Exceptions To The Rule” (Area/Office Code
Combinations)
FF8 3# (EntryNo.)# (AreaCode)#
FF8 4# (EntryNo.)# (TableNo.)# (Office Code)# (Add/Remove)#
If there are any special area/office code combinations you want routed to
different trunks, input these combinations here.
Example:
Assign 7 14-242 to Table 1 (for calls to 7 14/242-1000)
Assign 714-243 to Table 3 (for calls to 7 14/243-1000)
l
l
DBS-70-400
DBS Manual - Issued 8/l/95
Technical Manuals Online! - http://www.tech-man.com
Page 8-3
Chapter 8. Least Cost Routing (FF8)
Section 400-Programming
Step 6: Set Up Add/Delete Digits
FF8 7# (TrunkGroup)# (DeleteDigits)#
FF8 8# (TrunkGroup)# (AddDigits)#
The DBS will automatically outpulse Add Digits, or prevent Delete Digits
from being outpulsed, at the beginning of all phone numbers dialed on trunks
in the assigned group. The Add/Delete Digits are associated with LCR trunk
groups, not with the dialed phone number or the time of day.
Example: When the DBS is behind a PBX, assign “g-PAUSE” (press the
REDIAL key to insert the pause) so that the PBX will be automatically
accessed whenever a user dials out.
Activating LCR
l
l
l
Although the FF8 addresses provide for LCR setup, you must activate
LCR in the “LCR Access” system address, FFl 2# l# 3# l#.
You can still build a Pooled Trunk Group “9” in FF2 (Trunk)# 3#, which
the DBS will access if all LCR trunks are busy.
Individual extensions can be forced to use LCR in FF3 (ExtPort)# 4#.
LCR Call Processing
LCR processes calls as follows:
1. An extension user dials an outgoing phone nurnber.
If 0,411,555,911, or 800 is dialed, the DBS will automatically drop
out of LCR and use pooled trunk group “9” (this trunk group is built in
FF2 Trunk# 3#). This occurs to make sure these numbers are dialed
without any modification (e.g., LCR’s Add/Delete Digits Tables).
l
2. The DBS determines which Time Priority Route Table to use for the call,
based on the area code and/or office code dialed.
If the number is not assigned to a Table, LCR processing terminates
and the call is routed to pooled trunk group “9”.
l
3. The DBS will search all trunks in the Time Priority Route Table’s assigned
trunk groups, until an available trunk is found.
l
l
Page 8-4
If all trunks in the first trunk group are busy, the DBS will search it
again. If all the trunks are still busy, the user will hear a “beep-beep”
tone as LCR proceeds to the next trunk group. Each trunk group is
searched twice.
If no trunks are available in any trunk group (whether LCR or not), the
user (after hearing busy tone) can dial “2” to have the DBS call backDBS Manual - Issued 8/l/95
Technical Manuals Online! - http://www.tech-man.com
DBS-70-400
Chapter 8. Least Cost Routing (FF8)
Section 400-Programming
when a trunk becomes available. When the DBS recalls, the user picks
up the handset and the DBS will automatically redial the number.
4. When a trunk is found, digits are added to or deleted from the phone
number, according to the Add or Delete digits assigned to the trunk group.
.
Using LCR With a PBX System
When the DBS is behind a PBX. two “9”s have to be dialed to access an
outside line -- once to access the PBX, and again to access a trunk line. In
these cases, LCR is often used to add the “9”s automatically (via the Add
Digits Table) so the user doesn’t have to dial them each time.
.
Ln earlier CPC versions (CPC-A lower than 3.21; CPC-B lower than 2.1 l),
some office codes -- specifically, 941,955,991, and 980 .-- shotlld not be
routed through LCR in PBX systems. Because of the “9” dialing requirement, and because the DBS automatically drops out of LCR if 0,411,555,
911 or 800 is dialed, the DBS may interpret these special numbers as office
codes instead.
For example, if “9-9 11” is dialed to access a trunk and make an emergency
call, LCR may assume office code 991 was dialed instead. Therefore, do not
assign office codes 941,955,991 or 980 to Time [email protected] Route Tables if you
have an earlier CPC-A or CPC-B version.
DBS Manual - Issued 8/l/95
DBS-70-400
Technical Manuals Online! - http://www.tech-man.com
Page 8-5
Section 400-Programming
Chapter 8. Least Cost Routing (FF8)
LCR Area Codes
Software Version: All Versions
Address: FF8 1# (TableNo.)# (AreaCode)# (0 or l)#
Description
Use this address to route all calls to a certain area code through LCR.
This address associates the area code with a Time Priority Route Table, which
tells the DBS which trunk group to route the call to, based on the time of day
and weekend when the area code is dialed.
To use different Time Priority Route Tables for the same area code (based on
the office code dialed), do not enter the area code here -- instead, use the
Special LCR Area/Office Codes addresses (FF8 3# and 4#).
If a dialed area code is not assigned to a Time Priority Route Table, the call
will be routed to pooled trunk group “9” (built in FF2 Trunks 3#).
Programming
I
I
FF8 l# (1=15)# (000-999)# (0 or l)#
f
Time Priority Route
Table No.
t
Area Code
t
O=Remove from table.
l=Add to table.
Related Programming
Time Priority Route Tables: FF8 5# (Table)# (Position)# (TrunkGrp)#
Notes
FLASH Key Interaction. Once a trunk is accessed through LCR, the
FLASH key cannot be used to get a second dial tone. The flash operation is
disabled to prevent second calls from being placed over inappropriate routes.
Special Numbers Not Processed By LCR. If the user dials 0,411,555,9 11,
or 800, the DBS will automatically terminate LCR processing and route the
call to pooled trunk group “9” (this trunk group is built in FF2 Trunk# 3#).
This occurs so that these numbers are dialed without modification (e.g.,
preventing LCR Add digits from being dialed as a prefix to the number).
i
Page 8-6
DBS Manual - Issued 8/l/95
Technical
Manuals Online! - http://www.tech-man.com
\
‘.,
DBS-70-400
Chapter 8. Least Cost Routing (FF8)
Section 400-Programming
LCR Office Codes
Software Version: All Versions
Address: FF8 2# (TableNo.)# (OfficeCode)# (0 or l)#
Description
Use this address to route all calls to a certain office code (exchange) through
LCR.
This address associates an exchange with a Time Priority Route Table, which
tells the DBS which trunk group to route the call to, based on the time of day
and weekend when the exchange is dialed.
To use different Time Priority Route Tables for different exchanges within the
same area code, do not enter the exchanges here -- instead, use the Special
LCR Area/Office Codes addresses (FFS 3# and 4#).
If a dialed exchange is not assigned to a Time Priority Route Table, the call
will be routed to pooled trunk group “9” (built in FF2 Trunk++ 3#).
Programming
I
FF8 2# (1115)# (OOO-999)# (0 or I)#
f
Time Priority Route
Table No.
t
Office Code
(Exchange)
t
O=Remove from table.
l=Add to table.
Related Programming
Time Priority Route Tables: FF8 5# (Table)# (Position)++ (TrunkGrp)#
Notes
FLASH Key Interaction. Once a trunk is accessed through LCR, the FLASH key
cannot be used to get second dial tone. The flash operation is disabled to prevent
second calls from being placed over inappropriate routes.
Special Numbers Not Processed By LCR. If the user dials 0,4 11,555,9 11 or 800,
the DBS will automatically terminate LCR processing and route the call to pooled
trunk group ‘9” (this trunk group is built in FK! Tnm.k# 3#). This occurs so that
these numbers are dialed without modification (e.g., preventing‘LCR Add digits
from being dialed as a prefix to the number).
LCR Office Code Restriction in PBX Systems. With CPC-A versions lower than
3.21, and CPC-B versions lower than 2.11, office codes 941,955,991, and 980
should not be routed through LCR if the DBS is behind a PBX system. Because of
the ‘9” dialing requirement to access the PBX and a trunk line, and because the DBS
will automatically drop out of LCR processing if special numbers 0.411.555.9 11,
or 800 are dialed, the DBS may interpret the special numbers as office codes instead
(for example, reading a “9-911” emergency call as a “991” office code).
.
DBS-70-400
DBS Manual - Issued 8/t/95
Technical Manuals Online! - http://www.tech-man.com
Page 8-7
Chapter 8. Least Cost Routing (FF8)
Section 400-Programming
Special LCR Area Codes
Software Version: All Versions
Address: FF8 3## (EntryNo.)# (AreaCode)#
Description
Use this address to assign up to four special area codes for LCR routing.
This address is used in conjunction with the next address -- “Special LCR
Office Codes” (FF8 4#) -- to assign different office codes within the same
area code to different Time Priority Route Tables.
If an area code is assigned here, the DBS will wait until the next three digits
(representing the office code) are dialed, before routing the call.
Programming
To assign a Special LCR Area Code . . .
FF8 3# (I?# (00799)#
Special Area Code Entry No.
Area Code
To clear a Special LCR Area Code . . .
FF8 3# (114)# CONF ON/OFF
f
Special Area Code Entry No.
Related Programming
Time Priority Route Tables: FF8 5# (Table)## (Position)# (TrunkGrp)#
Special LCR Office Codes: FF8 4## (EntryNo.)# (Table)# (GfficeCode)#
(0 or l)#
Notes
FLASH Key Interaction. Once a trunk is accessed through LCR, the
FLASH key cannot be used to get second dial tone. The flash operation is
disabled to prevent second calls from being placed over inappropriate routes.
Special Numbers Not Processed By LCR. If the user dials 0,411,555,911,
or 800, the DBS will automatically terminate LCR processing and route the
call to pooled trunk group “9” (this trunk group is built in FF2 Trunk#+ 3#).
This occurs so that these numbers are dialed without modification (e.g.,
preventing LCR Add digits from being dialed as a prefix to the number).
DBS Manual - issued 8/l/95
Page 8-8
Technical Manuals Online! - http://www.tech-man.com
DBS-70-400
Section 400-Programming
Chapter 8. Least Cost Routing (FF8)
Special LCR Office Code Tables
Software Version: All Versions
Address: FF8 4## (EntryNo.)# (TableNo.)# (OfficeCode)# (0 or l)#
Description
Use this address to assign office codes to a special area code for LCR routing.
This address is used in conjunction with the previous address -- “Special
LCR Area Codes” (FFS 4#) -- to assign different office codes within the
same area code to different Time Priority Route Tables (instead of using the
same Time Priority Route Table for all calls to that area code).
If a special area/office code combination is dialed, the DBS will wait until
both the area code and office code is dialed before routing the call.
Programming
To assign a Special LCR Office Code . . .
FF8 4# (l-4)# (l-15)# (000-999)# (0 or l)#
/f
Special Area Code
Entry No.
+
lime Priority
f
Office Code
Route Table No.
f
O=Remove from table.
l=Add to table.
Related Programming
Time Priority Route Tables: FF8 5# (Table)# (Position)# (TrunkGrp)#
Special LCR Area Codes: FF8 3# (EntryNo.)# (AreaCode)#
Notes
FLASH Key Interaction. Once a trunk is accessed through LCR, the FLASH key
cannot be used to get second dial tone. The flash operation is disabled to prevent
second calls from being placed over inappropriate routes.
Special Numbers Not Processed By LCR. If the user dials 0,411,555,911 or 800,
the DBS will automatically terminate LCR processing and route the call to pooled
trunk group ‘9” (this trunk group is built in FF2 Trunk# 3#). This occurs so that
these numbers are dialed without modification (e.g.. preventing LCR Add digits
from being dialed as a prefix to the number).
LCR Office Code Restiction in PBX Systems. With CPC-A versions lower than
3.21, and CPC-B versions lower than 2.11, office codes 941,955,99 1, and 980
should not be routed through LCR if the DBS is behind a PBX system. Because of
the “9” dialing requirement to access the PBX and a trunk line, and because the DBS
will automatically drop out of LCR processing if special numbers 0,411,555,9 11 or
800 are dialed, the DBS may interpret the special numbers as office codes instead
(for example, reading a “9-9 11” emergency call as a “991” office code).
DBS Manual - Issued 8/i/95
DBS-70-400
Technical Manuals Online! - http://www.tech-man.com
Page 8-9
.
Section 400-Programming
Chapter 8. Least Cost Routing (FF8)
Time Priority .Route Tables
Software Version: All Versions
Address: FF8 5# (TableNo.)# (Position)# (TrunkGroup)#
Description
Use this address to assign LCR trunk groups to Time Priority Route Tables.
Within each Table, LCR trunk groups are assigned to priority positions in six
time-of-day periods (in the format shown in Table 8-2 below). This sets up
LCR routing paths for the DBS to follow when outgoing calls are placed.
Area codes and/or office codes are also associated with Time Priority Route
Tables, using other addresses. When a user dials the area code and/or office
code, the DBS will route the call to the trunk groups in the assigned Table
based on the time of day/weekend when the call is placed.
The first position in each time period is the highest-priority position for that
time period. For example, if a call is placed at 8:35 pm, the trunk group
assigned to position 25 will be tried first when the call is placed (refer to
Table 8-2 below). If the DBS cannot access a trunk in this group, it will
search the trunk group assigned to the next-highest position (in the same
example, position 26).
Table 8-2. Time Priority Route Table format
Fixed Time Periods
Trunk Group Positions
Programming
To create Time Priority Route Tables . . .
FF8 5#?5)# (li48)# (1-f#
Time Priority
Route Table No.
Position
DBS Manual - Issued 8/l/95
Page
8-l 0 Online! - http://www.tech-man.com
Technical
Manuals
Trunk Group
DBS-70-400 ’
Section 400-Programming
Chapter 8. Least Cost Routing (FF8)
To reset a position in a Time Priority Route Table to default . . .
FF8 5# (1015)# (l-48)# CONF ON/OFF
f
z
Time Pribrity
Route Table No.
Position
Related Programming
LCR Access: FFl 2# l# 3# (0 or l)#
LCR Area Codes: FF8 l# (TableNo.)# (AreaCode)# (0 or l)#
LCR Office Codes: FF8 2# (TableNo.)# (OfficeCode)# (0 or l)#
Special LCR Area Codes: FF8 3# (EntryNo.)## (AreaCode)#
Special LCR Office Code Tables: FF8 4# (EntryNo.)# (Tab1eNo.w (Office
Code)# (0 or l)#
LCR Trunk Groups: FF8 4# (TrunkGroup)# (Position)# (Trunk)#
DBS-70-400
DBS Manual - Issued 8/l/95
Technical Manuals Online! - http://www.tech-man.com
Page 8-11
Chapter 8. Least Cost Routing (FF8)
Section 400-Programming
LCR Trunk Groups
Software Version: AlI Versions
Address: FF8 6# (TrunkGrp)# (Position)# (Trunk)#
Description
Use this address to build LCR trunk groups, which are assigned to priority
positions in Time Priority Route Tables (see FF8 5#).
Each LCR trunk group can contain up to 8 trunks. A maximum of 8 different
trunk groups can be created. Within each trunk group, the trunks are assigned
to positions from the highest priority (position 1) to the lowest (position 8).
When a call is routed to the trunk group, LCR will try the trunk in the first
position, then the second position, etc.
LCR trunk groups are also used for assigning Add or Delete digits as a prefix
to dialed numbers routed to the trunk group (see FF8 7# and 8#).
Programming
FF8 6# (I-8)# (198)# (1164)#
fft
LCR Trunk Group .
Position
Trunk
Related Programming
Time Priority Route Tables: FF8 5# (TableNo.)# (Position)+! (TrunkGrp)#
LCR Delete Tables: FF8 7# (TrunkGrp)# (up to 16 digits)#
LCR Add Tables: FF8 8# (TrunkGrp)# (up to 16 digits)#
Notes
Trunk Assignment to LC’R Trunk Groups. A trunk cannot be assigned to
more than one position within the same LCR trunk group. However, the same
trunk can be assigned to several different groups.
Avoiding Glare. Glare occurs when both ends of a trunk are seized at the
same time, causing accidental connection between an incoming caller and a
DBS extension user preparing to make an outside call. Since incoming calls
will access DBS trunks starting from the lowest to the highest trunk number,
glare can be avoided by routing outgoing calls to the highest-numbered trunks
fast. So, when you build LCR trunk groups, assign trunks in descending
order (from highest to lowest trunk number) to trunk group positions in
ascending order (from lowest to highest position). For example, assign trunk
7 to position 1; trunk 6 to position 2, trunk 5 to position 3, etc.
Page 8-12
DBS Manual - Issued 8/l/95
Technical Manuals Online! - http://www.tech-man.com
.
DBS-70-400
Chapter 8. Least Cost Routing (FF8)
Section 400-Programming
LCR Delete Tables
Software Version: All Versions
Address: FF8 7# (TrunkGrp)# (DeleteDigits)#
Description
Use this address to assign Delete Digits to calls routed to an LCR trunk group.
Up to 16 digits can be assigned.
When an outgoing call is routed to an LCR trunk group, the DBS will check
the first digits of the dialed number and, if it finds a matching enny in this
table, the DBS will not outpulse the matched digits (only the rest of the dialed
digits will be outpulsed).
This feature is often used to strip off the “1” before an area code. or “!+AC”
before a 7-digit phone number.
The deletion will occur only if the outgoing call is routed to a trunk group that
has Delete Digits assigned to it. The deletion is not relative to time-of-day or
the complete dialed number.
Programming
To create an LCR Delete Table . . .
FF8 7# (l-8)# (NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN)#
LCR Trunk Group
$
Deletion Digits
(u;; to 16 digits)
To clear an LCR Delete Table . . .
FF8 7# (l-8)# CONF ON/OFF
4
I
LCR Trunk Group
Related Programming
LCR Trunk Groups.: FF8 6# (TrunkGrp)# (Position)# (Trunk)#
Notes
[email protected] of Deleted Digits Over Added Digits. If digits are being added and
deleted from the same trunk group, the DBS will delete digits first, then add
digits.
DBS-70-400
DBS Manual - Issued 8/1/95
Technical Manuals Online! - http://www.tech-man.com
Page 8-13
Section 400-Programming
Chapter 8. Least Cost Routing (FF8)
LCR Add Tables
Software Version: All Versions
Address: FF8 8## (TrunkGrp)# (AddDigits)#
Description
Use this address to assign Add Digits to calls routed to an LCR trunk group.
Up to 16 digits can be assigned.
When an outgoing call is routed to an LCR trunk group with Add Digits, the
DBS will add the digits to the beginning of the dialed number when it
outpulses the number to the CO.
This feature is often used to add CIC or PIC codes to dialed numbers. You
can also put “pauses” (by pressing REDIAL key) in the Add Digits.
The Add Digits feature is not associated with time-of-day or the dialed
number.
Programming
To create an LCR Add Table . . .
FF8 ‘8# (l-8)# (NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN)#
/.
LCR Trunk Group
t
Addition Digits
(up to 16 digits)
To clear an LCR Add Table . . .
Related Programming
Outbound DTMF Signal Duration for Auto-Dialed Digits: FF2 (Trunk)#
1% (l-3)#
LCR Trunk Groups: FF8 6# (TrunkGrp)b (Position)# (Trunk)#
Notes
Priority of Deleted Digits Over Added Dig&. If digits are being added and
deleted from the same trunk group, the DBS will delete digits first, then add
digits.
DBS Manual - Issued 8/l/95
Page 8-14
Technical Manuals Online! - http://www.tech-man.com
DBS-70-400
9. Copy Program Settings (FF9)
Use the FF9 program addresses in this chapter to copy settings among trunks,
extensions, and FF keys.
This chapter covers the following addresses:
FF9 Address
FF9 l# (Trunk)# (Trunk)#
FF9 2# (ExtPort)# (ExtPoft)##
FF9 3# (ExtPon)# (ExtP0l-t)~
CBS-70-400
Topic
Trunk Copy
1 Extension Copy
1 FF Key Copy
DBS Manual - Issued 8/t/95
Technical Manuals Online! - http://www.tech-man.com
Page
9-3
19-4
19-5
Page 9-1
.
Page 9-2
DBS Manual - Issued 8/l/95
Technical Manuals Online! - http://www.tech-man.com
DBS-70-400
Section 400-Programming
Chapter 9. Copy Program Settings (FF9)
Trunk Copy
Software Version: All Versions
Address: FF9 l# (SourceTrunk)# (TargetTrunk)##
Description
Use this address to copy the attributes of one trunk to another.
Copying must be done on a trunk-by-trunk basis. The first trunk entry in this
address is the trunk being copiedfrom (the source); the second trunk entry is
the trunk being copied to (the m-get).
Programming
Note: You must enter two pound-signs (#I#) at the end of this address.
FF9 1# (li64)1 (l?Y#
Trunk Number
(Source)
Notes
DBS-70-400
Trunk Number
(Target)
Restriction Regarding Private Trunks. This program copies all trunk
attributes except the Private Trunk Line attribute.
DBS Manual - Issued 8/l/95
Technical Manuals Online! - http://www.tech-man.com
Page 9-3
Chapter 9. Copy Program Settings (FF9)
Section 400-Programming
Extension Copy
Software Version: All Versions
Address: FF9 2# (SourceExtPort)# (TargetExtPort)##
Description
Use this address to copy the attributes of one extension to another.
Copying must be done on an extension-by-extension basis. The first
extension port entry in this address is the extension being copiedfrom (the
source); the second extension entry is the extension being copied to (the
target).
Programming
Note: You must enter two pound-signs (##) at the end of this address.
FF9 2# (l=lf4)# ( l - 1 4 4 7
Extension Port
(Source)
Notes
Extension Port
Wget)
Copying Restrictions. This address copies all extension attributes except the
extension number, telephone type, extension lockout code, and EM/24 port
number (BLF port setting).
Consideration for Call Forward ID Codes. Do not use this address to copy
settings from an extension with a Call Forward ID Code. If the copied
extension settings include a Call Forward ID Code, the copy “target” will be
able to retrieve the messages of the copy “source.” For example, if you copy
extension settings from station 200 to station 300, station 300 will be able to
retrieve 200’s messages. Station 300 can retrieve 200’s messages because the
Call Forward ID Code for 200 is also assigned to 300.
Page 9-4
DBS Manual - issued 8/l/95
Technical Manuals Online! - http://www.tech-man.com
DBS-70-400
Section 400-Programming
Chapter 9. Copy Program Settings (FF9)
FF Key Copy
Software Version: All Versions
Address: FF9 3# (ExtPort)# (ExtPort)###
Description
Use this address to copy the attributes of one extension’s FF keys to another.
Copying must be done on an extension-by-extension basis. The first
extension port entry in this address is the FF key source; the second extension
entry is the FF key target.
Programming
Note: You must enter two pound-signs (#) at the end of this address.
FF9 3# (l-lf4)Y (l-144f%
Extension Port
(Source)
Notes
Extension Port
Cbset)
Copying Restriction. This address does not copy FF keys programmed as
PSD (Personal Speed Dial) keys.
Clearing FF Keys Before Using the Copy Program. Before you copy the
FF keys to an extension that is set to the defaults, you must clear the key
settings of the target phone. To clear key settings, use address FF5 (ExtPort)#
(Key)# CONF ON/OFF.
Setting VP FF Keys on Multiple Phones. To set up multiple extensions with
new FF key settings, use the following steps:
1. Clear the keys of the source phone using FF5 (ExtPort)# (Key)#.
2. Copy the cleared key settings to multiple target extensions using FF9 3#
(SourceExtPort)# (TargetExtPort)#.
3. Set up the FF keys on the source phone using FF5 (ExtPort)# (Key)#.
4. Copy the new settings to multiple target extensions using FF9 3#
(SourceExtPort)#(TargetExtPort)#.
DBS-70-400
DBS Manual - Issued 8/l/95 .
Technical Manuals Online! - http://www.tech-man.com
Page 9-5
10. Speed Dial Programming (FFIO)
Use the FFlO addresses in this chapter to program speed dial numbers.
This chapter covers the following addresses:
FFlO I# (SSD)# (DialedN0.W
Topic
System Speed Dial Numbers
Page
10-3
FRO 2# (ExtPortM (PSDM (Dia1edNo.W
Personal Speed Dial Numbers
10-5
F’FlO Address
DBS-70400
DBS Manual- Issued 8/l/95
Technical Manuals Online! - http://www.tech-man.com
Page 10-l
Page 10-2
DBS Manual - Issued 8/l/95
Technical Manuals Online! - http://www.tech-man.com
DBS-70-400
Chapter 10. Speed Dial Programming (FFlO)
Section 400-Programming
System Speed Dial Numbers
Software Version: All Versions
Address: FFlO 1# (SSD)# (PhoneNumber)#
Description
Use this address to set up System Speed Dial (SSD) codes and their related
phone numbers. An Attendant phone is required to program SSD numbers.
NOTE: Up to 90 SSD codes (00-89) can be assigned in CPC-A (all versions)
and CPC-AH/B versions prior to 7.0. Beginning with CPC-AWB Version
7.0, up to 200 SSD codes (000-199) can be assigned.
Programming
To assign an SSD number . . .
FFlO l# (00-89 or 000-199)# (NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN)#
t
SSD Code
Pdone Number Sent To CO
OO-89=CPC-A (all versions), and CPC-AII/
(up to 16 digits)
CPC-B versions prior to 7.0
OOO-199=CPC-AIIKPC-B Version 7.0 or higher
To clear an SSD number . . .
FFlO l# (00-89 cy 000-199)# CONF ON/OFF
I
SSD Code
Related Programming
Override Toll Restriction with SSD Numbers: FFl 2# l# 4# (SSD)#
SSD Display Restriction: FFl 2# l# 5# (0 or l)#
SSD Name Display: FFl 2# l# 19# (0 or l)#
System Speed Dial Names: FF6 2# (SSD)# CONF (Name)++
Notes
SSD Code Display. SSD codes will appear on large-display telephones in
alphabetical order by SSD name (set in FF6 2#).
DBS Manual - issued 8/l/95
DBS-70-400
Technical Manuals Online! - http://www.tech-man.com
Page 10-3
Chapter 10. Speed Dial Programming (FFl 0)
Section 400-Programming
SSD Number Display. SSD codes 80-89 (or 160-199) can be set so that their
associated phone numbers will not display when the DBS outpulses them.
See “SSD Display Restriction”, address FFl 2# l# 5#.
Including Trunk Groups in an SSD Number. You can make a trunk group
part of an SSD number. To do this, press CONP to insert a “C” as the first
character of the SSD number, then enter the trunk group number l-8. The
“C” is required for an SLT to use speed-dialing. A “9” can also be used to
access the pooled trunk capability.
DSS Key Functions. DSS keys can be used for several different tasks in
speed dial programming. The keys are described in the following table:
Table 10-I. DSS key functions in System Speed Dial programming
Function
DSS Key
Clears entered data on key phone
CON-F
<Backsoaces
1 Backspaces
BS
->
1 Forward spaces
P
Inserts a pause
Initiates trunk group access
C
r ~~~~
I
I
I
For example, “Cl P5551212” will access pooled trunk group 8 1, then pause,
and then dial 555-1212.
Page 10-4
DBS Manual - Issued 8/l/95
Technical Manuals Online! - http://www.tech-man.com
DBS-70-400
Chapter 10. Speed Dial Programming (FFlO)
Section 400-Programming
Personal Speed Dial Numbers
Software Version: All Versions
Address: FFlO 2# (ExtPort)# (PSD)# (PhoneNumber)#
Description
Use this address to set up Personal Speed Dial (PSD) codes and their related
phone numbers. PSD numbers can be programmed from any phone.
Up to 10 PSDs can be assigned on each extension. In CPC-A (all versions)
and in CPC-AH/B versions prior to 7.0, two-digit PSD codes 90-99 are used.
Beginning with CPC-AI1 and CPC-B Version 7.0, three-digit codes 900-909
are used.
Programming
To assign a PSD number . . .
FFIO 2# (l-144)# (90-99 or 9001909)# (NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN)#
f
Extension Port
t
f
PSD Code
Phone Number Sent To CO
(up to 16 digits)
90-99=CPC-A (all versions), and
CPC-AIWPC-B versions
prior to 7.0
900-909=CPC-AII/CPC-B Version 7.0
or higher
To clear a PSD number . . .
FFIO 2# (19144)# (90-99 or 900-909)# CONF ON/OFF
+
Extension Port
+
PSD Code
Related Programming
PSD Name Display: FF3 (ExtPort)# 17# (0 or l)#
Personal Speed Dial Names: FF6 3# (ExtPort)# (PSD)# CONF (Name)#
Notes
PSD Number Display. PSD numbers appear on large-display telephones in
alphabetical order by PSD name (set in FF6 3#) .
DBS-70-400
DBS Manual - Issued 8/l/95
Technical Manuals Online! - http://www.tech-man.com
Page 10-5
Chapter 10. Speed Dial Programming (FFlO)
Section 400-Programming
DSS Key Functions. DSS keys can be used for several different tasks in
speed dial programming. The keys are described in the following table:
Table 10-2. DSS key functions in Personal Speed Dial programming
DSS Key
CONF
<BS
->
P
C
Function
Clears entered data on key phone
Backspaces
Backspaces
Forward spaces
Inserts a pause
Initiates trunk group access
For example:
“Cl P5551212” will access pooled trunk group 8 1, then pause, and
then dial 555-1212.
Page 10-6
DBS Manual - Issued 8/l/95
Technical Manuals Online! - http://www.tech-man.com
DBS-70-400
Appendix A. Large-Screen Displays
This appendix illustrates the menu screens that can be programmed to appear
during different call states (e.g., when the phone is idle, during a trunk call,
during an intercom call, etc.) on large-display phones. These screens act as
labels for the soft keys surrounding the LCD. The soft keys provide onetouch initiation of a feature, or one-touch access to a directory, during the call
state when the screen appears.
There are a total of 39 screens. Screens 1-24 are fixed, pre-programmed
screens which cannot be changed. Beginning with CPC-AM3 Version 6.0,
Flexible Function screens 25-39 are available, which can be custom-designed
using FFl 2# 7# l# thru 4#. AU of these screens can be assigned to different
call states using FF3 (ExtPort)# (26-33)# (0-39)#:
Note: Some screens cannot be set to display during certain call processing
operations.
Main Menu
FF3 (Extl’ort)# (26-33)# l#
Personal Speed Dial
FF3 (ExtPort)# (26-33)# 2#
DBS-70-400
System Speed Dial
FF3 (ExtPort)# (26-33)# 3#
DBS Manual - issued 8/l/95
Technical Manuals Online! - http://www.tech-man.com
Page A-l
Appendix A. Large-Screen Displays
Page A-2
Section 400-Programming
DBS Manual - Issued 8/l/95
Technical Manuals Online! - http://www.tech-man.com
DBS-70-400
Section 400-Programming
Appendix A. Large-Screen Displays
Attendant Menu 3
FF3 (ExtPort)# (26-33j# lO#
Function Screen 1
FF3 (ExtPort)# (26-33)# ll#
Function Screen 2
FF3 (ExtPort)# (26-33)# 12#
Function Screen 3
FF3 (ExtPort)# (26-33)# 13#
Function Screen 4
FF3 (ExtPort)# (26-33)# 14#
Function Screen 5
FF3 (ExtPort)# (26-33)# 15#
Df3S Manual - Issued 8/l/95
DES-70-400
Technical Manuals Online! - http://www.tech-man.com
+
Page A-3
Appendix A. Large-Screen Displays
w
a
B
a
~
Section 400-Programming
Function Screen 6
FF3 (ExtPort)# (26-33)# 16#
Function Screen 7
FF3 (ExtPort)# (26-33)# 17#
Function Screen 8
FF3 (ExtPort)# (26-33)# 18#
Function Screen 9
FF3 (ExtPort)# (26-33)# 19#
.~,O~-!j~~~~~~,~~~~~
.“::kiii’$“:4i~~~~~~~,~~~~~
,.,__.n_.,., _, ,/., :.: :.‘,:.‘,:.
,~I~-~~~“~~~~~~:
. . ........._.:..,:.;:.,(i,:.:......... :.:. a....,., .>2,. .,._., ,.,_ ,. ,. .,.: i., :.:.:. . . . .
.~.~~ii~~~~~~~~~~;
-.~:i~~~~.~~~~~~~~~
I, , :, ..: “‘::.?.:.:.. . . . i., , ‘:.:.,:.,i’:‘.: : : > .;. ; ? “:+;::$::. ,:
:.p& ‘6’ R~~~:~~~~.~~~8:I”~~~~~~:
:I.: i:c.:.:.:, :. ~:. : ~,::.,::.:i..,. <..A,.. .:.y.: .: ::,,:..::..::.: :,..:: ‘:: ’ :’ : :
.:,., ,:. :g:.
‘,::,:‘.:;y”;:.
.,,(.,:‘,.~‘~.~::.~, .“,:: ,:: ..:.:::..~:::..:~+.:+.. ~..::..~:~-.,:~,:;~~~~:
:.:~: ~. : ~:~:, .;:,c<*
,. (_.,. . . ... .;,.r(,f.~:,.:~.:‘:.~.,.~. :.~~:~.:..:,: ..:...:.i.’:.‘.:..‘.:. ~_:.. .:.‘..::~. ._.. ..:. ,. ..:.:.. .., . ,. . .r ,.,:.
Function Screen 10
FF3 (ExtPort)# (26-33)# 20#
w
w
~
B
B
w
m
w
:~~~~~!~~~~~~~~~~~
~iii~~~~~~~~~:
: :y:.: .:. . .i.i. /5 . . .:.:.: . . . . ..~y.. . . ~.:. :.:.~;. .:.:.:.~:.:. c..:.:y.:.,.:. .:.:,: . . . .
~~~~~~~~:~~~~~~~~~
: . . ., . . . . .
~~~~~~~~~~~~~
.;i,::,....::..:..:.. ..i::...:..:..:‘.. ..:.. L. . . i... . .. .i.. . .. . ..,.., . ..,.. ... . . . .......~. . . .y.i. . ~~~.~F:::.:,
:~:~~~~lD;f;~~~~~~:~
:.:., ,‘( y:::.: .“:...., : . .:. : , .:c : ‘.‘.‘i.’ 1: 2: : :.:. ::.. :i. : . . . . .
~~~~~i-~~~~:~
. . . . . . . . . . . .;. . . . . . , ,_ .,:.:.,.,.,. . ,:.:.:.:.:.:.‘.‘.~.~,‘:‘.‘:‘: .T. :. .:.‘.:.:.:.x. j.‘. ?.
~~~~~~~~~~~:~
a
~
m
w
m
Function Screen 11
FF3 (ExtPort)# (26-33)# 21#
DBS Manual - Issued 8/l/95
Page A-4
Technical Manuals Online! - http://www.tech-man.com
DBS-70-400
Section 400-Programming
Appendix A. Large-Screen Displays
Function Screen 12
FF3 (ExtPort)# (26-33)# 22#
Function Screen 13
FF3 (ExtPort)# (26-33)# 23#
Function Screen 14
FF3 (ExtPort)# (26-33)# 24#
Flexible Function Screens 1 - 15
F’F3 (ExtPort)# (26-33)# (2%39)#
DBS-70-400
DBS Manual - Issued 8/l/95
Technical Manuals Online! - http://www.tech-man.com
Page A-5
Appendix B. Terminal Programming
The body of this Secrion 400 i$ devoted to programming the DBS system
through a key phone. However. the DBS can also be programmed remotel!
via the Terminal Programming mode.
Using this mode, commands can be entered on a remote PC or terminal and
sent to the DBS via modem. Or, the PC/terminal can be connected directly to
the DBS’s SMDR port (0’6~.
You can enter the Terminal Programming mode using any of the follo\ving
three methods:
l
l
l
Direct Connection: Lse a local PC or terminal and a communications
package to connect directly to CX6.
DISA: Dial into the system through a DISA trunk.
Operator Transfer: Dial into the system through a regular trunk. then
have the operator enter the Remote Programming ID Code.
This appendix gives an overview of these programming methods.
Terminal Programming Through a Direct Connection
To program the system through a PC or terminal connected :G DBS ser-iaI port
CN6:
1. .Make sure the cables are configured and connected as described in Secrio~
300-Imrullation.
2. Make sure the DBS is in the SMDR mode. Dial the following codes from
the Attendant port
OK/OFF #93
3. Enter your terminal communications program and make sure your PC or
terminal’s data communications settings match those of the DBS.
3. From your terminal communications program (~terminal emulation in a PC
communications package). type the following command:
#99 xxxx
(where “xxxx” is the site’s password: system default is -‘9999”)
5. After the DBS displays “REMT>” on the computer, type P 2nd press
ENTER.
6. Follow the directions on the screen to access the desired program.
DBS-70-400
DBS Manual - Issued 8/l/95
Technical Manuals Online! - http://www.tech-man.com
Page B-l
Section 400-Programming
Appendix 8. Terminal Programming
Terminal Programming Through a CO or DISA Trunk
Note: To enter the Terminal Programming mode through a trunk, the DBS
must be equipped with an MFR card (if using DISA) and an RAI card.
To program through a CO or DISA trunk:
1. Dial into the DBS through the trunk.
2. Ask the operator to place you on hold and dial #6 xxxx (where “xxxx” is
the site’s password; system default is “9999”). This will transfer you to the
RAI-A&B cards.
3. Wait for the computer to display “REMT>“, then type P and press
ENTER.
4. Follow the directions on the screen to access the desired program.
Terminal Programming Commands
Use the following commands to navigate terminal programming:
ruble B-I. Terminal programming commands
i
!
I
’
-07
-08
-09
-10
-B
-b
i -F
-f
Ix
1 Ctrl-2
Page 8-2
1 Access Ring assignments
f Access FF key assignments
( Access Name assignments
i Access Toll Restriction data
Access Least Cost Routing data
Access Copy mode
Access Speed Dial data
Back to previous address
Back to previous port
1 Forward to next address
I
I Forward to next port
1 Return to previous mode
Quit
DBS Manual - Issued 8/l/95
Technical Manuals Online! - http://www.tech-man.com
DBS-70-400
Appendix B. Terminal Frogramming
Section 400-Programming
Resuming SMDR or Bus Monitor Mode After Terminal Programming
The DBS supports three remote functions -1) Bus Monitor
2) SMDR
3) Terminal (Remote) Programming
However, only one of these functions can operate at a time. When not in
Terminal (Remote) Programming, either SMDR or Bus Monitor is active.
When you enter Terminal Programming (#6-xxxx), the other function stops.
When finished, the SMDR or Bus Monitor function resumes. The DBS can
be reset to the desired SMDR or Bus Monitor mode by entering (or having
someone at the site enter) one of the following codes at an extension or
Attendant phone:
Table B-2. Codes for switching SMDRIBus Monitor modes
Function
Command
Normal Bus Monitor
#90
Register Bus Monitor
#91
Poll Bus Monitor
#92
1 SMDR Output
#93
DBS-70-400
DBS Manual - Issued 8/l/95
Technical Manuals Online! - http://www.tech-man.com
Page B-3
Section 400-Index
A
AB/ABCD Signaling ................................. 1-19 1
Absence Messagesassigning to FF keys...................................5-5
creatintr_ .......................................................6-6
displaying extension status.. ..................... 3-39
effect on call coverage feature ................ .4- 18
effect on hunt feature.. ..............................4- 1 1
preset ..........................................................6-6
Access CodesDISA inbound ID code.. ......................... 1-128
DISA outbound ID code 1.. .................... I- 129
DISA outbound ID code 2...................... l-130
PBX, automatic pause in .......................... 2-10
PBX. creating ...........................................l-64
programming mode ................................ l-131
remote programming .............................. 1-127
Account Codesassigning ...................................................I-70
assigning to FF keys................................... 5-5
forced verified/unverified/voluntary ..........3-9
ACD Channelsterminal type.. ........... ................................. .3-5
Add DigitsillLCR ......................................................8-14
AEC (Analog Extension Card)-API slot assignment.. ................................ 1-25
disconnect signal (CPC-A). ..................... .3-4 1
disconnect signal (CPC-AII/B) ............... .3-55
disconnect signal duration (CPC-A) ........ I-30
disconnect signal duration (CPC-AII/E%) . . l-43
extension ring pattern............................... 3-47
AFP (Attendant Feature Package)-alarm feature, enabling ............................. 1-36
default FF key feature assignments..........5-l 1
FF key feature assignment.. ......................5- 10
terminal type ...............................................3-6
AIS (Alarm Indication Signal)-alarm [email protected] ...........................................l-171
recovery timer ........................................1-173
relay close ...............................................1-184
Aiarms...........................................................1-36
assigning to FF keys ................................... 5-5
Tl frame loss ..........................................l-174
Tl other alarms, detection.. .................... I-171
DBS-70-400
Tl other alarms, recovery ...................... 1-173
Tl red, counter ....................................... l- 176
Tl red, detection .................................... l-166
Tl red. relay........................................... 1-181
Tl relay, reset ........................................ 1-185
Tl signal loss, counter.. ......................... l-177
Tl slips................................................... 1-175
Tl sync loss, counter ............................. 1-178
Tl sync loss, relay ................................. I-182
Tl yellow, counter ................................. l- 179
Tl yellow. detection .............................. 1-167
Tl yellow. recovery............................... 1-169
Tl yellow, relay ..................................... l-180
T 1 yellow, send ...................................... 1-164
Alert ToneBusy Override/OHVA ............................. l-22
voice calls ................................................ I-21
AMI (Alternate Mark Inversion)-line coding set ........................................ 1-161
Answer Key-assigning to FF keys .................................. 5-5
Answer Supervision Timer for Tl .......... I- 152
Any Key-assigning to FF key .................................... 5-5
API (Application Programming Interface)-AEC slot for ............................................. 1-25
auto-redial restriction.. ............................. 3-58
baud rate.. ................................................. I-52
DID/DNIS answer codes ......................... l-46
DID/DNIS digits.. .................................... I-44
pot-t type ................................................... 1-51
Area Codesglobal restriction for TRS types 3-6.. ......7-23
global restriction with office codes..........7-25
in LCR........................................................ 8-6
restricting by TRS type ............................ 7-16
restricting with office codes........... .7-18, 7-26
special, in LCR ..........................................8-8
Attendant Phones-alternate .................................................... l-18
assigning Park Hold to FF key................... 5-5
barge-ins.. ................................................. 3- 13
default ringing trunks ................................. 4-3
delayed ringing on ................................... 4-20
Fourth Attendant position........................ l-33
hunt group transfer to ............................... 4-15
intercom calling ....................................... I- 19
DBS Manual- Issued 8/l/95
Technical Manuals Online! - http://www.tech-man.com
Index-l
Section 400-Programming
Index
override.. ................................................... 1-35
permanent call forward point .................. .3-52
primary, overflow calls ............................ l-28
recall timer, hold (CO) ............................. l-93
recall timer, hunt groups........................... l-97
recall timer, intercom hold ..................... l-l 14
recall timer, Park Hold ............................. l-99
recall timer. transferred CO calls ............. l-95
recall timer, transferred intercom calls ... l-l 16
Second Attendant position ....................... l-3 1
terminal type.. ............................................. 3-5
Third Attendant position .......................... l-32
timer, call reversions .............................. l-101
transfer extension ..................................... l-34
Auto Flash Redial ....................................... l-10
Auto Pickup.. ............................................... 3-16
Auto Set Relocation Code ......................... .3-49
Auto-Dialing-auto-redial (enabling on extensions) ........3-58
outbound DTMF signal duration for........2- 12
Automatic Pause-unsupervised conferencing with...............3- 17
B
BSZS ........................................................... l-161
_ Barge-In-allowing on extensions............................ .3-14
assigning to FF key ................................... .5-5
Attendant override .................................... l-35
enabling an extension to ........................... 3-13
Baud Rate-for API port .............................................. l-52
for RAI modem ........................................ l-62
for SMDR serial port................................ l-55
BGM (Background Music)-and Class of Service ........................ l-68, 3-40
assigning to FF key .................................... 5-5
BLF (Busy Lamp Field)-delayed ringing on.. .................................. l-37
Buffer Size ................................................... l-6 1
Bus Monitor Mode-switching to SMDR.. ..... l-58, l-59, l-60, B-3
Busy Override-alert tone................................................... l-22
assigning to FF key .................................... 5-5
receive ...................................................... 3-14
send.. .........................................................3-13
Busy Tone Transmission for Tl .............. 1-194
Index-2
Busy/No Answer-permanent call forward type .................... 3-5 1
Busy/Offhook-displaying extension status ...................... 3-39
Busy-Out ....................................................... 2-3
C
Call Coverage Groups-extension members .................................. 4-18
restrictions ................................................ 4-19
Call Duration Display .................................. l-5
Call Forwarding-and call coverage groups.......................... 4-18
and copying extension attributes.. .............. 9-4
and transferred calls.. .............................l- 117
assigning to FF key.................................... 5-5
effect on hunt feature ............................... 4- 11
forced LCR and (X-Outside ...................... 3-8
ID digits and terminal type ........................ 3-6
no-answer timer ..................................... l-111
permanent type.. ....................................... 3-51
target extension (permanent) ................... 3-52
Call Forward-Outside-and Class of Service................................. l-68
assigning to FF key.................................... 5-5
with LCR.................................................... 1-7
Call Park-and hunt groups.. ...................................... 4- 12
assigning to FF key.................................... 5-5
default assignment to DSS FF keys.. ......... 5-9
Call Pickup-assigning to FF key.................................... 5-5
Call Reversions-and hunt groups.. ...................................... 4- 13
timer, Attendant phones.. ....................... l- 101
Call Waiting-assigning to FF key.. .................................. 5-5
creating text replies.. ................................ 6- 10
enabling extensions for ............................ 3-12
Caller ID-and DISA Auto Answer.. ........................... 2-8
automatic DISA ....................................... l-81
LCD timer for .......................................... l-48
Log, assigning to FF key............................ 5-5
trunk circuit types .................................... 2-18
trunk setting considerations ..................... 2-20
Carrier Tones ................................ l-195, l-196
DBS Manual - Issued 8/l/95
Technical Manuals Online! - http://www.tech-man.com
DBS-70-400
Section 400-Programming
Index
CIC (Carrier Identification Code)-adding with LCR ...................................... 8-14
old format, allowing ................................ .7- 14
Circuit Types-and Tl channels.. .................................... 1-159
for tnmks ..................................................2-18
station port class .......................................3-43
Tl digital’pad settings ............................ 1-155
Class of Service-assigning to extensions............................. 3-40
changing assignment to extension.. ..........3-40
defining features of................................... l-68
CN6............... l-53, l-54, l-55, l-56, l-57, l-58,
l-59, l-60, B-l
Conferencing-unsupervised, allowing on extensions ...... 3-17
unsupervised, allowing on trunks.............2-13
unsupervised, timer ................................ l-102
Country Code Table-building .....................................................7-13
CPC Card Initialization.. ....................... Intro-4
D
Day Mode-assigning to FF key .................................... 5-5
extension delayed ring assignments.. .......4-20
extension ring assignments.. ...................... .4-3
hunt group delayed ring assignments.. .... .4-21
hunt group ring assignments ..................... .4-4
start time, automatic ............................... 1-123
TRS during ...............................................7-21
Day/Date Setting ........................................... 1-3
Defauit Program Settings.. ..................... Intro-9
Delayed Ringing-enabling for CO calls................................ 1-29
enabling on extensions (BLF) .................. l-37
extension assignment (Day) .................... .4-20
extension assignment (Night 2)............... -4-29
extension assignment (Night). ................. .4-22
hunt group assignment (Day) .................. .4-2 1
hunt group assignment (Night 2)............. .4-30
hunt group assignment (Night)................ .4-23
timer for CO calls ................................... 1-118
timer for extensions (DSS/BLF) ............ l-120
Delete Digits-inLCR ......................................................8-13
Dial Tone-calling, assigning to FF key.. ..................... .5-7
DBS-70-400
detection ................................................... 2-11
On/Off, assigning to FF key ...................... 5-5
Tl receive .............................................. 1-195
Tl transmission.. .................................... l- 193
Dial-Pulse-and Tl incoming calls ............................ 1-192
signal conversion to DTMF, assigning to
FF key ...................................................... 5-5
trunk setting ............................................... 2-4
DID (Direct Inward Dialing)-enabling trunks for ................................. l- 187
extension assignments (CPC-B 2.0) ........ 3-41
extension assignments (CPC-B 3.1)...... 1-133
hardware and power requirements......... 1 - 134
immediate/wink start on trunks.. .............. 2-21
multiple DID/DNIS.. ................................ l-39
name assignments .................................... 6-11
New Function Reset and........................ 1-132
ring assignments .................................... 1-198
Tl dialing method, incoming calls........ 1-192
timeout for dialing ................................... 2-23
timeout for interdigit dialing.. .................. 2-24
to a Voice Mailbox .................................. l-44
trunk circuit types .................................... 2-18
Voice Mail answer code for..................... l-46
wink start timer for trunks ....................... 2-22
Digital Pad Settings for Tl ...................... 1-155
Directories-extensions.. ............................................... 3-39
PSD numbers, assigning to FF key............ 5-6
SSD numbers, assigning to FF key............ 5-6
DISA (Direct Inward System Access)-auto answer ................................................ 2-8
automatic DISA callers ............................ 1-81
end time.................................................... 2-17
hardware requirement ................................ 2-8
ID code (inbound) .................................. l- 128
ID code 1 (outbound) ............................. 1-129
ID code 2 (outbound) ............................. l-130
ID code for remote programming.......... 1-127
in remote programming ............................. B-2
limitations ..............................................l-130
SLT ring pattern ....................................... l-42
start time .................................................. 2-16
Disconnect Signaling-AEC disconnect (CPC-A)........................ 3-41
AEC disconnect (CPC-AII/B) ................. 3-55
detection timer for trunks.. ....................... 2-15
release acknowledge timer for Tl .......... 1-148
Tl timer for ............................................1-146
DBS Manual - Issued 8/l/95
Technical Manuals Online! - http://www.tech-man.com
.
Index-3
Section 400-Programming
Index
DND (Do Not Disturb)-assigning to FF key .................................... 5-5
displaying extension status.. ..................... 3-39
effect on call coverage .feature ................ .4- 18
effect on hunt feature ................................. 4-11
DNIS (Dialed Number Identification Service)-enabling trunks for ................................. 1-187
extension assignments ............................ l- 197
multiple DWDNIS .................................. l-39
name assignments.. ................................... 6-l 1
ring assignments ..................................... 1-198
Tl dialing method, incoming calls.. ....... 1-192
to a Voice Mailbox................................... l-44
Voice Mail answer code.. ......................... l-46
Door Phonesassigning ports for .................................... 1-82
auto-rediai restriction ............................... 3-58
ML keys, using with ................................. l-84
opener access code, creating .................... l-86
opener access code, requiring.. ................. l-50
opener relay timer.. ................................... I-90
receiving a call from.. ............................... l-85
restrictions ....................................... l-83, l-85
ring assignments ....................................... l-84
ring pattern ............................................... l-89
ring timeout timer..................................... l-88
setting trunk dialing for .......i...................... 2-4
SLT phones, using with.. .......................... 1-84
tone type ................................................... l-87
DSLT (Digital Single-Line Telephone)-auto-redial on............................................ 3-58
receiving volume ...................................... 3-48
ring pattern for.. ........................................ 3-46
setting terminal type for ............................. 3-5
DSS Consoles-default FF key feature assignments............. 5-9
key layout (illust.) ............................... 5-9, 6-2
keys in PSD programming ....................... 10-6
keys in SSD programming ....................... 10-4
setting terminal type for ............................ .3-5
DSS/BLF Key-assigning to extensions (LED flash)...........5-5
Attendant. using on .................................. 1-31
call coverage, using with.. ....................... .4- 18
default FF key assignment.......................... 5-9
delayed ring, required with.. ..................... l-37
delayed ringing on extensions.. ................4-26
DTMF signaling on .................................... 7-6
key bank hold, using with ........................ l-13
names & messages, creating with ............. .6- 1
Index-4
ringing on extensions............................... 4-25
DTMF (Dual Tone Multi-Frequency)-and Tl incoming calls.. .......................... 1-192
outbound signal duration for auto-dialed
digits....................................................... 2- 12
restricting with TRS ................................... 7-6
trunk setting ............................................... 2-4
E
E&M ..........................................................1-186
EM/24-copying restriction ..................................... 9-4
FF key feature assignment ......................... 5-3
key layout on (illust.) ................................. 5-4
port assignment .......................................... 3-7
Equal Access Codeformat.. ..................................................... 7-14
ESF (Extended SuperFrame). ...... l-160, 1-191
Extension Lockoutassigning to FF key .................................... 5-6
codes, creating ......................................... 3-10
copying restriction ..................................... 9-4
Extension Numbers-assigning to ports ....................................... 3-3
clearing ....................................................... 3-4
displaying port number for ........................ 3-4
for Primary Attendant ................................ 3-4
for Second Attendant ................................. 3-4
number of digits in................................... 1-17
reassigning.. .............................................. 3-4
Extensionsclass of service ......................................... 3-40
copying attributes of .................................. 9-4
directory display ...................................... 3-39
directory, assigning to FF key.................... 5-6
DSS/BLF delayed ring assignments........4-26
DSS/BLF ring assignments.. .................... 4-25
hunt group members (CPC-A/B) ............. 4-14
hunt group members (CPC-AIL/B) .......... 4- 17
hunt group transfer to.. ................... . ......... 4- 15
including in page groups.. ............... ......... 3-22
moving ..................................................... 3-49
name assignments ...................................... 6-3
ring pattern.. ............................................. 3-46
status of .................................................... 3-39
terminal type .............................................. 3-5
External Paging .......................................... 1-67
DBS Manual - Issued 8/l/95
Technical Manuals Online! - http://www.tech-man.com
DBS-70-400
Section 400-Programming
index
F
Failure Mode for Tl ................................. 1-162
FF Keys-APP default feature assignments.. ........... .5-11
copying attributes of.................................. .9-5
extension assignments............................... -5-3
feature assignments. DSS consoles ........... .5-8
feature codes (table) .................................. .5 -5
layout on a 34-button phone (illust.) ..........5-4
layout on an EM/24 console (illust.) ..........5-4
programming mode ................................... xvii
Flash-auto flash redial ........................................ l-10
CO flash timer.. ...................................... l-104
inT1 .......................................................1-165
PBX flash timer...................................... l-l 10
SLT flash control ...................................... 1-15
SLT hookflash .......................................... 3-45
SLT onhook flash timer.. ........................ 1 . 106
FLASH Key-LCR, using with ......................................... 8-6
timing for CO ......................................... l-104
timing for PBX hold.. .............................. l-l 10
TRS. using with .......................................... 7-6
Flexible Function Screens-assigning text for ...................................... l-78
l - 8 0
default, all screens ....................................
default, individual screens.. ...................... l-79
feature codes (table) ................................. 1-74
soft-keys, assigning features to ................ l-73
Forced Account Codes--see Account Codes
Forced Least Cost Routing ......................... .3-8
Fractional Tl ............................................. l-200
Frame (Tl)-format .....................................................l-160
loss counter.............................................1-174
loss relay.................................................1-183
G
Glare--
and wink-start signaling in Tl................ 1-154
avoiding in LCR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8- 12
immediate glare timer for T 1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . I- 153
Ground-Start Trunks-and Tl COP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..-.............l-186
considerations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-19
inbound call detection timer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . l-l 13
DBS-70-400
outbound call detection timer ................ l- 112
trunk circuit type.. .................................... 2- 18
Group Call Pickup-and page groups ....................................... 3-22
assigning feature to FF key.. ...................... 5-6
Guard Timer for Tl ................................. 1-147
H
Headset-assigning to FP key .................................... 5-6
Hold-non-appearing, for CO calls.. ................... 1-14
recall timer, Attendant-held CO calls ...... l-93
recall timer, Attendant-held intercom
calls ...................................................... 1-l 14
recall timer, Attendant-parked ................. 1-99
recall timer, extension-held CO calls ....... 1-94
recall timer, extension-held intercom
calls ...................................................... l-l 15
recall timer, extension-parked calls ....... I- 100
tone, internal ............................................ 1-49
Hot Dial Pad.. .............................................. 3-57
Hunt Groups-call next.. .................................................. 4-13
circular ....................................................... 4-9
deiayed ring assignments (Day)............... 4-2 1
delayed ring assignments (Night 2).........4-30
delayed ring assignments (Night) ............ 4-23
distributed ................................................ 4- 11
longest idle ............................................... 4-11
member extensions (CPC-A/B) ............... 4- 14
member extensions (CPC-AII/B). ............ 4- 17
membership restriction ............................ 4- 11
name assignments ...................................... 6-9
permanent call forward point................... 3-52
pilot number requirement.. ....................... 4- 17
pilot numbers ............................................. 4-7
recall timer, Attendant ............................. l-97
recall timer, extension transfers to........... l-98
ring assignments (Day) .............................. 4-4
ring assignments (Night 2)....................... 4-28
ring assignments (Night) ............................ 4-6
terminal ............................................. 4-9,4- 11
timer, no-answer .................................... 1-122
transfer extension for overflow calls .......4- 15
transfer timer for overflow calls .............. 4-16
VAU hunting priority............................... 3-54
DBS Manual - Issued 8/l/95
Technical Manuals Online! - http://www.tech-man.com
Index-5
Section 400-Programming
Index
I
Incoming Calls (Tl)-detection timer.. ..........I........................... 1-151
dialing method ........................................ 1-192
signaling type ......................................... l- 189
Initializing New DBS Systems.. .............. Intro-4
Intercom Calls-assigning to FF key .................................... 5-6
prime line ‘pickup.. .................................... 3- 15
recall timer, Attendant-held.. .................. l-l 14
recall timer, Attendant-transferred ......... 1- 116
recall timer, extension-held .................... l- 115
recall timer, extension-transferred.. ........ 1-l 17
tone/voice calling from an extension ....... l-20
tone/voice calling from Attendant.. .......... l- 19
Internal Hold Tone ..................................... l-49
International Calls-restricting on extensions with TRS ..........7- 12
restricting on trunks with TRS ................... 7-5
IXC (Inter-Exchange Carrier)-formats.. ................................... 7-3.7-l 1, 7-14
K
Key bank Hold ............................................ 1-13
Key Phones (K-Tel)-auto-redial on.. ..........................................3-58
setting terminal type for.. .......................... .3-5
L
LCD-SSD display on ........................................... l-9
timer for Caller ID.................................... l-48
LCR (Least Cost Routing)-l+ required ............................................... l-23
access.. ........................................................l-7
activating .................................................... 8-4
add digits .................................................. 8-14
area codes in.. ............................................. 8-6
call processing in.. ...................................... 8-4
delete digits ..............................................8- 13
forced, on extensions .................................. 3-8
office codes in ............................................8-7
overview .....................................................8-2
PBX, using with .........................................8-5
pooled trunks in..........................................2-5
requirements ...............................................8-2
Index-6
setup ...........................................................8-2
special area codes in .................................. 8-8
special numbers not processed.. ................. 8-6
special office codes in ................................ 8-9
time priority route tables, building .......... 8-10
trunk groups in ......................................... 8- 12
Line Coding for Tl ................................... 1-161
Local Calls-restricting office codes for ....................... 7- 17
Loop-Start Trunks-considerations .......................................... 2- 18
trunk circuit type ...................................... 2-18
M
MC0 (Multi-Central Office)-AFP default F’F key feature assignments. 5-l 1
enabling an extension for......................... 3-53
Meet-Me Answer-assigning to FF key.................................... 5-6
Menus-displayed during a trunk call.. .................. 3-3 1
displayed during Cal! Waiting tone.. ....... 3-35
displayed during idle mode...................... 3-23
displayed during intercom dial tone......... 3-25
displayed when accessing CO dial tone ... 3-29
displayed when calling an extension ....... 3-27
displayed when dialing a busy extension. 3-3?
displayed when receiving a page ............. 3-33
soft key (illustr.). ........................................ A-l
Message Waiting Answer-assigning to FF key .................................... 5-6
MFR Card-in remote programming ............................. B-2
ML (Multi-Line)-enabling an extension for......................... 3-53
ringback tone from.. ................................. 3-42
ML/MCO-and call coverage groups.......................... 4-18
assigning to FF key.. .................................. 5-6
separation ................................................. 3-53
Multiple DID/DNIS .................................... l-39
Mute-assigning to FF key .................................... 5-6
N
Name Assignments-extensions.. ................................................. 6-3
DSS Manual - Issued 8/l/95
Technical Manuals Online! - http://www.tech-man.com
DBS-70-400
.
Section 400~Programming
Index
hunt. groups .................................................6-9
PSD.............................................................6-5
SSD.............................................................6-4
trunks ..........................................................
6-8
NANP (North American Numbering Plan)-and “911” dialing.. ..................................... .7-8
choosing ...................................................7-10
compared to old numbering plan (table) ....7-3
country code table .................................... 7-13
international calling on extensions.. .........7-12
international calls ....................................... 7-5
lxc format ...............................................7-14
of&e codes, restricting ........................... .7-15
operator calls ............................................7-11
New Function Reset ..................... Intro-5, 1-132
Night 2 Modeassigning to FF key .................................... 5-6
extension delayed ring assignments.. .......4-29
extension ring assignments.. .................... .4-27
hunt group delayed ring assignments.......4-30
hunt group ring assignments ................... .4-28
star& time, automatic ............................... l- 125
TRS during ...............................................7-22
Night Key.. ...................................................1-92
Night Modeassigning to FF key .................................... 5-6
extension delayed ring assignments.. .......4-22
kxtension ring assignments.. ...................... .4-5
hunt group delayed ring assignments.. .....4-23
hunt group ring assignments ..................... .4-6
start time, automatic ................................. 1-9 1
TRS during ............................................... .7-22
Non-Appearing Trunk Hold ...................... l- 14
0
Offhook Signalingand hunt groups ........................................ 4-12
for busy extensions ................................... 3-11
pattern.. .....................................................3-20
volume ......................................................3-19
Office Codesglobal restriction for TRS types 3-6.........7-24
global restriction with area codes.............7-25
illLCR ........................................................8-7
restricting individual ................................ 7-17
restricting system-wide ............................ 7-15
restricting with area codes.. ............ .7-19.7-26
special, in LCR ........................................... 8-9
DBS-70-400
OHVA (Offhook Voice Announce)-alert tone .................................................. l-22
assigning to FF key .................................... 5-6
creating text replies .................................. 6-10
enabling extensions for ............................ 3-12
One Touch Dial ........................................... l-l 1
Onhook Transfer ........................................ 1-12
OOF (out-of-frame). ...................... 1-17 1, l- 173
Operator Calls-restricting with TRS ................................. 7-11
OPXauto-redial restriction ............................... 3-58
extension ring pattern.. ............................. 3-47
setting terminal type for............................. 3-5
Outgoing Signaling Type for Tl ............. l-188
Outpulse Delay Timer for Tl .................. l- 149
Overflow Calls-Attendant transfer extension .................... l-34
for primary Attendant .............................. l-28
Override Toll Restrictionwith SSD numbers ..................................... 1-8
P
Pad Settingsdigital, for Tl ......................................... 1-155
hot dial pad.. ............................................. 3-57
levels (Station Port Class). ....................... 3-43
Pagingassigning to FF key.. .................................. 5-6
building page groups.. .............................. 3-22
default assignment to DSS F’F keys........... 5-9
duration timing ......................................... 1-41
external delayed ringing (Day) ................ 4-20
external delayed ringing (Night 2)........... 4-29
external delayed ringing (Night). ............. 4-22
external interface control for.. .................. l-67
external ringing (Day) ................................ 4-3
external ringing (Night 2) ........................ 4-27
external ringing (Night) ............................. 4-5
group limitation for barge-ins .................. 3- 13
hot dial pad restriction ............................. 3-57
zones ........................................................ 1-67
Park Holdassigning to Attendant FF key ................... 5-5
assigning to FF key .................................... 5-6
recall timer for Attendants ....................... 1-99
recall timer for extensions...................... 1- 100
DBS Manual - Issued 8/l/95
Technical Manuals Online! - http://www.tech-man.com
Index-7
Section 400-Programming
Index
Pause-inserting into Add digits (LCR) ...............8-14
timer, automatic ...................................... l-103
timer, dialing .......................................... l-109
Pay-For-Call Services-restricting .................................................. 7-19
PBXaccess codes, automatic pause in.............. l-64
access codes, creating ............................... l-63
automatic pause for .................................. 2-10
flash on REDIAL ..................................... l-10
flash timer............................................... l-l 10
LCR, using with ......................................... 8-5
trunk port type setting ................................ 2-7
unsupervised conference in ...................... 3- 17
Permanent Call Forward-target extension ........................................ 3-52
type ........................................................... 3-5 1
Pooled Trunksaccess, group “9” ........................................ 2-5
access, groups “8 l-86” ............................... 2-6
forced LCR on ............................................ 3-8
including in SSD numbers.. ...................... 10-4
prime line pickup ...................................... 3-15
selection, assigning to FF key ............... ....5-7
Prime Line Pickup ...................................... 3-15
Private Trunk Lineassigning to extensions ............................... 2-9,
copying restriction ...................................... 9-3
PROG Key ................................................... 1-12
Programming Modeentering ................................................. Intro-7
example entry ....................................... Intro-9
FF key sequence ........................................ xvii
ID code for entering ............................... 1-131
preparations for ................................ ..L. Intro-3
structure ................................................ Intro-6
PSD (Personal Speed Dial)-copying restriction for FF keys ..................9-5
directory, assigning to FF key.. ..................5-6
display on large LCD phones...................3-21
displaying ................................................. 1 O-5
name assignments....................................... 6-5
numbers, assigning on extensions............ 10-5
numbers, assigning to FF key.................... .5-6
permanent call forward point .................. .3-52
Index-8
RAI (Remote Administration Interface)-baud rate ................................................... 1-62
modem card compatibility ....................... l-62
remote programming with ......................... B-2
serial port settings .................................... 1-62
RAlMCLR/RAMHOLD Switches ..........Intro-4
Rangefor extension ports ..................................... 3 - 1
for trunks .................................................... 2-1
Red Alarms (Tl)-counter ................................................... 1-176
detection .................................................1-166
relay ....................................................... 1-181
REDIAL Key-add digits (LCR) ...................................... 8-14
auto flash timer ...................................... l-104
auto flash using ........................................ l-10
automatic pause for PBX ......................... 2-10
auto-redial................................................ 3-58
SSD display on.. ......................................... l-9
Release-acknowledge timer for Tl ...................... 1-148
assigning to FF key .................................... 5-6
Reminderassigning to FF key .................................... 5-6
Remote Loopback for Tl ......................... 1-163
Remote Programmingcommands in .............................................. B-2
ID code for............................................. 1-127
resuming mode after .................................. B-3
through a CO or DISA Trunk.. .................. B-2
through a direct connection.. ...................... B-l
Ring Assignmentsextensions (Day) ........................................ 4-3
extensions (Night 2) ................................. 4-27
extensions (Night) ...................................... 4-5
hunt groups (Day) ...................................... 4-4
hunt groups (Night 2) ............................... 4-28
hunt groups (Night) .................................... 4-6
Ring Cycieexpansion timer, incoming calls ............ l-108
illustration .............................................. l-107
Ring Patternsfor analog transfers (CPC-A). .................. l-27
for analog transfers (CRC-AII/B) ............ 1-38
for extensions ........................................... 3-46
for inbound trunk calls ............................. 2-14
DBS Manual - Issued 8/l/95
Technical Manuals Online! - http://www.tech-man.com
DBS-70-400
Section 400-Programming
Index
for SLT DISA ...........................................1-42
for UNA terminals ....................................1-66
Ringback Tone-ML keys....................................................3-42
transmission for Tl................................. l-196
Ringing Line Pickup...................................3-16
RJ2lx ............................................................
.3-3
Robbed Bit Setting for Tl ........................ 1-191
S
Sl Strap.. .................................. l-7. 2-5, 2-6, 8-2
Save Number Redial-assigning to FF key ................................... .5-6
SCC-B Card-extension ring pattern ............................... 3-47
SF (SuperFrame) ........................... l-160, 1-191
Signal Loss Counter for Tl...................... 1-177
Slip Counter for Tl...................................1-175
SLT (Single-Line Teiephone)-and hunt groups ........................................4- 12
audio delay when overriding TRS.............. l-8
auto-redial restriction ............................... 3-58
DISA ring pattern..................................... l-42
flash control ..............................................l-15
hookflash ..................................................3-45
hot dial pad restriction.. ............................3-57
hunt group transfer to .............................. .4-15
onhook flash timer.. ................................l-106
restrictions on moving .............................. 3-50
setting terminal type for ............................ .3-5
station port class for ................................. 3-43
transfer ring pattern (CPC-A). .................. l-27
transfer ring pattern (CPC-AIVB) ............ 1-38
SLT Adapter (SLT-A)-ring pattern for........................................... 3-46
setting terminal type for .............................3-5
SMDR-account c,odes in .........................................3-9
and Account Codes...................................1-71
baud rate ...................................................l-55
data length ................................................l-57
display start timer for CO calls .................. 1-6
including extensions on report .................3- 18
mode, in remote programming.................. B-l
odd/even parity .........................................l-54
parity check ..............................................l-53
print mode 1 (out/inbound calls) .............. l-58
print mode 2 (local/Iong-distance) ........... l-59
DBS-70-400
print mode 3 (header title) ....................... l-60
serial port flow control ............................. 1-61
stop bit length........................................... l-56
SMDR/Bus Monitor mode
resuming after terminal programming....... B-3
Soft Key Menus--see Menus
Soft Keys-on large-display phones (illust.)............... l-73
Software Version Verification.. .............. Intro-4
Splash Tone-for Busy Override/OHVA.. ...................... 1-22
for voice calls ........................................... 1-21
SRAM ........................................... Intro-5, 1-132
SSD (System Speed Dial)-directory, assigning to FF key.. .................. 5-6
display restriction....................................... l-9
displaying ................................................. 10-3
name assiggents ...................................... 6 3
name display ............................................ 1-24
numbers, assigning.. ................................. 10-3
numbers, assigning to FP key .................... 5-6
overriding TRS with .................................. l-8
permanent call forward point.. ................. 3-52
Station Lockout-codes, creating ......................................... 3-10
copying restriction ..................................... 9-4
Station Port Class ....................................... 3-43
Structure of Section 400 ............................... xvii
SW1 Switch .............................................. Intro-4
Syncing (for Tl)-detecting sync loss.. .................... 1-171, 1-173
duplicate settings for.. ............................ l-142
loss counter ............................................ 1- 178
loss relay ................................................ 1-182
network re-sync timer ............................ 1-145
sync source l..........................................1-141
sync source 2.......................................... 1-143
sync source 3.......................................... 1-144
trunk port class ......................................... 2-25
typical settings ....................................... 1-141
System Configuration (Tl) ...................... I- 135
System Installation Area Code.. ................ l-23
T
Tl-alarms, assigning to PP keys...................... 5-6
failure mode ........................................... 1-162
flash key operation ................................. 1-165
DBS Manual - Issued 8/l/95
Technical Manuals Online! - http://www.tech-man.com
Index-9
Index
frame format........................................... I-160
frame loss counter .................................. 1-174
frame loss relay ...................................... l-183
incoming dialing method.. ...................... l- 192
incoming signaling type ......................... l- 189
line codinob .............................................. 1-161
minimum programming for.................... l- 136
number of channels used.. ...................... 1-159
outgoing signaling type .......................... 1- 188
relay reset ............................................... 1-185
remote loopback ..................................... l- 163
robbed bit setting.. .................................. 1-191
slip counter ............................................. 1- 175
system configuration .............................. 1-135
trunk circuit types ..................................... 2-18
trunk closure.. ......................................... l-200
trunk configuration.. ............................... 1-158
tnmk mode.. ............................................ l-190
trunk port class ......................................... 2-25
trunk signaling emulation ....................... l- 186
Talkbackassigning to FF key ................................... .5-7
Terminal Programming--see Remote Programming
Terminal Type-copying restriction.. ................................... .9-4
setting for extensions.. ................................ 3-5
Time Priority Route Tables ...................... .8-10
Time Setting-for Day mode automatic start................. 1-123
for DBS system clock.. ................. ;............. l-4
for DISA end on trunks.. ......................... .2-17
for DISA start on trunks.. ........................ .2-16
for Night 2 mode automatic start............ 1-125
for Night mode automatic start.. ............... 1-91
Timers-answer supervision for Tl ...................... l- 152
Attendant call reversion ......................... l- 10 1
automatic pause ...................................... l-103
call forward no-answer.. ......................... l-l 11
CO flash.. ................................................ I-104
CO ring cycle detection .......................... l-107
delayed ring, CO calls.. .......................... l-l 18
delayed ring. DSS/BLF.. ........................ l-120
dial pause ................................................ l-109
DID digit timeout.. .................................. .2-23
DID interdigit timeout .............................. 2-24
inbound detection, ground-start.. ............ l-l 13
inbound expansion, ring cycle.. .............. l- 108
no-answer, hunt groups .......................... 1-122
Section 400-Programming
outbound detection, ground-start........... l- 112
PBX flash...............................................l-110
recall. Attendant hunt group .................... 1-97
recall, Attendant park hold.. ..................... 1-99
recall, Attendant-held CO calls.. .............. l-93
recall, Attendant-held intercom calls.. ... l-l 14
recall, Attendant-transferred CO calls.. ... 1-95
recall, Attendant-transferred intercom
calls ......................................................l-l 16
recall. extension transfers to hunt groups l-98
recall, extension-held CO calls.. .............. l-94
recall, extension-held intercom calls ..... l- 115
recall, extension-parked calls.. ............... l- 100
recall, extension-transferred CO calls ...... i-96
recall, extension-transferred intercom
calls ......................................................1-117
SLT onhook flash...................................l- 106
SMDR display start.. .................................. 1-6
T 1 disconnect .........................................1-146
Tl guard.................................................1-147
Tl immediate glare................................ 1-153
Tl incoming detection.. ......................... 1-151
Tl outpulse delay.. .................................1-149
Tl release acknowledge.. ....................... 1-148
Tl wink glare.........................................1-154
Tl wink timeout .....................................l-150
transfer, hunt group.. ................................ 4-16
trunk disconnect detection ....................... 2- 15
unsupervised conference.. ...................... 1 - 102
wink-start for trunks.. ............................... 2-22
Transferassigning to FF key.. .................................. 5-7
onhook .....................................................1-12
recall timer, Attendant-transferred CO
CalIS ........................................................l-95
recall timer, Attendant-transferred intercom
calls ......................................................l- 116
recall timer, extension-transferred CO
calls .................................. ...................... l-96
recall timer, extension-transferred intercom
calls ......................................................l -l 17
ring pattern, analog (CPC-A)................... l-27
ring pattern, analog (CPC-AII/Et) ............ l-38
TRS (Toll Restriction Service)-1+ required............................................... l-23
3-digit dialing, restricting .......................... 7-8
‘I-digit dialing, restricting ................ .7-9, 7-20
account codes and.................... l-70. l-72. 3-9
area codes. restricting .................... .7- 16, 7-23
index-l 0
DBS Manual - Issued 8/l/95
Technical Manuals Online! - http://www.tech-man.com
DBS-70-400
Section 400-Programming
Index
area/offtce codes, restricting ..........7- 18,7- 19,
7-25.7-26
country codes, allowing............................ 7-13
dialed digits, restricting number of ........... .7-7
dialing plan switch ................................... 7-10
DTMF signaling, restricting.. .................... .7-6
equal access code format......................... .7-14
international calls, restricting on
extensions ...............................................7-12
international calls, restricting on trunks.....7-5
office codes, restricting.........7-15,7-17,7-24
operator calls, restricting .......................... 7-11
overriding with SSD numbers.. .................. 1-8
overview .....................................................7-2
PBX, using with .......................................1-63
private trunk lines, using with................... .2-9
trunk port types and .................................... 2-7
types, assigning (Day)............................. .7-21
types, assigning (Night 2)........................ .7-22
types, assigning (Night). .......................... .7-22
types, characteristics of (table).................. .7-2
Trunk Closure for Tl ............................... l-200
Trunk Groups-including in SSD numbers.. ...................... 10-4
LCR, building ........................................... 8-12
pooled group “9” access ............................ .2-5
pooled groups “81-86” access ................... .2-6
selection, assigning to PP key ................... .5-7
Trunks-assigning TRS types to (Day).................. .7-2 1
assigning TRS types to (Night 2)............ .7-22
assigning TRS types to (Night) ............... .7-22
busy-out ......................................................2-3
circuit type for .......................................... 2-18
closure (Tl) ............................................l-200
copying attributes of.................. . ................ 9-3
DISA end time for .................................... 2-17
DISA start time......................................... 2-16
disconnect detection timer.. ..................... .2- 15
DTMWpulse dialing ................................... 2-4
FF key assignment restriction ................... .5-9
inbound ring pattern ................................ .2- 14
name assignments....................................... 6-8
numbering range ......................................... 2-l
pooled trunk access, group “9”.................. .2-5
pooled trunk access, groups “8 l-86” ..........2-6
port class...................................................2-25
port operation ............................................. 2-3
port type.. ....................................................2-7
private, assigning to extensions.. ............... .2-9
DBS-70-400
queuing, assigning to FF key.. ................... 5-7
selection. assigning to PI? key.. .................. 5-7
Tl circuit types ........................................ 2-18
Tl configuration .................................... l- 158
Tl mode .................................................l-190
Tl signal emulation ...............................l- 186
unsupervised conference, allowing.. ........ 2- 13
TSAPI .................................................1-51, l-52
U
UNA (Universal Night Answer)-delayed ring assignments (Day). .............. 4-20
delayed ring assignments (Night 2).........4-29
delayed ring assignments (Night) ............ 4-22
pickup, assigning to F’F key ....................... 5-7
ring assignments (Day) .............................. 4-3
ring assignments (Night 2)....................... 4-27
ring assignments (Night). ........................... 4-5
ring patterns for M/C/B terminals............ 1-66
Unsupervised Conference-allowing on extensions.. ........................... 3- 17
allowing on trunks ................................... 2-13
timer for ................................................. l-102
Upgrading CPC-B Software................... Intro-5
V
VAU (Voice Announce Unit)-Attendant intercom calling with .............. l- 19
call waiting/OHVA, disabling for............ 3-12
extension intercom calling with............... l-20
hunting priority ........................................ 3-54
non-appearing trunk hold, setting for...... 1-14
offhook signaling, disabling for............... 3- 11
onhook transfer, enabling for.. ................. 1- 12
port assignment.. ...................................... 3-56
prime line pickup, enabling for.. .............. 3- 16
terminal type ..............................................3-6
Voice Calling-assigning to FP key .................................... 5-7
Voice Mail-access, assigning to FF key.. ...................... 5-7
AJX slot................................................... l-25
auto-redial restriction ............................... 3-58
busy tone .................................................. l-26
DID/DNIS answer codes ......................... l-46
DID/DNIS digits to .................................. l-44
hunt group pilot number ............................ 4-7
DBS Manual - Issued 8/l/95
Technical Manuals Online! - http://www.tech-man.com
Index-l 1
Section 400-Programming
index
password assignment to FF key ................ .5-5
permanent call forwarding to ...................3-5 1
terminal hunt group type ........................ ..4-11
terminal type.. ........... _-. ............................... 3-5
transfer, assigning to FF key ..................... .5-7
using 3-digit extension numbers with ...... 1-17
W
Wink-and DID/DNIS calls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-187
start signaling for DID trunks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-21
start timer for trunks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..*.......... 2-22
Tl glare timer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . l-154
Tl signaling for incoming calls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-189
Tl signaling for outgoing calls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-188
Tl timeout timer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . l-150
X:
X ON/X OFF . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .I-61
Y
Yellow Alarms (Tl)-counter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-179
detection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-167
recovery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-169
relay . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . l-180
send . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-164
Index-l 2
DBS Manual - Issued 8/l/95
Technical Manuals Online! - http://www.tech-man.com
DBS-70-400
Was this manual useful for you? yes no
Thank you for your participation!

* Your assessment is very important for improving the work of artificial intelligence, which forms the content of this project

Download PDF

advertisement